Mechanical engineering and materials Books

Book SynopsisProvides a clear, concise, and self-contained introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) This comprehensively updated new edition covers the fundamental concepts and main methods of modern Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD). With expert guidance and a wealth of useful techniques, the book offers a clear, concise, and accessible account of the essentials needed to perform and interpret a CFD analysis. The new edition adds a plethora of new information on such topics as the techniques of interpolation, finite volume discretization on unstructured grids, projection methods, and RANS turbulence modeling. The book has been thoroughly edited to improve clarity and to reflect the recent changes in the practice of CFD. It also features a large number of new end-of-chapter problems. All the attractive features that have contributed to the success of the first edition are retained by this version. The book remains an indispensable guide, which: Table of ContentsPreface xvii About the Companion Website xxi 1 What is CFD? 1 1.1. Introduction 1 1.2. Brief History of CFD 4 1.3. Outline of the Book 5 Bibliography 7 I Fundamentals 9 2 Governing Equations of Fluid Dynamics and Heat Transfer 11 2.1. Preliminary Concepts 11 2.2. Conservation Laws 14 2.2.1. Conservation of Mass 15 2.2.2. Conservation of Chemical Species 15 2.2.3. Conservation of Momentum 16 2.2.4. Conservation of Energy 20 2.3. Equation of State 21 2.4. Equations of Integral Form 22 2.5. Equations in Conservation Form 25 2.6. Equations in Vector Form 26 2.7. Boundary Conditions 27 2.7.1. Rigid Wall Boundary Conditions 28 2.7.2. Inlet and Exit Boundary Conditions 29 2.7.3. Other Boundary Conditions 30 2.8. Dimensionality and Time Dependence 31 2.8.1. Two- and One-Dimensional Problems 32 2.8.2. Equilibrium and Marching Problems 33 Bibliography 34 Problems 34 3 Partial Different Equations 37 3.1. Model Equations: Formulation of a PDE Problem 38 3.1.1. Model Equations 38 3.1.2. Domain, Boundary and Initial Conditions, and Well-Posed PDE Problem 40 3.1.3. Examples 42 3.2. Mathematical Classification of PDEs of Second Order 45 3.2.1. Classification 45 3.2.2. Hyperbolic Equations 48 3.2.3. Parabolic Equations 50 3.2.4. Elliptic Equations 52 3.2.5. Classification of Full Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer Equations 52 3.3. Numerical Discretization: Different Kinds of CFD 53 3.3.1. Spectral Methods 54 3.3.2. Finite Element Methods 56 3.3.3. Finite Difference and Finite Volume Methods 56 Bibliography 59 Problems 59 4 Finite Difference Method 63 4.1. Computational Grid 63 4.1.1. Time Discretization 63 4.1.2. Space Discretization 64 4.2. Finite Difference Approximation 65 4.2.1. Approximation of 𝜕u∕𝜕x 65 4.2.2. Truncation Error, Consistency, and Order of Approximation 66 4.2.3. Other Formulas for 𝜕u∕𝜕x: Evaluation of the Order of Approximation 69 4.2.4. Schemes of Higher Order for First Derivative 71 4.2.5. Higher-Order Derivatives 71 4.2.6. Mixed Derivatives 73 4.2.7. Finite Difference Approximation on Nonuniform Grids 74 4.3. Development of Finite Difference Schemes 77 4.3.1. Taylor Series Expansions 77 4.3.2. Polynomial Fitting 79 4.3.3. Development on Nonuniform Grids 80 4.4. Finite Difference Approximation of Partial Differential Equations 81 4.4.1. Approach and Examples 81 4.4.2. Boundary and Initial Conditions 85 4.4.3. Difference Molecule and Difference Equation 87 4.4.4. System of Difference Equations 88 4.4.5. Implicit and Explicit Methods 89 4.4.6. Consistency of Numerical Approximation 91 4.4.7. Interpretation of Truncation Error: Numerical Dissipation and Dispersion 92 4.4.8. Methods of Interpolation for Finite Difference Schemes 95 Bibliography 98 Problems 98 5 Finite Volume Schemes 103 5.1. Introduction and General Formulation 103 5.1.1. Introduction 103 5.1.2. Finite Volume Grid 105 5.1.3. Consistency, Local, and Global Conservation Property 107 5.2. Approximation of Integrals 109 5.2.1. Volume Integrals 109 5.2.2. Surface Integrals 110 5.3. Methods of Interpolation 112 5.3.1. Upwind Interpolation 112 5.3.2. Linear Interpolation of Convective Fluxes 115 5.3.3. Central Difference (Linear Interpolation) Scheme for Diffusive Fluxes 115 5.3.4. Interpolation of Diffusion Coefficients 117 5.3.5. Upwind Interpolation of Higher Order 118 5.4. Finite Volume Method on Unstructured Grids 119 5.5. Implementation of Boundary Conditions 122 Bibliography 123 Problems 123 6 Numerical Stability for Marching Problems 127 6.1. Introduction and Definition of Stability 127 6.1.1. Example 127 6.1.2. Discretization and Round-Off Error 129 6.1.3. Definition 131 6.2. Stability Analysis 132 6.2.1. Neumann Method 132 6.2.2. Matrix Method 140 6.3. Implicit Versus Explicit Schemes – Stability and Efficiency Considerations 142 Bibliography 144 Problems 144 II Methods 147 7 Application to Model Equations 149 7.1. Linear Convection Equation 150 7.1.1. Simple Explicit Schemes 151 7.1.2. Simple Implicit Scheme 154 7.1.3. Leapfrog Scheme 155 7.1.4. Lax–Wendroff Scheme 156 7.1.5. MacCormack Scheme 157 7.2. One-Dimensional Heat Equation 157 7.2.1. Simple Explicit Scheme 157 7.2.2. Simple Implicit Scheme 159 7.2.3. Crank–Nicolson Scheme 159 7.3. Burgers and Generic Transport Equations 161 7.4. Method of Lines 162 7.4.1. Adams Methods 163 7.4.2. Runge–Kutta Methods 164 7.5. Solution of Tridiagonal Systems by Thomas Algorithm 165 Bibliography 169 Problems 169 8 Steady-State Problems 173 8.1. Problems Reducible to Matrix Equations 173 8.1.1. Elliptic PDE 174 8.1.2. Marching Problems Solved by Implicit Schemes 177 8.1.3. Structure of Matrices 179 8.2. Direct Methods 180 8.2.1. Cyclic Reduction Algorithm 181 8.2.2. Thomas Algorithm for Block-Tridiagonal Matrices 184 8.2.3. LU Decomposition 185 8.3. Iterative Methods 186 8.3.1. General Methodology 187 8.3.2. Jacobi Iterations 188 8.3.3. Gauss–Seidel Algorithm 189 8.3.4. Successive Over- and Underrelaxation 190 8.3.5. Convergence of Iterative Procedures 191 8.3.6. Multigrid Methods 194 8.3.7. Pseudo-transient Approach 197 8.4. Systems of Nonlinear Equations 197 8.4.1. Newton’s Algorithm 198 8.4.2. Iteration Methods Using Linearization 199 8.4.3. Sequential Solution 201 8.5. Computational Performance 202 Bibliography 203 Problems 203 9 Unsteady Compressible Fluid Flows and Conduction Heat Transfer 207 9.1. Introduction 207 9.2. Compressible Flows 208 9.2.1. Equations, Mathematical Classification, and General Comments 208 9.2.2. MacCormack Scheme 212 9.2.3. Beam–Warming Scheme 214 9.2.4. Upwinding 218 9.2.5. Methods for Purely Hyperbolic Systems: TVD Schemes 220 9.3. Unsteady Conduction Heat Transfer 223 9.3.1. Overview 223 9.3.2. Simple Methods for Multidimensional Heat Conduction 223 9.3.3. Approximate Factorization 225 9.3.4. ADI Method 227 Bibliography 228 Problems 229 10 Incompressible Flows 233 10.1. General Considerations 233 10.1.1. Introduction 233 10.1.2. Role of Pressure 234 10.2. Discretization Approach 236 10.2.1. Conditions for Conservation of Mass by Numerical Solution 237 10.2.2. Colocated and Staggered Grids 238 10.3. Projection Method for Unsteady Flows 243 10.3.1. Explicit Schemes 244 10.3.2. Implicit Schemes 247 10.4. Projection Methods for Steady-State Flows 250 10.4.1. SIMPLE 252 10.4.2. SIMPLEC and SIMPLER 254 10.4.3. PISO 256 10.5. Other Methods 257 10.5.1. Vorticity–Streamfunction Formulation for Two-Dimensional Flows 257 10.5.2. Artificial Compressibility 261 Bibliography 261 Problems 262 III Art of CFD 265 11 Turbulence 267 11.1. Introduction 267 11.1.1. A Few Words About Turbulence 268 11.1.2. Why is the Computation of Turbulent Flows Difficult? 271 11.1.3. Overview of Numerical Approaches 273 11.2. Direct Numerical Simulation (DNS) 275 11.2.1. Homogeneous Turbulence 275 11.2.2. Inhomogeneous Turbulence 278 11.3. Reynolds-Averaged Navier–Stokes (RANS) Models 279 11.3.1. Mean Flow and Fluctuations 280 11.3.2. Reynolds-Averaged Equations 281 11.3.3. Reynolds Stresses and Turbulent Kinetic Energy 282 11.3.4. Eddy Viscosity Hypothesis 284 11.3.5. Closure Models 285 11.3.6. Algebraic Models 286 11.3.7. One-Equation Models 287 11.3.8. Two-Equation Models 289 11.3.9. RANS and URANS 291 11.3.10. Models of Turbulent Scalar Transport 292 11.3.11. Numerical Implementation of RANS Models 294 11.4. Large Eddy Simulation (LES) 297 11.4.1. Filtered Equations 298 11.4.2. Closure Models 301 11.4.3. Implementation of LES in CFD Analysis: Numerical Resolution and Near-Wall Treatment 304 Bibliography 307 Problems 309 12 Computational Grids 313 12.1. Introduction: Need for Irregular and Unstructured Grids 313 12.2. Irregular Structured Grids 316 12.2.1. Generation by Coordinate Transformation 316 12.2.2. Examples 319 12.2.3. Grid Quality 321 12.3. Unstructured Grids 322 12.3.1. Grid Generation 325 12.3.2. Cell Topology 325 12.3.3. Grid Quality 326 12.4. Adaptive Grids 329 Bibliography 331 Problems 332 13 Conducting CFD Analysis 335 13.1. Overview: Setting and Solving a CFD Problem 335 13.2. Errors and Uncertainty 339 13.2.1. Errors in CFD Analysis 339 13.2.2. Verification and Validation 346 Bibliography 349 Problems 349 Index 351

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis proceedings contains a collection of 24 papers from The American Ceramic Society's 41st International Conference on Advanced Ceramics and Composites, held in Daytona Beach, Florida, January 22-27, 2017. This issue includes papers presented in the following symposia: Symposium 3 14th International Symposium on Solid Oxide Fuel Cells (SOFC) Symposium 8 11th International Symposium on Advanced Processing & Manufacturing Technologies for Structural & Multifunctional Materials and Systems Symposium 11 Advanced Materials and Innovative Processing ideas for the Production Root Technology Symposium 12 Materials for Extreme Environments: Ultrahigh Temperature Ceramics (UHTCs) and Nano-laminated Ternary Carbides and Nitrides (MAX Phases) Symposium 13 Advanced Materials for Sustainable Nuclear Fission and Fusion Energy Symposium 14 Crystalline Materials for Electrical, Optical and Medical Applications Symposium 15 Additive ManufacturTable of ContentsIntroduction ix SOLID OXIDE FUEL CELLS Mitigation of Compressor Stall/Surge in a Hybrid Solid Oxide Fuel Cell-Gas Turbine System 3M. Azizi and J. Brouwer Characteristics of Protective Spinel Manganese Cobaltite Coatings Produced by APS for Cr-Contained SOFC Interconnects 7Chun-Liang Chang, Chang-sing Hwang, Chun-Huang Tsai, Sheng-Fu Yang, Te-Jung Huang, Ming-Hsiu Wu, and Cheng-Yun Fu Influence of Temperature and Steam Content on Degradation of Metallic Interconnects in Reducing Atmosphere 17Christoph Folgner, Viktar Sauchuk, Mihails Kusnezoff, and Alexander Michaelis Fabrication of the Anode-Supported Solid Oxide Fuel Cell with Direct Pore Channel in the Cermet Structure to Improve the Electrochemical Performance 35Ming-Wei Liao, Tai-Nan Lin, Hong-Yi Kuo, Chun-Yen Yeh, Yu-Ming Chen, Wei-Xin Kao, Jing-Kai Lin, and Ruey-Yi Lee Critical Evaluation of Dynamic Reversible Chemical Energy Storage with High Temperature Electrolysis 47D. McVay, J. Brouwer, and F. Ghigliazza Estimation of Polarization Loss Due to Chromium Poisoning of LSM-Based Cathodes in Solid Oxide Fuel Cells 59R. Wang, B. Mo, M. Würth, U. B. Pal, S. Gopalan, and S. N. Basu ADVANCED PROCESSING AND MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGIES Synthesis and Tribological Behavior of Bi-Cr2AlC Composites 69F. AlAnazi, S. Ghosh, R. Dunnigan, and S. Gupta Finite Element Analysis of Self-Propagating High-Temperature Synthesis (SHS) of Silicon Nitride 75Venkata V. K. Doddapaneni, Julia Lin, Ayako Hiranaka, Tomohiro Akiyama, and Sidney Lin TEM Analysis of Diffusion-Bonded Silicon Carbide Ceramics Joined using Metallic Interlayers 87T. Ozaki, Y. Hasegawa, H. Tsuda, S. Mori, M. C. Halbig, R. Asthana, and M. Singh Numerical Analysis of Inhomogeneous Behavior in Friction Stir Processing by Using a New Coupled 95 Method of MPS and FEMHisashi Serizawa and Fumikazu Miyasaka Study of Shielding Method to Reduce Leakage Magnetic Fields of an Opening in a Magnetically Shielded Room 105H. Sugiyama and K. Kamata Low-Temperature Synthesis of Hafnium Diboride Powder Via Magnesiothermic Reduction in Molten Salt 119Ke Bao, Joseph Massey, Juntong Huang, and Shaowei Zhang Tribology Study of Novel Ti3SiC2 Matrix Composites Reinforced with Ceramics (Al2O3, BN, B4C) Particulates 131J. Nelson, M. Olson, and S. Gupta Interfacial Reaction and Mechanical Properties of SiC Bonded with Zircaloy-4 using Ni, Zr /Al Double Interlayers 143Xin Geng, Guangwu Wen, and Xiaoxiao Huang SINGLE CRYSTALLINE MATERIALS FOR ELECTRICAL, OPTICAL, AND MEDICAL APPLICATIONS Characterization Approaches of Femtosecond Direct Laser Writing (DLW) Modifications inside Cubic YAG Crystals 157W. Gebremichael, I. Manek-Hönninger, S. Rouzet, M. Chamoun, A. Fargues, V. Jubera, T. Cardinal, Y. Petit, and L. Canioni ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING AND 3D PRINTING TECHNOLOGIES Comparison of Dynamic Mask- and Vector-Based Ceramic Stereolithography 165S. Baumgartner, M. Pfaffinger, B. Busetti, and J. Stampfl Additive Manufacturing (3D Printing) of Ceramics: Microstructure, Properties, and Product Examples 175P. Karandikar, M. Watkins, A. McCormick, B. Givens, and M. Aghajanian GEOPOLYMERS, CHEMICALLY BONDED CERAMICS, ECO-FRIENDLY, AND SUSTAINABLE MATERIALS Impact of Various Aluminosilicate Compounds in Geopolymer Foam Formation to a Si/M=0.7 of Silicate Solution 191M. Arnoult, M. Perronnet, A. Autef, G. Gasgnier, and S. Rossignol Geopolymers Based on Natural and Synthetic Metakaolin: A 201 Critical ReviewJoseph Davidovits On the Durability Behavior of Natural Fiber Reinforced 215 GeopolymersA. C. C. Trindade, F. A. Silva, H. A. Alcamand, and P. H. R. Borges Performance and Durability of Fe-Rich Inorganic Polymer Composites with Basalt Fibers 229A. Peys, M. Peeters, A. Katsiki, L. Kriskova, H. Rahier, and Y. Pontikes Wetting Angle: New Parameter Indicating the Reactivity of Alkaline Solutions and Geopolymer Binders 239Ameni Gharzouni, Laeticia Vidal, Robin Stocky, Julie Peyne, and Sylvie Rossignol Effect of TiO2 and ZnO Nanopowders on Metakaolin-Sodium 251 Hydroxide GeopolymersD. Sarbapalli and P. Mondal Eco-Friendly Geopolymer Composite for Winter Season Pavement Pothole Patching 263M. Sarkkinen, K. Kujala, and S. Gehör

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe most comprehensive reference on fluorescent nanodiamond physical and chemical properties and contemporary applications Fluorescent nanodiamonds (FNDs) have drawn a great deal of attention over the past several years, and their applications and development potential are proving to be manifold and vast. The first and only book of its kind, Fluorescent Nanodiamonds is a comprehensive guide to the basic science and technical information needed to fully understand the fundamentals of FNDs and their potential applications across an array of domains. In demonstrating the importance of FNDs in biological applications, the authors bring together all relevant chemistry, physics, materials science and biology. Nanodiamonds are produced by powerful cataclysmic events such as explosions, volcanic eruptions and meteorite impacts. They also can be created in the lab by high-pressure high-temperature treatment of graphite or detonating an explosive in a reactor vessel. A single imperfection canTable of ContentsPreface xi Acknowledgements xv Part I Basics 1 1 Introduction to Nanotechnology 3 1.1 Nanotechnology: From Large to Small 3 1.1.1 Feynman: Plenty of Room at the Bottom 3 1.1.2 Nanotechnology Today 6 1.1.3 The Bottom‐Up Approach 7 1.2 Nanocarbons: Now and Then 8 1.2.1 Classification 9 1.2.2 Fullerenes 9 1.2.3 Carbon Nanotubes 11 1.2.4 Graphenes 13 References 15 2 Nanodiamonds 19 2.1 Ah, Diamonds, Eternal Beautiful 19 2.2 Diamonds: From Structure to Classification 22 2.2.1 Structure 22 2.2.2 Classification 24 2.3 Diamond Synthesis 26 2.3.1 HPHT 27 2.3.2 CVD 29 2.3.3 Detonation 30 2.4 Nanodiamonds: A Scientist’s Best Friend 30 References 33 3 Color Centers in Diamond 37 3.1 Nitrogen Impurities 37 3.2 Crystal Defects 40 3.3 Vacancy‐Related Color Centers 41 3.3.1 GR1 and ND1 41 3.3.2 NV0 and NV− 44 3.3.3 H3 and N3 46 3.3.4 SiV− 46 3.4 The NV− Center 47 References 50 4 Surface Chemistry of Nanodiamonds 55 4.1 Functionalization 56 4.2 Bioconjugation 61 4.2.1 Noncovalent Conjugation 61 4.2.2 Covalent Conjugation 64 4.3 Encapsulation 66 4.3.1 Lipid Layers 66 4.3.2 Silica Shells 67 References 69 5 Biocompatibility of Nanodiamonds 73 5.1 Biocompatibility Testing 73 5.1.1 Cytotoxicity 74 5.1.2 Genotoxicity 76 5.1.3 Hemocompatibility 76 5.2 In Vitro Studies 77 5.2.1 HPHT‐ND 77 5.2.2 DND 80 5.3 Ex Vivo Studies 82 5.4 In Vivo Studies 83 References 86 Part II Specific Topics 91 6 Producing Fluorescent Nanodiamonds 93 6.1 Production 93 6.1.1 Theoretical Simulations 93 6.1.2 Electron/Ion Irradiation 96 6.1.3 Size Reduction 99 6.2 Characterization 101 6.2.1 Fluorescence Intensity 101 6.2.2 Electron Spin Resonance 104 6.2.3 Fluorescence Lifetime 105 6.2.4 Magnetically Modulated Fluorescence 107 References 110 7 Single Particle Detection and Tracking 113 7.1 Single Particle Detection 113 7.1.1 Photostability 113 7.1.2 Spectroscopic Properties 117 7.1.3 Color Center Numbers 118 7.2 Single Particle Tracking 120 7.2.1 Tracking in Solution 120 7.2.2 Tracking in Cells 122 7.2.3 Tracking in Organisms 127 References 130 8 Cell Labeling and Fluorescence Imaging 135 8.1 Cell Labeling 135 8.1.1 Nonspecific Labeling 136 8.1.2 Specific Labeling 139 8.2 Fluorescence Imaging 142 8.2.1 Epifluorescence and Confocal Fluorescence 142 8.2.2 Total Internal Reflection Fluorescence 144 8.2.3 Two‐Photon Excitation Fluorescence 146 8.2.4 Time‐Gated Fluorescence 147 References 150 9 Cell Tracking and Deep Tissue Imaging 155 9.1 Cellular Uptake 155 9.1.1 Uptake Mechanism 155 9.1.2 Entrapment 158 9.1.3 Quantification 159 9.2 Cell Tracking 161 9.2.1 Tracking In Vitro 161 9.2.2 Tracking In Vivo 163 9.3 Deep Tissue Imaging 165 9.3.1 Wide‐Field Fluorescence Imaging 165 9.3.2 Optically Detected Magnetic Resonance Imaging 169 9.3.3 Time‐Gated Fluorescence Imaging 170 9.3.4 Magnetically Modulated Fluorescence Imaging 170 References 171 10 Nanoscopic Imaging 175 10.1 Diffraction Barrier 176 10.2 Superresolution Fluorescence Imaging 177 10.2.1 Stimulated Emission Depletion Microscopy 177 10.2.2 Saturated Excitation Fluorescence Microscopy 181 10.2.3 Deterministic Emitter Switch Microscopy 182 10.2.4 Tip‐Enhanced Fluorescence Microscopy 183 10.3 Cathodoluminescence Imaging 184 10.4 Correlative Light‐Electron Microscopy 188 References 191 11 Nanoscale Quantum Sensing 195 11.1 The Spin Hamiltonian 196 11.2 Temperature Sensing 197 11.2.1 Ultrahigh Precision Temperature Measurement 197 11.2.2 Time‐Resolved Nanothermometry 200 11.2.3 All‐Optical Luminescence Nanothermometry 203 11.2.4 Scanning Thermal Imaging 205 11.3 Magnetic Sensing 207 11.3.1 Continuous‐Wave Detection 207 11.3.2 Relaxometry 210 References 211 12 Hybrid Fluorescent Nanodiamonds 215 12.1 Silica/Diamond Nanohybrids 215 12.2 Gold/Diamond Nanohybrids 217 12.2.1 Photoluminescence Enhancement 217 12.2.2 Dual‐Modality Imaging 218 12.2.3 Hyperlocalized Hyperthermia 220 12.2.4 NV‐Based Nanothermometry 224 12.3 Silver/Diamond Nanohybrids 226 12.4 Iron Oxide/Diamond Nanohybrids 228 12.4.1 Single‐Domain Magnetization 228 12.4.2 Magnetic Resonance Imaging 229 References 232 13 Nanodiamond‐Enabled Medicine 235 13.1 NDs as Therapeutic Carriers 236 13.2 Drug Delivery 237 13.2.1 Small Molecules 237 13.2.2 Proteins 241 13.3 Gene Therapy 244 13.3.1 RNA 244 13.3.2 DNA 245 13.4 Animal Experiments 247 References 249 14 Diamonds in the Sky 253 14.1 Unidentified Infrared Emission 253 14.2 Extended Red Emission 258 14.3 Cosmic Events at Home on Earth 264 References 267 Further Reading 271 Index 273

Read more less

Book SynopsisReliability is one of the most important attributes for the products and processes of any company or organization. This important work provides a powerful framework of domain-independent reliability improvement and risk reducing methods which can greatly lower risk in any area of human activity. It reviews existing methods for risk reduction that can be classified as domain-independent and introduces the following new domain-independent reliability improvement and risk reduction methods: SeparationStochastic separationIntroducing deliberate weaknessesSegmentationSelf-reinforcementInversionReducing the rate of accumulation of damagePermutationSubstitutionLimiting the space and time exposureComparative reliability models The domain-independent methods for reliability improvement and risk reduction do not depend on the availability of past failure data, domain-specific expertise or knowledge of the failure mechanisms underlying the failure modes. Through numerous examples and case studiesTable of ContentsPreface xv 1 Domain-Independent Methods for Reliability Improvement and Risk Reduction 1 1.1 The Domain-Specific Methods for Risk Reduction 1 1.2 The Statistical, Data-Driven Approach 3 1.3 The Physics-of-Failure Approach 4 1.4 Reliability Improvement and TRIZ 6 1.5 The Domain-Independent Methods for Reliability Improvement and Risk Reduction 6 2 Basic Concepts 9 2.1 Likelihood of Failure, Consequences from Failure, Potential Loss, and Risk of Failure 9 2.2 Drawbacks of the Expected Loss as a Measure of the Potential Loss from Failure 14 2.3 Potential Loss, Conditional Loss, and Risk of Failure 15 2.4 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk 19 2.5 Resilience 21 3 Overview of Methods and Principles for Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk That Can Be Classified as Domain-Independent 23 3.1 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Preventing Failure Modes 23 3.1.1 Techniques for Identifying and Assessing Failure Modes 23 3.1.2 Effective Risk Reduction Procedure Related to Preventing Failure Modes from Occurring 27 3.1.3 Reliability Improvement and Risk Reduction by Root Cause Analysis 28 3.1.3.1 Case Study: Improving the Reliability of Automotive Suspension Springs by Root Cause Analysis 28 3.1.4 Preventing Failure Modes by Removing Latent Faults 29 3.2 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by a Fault-Tolerant System Design and Fail-Safe Design 31 3.2.1 Building in Redundancy 31 3.2.1.1 Case Study: Improving Reliability by k-out-of-n redundancy 34 3.2.2 Fault-Tolerant Design 34 3.2.3 Fail-Safe Principle and Fail-Safe Design 35 3.2.4 Reducing Risk by Eliminating Vulnerabilities 36 3.2.4.1 Eliminating Design Vulnerabilities 36 3.2.4.2 Reducing the Negative Impact of Weak Links 37 3.2.4.3 Reducing the Likelihood of Unfavourable Combinations of Risk-Critical Random Factors 38 3.2.4.4 Reducing the Vulnerability of Computational Models 39 3.3 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Protecting Against Common Cause 40 3.4 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Simplifying at a System and Component Level 42 3.5 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Reducing the Variability of Risk-Critical Parameters 44 3.5.1 Case Study: Interaction Between the Upper Tail of the Load Distribution and the Lower Tail of the Strength Distribution 46 3.6 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Making the Design Robust 48 3.6.1 Case Study: Increasing the Robustness of a Spring Assembly with Constant Clamping Force 50 3.7 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Built-in Reinforcement 51 3.7.1 Built-In Prevention Reinforcement 51 3.7.2 Built-In Protection Reinforcement 51 3.8 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Condition Monitoring 52 3.9 Reducing the Risk of Failure by Improving Maintainability 56 3.10 Reducing Risk by Eliminating Factors Promoting Human Errors 57 3.11 Reducing Risk by Reducing the Hazard Potential 58 3.12 Reducing Risk by using Protective Barriers 59 3.13 Reducing Risk by Efficient Troubleshooting Procedures and Systems 60 3.14 Risk Planning and Training 60 4 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Separation 61 4.1 The Method of Separation 61 4.2 Separation of Risk-Critical Factors 62 4.2.1 Time Separation by Scheduling 62 4.2.1.1 Case Study: Full Time Separation with Random Starts of the Events 62 4.2.2 Time and Space Separation by Using Interlocks 63 4.2.2.1 Case Study: A Time Separation by Using an Interlock 63 4.2.3 Time Separation in Distributed Systems by Using Logical Clocks 64 4.2.4 Space Separation of Information 65 4.2.5 Separation of Duties to Reduce the Risk of Compromised Safety, Errors, and Fraud 65 4.2.6 Logical Separation by Using a Shared Unique Key 66 4.2.6.1 Case Study: Logical Separation of X-ray Equipment by a Shared Unique Key 66 4.2.7 Separation by Providing Conditions for Independent Operation 67 4.3 Separation of Functions, Properties, or Behaviour 68 4.3.1 Separation of Functions 68 4.3.1.1 Separation of Functions to Optimise for Maximum Reliability 68 4.3.1.2 Separation of Functions to Reduce Load Magnitudes 70 4.3.1.3 Separation of a Single Function into Multiple Components to Reduce Vulnerability to a Single Failure 71 4.3.1.4 Separation of Functions to Compensate Deficiencies 71 4.3.1.5 Separation of Functions to Prevent Unwanted Interactions 71 4.3.1.6 Separation of Methods to Reduce the Risk Associated with Incorrect Mathematical Models 72 4.4 Separation of Properties to Counter Poor Performance Caused by Inhomogeneity 72 4.4.1 Separation of Strength Across Components and Zones According to the Intensity of the Stresses from Loading 72 4.4.2 Separation of Properties to Satisfy Conflicting Requirements 74 4.4.3 Separation in Geometry 75 4.4.3.1 Case Study: Separation in Geometry for a Cantilever Beam 75 4.5 Separation on a Parameter, Conditions, or Scale 76 4.5.1 Separation at Distinct Values of a Risk-Critical Parameter Through Deliberate Weaknesses and Stress Limiters 76 4.5.2 Separation by Using Phase Changes 77 4.5.3 Separation of Reliability Across Components and Assemblies According to Their Cost of Failure 77 4.5.3.1 Case Study: Separation of the Reliability of Components Based on the Cost of Failure 78 5 Reducing Risk by Deliberate Weaknesses 81 5.1 Reducing the Consequences from Failure Through Deliberate Weaknesses 81 5.2 Separation from Excessive Levels of Stress 82 5.2.1 Deliberate Weaknesses Disconnecting Excessive Load 82 5.2.2 Energy-Absorbing Deliberate Weaknesses 85 5.2.2.1 Case Study: Reducing the Maximum Stress from Dynamic Loading by Energy-Absorbing Elastic Components 85 5.2.3 Designing Frangible Objects or Weakly Fixed Objects 86 5.3 Separation from Excessive Levels of Damage 87 5.3.1 Deliberate Weaknesses Decoupling Damaged Regions and Limiting the Spread of Damage 87 5.3.2 Deliberate Weaknesses Providing Stress and Strain Relaxation 88 5.3.3 Deliberate Weaknesses Separating from Excessive Levels of Damage Accumulation 90 5.4 Deliberate Weaknesses Deflecting the Failure Location or Damage Propagation 91 5.4.1 Deflecting the Failure Location from Places Where the Cost of Failure is High 91 5.4.2 Deflecting the Failure Location from Places Where the Cost of Intervention for Repair is High 92 5.4.3 Deliberate Weaknesses Deflecting the Propagation of Damage 92 5.5 Deliberate Weaknesses Designed to Provide Warning 92 5.6 Deliberate Weaknesses Designed to Provide Quick Access or Activate Protection 94 5.7 Deliberate Weaknesses and Stress Limiters 94 6 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Stochastic Separation 97 6.1 Stochastic Separation of Risk-Critical Factors 97 6.1.1 Real-Life Applications that Require Stochastic Separation 97 6.1.2 Stochastic Separation of a Fixed Number of Random Events with Different Duration Times 99 6.1.2.1 Case Study: Stochastic Separation of Consumers by Proportionally Reducing Their Demand Times 102 6.1.3 Stochastic Separation of Random Events Following a Homogeneous Poisson Process 105 6.1.3.1 Case Study: Stochastic Separation of Random Demands Following a Homogeneous Poisson Process 106 6.1.4 Stochastic Separation Based on the Probability of Overlapping of Random Events for More than a Single Source Servicing the Random Demands 106 6.1.5 Computer Simulation Algorithm Determining the Probability of Overlapping for More than a Single Source Servicing the Demands 108 6.2 Expected Time Fraction of Simultaneous Presence of Critical Events 110 6.2.1 Case Study: Expected Fraction of Unsatisfied Demand at a Constant Sum of the Time Fractions of User Demands 112 6.2.2 Case Study: Servicing Random Demands from Ten Different Users, Each Characterised by a Distinct Demand Time Fraction 114 6.3 Analytical Method for Determining the Expected Fraction of Unsatisfied Demand for Repair 114 6.3.1 Case Study: Servicing Random Repairs from a System Including Components of Three Different Types, Each Characterised by a Distinct Repair Time 115 6.4 Expected Time Fraction of Simultaneous Presence of Critical Events that have been Initiated with Specified Probabilities 116 6.4.1 Case Study: Servicing Random Demands from Patients in a Hospital 117 6.4.2 Case Study: Servicing Random Demands from Four Different Types of Users, Each Issuing a Demand with Certain Probability 118 6.5 Stochastic Separation Based on the Expected Fraction of Unsatisfied Demand 119 6.5.1 Fixed Number of Random Demands on a Time Interval 119 6.5.2 Random Demands Following a Poisson Process on a Time Interval 120 6.5.2.1 Case Study: Servicing Random Failures from Circular Knitting Machines by an Optimal Number of Repairmen 122 7 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Segmentation 125 7.1 Segmentation as a Problem-Solving Strategy 125 7.2 Creating a Modular System by Segmentation 127 7.3 Preventing Damage Accumulation and Limiting Damage Propagation by Segmentation 129 7.3.1 Creating Barriers Containing Damage 129 7.3.2 Creating Weak Interfaces Dissipating or Deflecting Damage 131 7.3.3 Reducing Deformations and Stresses by Segmentation 131 7.3.4 Reducing Hazard Potential by Segmentation 131 7.3.5 Reducing the Likelihood of Errors by Segmenting Operations 132 7.3.6 Limiting the Presence of Flaws by Segmentation 132 7.4 Improving Fault Tolerance and Reducing Vulnerability to a Single Failure by Segmentation 133 7.4.1 Case Study: Improving Fault Tolerance of a Column Loaded in Compression by Segmentation 133 7.4.2 Reducing the Vulnerability to a Single Failure by Segmentation 136 7.5 Reducing Loading Stresses by Segmentation 138 7.5.1 Improving Load Distribution by Segmentation 138 7.5.2 Improving Heat Dissipation by Segmentation 139 7.5.3 Case Study: Reducing Stress by Increasing the Perimeter to Cross-Sectional Area Ratio Through Segmentation 140 7.6 Reducing the Probability of a Loss/Error by Segmentation 142 7.6.1 Reducing the Likelihood of a Loss by Segmenting Opportunity Bets 142 7.6.1.1 Case Study: Reducing the Risk of a Loss from a Risky Prospect Involving a Single Opportunity Bet 143 7.6.2 Reducing the Likelihood of a Loss by Segmenting an Investment Portfolio 144 7.6.3 Reducing the Likelihood of Erroneous Conclusion from Imperfect Tests by Segmentation 145 7.7 Decreasing the Variation of Properties by Segmentation 146 7.8 Improved Control and Condition Monitoring by Time Segmentation 148 8 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Inversion 149 8.1 The Method of Inversion 149 8.2 Improving Reliability by Inverting Functions, Relative Position, and Motion 150 8.2.1 Case Study: Eliminating Failure Modes of an Alarm Circuit by Inversion of Functions 151 8.2.2 Improving Reliability by Inverting the Relative Position of Objects 152 8.2.2.1 Case Study: Inverting the Position of an Object with Respect to its Support to Improve Reliability 153 8.3 Improving Reliability by Inverting Properties and Geometry 155 8.3.1 Case Study: Improving Reliability by Inverting Mechanical Properties Whilst Maintaining an Invariant 155 8.3.2 Case Study: Improving Reliability by Inverting Geometry Whilst Maintaining an Invariant 156 8.4 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Introducing Inverse States 158 8.4.1 Inverse States Cancelling Anticipated Undesirable Effects 158 8.4.2 Inverse States Buffering Anticipated Undesirable Effects 159 8.4.3 Inverse States Reducing the Likelihood of an Erroneous Action 160 8.5 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Inverse Thinking 161 8.5.1 Inverting the Problem Related to Reliability Improvement and Risk Reduction 161 8.5.1.1 Case Study: Reducing the Risk of High Employee Turnover 162 8.5.2 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Inverting the Focus 163 8.5.2.1 Shifting the Focus from the Components to the System 163 8.5.2.2 Starting from the Desired Ideal End Result 163 8.5.2.3 Focusing on Events that are Missing 164 8.5.3 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Moving Backwards to Contributing Factors 164 8.5.3.1 Case Study: Identifying Failure Modes of a Lubrication System by Moving Backwards to Contributing Factors 165 8.5.4 Inverse Thinking in Mathematical Models Evaluating or Reducing Risk 166 8.5.4.1 Case Study: Using the Method of Inversion for Fast Evaluation of the Production Availability of a Complex System 167 8.5.4.2 Case Study: Repeated Inversion for Evaluating the Risk of Collision of Ships 170 9 Reliability Improvement and Risk Reduction Through Self-Reinforcement 177 9.1 Self-Reinforcement Mechanisms 177 9.2 Self-Reinforcement Relying on a Proportional Compensating Factor 179 9.2.1 Transforming Forces and Pressure into a Self-Reinforcing Response 179 9.2.1.1 Capturing a Self-Reinforcing Proportional Response from Friction Forces 179 9.2.1.2 Case Study: Transforming Friction Forces into a Proportional Response in the Design of a Friction Grip 180 9.2.1.3 Transforming Pressure into a Self-Reinforcing Response 182 9.2.1.4 Transforming Weight into a Self-Reinforcing Response 182 9.2.1.5 Transforming Moments into a Self-Reinforcing Response 182 9.2.1.6 Self-Reinforcement by Self-Balancing 183 9.2.1.7 Self-Reinforcement by Self-Anchoring 184 9.2.2 Transforming Motion into a Self-Reinforcing Response 186 9.2.3 Self-Reinforcement by Self-Alignment 186 9.2.3.1 Case Study: Self-Reinforcement by Self-Alignment of a Rectangular Panel Under Wind Pressure 187 9.2.4 Self-Reinforcement Through Modified Geometry and Strains 188 9.3 Self-Reinforcement by Feedback Loops 188 9.3.1 Self-Reinforcement by Creating Negative Feedback Loops 188 9.3.2 Positive Feedback Loops 189 9.3.3 Reducing Risk by Eliminating or Inhibiting Positive Feedback Loops with Negative Impact 190 9.3.3.1 Case Study: Growth of Damage Sustained by a Positive Feedback Loop with Negative Impact 192 9.3.4 Self-Reinforcement by Creating Positive Feedback Loops with Positive Impact 194 9.3.4.1 Case Study: Positive Feedback Loop Providing Self-Reinforcement by Self-Energising 195 10 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Minimising the Rate of Damage Accumulation and by a Substitution 197 10.1 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Minimising the Rate of Damage Accumulation 197 10.1.1 Classification of Failures Caused by Accumulation of Damage 197 10.1.2 Minimising the Rate of Damage Accumulation by Optimal Replacement 198 10.1.3 Minimising the Rate of Damage Accumulation by Selecting the Optimal Variation of the Damage-Inducing Factors 203 10.1.3.1 A Case Related to a Single Damage-Inducing Factor 203 10.1.3.2 A Case Related to Multiple Damage-Inducing Factors 206 10.1.3.3 Reducing the Rate of Damage Accumulation by Derating 209 10.1.4 Reducing the Rate of Damage Accumulation by Deliberate Weaknesses 210 10.1.5 Reducing the Rate of Damage Accumulation by Reducing Exposure to Acceleration Stresses 211 10.1.5.1 Reducing Exposure to Acceleration Stresses by Reducing the Magnitude of the Acceleration Stresses 211 10.1.5.2 Reducing Exposure to Acceleration Stresses by Modifying or Replacing the Working Environment 211 10.1.6 Reducing the Rate of Damage Accumulation by Appropriate Materials Selection, Design, and Manufacturing 212 10.2 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Substitution with Assemblies Working on Different Physical Principles 213 10.2.1 Increasing Reliability by a Substitution with Magnetic Assemblies 215 10.2.2 Increasing Reliability by a Substitution with Electrical Systems 215 10.2.3 Increasing Reliability by a Substitution with Optical Assemblies 216 10.2.4 Increasing Reliability and Reducing Risk by a Substitution with Software 217 11 Improving Reliability by Comparative Models, Permutations, and by Reducing the Time/Space Exposure 219 11.1 A Comparative Method for Improving System Reliability 219 11.1.1 Comparative Method for Improving System Reliability Based on Proving an Inequality 220 11.1.2 The Method of Biased Coins for Proving System Reliability Inequalities 221 11.1.2.1 Case Study: Comparative Method for Improving System Reliability by the Method of Biased Coins 223 11.1.3 A Comparative Method Based on Computer Simulation for Production Networks 225 11.2 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Permutations of Interchangeable Components and Processes 226 11.3 Improving Reliability and Availability by Appropriate Placement of the Condition Monitoring Equipment 229 11.4 Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk by Reducing Time/Space Exposure 231 11.4.1 Reducing the Time of Exposure 231 11.4.2 Reducing the Space of Exposure 232 11.4.2.1 Case Study: Reducing the Risk of Failure of Wires by Simultaneously Reducing the Cost 232 11.4.2.2 Case Study: Evaluating the Risk of Failure of Components with Complex Shape 233 12 Reducing Risk by Determining the Exact Upper Bound of Uncertainty 235 12.1 Uncertainty Associated with Properties from Multiple Sources 235 12.2 Quantifying Uncertainty in the Case of Known Mixing Proportions 237 12.2.1 Variance of a Property from Multiple Sources in the Case Where the Mixing Proportions are Known 239 12.2.1.1 Case Study: Estimating the Uncertainty in Setting Positioning Distance 239 12.3 A Tight Upper Bound for the Uncertainty in the Case of Unknown Mixing Proportions 242 12.3.1 Variance Upper Bound Theorem 242 12.3.2 An Algorithm for Determining the Exact Upper Bound of the Variance of Properties from Multiple Sources 243 12.3.3 Determining the Source Whose Removal Results in the Largest Decrease of the Exact Variance Upper Bound 244 12.4 Applications of the Variance Upper Bound 245 12.4.1 Using the Variance Upper Bound for Increasing the Robustness of Products and Processes 245 12.4.2 Using the Variance Upper Bound for Increasing the Robustness of Electronic Devices 246 12.4.2.1 Case Study: Calculating the Worst-Case Variation by the Variance Upper Bound Theorem 246 12.4.3 Using the Variance Upper Bound Theorem for Delivering Conservative Designs 247 12.4.3.1 Case Study: Identifying the Distributions Associated with the Worst-Case Variation During Virtual Testing 247 12.5 Using Standard Inequalities to Obtain a Tight Upper Bound for the Uncertainty in Mechanical Properties 248 References 251 Index 261

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe newest volume in the authoritative Inorganic Syntheses book series provides users of inorganic substances with detailed and foolproof procedures for the preparation of important and timely inorganic and organometallic compounds that can be used in reactions to develop new materials, drug targets, and bio-inspired chemical entities.Table of ContentsNote to Contributors and Checkers xv Toxic Substances and Laboratory Hazards xvii Preface xix Chapter One DIVALENT MANGANESE, IRON, AND COBALT BIS(TRIMETHYLSILYL)AMIDO DERIVATIVES AND THEIR TETRAHYDROFURAN COMPLEXES 1 1. Introduction 1 2. Bis{bis(trimethylsilyl)amido}iron(II) dimer: [Fe{N(SiMe3)2}2]2 4 A. Bis{bis(trimethylsilyl)amido}iron(II) dimer: [Fe{N(SiMe3)2}2]2 5 3. Bis{bis(trimethylsilyl)amido}cobalt(II) dimer, [Co{N(SiMe3)2}2]2,and bis{bis(trimethylsilyl)amido}(tetrahydrofuran)cobalt(II),Co{N(SiMe3)2}2(THF) 7 A. Bis{bis(trimethylsilyl)amido}cobalt(II) dimer: [Co{N(SiMe3)2}2]2 . 8 B. Bis{bis(trimethylsilyl)amido}(tetrahydrofuran)cobalt(II): Co{N(SiMe3)2}2(THF) 9 4. Bis{bis(trimethylsilyl)amido}manganese(II) dimer, [Mn{N(SiMe3)2}2]2, and its THF complexes Mn{N(SiMe3)2}2(THF) and Mn{N(SiMe3)2}2(THF)2 10 A. Bis{bis(trimethylsilyl)amido}(tetrahydrofuran)manganese(II),Mn{N(SiMe3)2}2(THF), and bis{bis(trimethylsilyl)amido} manganese(II) dimer, [Mn{N(SiMe3)2}2]2 11 B. Bis{bis(trimethylsilyl)amido}bis(tetrahydrofuran)manganese(II) 12 C. An alternative synthesis of Mn{N(SiMe3)2}2(THF) and [Mn{N(SiMe3)2}2]2 12 Chapter Two CALCIUM, STRONTIUM, GERMANIUM, TIN, AND LEAD BIS(TRIMETHYLSILYL)AMIDO DERIVATIVES AND 2,2,6,6- TETRAMETHYLPIPERIDIDO AND N-ISOPROPYLPHENYLAMIDO DERVATIVES OF POTASSIUM AND CALCIUM 15 1. Introduction 15 2. Potassium (2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidide), bis(2,2,6,6- tetramethylpiperidido) (N,N,N’,N’ -tetramethylethylenediamine)calcium(II), potassium (N-isopropylanilido), and bis(N-isopropylanilido) Tris (tetrahydrofuran)calcium(II) 18 A. Potassium 2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidide 19 B. Diiodotetrakis(tetrahydrofuran)calcium(II) 20 C. Bis(2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidido)(N,N,N’,N’- tetramethylethylenediamine)calcium(II) 20 D. Potassium N-{isopropyl(phenyl)amide} (Potassium N-isopropylanilide) 21 E. Bis{N-isopropyl(phenyl)amido}tris(tetrahydrofuran)calcium(II) 22 F. Bis[{bis(tetrahydrofuran)potassium}bis{μ-N(isopropyl)(phenyl) amido}]calcium(II) 22 3. Bis{bis(trimethylsilyl)amido}calcium(II) dimer, [Ca{N(SiMe3)2}2]2, and bis {bis(trimethylsilyl)amido}strontium(II) dimer, [Sr{N(SiMe3)2}2]2 24 A. Bis{bis(trimethylsilyl)amido}calcium(II) dimer, [Ca{N(SiMe3)2}2]2,and bis{bis(trimethylsilyl)amido}strontium(II) dimer, [Sr{N(SiMe3)2}2]2 25 4. Divalent Group 14 metal bis(trimethylsilylamides), M{N(SiMe3)2}2 (M = Ge, Sn, Pb) 26 A. Bis{bis(trimethylsilyl)amido}germanium(II), Ge{N(SiMe3)2}2 27 B. Bis{bis(trimethylsilyl)amido}tin(II), Sn{N(SiMe3)2}2 28 C. Bis{bis(trimethylsilyl)amido}lead(II), Pb{N(SiMe3)2}2 29 Chapter Three COMPOUNDS WITH Zn–Zn AND Mg–Mg BONDS: DECAMETHYLDIZINCOCENE AND β-DIKETIMINATO COMPLEXES OF MAGNESIUM(I) AND (II) 33 1. Introduction 33 2. Pentamethylcyclopentadienyl zinc(I) dimer, {Zn(η5-C5Me5)}2 37 A. Pentamethylcyclopentadienyl potassium 38 B. Bis(pentamethylcyclopentadienyl)zinc(II) 38 C. Bis(pentamethylcyclopentadienyl)dizinc(I) 39 3. β-diketiminato complexes of magnesium(I)/(II) 40 A. {2,4-bis-(2,6-diisopropylphenylimido)pentyl}(diethylether) iodomagnesium(II), {HC(CMeNC6H3-2,6-Pri 2)2}MgI(OEt2) 41 B. {2,4-bis-(mesitylimido)pentyl}(diethylether) iodidomagnesium(II),{HC(CMeNC6H2-2,4,6-Me3)2}MgI(OEt2) 42 C. Bis{2,4-bis-(2,6-diisopropylphenylimido)pentyl}dimagnesium(I) [{HC(CMeNC6H3-2,6-Pri 2)2}2Mg]2 43 D. Bis{2,4-bis-(mesitylimido)pentyl}dimagnesium(I), [{HC(CMeN(C6H2-2,4,6-Me3)}Mg]2 44 Chapter Four STERICALLY CROWDED σ- AND π-BONDED METAL ARYL COMPLEXES 47 1. Introduction 47 2. Dimesityliron(II) dimer and dimesityldipyridineiron(II) (Mes = Mesityl = C6H2-2,4,6-Me3) 50 A. Tetramesityldiiron(II) dimer (FeMes2)2 (Mes = 2,4,6-trimethylphenyl) 51 B. Dimesityldi(pyridine)iron(II) FeMes2py2 (py = C5H5N) 54 3. Homoleptic, two-coordinate open-shell 2,6-dimesitylphenyl complexes of lithium, manganese, iron, and cobalt 56 A. 1-Iodo-2,6-bis(2,4,6-trimethylphenyl)benzene, 2,6-dimesitylphenyl iodide 57 B. Bis{μ-2,6-bis(2,4,6-trimethylphenyl)phenyl}dilithium, 2,6-dimesitylphenyllithium dimer 58 C. Bis{2,6-bis(2,4,6-trimethylphenyl)phenyl}manganese(II), (bis(2,6-dimesitylphenyl)manganese(II)) 59 D. Bis{2,6-bis(2,4,6-trimethylphenyl)phenyl}iron(II), bis(2,6-dimesitylphenyl)iron(II) 59 E. Bis{2,6-bis(2,4,6-trimethylphenyl)phenyl}cobalt(II),bis(2,6-dimesitylphenyl)cobalt(II) 60 4. Monomeric group 14 diaryls bis{2,6-bis(2,4,6-trimethylphenyl)phenyl} germanium(II), tin(II), or lead(II), M{C6H3-2,6-Mes2)2 and bis{2,6-bis(2,6- diisopropylphenyl)phenyl}germanium(II), tin(II), or lead(II), M{C6H3-2,6-Dipp2}2 (M = Ge, Sn, or Pb; Mes = C6H2-2,4,6-Me3;Dipp = C6H3-2,6-Pri2) 61 5. m-terphenylgallium chloride complexes 65 A. {Bis(diethylether)lithium}{trichlorido(2,6-diphenyl)phenylgallate}, {Li(Et2O)2}{(C6H3-2,6-Ph2)GaCl3} 66 B. Chlorido{bis(2,6-dimesitylphenyl)}gallium, (2,6-Mes2C6H3)2GaCl 67 6. {(18-crown-6)bis(tetrahydrofuran)potassium}{bis(1,2,3,4-η4-anthracene)metallates} of cobalt(-I) and iron(-I),{K(18-crown-6)(THF)2} {M(η4-C14H10)2}, M= Co, Fe 67 A. {(18-crown-6)bis(tetrahydrofuran)potassium}{bis(1,2,3,4-η4-anthracene)cobaltate}, {K(18-crown-6)(THF)2}{Co(C14H10)2} 69 B. {(18-crown-6)bis(tetrahydrofuran)potassium}{bis(1,2,3,4-η4-anthracene)ferrate}, {K(18-crown-6)(THF)2}{Fe(C14H10)2} 70 7. {Bis(1,2-dimethoxyethane)potassium}{bis(1,2,3,4-η4-anthracene) cobaltate}, {K(DME)2}{Co(η4-C14H10)2} 72 8. Cyclopentadienyl and pentamethylcyclopentadienyl naphthalene ferrates 76 A. Bis(tetrahydrofuran)lithium cyclopentadienyl(1,2,3,4-η4-napthalene) ferrate, [{Li(thf)2}{CpFe(η4-C10H8)}] 78 B. (18-crown-6)potassium pentamethylcyclopentadienyl(1,2,3,4-η4- napthalene)ferrate, [K(18-crown-6){Cp∗Fe(η4-C10H8)}] 79 Chapter Five TERPHENYL LIGANDS AND COMPLEXES 85 1. Introduction 85 2. m-Terphenyl iodo and lithium reagents featuring 2,6-bis-(2,6- diisopropylphenyl) substitution patterns and an m-terphenyl lithium etherate featuring the 2,6-bis-(2,4,6-triisopropylphenyl) substitution pattern 89 A. 1-bromo-2,6-diisopropylbenzene, 1-Br-2,6-Pri2C6H3;DippBr) 90 B. 1-iodo-2,6-bis(2,6-diisopropylphenyl)benzene (IC6H3-2,6-Dipp2) 92 C. Bis{2,6-bis(2,6-diisopropylphenyl)phenyl}dilithium,(LiC6H3-2,6-Dipp2)2 94 D. 2,6-bis(2,6-diisopropylphenyl)phenyllithiumetherate 95 E. 2,6-bis(2,4,6-triisopropylphenyl)phenyllithiumetherate{(Et2O)LiC6H3-2,6-Trip2} 96 3. 2,6-dimesitylaniline (H2NC6H3-2,6-Mes2) and 2,6-bis(2,4,6- triisopropylphenyl)aniline (H2NC6H3-2,6-Trip2) 98 A. 2,6-dimesitylphenylazide, 2,6-Mes2C6H3N 99 B. 2,6-dimesitylaniline, 2,6-Mes2C6H3NH2 100 C. 2,6-bis(2,4,6-triisopropylphenyl)iodobenzene, 2,6-Trip2C6H3I 101 D. 2,6-bis(2,4,6-triisopropylphenyl)azidobenzene,2,6-Trip2C6H3N3 102 E. 2,6-bis(2,4,6-triisopropylphenyl)aniline, 2,6-Trip2C6H3NH2 103 4. Bis-2,6-(2,6-diisopropylphenyl)aniline 105 A. 1-azido-bis-2,6-(2,6-diisopropylphenyl)benzene,2,6-Dipp2H3C6N3 106 B. Bis-2,6-(2,6-diisopropylphenyl)aniline, 2,6-Dipp2H3C6NH2 107 5. Bis-2,6-(2,4,6-trimethylphenyl)phenylformamide and isocyanide,Bis-2,6-(2,6-diisopropylphenyl)phenylformamide and isocyanide 109 A. 2,6-dimesitylphenyl formamide {2,6-Mes2H3C6N(H)C(O)H} 110 B. 2,6-dimesitylphenyl isocyanide (2,6-Mes2H3C6NC) 111 C. 2,6-bis-(diisopropylphenyl)phenyl formamide{2,6-Dipp2H3C6N(H)C(O)H} 112 D. 2,6-bis-(diisopropylphenyl)phenyl isocyanide (2,6-Dipp2H3C6NC) 113 6. Synthesis of the terphenylthiols: 2,6-bis(2,6-diisopropylphenyl)phenylthiol,2,6-bis(2,4,6-triisopropylphenyl)phenylthiol, and bis{2,6-bis(2,4,6-triisopropylphenyl)phenylthiolato}dilithium 116 A. 2,6-bis(2,6-diisopropylphenyl)phenylthiol 117 B. 2,6-bis(2,4,6-triisopropylphenyl)phenylthiol 118 C. Bis{2,6-bis(2,4,6-triisopropylphenyl)phenylthiolato}dilithium 119 7. Sterically encumbered terphenols: 2,6-bis(2,4,6-trimethylphenyl)phenol and 2,6-bis(2,6-diisopropylphenyl)phenol 120 A. 2,6-bis(2,6-diisopropylphenyl)phenol 121 B. Bis(2,4,6-trimethylphenyl)phenol 121 Chapter Six SYNTHETIC ROUTES TO WHITE PHOSPHORUS (P4) AND ARSENIC TRIPHOSPHIDE (AsP3) 123 1. Introduction 123 2. Facile preparation of white phosphorus from red phosphorus:Preparation A 125 3. Synthesis of white phosphorus (P4) from red phosphorus:Preparation B 127 4. Arsenic triphosphide, AsP3 130 A. Tris(2,6-diisopropylphenoxy)niobiumdichloride {Cl2Nb(ODipp)3} and Tris(2,6-diisopropylphenoxy)niobiumdichloride(tetrahydrofuran) {Cl2Nb(ODipp)3(THF)} 131 B. {Na(THF)3}{P3Nb(ODipp)3} 132 C. Arsenic Triphosphide AsP3 133 Chapter Seven SYNTHETIC ROUTES TO PHOSPHIDO AND ARSENIDO DERIVATIVES OF THE GROUP 13 METALS ALUMINUM, GALLIUM, AND INDIUM, TRIS(TERT-BUTYL)GALLIUM AND ITS REACTIONS WITH AMMONIA, AND THE ALUMINUM(I) SPECIES PENTAMETHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL ALUMINUM TETRAMER 135 1. Introduction 135 2. Dinuclear phosphido and arsenido derivatives of aluminum, gallium, and indium {Me2M(μ-EBut2)}2, M= Al, Ga, In; E = P, As 137 A. Preparation of {Me2M(μ-EBut2)}2 Complexes: M= Al,Ga, In; E = P, As 138 3. Tris(tert-butyl)gallane, its ammonia complex, and the amidobis(tert-butyl)gallane trimer tris(μ-amido)hexa(tert-butyl)trigallium 140 A. Tri-tert-butylgallane 141 B. Ammonia complex of tri-tert-butylgallane 142 C. Tris(μ-amido)hexa-tert-butyltrigallium: The trimer {But2Ga (μ-NH2)}3 143 4. Reductive elimination as a convenient pathway to tetrameric (η5-pentamethylcyclopentadienyl)aluminum(I) {(AlCp∗)4} (Cp∗ = η5-C5Me5) 144 A. Potassium pentamethylcyclopentadienide KCp∗ 146 B. Bis(pentamethylcyclopentadienyl)aluminumhydride (Cp∗2AlH) 146 C. Tetrameric (η5-pentamethylcyclopentadienyl)aluminum(I){(AlCp∗)4} 147 5. A facile synthesis of tetrameric (ƞ5-pentamethylycycloclopentadienyl) aluminum(I) {Al(ƞ5-C5Me5)}4 147 A. (ƞ5-pentamethylcyclopentadienyl)aluminumdichloride 149 B. Tetrameric (ƞ5-pentamethylcyclopentadienyl)aluminum(I) (AlCp∗)4 149 6. Tris(pentafluorophenyl)aluminum(toluene): Al(C6F5)3(C7H8) 150 A. Tris(pentafluorophenyl)aluminum(toluene) 151 Chapter Eight SYNTHESIS OF SELECTED TRANSITION METAL AND MAIN GROUP COMPOUNDS WITH SYNTHETIC APPLICATIONS 155 1. Introduction 155 2. Synthesis of gold(I) and gold(II) amidinate complexes 157 A. Synthesis of gold(I) amidinate complexes 158 B. Synthesis of gold(II) amidinate complexes 161 3. A nickel–iron thiolate and its hydride 166 A. (1,2-bis(diphenylphosphino)ethane)(1,3-propanedithiolato) nickel(II) 167 B. (1,2-bis(diphenylphosphino)ethane)nickel(I)(μ-1,3- propanedithiolato)tricarbonyliron(I) 168 C. (1,2-bis(diphenylphosphino)ethane)nickel(II)(μ-hydrido)(μ-1,3-propanedithiolato)tricarbonyliron(II) tetrafluoroborate 169 4. Dimethyl sulfoxide and organophosphine complexes of ruthenium(II) halides 171 A. cis-tetrakis(dimethylsulfoxide)ruthenium(II)dichloride 172 B. cis-bis{1,2-bis(diphenylphosphino)ethane}ruthenium(II) dichloride 174 C. Bis{1,2-bis(diphenylphosphino)ethane}chlororuthenium(II) hexafluorophosphate 174 D. trans-bis{1,2-bis(diphenylphosphino)ethane}ruthenium(II) dichloride 176 5. Synthesis of {CrIII(NCMe)6}(BF4)3 and {CrIII(NCMe)5F} (BF4)2•MeCN 177 A. Hexakis(acetonitrile)chromium(III) tetrafluoroborate, {CrIII(NCMe)6}(BF4)3 177 B. Pentakis(acetonitrile)fluorido chromium(III) tetrafluoroborate, {CrIIIF(NCMe)5}(BF4)2 178 6. (1R,2R-diaminocyclohexane)oxalatoplatinum(II), oxaliplatin 179 7. Tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium(0) 183 A. Synthesis of Pd2dba3·CHCl3 185 B. Purity determination and repurification of Pd2dba3 186 C. Stability 187 8. Tetraalkylammonium salts of tetra(fluoroaryl)borate anions 188 A. Tetraalkylammonium salts of [B(C6F5)4]− 189 B. Tetraalkylammonium salts of [B{C6H3-3,5-(CF3)2}4]− 191 9. Titanium tris(N-tert-butyl, 3,5-dimethylanilide) 193 10. Tetrachlorido(tetramethylethylenediamine)tantalum(IV),TaCl4(TMEDA) 196 A. Tetrachlorido(tetramethylethyenediamine)tantalum(IV),TaCl4(TMEDA) 197 11. Synthesis of 1,3,5-tri-tert-butylcyclopenta-1,3-diene and its metal complexes Na{1,2,4-(Me3C)3C5H2} and Mg{η5-1,2,4-(Me3C)3C5H2}2 199 A. Method A (Phase Transfer) 199 B. Method B (Grignard Procedure) 201 C. Sodium(1,2,4-tri-tert-butyl)cyclopentadienide 203 D. Magnesium(II)bis(1,2,4-tri-tert-butyl)cyclopentadienide 203 Cumulative Contributor Index 205 Cumulative Subject Index 215 Cumulative Formula Index 245

Read more less

Book SynopsisGet to know a key ingredient to world-class product manufacturing With this manual, you have the best of the best management practices for the configuration management processes. It goes a long way toward satisfying Total Quality Management, FDA, GMP, Lean CM and ISO/QS/AS 9XXX process documentation requirements. The one requirement common to all those standards is to document the processes and to do what you document.Table of ContentsIntroduction ix Questions and Answers xiii Part I Company EDC/CM Policy 1 1 Policy Statement 3 EDC/CM Manager Job Description 7 Part II Basic Standards 9 2 Writing CM Standards 11 3 CM Requirements for Drafting Standards 15 4 Technical Document Groups 17 5 Teams for All CM Processes 21 6 Cognizant Engineers 25 7 Part Numbers 27 8 Quantity and Units of Measure 33 9 Bills of Material 35 10 Approved Manufacturers List (AML) 37 11 Deviations 39 12 Spares List 43 13 Prints/Point of Use/Paperless 45 14 Signatures 47 15 Class Coding/Naming Conventions/Group Technology 49 16 Tabulated Documents 53 17 Nameplate and Serial Number 55 Part III Product and Document Release Process 57 18 Release Policy 59 19 Team in Release 63 20 Phase Release 65 Part IV Change Request Process 69 21 Change Request Policy 71 22 Team in Request 75 23 Request Form 77 Part V Change Control Process 81 24 Change Control Policy 83 25 Team in Change 89 26 Change Form 91 27 Interchangeability 99 28 Part Number & Revision Level Changes 101 29 Change Classification 103 30 Mark Up of Design Documents 105 31 Effectivity 109 32 Effectivity Management 111 33 Disposition of Old Design Parts 115 34 Impacted/Affected by a Change 117 35 Product Improvements 119 36 Change Design Complete 121 37 Actual Effectivity Tracking 125 38 Line-Down Change 129 39 Closing a Change 131 40 Tracing Changes 133 Part VI Changing Product shipped - Field Changes 135 41 Change of Field Units 137 42 Field Change Policy 139 43 Field Change Order Form 141 Part VII Odds and Ends 143 44 Costing Design Changes 145 45 Data Dictionary 151 46 System Measurements 153 47 Users Guide/CM Plan 157 48 Acronyms and Definitions 163 Author Biogaphy 173

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book focuses on the materials used for fuel cells, solar panels, and storage devices, such as rechargeable batteries. Fuel cell devices, such as direct methanol fuel cells, direct ethanol fuel cells, direct urea fuel cells, as well as biological fuel cells and the electrolytes, membranes, and catalysts used there are detailed. Separate chapters are devoted to polymer electrode materials and membranes. With regard to solar cells, the types of solar cells are detailed, such as inorganic-organic hybrid solar cells, solar powered biological fuel cells, heterojunction cells, multi-junction cells, and others. Also, the fabrication methods are described. Further, the electrolytes, membranes, and catalysts used there are detailed. The section that is dealing with rechargeable batteries explains the types of rechargeable devices, such as aluminum-based batteries, zinc batteries, magnesium batteries, and lithium batteries. Materials that are used for cathodes, anodesTable of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Fuel Cells 1 1.1 Conventional Fuel Cells 2 1.1.1 Sealing Material for Solid Polymer Fuel Cell Separator 2 1.1.2 Water Management in a Polymer Electrolyte Fuel Cell 2 1.1.3 Alkaline Fuel Cells 7 1.1.4 Alkaline Direct Alcohol Fuel Cells 8 1.1.5 Vanadium Redox Flow Battery 8 1.1.6 Miniaturization of a Polymer-Type Fuel Cell 9 1.1.7 Polymer Fuel Cell Structure 13 1.1.8 Fuel Cell System and Method for Humidifying 15 1.2 Direct Methanol Fuel Cells 15 1.2.1 Modeling Liquid Feed Direct Methanol Fuel Cells 17 1.2.2 Vapor Feed Direct Methanol Fuel Cells 18 1.2.3 Mixed Feed Direct Methanol Fuel Cells 19 1.2.4 Metalized Polymer Film 19 1.2.5 Catalysts 20 1.2.6 Electrolytes 29 1.3 Direct Ethanol Fuel Cells 29 1.3.1 Transport Phenomena in Alkaline Direct Ethanol Fuel Cells 31 1.3.2 Nanoporous Palladium Anode 33 1.3.3 Catalysts for Ethanol Fuel Cells 33 1.4 Direct Formate Fuel Cells 37 1.5 Direct Urea Fuel Cells 40 1.6 Solid Oxide Fuel Cell Systems 42 1.6.1 Perovskite Oxides 44 1.6.2 Yttria-Stabilized Zirconia 45 1.6.3 Anodized Aluminum Oxide 46 1.6.4 Copper-Modified Ceria Zirconia 46 1.6.5 Nanostructured Bilayer Solid Oxide Fuel Cell 47 1.6.6 Organic Waste Power Plant 47 1.6.7 Oriented Nanostructures 48 1.6.8 Silicon-Based Nanothin Film Solid Oxide Fuel Cell 48 1.6.9 Nanoparticles-Loaded Cathode 49 1.6.10 Direct Oxidation of Hydrocarbons in a Solid Oxide Fuel Cell 49 1.7 Biological Fuel Cells 50 1.7.1 Miniature Biological Fuel Cell 51 1.7.2 Cellulose Pellicles 56 1.7.3 Nanoporous Filters 56 1.7.4 Paper-Based Fuel Cell 57 1.7.5 Fuel Cell Utilizing Mitochondria 57 1.7.6 Grafting of Biomolecules onto Microbial Fuel Cells 58 1.7.7 Biosupercapacitor 59 1.7.8 Biological Clean Fuel Processing Systems 60 1.7.9 Filtration-Active Fuel Cell 61 1.7.10 Sustainable Wastewater Treatment 62 1.7.11 Hybrid Biological Fuel Cell 65 1.7.12 High Durability Fuel Cell Components with Cerium Salt Additives 67 1.7.13 Reserve Power Source 68 1.7.14 Performance of a Yeast-Mediated Biological Fuel Cell 68 1.7.15 One-Compartment Fructose/Air Biological Fuel Cell 69 References 69 2 Polymer Electrodes 79 2.1 Porous Electrode Substrate 79 2.2 Electrode Assembly for Solid Polymer Fuel Cell 83 2.3 Electrode for Fuel Cell 83 2.4 Flow-Field Plate 84 2.5 Catalyst for Fuel Electrode 85 2.6 Electrode Catalyst and Solid Polymer Fuel Cell 85 2.7 Membrane Electrode Assembly 87 References 88 3 Polymer Membranes 91 3.1 History 91 3.2 Desired Properties of Membranes 92 3.2.1 Permeation and Diffusion 93 3.2.2 Water Transport in Polymer Electrolyte Membrane Fuel Cells 93 3.2.3 Water Management System for Solid Polymer Electrolyte Fuel Cell Power Plants 95 3.2.4 Accelerated Conditioning 95 3.2.5 Working Principle of a Polymer Exchange Membrane 96 3.2.6 Membranes for Direct Methanol Fuel Cells 96 3.2.7 Membranes for Direct Ethanol Fuel Cells 109 3.2.8 High-Temperature Polymer Electrolyte Membrane Fuel Cell 111 3.2.9 Functionalized Microporous Zeolite- 13X Membrane 112 3.2.10 Nanoporous Carbon-Nafion Hybrid Membranes 112 3.2.11 Proton Exchange Membranes 113 3.2.12 Catalyst Degradation and Starvation 113 3.2.13 Durability Test Protocols 114 3.2.14 Nanoscale Properties 115 3.3 Types of Membrane Materials 116 3.3.1 Biological Fuel Cells with Nanoporous Membranes 116 3.3.2 Proton-Selective Membrane for Solid Polymer Fuel Cells 119 3.3.3 Polymer Electrolyte Membranes for Direct Methanol Fuel Cells 122 3.3.4 Nafion 124 3.3.5 Fuel Cell Polymer Electrolyte Membrane Containing Manganese Oxide 126 3.3.6 High-Temperature Polymer Electrolyte Membrane Fuel Cells 126 3.3.7 Fluorinated High-Performance Polymers 127 3.3.8 Fluor-Containing Copolymers for Polymer Membranes 128 3.3.9 Solid Electrolyte Membrane 129 3.3.10 Triazine Polymer for Fuel Cell Membrane 133 3.3.11 Polymer-Nanocomposite Electrolyte Membranes 134 3.4 Fabrication 135 3.4.1 Low-Pressure Plasmas 135 3.4.2 Electrospinning 135 3.5 Degradation 136 3.5.1 Mechanical Degradation 136 3.5.2 Thermal Degradation 136 3.5.3 Chemical Degradation 137 References 138 4 Solar Cells 145 4.1 History 146 4.2 Types of Solar Cells 147 4.2.1 Inorganic-Organic Hybrid Perovskite Solar Cells 147 4.2.2 Solar Powered Biological Fuel Cell 150 4.2.3 Conjugated Polymer-Based Organic Solar Cells 152 4.2.4 Heterojunction Polymer Solar Cell 156 4.2.5 Hybrid Bulk Heterojunction Type Solar Cells 157 4.2.6 Triple-Junction Polymer Solar Cell 157 4.2.7 Amorphous Silicon Multijunction Solar Cells 158 4.2.8 Multijunction Polymer Solar Cells 158 4.2.9 Wide Bandgap Photovoltaic Polymers 158 4.2.10 Low Bandgap Polymer 159 4.2.11 Fluorinated Benzothiadiazole 161 4.2.12 Indene C60 Bisadduct 161 4.2.13 Spiro Derivatives 162 4.2.14 Pyrene Derivatives 163 4.2.15 Interfacial Materials for Organic Solar Cells 163 4.2.16 Improvement of Polymer Solar Cell Stability 165 4.3 Solar Cell Efficiency 166 4.4 Fabrication Methods 166 4.4.1 Slot-Die Coating 170 4.4.2 Full Roll-to-Roll Processing 171 4.5 Silver Nanoplates and Core-Shell Nanoparticles 174 4.6 Vanadium Oxide Hydrate as Hole-Transport Layer 176 4.7 Graphene Quantum Dot-Modified Electrodes 178 4.8 Enhancing Thermal Stability by Electron Beam Irradiation 178 4.9 Inverted Polymer Solar Cell 179 4.10 Single-Junction Polymer Solar Cells 180 4.11 Medium-Bandgap Polymer Donor 181 4.12 Flexible Polymer Solar Cells 182 4.13 PCPDTBT 183 4.13.1 Direct Attachment and Growth of Gold or Silver Nanop articles 185 4.13.2 Photooxidation Behavior 186 4.13.3 PCPDTBT:PC70BM Solar Cells 186 4.13.4 Ternary Blend of PCDTBT, PCPDTBT, and PC70BM 187 4.13.5 PCPDTBT:PC71BM Devices with Gold Nanoparticles 188 4.13.6 P3HT and ICBA blends in C-PCPDTBT and Si-PCPDTBT 189 4.13.7 Influence of Environment Temperature 189 4.14 Extended Storage Life 190 4.15 Dye-Sensitized Solar Cells 191 4.15.1 Poly(ethylene oxide) Matrix 191 4.15.2 Poly(methyl methacrylate) Matrix 192 4.15.3 Poly(propylene carbonate) Matrix 193 4.15.4 Sulfobetaine-Based Polymer 194 4.15.5 Titanium Dioxide-Based Cells 194 4.15.6 Quasi-Solid-State Gel Electrolytes 195 4.15.7 Bio-based Electrolytes 196 4.16 Direct Arylation Polymerization 198 4.17 Polymer-Fullerene Solar Cells 200 4.18 Functionalized Poly(thiophene) 201 4.19 Fullerene 202 4.20 Transparent Window Materials 204 4.21 Solar Cell Encapsulants 204 4.22 Anti-reflection Coating 205 4.23 Fullerene-Free Polymer Solar Cells 207 4.23.1 PBDB-T Fullerene-Free Solar Cells 208 4.23.2 P3HT-Based Fullerene-Free Solar Cells 208 4.23.3 Poly(thiophene)-Based Fullerene-Free Solar Cells 210 4.23.4 Trialkylsilyl Substituted 2D-Conjugated Polymer 211 4.23.5 Electron Acceptor Dimer 213 4.23.6 Wide Bandgap Polymer Donor 215 4.23.7 Spirobifluorene- and Diketopyrrolopyrrole-Based Nonfullerene Acceptor 216 4.23.8 Selenophene-Containing Fused-Ring Acceptor 217 4.23.9 Rhodanine Flanked Nonfullerene Acceptor 219 4.23.10 Indacenodithiopheno-indacenodithiophene 220 4.23.11 DTBTF with Thiobarbituric Acid 221 4.23.12 2-Vinyl-4,5-dicyanoimidazole 221 4.23.13 Thiophene-Based Polymers 222 References 227 5 Rechargeable Batteries 239 5.1 Aluminium Batteries 239 5.2 Zinc Batteries 241 5.2.1 Zinc-Poly(aniline) Batteries 241 5.2.2 Zinc Deposition and Stripping 242 5.2.3 Zinc-Air Batteries 243 5.3 Sodium Batteries 245 5.3.1 Organosodium Polymer Batteries 245 5.3.2 Sodium Nickel Batteries 247 5.4 Magnesium Batteries 248 5.4.1 Coordination Polymer Cathode 248 5.4.2 Nanocomposite Polymer Electrolyte 248 5.4.3 Solid Polymer Electrolytes 249 5.4.4 Anthraquinone-Based Polymer as Cathode 250 5.5 Lithium Batteries 251 5.5.1 Polymeric Binders 251 5.5.2 Nano Bioceramic Filler 253 5.5.3 Polymer Binder-Free Anode 254 5.5.4 Overcharge Protection 255 5.5.5 Electrode Protection 256 5.5.6 Calix[4]quinone 257 5.5.7 Copolymer of Methyl methacrylate and Ethylene oxide Electrolyte 257 5.5.8 Poly(vinylene carbonate) Electrolyte 258 5.5.9 Graphene/Carbon Nanotube Foam Conjugated Polymers 259 5.5.10 Fibrous Nanocomposite Polymer Electrolyte 259 5.5.11 Nanocomposite Fluoro Polymer Electrolyte 260 5.5.12 Solid Polymer Electrolytes for Lithium Battery Applications 261 5.5.13 Porous Polymer Electrolytes 264 5.5.14 Poly(anthraquinonyl sulfide) Cathode Material 265 5.5.15 Poly(aniline) Cathode Material 268 5.5.16 Polymer Gel Electrolytes 268 5.5.17 Lithium-Oxygen Batteries 272 5.5.18 Lithium-Sulfur Batteries 272 5.5.19 Lithium-Ion Poly(sulfide) Batteries 275 5.5.20 Lithium-Carbon Dioxide Batteries 276 5.5.21 Lithium Titanate Spinel 276 5.5.22 Selenized Poly(acrylonitrile) Electrodes 277 5.5.23 Flexible Rechargeable Thin-Film Batteries 277 References 278 Index 267 Acronyms 283 Chemicals 285 General Index 290

Read more less

Book SynopsisNew edition of the popular textbook, comprehensively updated throughout and now includes a new dedicated website for gas dynamic calculations The thoroughly revised and updated third edition of Fundamentals of Gas Dynamics maintains the focus on gas flows below hypersonic. This targeted approach provides a cohesive and rigorous examination of most practical engineering problems in this gas dynamics flow regime. The conventional one-dimensional flow approach together with the role of temperature-entropy diagrams are highlighted throughout. The authorsnoted experts in the fieldinclude a modern computational aid, illustrative charts and tables, and myriad examples of varying degrees of difficulty to aid in the understanding of the material presented. The updated edition of Fundamentals of Gas Dynamics includes new sections on the shock tube, the aerospike nozzle, and the gas dynamic laser. The book contains all equations, tables, and charts necessary Table of ContentsPreface to Third Edition xi Preface to Second Edition xiii To the Student xv About the Companion Website xix 1 Definitions and Fundamental Principles 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Units and Notation 2 1.3 Why we use Nondimensional Quantities 8 1.4 Thermodynamic Concepts for Control Mass Analysis 12 Review Questions 21 Review Problems 24 2 Control Volume Analysis—Part I 27 2.1 Introduction 27 2.2 Objectives 28 2.3 Flow Dimensionality and Average Velocity 28 2.4 Transformation of a Material Derivative to a Control Volume Approach 31 2.5 Conservation of Mass 37 2.6 Conservation of Energy 39 2.7 Summary 48 Problems 50 Check Test 53 3 Control Volume Analysis—Part II 55 3.1 Introduction 55 3.2 Objectives 55 3.3 Comments on Entropy 56 3.4 Pressure-Energy Equation 58 3.5 The Stagnation Concept 60 3.6 Stagnation Pressure-Energy Equation 64 3.7 Consequences of Constant Density 66 3.8 Momentum Equation 71 3.9 Summary 80 Problems 82 Check Test 88 4 Introduction to Compressible Flow 91 4.1 Introduction 91 4.2 Objectives 92 4.3 Sonic Speed and Mach Number 92 4.4 Wave Propagation 98 4.5 Equations for Perfect Gases in Terms of Mach Number 100 4.6 h–s and T–s Diagrams 107 4.7 Summary 108 Problems 109 Check Test 112 5 Varying-Area Adiabatic Flow 115 5.1 Introduction 115 5.2 Objectives 116 5.3 General Fluid with No Losses 117 5.4 Perfect Gases with Losses 123 5.5 The ∗ Reference Concept 127 5.6 Isentropic Table 129 5.7 Nozzle Operation 136 5.8 Nozzle Performance 144 5.9 Diffuser Performance 146 5.10 When γ is not Equal to 1.4 148 5.11 Beyond the Tables 148 5.12 Summary 152 Problems 153 Check Test 157 6 Standing Normal Shocks 159 6.1 Introduction 159 6.2 Objectives 160 6.3 Shock Analysis: General Fluid 160 6.4 Working Equations for Perfect Gases 163 6.5 Normal-Shock Table 167 6.6 Shocks in Nozzles 172 6.7 Supersonic Wind Tunnel Operation 178 6.8 When γ is not Equal to 1.4 180 6.9 (Optional) Beyond the Tables 182 6.10 Summary 183 Problems 184 Check Test 188 7 Moving and Oblique Shocks 191 7.1 Introduction 191 7.2 Objectives 192 7.3 Normal Velocity Superposition: Moving Normal Shocks 192 7.4 Tangential Velocity Superposition: Oblique Shocks 196 7.5 Oblique-Shock Analysis: Perfect Gas 202 7.6 Oblique-Shock Table and Charts 204 7.7 Boundary Condition of Flow Direction 206 7.8 Boundary Condition of Pressure Equilibrium 210 7.9 Conical Shocks 213 7.10 The Shock Tube 216 7.11 (Optional) Beyond the Tables 219 7.12 Summary 221 Problems 222 Check Test 227 8 Prandtl–Meyer Flow 229 8.1 Introduction 229 8.2 Objectives 229 8.3 Argument for Isentropic Turning Flow 230 8.4 Analysis of Prandtl–Meyer Flow 237 8.5 Prandtl–Meyer Function 241 8.6 Overexpanded and Underexpanded Nozzles 244 8.7 Supersonic Airfoils 249 8.8 Aerospike Nozzle 254 8.9 When γ is not Equal to 1.4 256 8.10 (Optional) Beyond the Tables 257 8.11 Summary 258 Problems 259 Check Test 264 9 Fanno Flow 267 9.1 Introduction 267 9.2 Objectives 267 9.3 Analysis for a General Fluid 268 9.4 Working Equations for Perfect Gases 275 9.5 Reference State and Fanno Table 280 9.6 Applications 285 9.7 Correlation with Shocks 290 9.8 Friction Choking 292 9.9 (Optional) How the Left-Hand-Side of Equation (9.40) Arose 296 9.10 When γ is not Equal to 1.4 296 9.11 (Optional) Beyond the Tables 297 9.12 Summary 298 Problems 300 Check Test 305 10 Rayleigh Flow 307 10.1 Introduction 307 10.2 Objectives 308 10.3 Analysis for a General Fluid 309 10.4 Working Equations for Perfect Gases 319 10.5 Reference State and the Rayleigh Table 323 10.6 Applications 326 10.7 Correlation with Shocks 330 10.8 Thermal Choking Due to Heating 334 10.9 When γ is not Equal to 1.4 338 10.10 (Optional) Beyond the Tables 338 10.11 Summary 339 Problems 341 Check Test 347 11 Real Gas Effects 349 11.1 Introduction 349 11.2 Objectives 350 11.3 What’s Really Going on 351 11.4 Semiperfect Gas Behavior and Development of the Gas Tables 354 11.5 Real Gas Behavior, Equations of State and, Compressibility Factors 361 11.6 Variable-γ Variable-Area Flows 365 11.7 Variable-γ Constant-Area Flows 373 11.8 High-Energy Gas Lasers 375 11.9 Summary 377 Problems 380 Check Test 381 12 Propulsion Systems 383 12.1 Introduction 383 12.2 Objectives 384 12.3 Brayton Cycle 384 12.4 Propulsion Engines 394 12.5 General Performance Parameters, Thrust, Power, and Efficiency 412 12.6 Air-Breathing Propulsion Systems Performance Parameters 419 12.7 Air-Breathing Propulsion Systems Incorporating Real Gas Effects 424 12.8 Rocket Propulsion Systems Performance Parameters 426 12.9 Supersonic Diffusers 431 12.10 Summary 434 Problems 435 Check Test 439 Appendices A Summary of the English Engineering (EE) System of Units 441 B Summary of the International System (SI) of Units 445 C Friction-Factor Chart 449 D Oblique-Shock Charts (γ = 1.4) (Two-Dimensional) 451 E Conical-Shock Charts (γ = 1.4) (Three-Dimensional) 455 F Generalized Compressibility Factor Chart 459 G Isentropic Flow Parameters (γ = 1.4) (Including Prandtl–Meyer Function) 461 H Normal-Shock Parameters (γ = 1.4) 473 I Fanno Flow Parameters (γ = 1.4) 483 J Rayleigh Flow Parameters (γ = 1.4) 495 K Properties of Air at Low Pressure 507 L Specific Heats of Air at Low Pressures 517 Selected References 519 Answers to Problems 523 Index 535

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis volume describes frontiers in social-behavioral modeling for contexts as diverse as national security, health, and on-line social gaming. Recent scientific and technological advances have created exciting opportunities for such improvements. However, the book also identifies crucial scientific, ethical, and cultural challenges to be met if social-behavioral modeling is to achieve its potential. Doing so will require new methods, data sources, and technology. The volume discusses these, including those needed to achieve and maintain high standards of ethics and privacy. The result should be a new generation of modeling that willadvance science and, separately, aid decision-making on major social and security-related subjects despite the myriad uncertainties and complexities of social phenomena. Intended to be relatively comprehensivein scope, the volume balances theory-driven, data-driven, and hybrid approaches. The latter may be rapidly iterative, as when artificial-inteTable of ContentsForeword xxvii List of Contributors xxxi About the Editors xli About the Companion Website xliii Part I Introduction and Agenda 1 1 Understanding and Improving the Human Condition: A Vision of the Future for Social-Behavioral Modeling 3Jonathan Pfautz, Paul K. Davis, and Angela O’Mahony Challenges 5 About This Book 10 References 13 2 Improving Social-Behavioral Modeling 15Paul K. Davis and Angela O’Mahony Aspirations 15 Classes of Challenge 17 Inherent Challenges 17 Selected Specific Issues and the Need for Changed Practices 20 Strategy for Moving Ahead 32 Social-Behavioral Laboratories 39 Conclusions 41 Acknowledgments 42 References 42 3 Ethical and Privacy Issues in Social-Behavioral Research 49Rebecca Balebako, Angela O’Mahony, Paul K. Davis, and Osonde Osoba Improved Notice and Choice 50 Usable and Accurate Access Control 52 Anonymization 53 Avoiding Harms by Validating Algorithms and Auditing Use 55 Challenge and Redress 56 Deterrence of Abuse 57 And Finally Thinking Bigger About What Is Possible 58 References 59 Part II Foundations of Social-Behavioral Science 63 4 Building on Social Science: Theoretic Foundations for Modelers 65Benjamin Nyblade, Angela O’Mahony, and Katharine Sieck Background 65 Atomistic Theories of Individual Behavior 66 Social Theories of Individual Behavior 75 Theories of Interaction 80 From Theory to Data and Data to Models 88 Building Models Based on Social Scientific Theories 92 Acknowledgments 94 References 94 5 How Big and How Certain? A New Approach to Defining Levels of Analysis for Modeling Social Science Topics 101Matthew E. Brashears Introduction 101 Traditional Conceptions of Levels of Analysis 102 Incompleteness of Levels of Analysis 104 Constancy as the Missing Piece 107 Putting It Together 111 Implications for Modeling 113 Conclusions 116 Acknowledgments 116 References 116 6 Toward Generative Narrative Models of the Course and Resolution of Conflict 121Steven R. Corman, Scott W. Ruston, and Hanghang Tong Limitations of Current Conceptualizations of Narrative 122 A Generative Modeling Framework 125 Application to a Simple Narrative 126 Real-World Applications 130 Challenges and Future Research 133 Conclusion 135 Acknowledgment 137 Locations, Events, Actions, Participants, and Things in the Three Little Pigs 137 Edges in the Three Little Pigs Graph 139 References 142 7 A Neural Network Model of Motivated Decision-Making in Everyday Social Behavior 145Stephen J. Read and Lynn C. Miller Introduction 145 Overview 146 Theoretical Background 147 Neural Network Implementation 151 Conclusion 159 References 160 8 Dealing with Culture as Inherited Information 163Luke J. Matthews Galton’s Problem as a Core Feature of Cultural Theory 163 How to Correct for Treelike Inheritance of Traits Across Groups 167 Dealing with Non independence in Less Treelike Network Structures 173 Future Directions for Formal Modeling of Culture 178 Acknowledgments 181 References 181 9 Social Media, Global Connections, and Information Environments: Building Complex Understandings of Multi-Actor Interactions 187Gene Cowherd and Daniel Lende A New Setting of Hyperconnectivity 187 The Information Environment 188 Social Media in the Information Environment 189 Integrative Approaches to Understanding Human Behavior 190 The Ethnographic Examples 192 Conclusion 202 References 204 10 Using Neuroimaging to Predict Behavior: An Overview with a Focus on the Moderating Role of Sociocultural Context 205Steven H. Tompson, Emily B. Falk, Danielle S. Bassett, and Jean M. Vettel Introduction 205 The Brain-as-Predictor Approach 206 Predicting Individual Behaviors 208 Interpreting Associations Between Brain Activation and Behavior 210 Predicting Aggregate Out-of-Sample Group Outcomes 211 Predicting Social Interactions and Peer Influence 214 Sociocultural Context 215 Future Directions 219 Conclusion 221 References 222 11 Social Models from Non-Human Systems 231Theodore P. Pavlic Emergent Patterns in Groups of Behaviorally Flexible Individuals 232 Model Systems for Understanding Group Competition 239 Information Dynamics in Tightly Integrated Groups 246 Conclusions 254 Acknowledgments 255 References 255 12 Moving Social-Behavioral Modeling Forward: Insights from Social Scientists 263Matthew Brashears, Melvin Konner, Christian Madsbjerg, Laura McNamara, and Katharine Sieck Why Do People Do What They Do? 264 Everything Old Is New Again 264 Behavior Is Social, Not Just Complex 267 What is at Stake? 270 Sensemaking 272 Final Thoughts 275 References 276 Part III Informing Models with Theory and Data 279 13 Integrating Computational Modeling and Experiments: Toward a More Unified Theory of Social Influence 281Michael Gabbay Introduction 281 Social Influence Research 283 Opinion Network Modeling 284 Integrated Empirical and Computational Investigation of Group Polarization 286 Integrated Approach 299 Conclusion 305 Acknowledgments 307 References 308 14 Combining Data-Driven and Theory-Driven Models for Causality Analysis in Sociocultural Systems 311Amy Sliva, Scott Neal Reilly, David Blumstein, and Glenn Pierce Introduction 311 Understanding Causality 312 Ensembles of Causal Models 317 Case Studies: Integrating Data-Driven and Theory-Driven Ensembles 321 Conclusions 332 References 333 15 Theory-Interpretable, Data-Driven Agent-Based Modeling 337William Rand The Beauty and Challenge of Big Data 337 A Proposed Unifying Principle for Big Data and Social Science 340 Data-Driven Agent-Based Modeling 342 Conclusion and the Vision 353 Acknowledgments 354 References 355 16 Bringing the Real World into the Experimental Lab: Technology-Enabling Transformative Designs 359Lynn C. Miller, Liyuan Wang, David C. Jeong, and Traci K. Gillig Understanding, Predicting, and Changing Behavior 359 Social Domains of Interest 360 The SOLVE Approach 365 Experimental Designs for Real-World Simulations 368 Creating Representative Designs for Virtual Games 371 Applications in Three Domains of Interest 375 Conclusions 376 References 380 17 Online Games for Studying Human Behavior 387Kiran Lakkaraju, Laura Epifanovskaya, Mallory Stites, Josh Letchford, Jason Reinhardt, and Jon Whetzel Introduction 387 Online Games and Massively Multiplayer Online Games for Research 388 War Games and Data Gathering for Nuclear Deterrence Policy 390 MMOG Data to Test International Relations Theory 393 Analysis and Results 397 Games as Experiments: The Future of Research 403 Final Discussion 405 Acknowledgments 405 References 405 18 Using Sociocultural Data from Online Gaming and Game Communities 407Sean Guarino, Leonard Eusebi, Bethany Bracken, and Michael Jenkins Introduction 407 Characterizing Social Behavior in Gaming 409 Game-Based Data Sources 412 Case Studies of SBE Research in Game Environments 422 Conclusions and Future Recommendations 437 Acknowledgments 438 References 438 19 An Artificial Intelligence/Machine Learning Perspective on Social Simulation: New Data and New Challenges 443Osonde Osoba and Paul K. Davis Objectives and Background 443 Relevant Advances 443 Data and Theory for Behavioral Modeling and Simulation 454 Conclusion and Highlights 470 Acknowledgments 472 References 472 20 Social Media Signal Processing 477Prasanna Giridhar and Tarek Abdelzaher Social Media as a Signal Modality 477 Interdisciplinary Foundations: Sensors, Information, and Optimal Estimation 479 Event Detection and Demultiplexing on the Social Channel 481 Conclusions 492 Acknowledgment 492 References 492 21 Evaluation and Validation Approaches for Simulation of Social Behavior: Challenges and Opportunities 495Emily Saldanha, Leslie M. Blaha, Arun V. Sathanur, Nathan Hodas, Svitlana Volkova, and Mark Greaves Overview 495 Simulation Validation 498 Simulation Evaluation: Current Practices 499 Measurements, Metrics, and Their Limitations 500 Proposed Evaluation Approach 507 Conclusions 515 References 515 Part IV Innovations in Modeling 521 22 The Agent-Based Model Canvas: A Modeling Lingua Franca for Computational Social Science 523Ivan Garibay, Chathika Gunaratne, Niloofar Yousefi, and Steve Scheinert Introduction 523 The Language Gap 527 The Agent-Based Model Canvas 530 Conclusion 540 References 541 23 Representing Socio-Behavioral Understanding with Models 545Andreas Tolk and Christopher G. Glazner Introduction 545 Philosophical Foundations 546 The Way Forward 562 Acknowledgment 563 Disclaimer 563 References 564 24 Toward Self-Aware Models as Cognitive Adaptive Instruments for Social and Behavioral Modeling 569Levent Yilmaz Introduction 569 Perspective and Challenges 571 A Generic Architecture for Models as Cognitive Autonomous Agents 575 The Mediation Process 578 Coherence-Driven Cognitive Model of Mediation 581 Conclusions 584 References 585 25 Causal Modeling with Feedback Fuzzy Cognitive Maps 587Osonde Osoba and Bart Kosko Introduction 587 Overview of Fuzzy Cognitive Maps for Causal Modeling 588 Combining Causal Knowledge: Averaging Edge Matrices 592 Learning FCM Causal Edges 594 FCM Example: Public Support for Insurgency and Terrorism 597 US–China Relations: An FCM of Allison’s Thucydides Trap 603 Conclusion 611 References 612 26 Simulation Analytics for Social and Behavioral Modeling 617Samarth Swarup, Achla Marathe, Madhav V. Marathe, and Christopher L. Barrett Introduction 617 What Are Behaviors? 619 Simulation Analytics for Social and Behavioral Modeling 624 Conclusion 628 Acknowledgments 630 References 630 27 Using Agent-Based Models to Understand Health-Related Social Norms 633Gita Sukthankar and Rahmatollah Beheshti Introduction 633 Related Work 634 Lightweight Normative Architecture (LNA) 634 Cognitive Social Learners (CSL) Architecture 635 Smoking Model 639 Agent-Based Model 641 Data 645 Experiments 646 Conclusion 652 Acknowledgments 652 References 652 28 Lessons from a Project on Agent-Based Modeling 655Mirsad Hadzikadic and Joseph Whitmeyer Introduction 655 ACSES 656 Verification and Validation 661 Self-Organization and Emergence 665 Trust 668 Summary 669 References 670 29 Modeling Social and Spatial Behavior in Built Environments: Current Methods and Future Directions 673Davide Schaumann and Mubbasir Kapadia Introduction 673 Simulating Human Behavior – A Review 675 Modeling Social and Spatial Behavior with MAS 678 Discussion and Future Directions 685 Acknowledgments 687 References 687 30 Multi-Scale Resolution of Human Social Systems: A Synergistic Paradigm for Simulating Minds and Society 697Mark G. Orr Introduction 697 The Reciprocal Constraints Paradigm 699 Discussion 706 Acknowledgments 708 References 708 31 Multi-formalism Modeling of Complex Social-Behavioral Systems 711Marco Gribaudo, Mauro Iacono, and Alexander H. Levis Prologue 711 Introduction 713 On Multi-formalism 718 Issues in Multi-formalism Modeling and Use 719 Issues in Multi-formalism Modeling and Simulation 734 Conclusions 736 Epilogue 736 References 737 32 Social-Behavioral Simulation: Key Challenges 741Kathleen M. Carley Introduction 741 Key Communication Challenges 742 Key Scientific Challenges 743 Toward a New Science of Validation 748 Conclusion 749 References 750 33 Panel Discussion:Moving Social-Behavioral Modeling Forward 753Angela O’Mahony, Paul K. Davis, Scott Appling, Matthew E. Brashears, Erica Briscoe, Kathleen M. Carley, Joshua M. Epstein, Luke J. Matthews, Theodore P. Pavlic, William Rand, Scott Neal Reilly, William B. Rouse, Samarth Swarup, Andreas Tolk, Raffaele Vardavas, and Levent Yilmaz Simulation and Emergence 754 Relating Models Across Levels 765 Going Beyond Rational Actors 776 References 784 Part V Models for Decision-Makers 789 34 Human-Centered Design of Model-Based Decision Support for Policy and Investment Decisions 791William B. Rouse Introduction 791 Modeler as User 792 Modeler as Advisor 792 Modeler as Facilitator 793 Modeler as Integrator 797 Modeler as Explorer 799 Validating Models 800 Modeling Lessons Learned 801 Observations on Problem-Solving 804 Conclusions 806 References 807 35 A Complex Systems Approach for Understanding the Effect of Policy and Management Interventions on Health System Performance 809Jason Thompson, Rod McClure, and Andrea de Silva Introduction 809 Understanding Health System Performance 811 Method 813 Model Narrative 815 Policy Scenario Simulation 817 Results 817 Discussion 824 Conclusions 826 References 827 36 Modeling Information and Gray Zone Operations 833Corey Lofdahl Introduction 833 The Technological Transformation of War: Counterintuitive Consequences 835 Modeling Information Operations: Representing Complexity 838 Modeling Gray Zone Operations: Extending Analytic Capability 842 Conclusion 845 References 847 37 Homo Narratus (The Storytelling Species): The Challenge (and Importance) of Modeling Narrative in Human Understanding 849Christopher Paul The Challenge 849 What Are Narratives? 850 What Is Important About Narratives? 851 What Can Commands Try to Accomplish with Narratives in Support of Operations? 856 Moving Forward in Fighting Against, with, and Through Narrative in Support of Operations 857 Conclusion: Seek Modeling and Simulation Improvements That Will Enable Training and Experience with Narrative 861 References 862 38 Aligning Behavior with Desired Outcomes: Lessons for Government Policy from the Marketing World 865Katharine Sieck Technique 1: Identify the Human Problem 867 Technique 2: Rethinking Quantitative Data 869 Technique 3: Rethinking Qualitative Research 876 Summary 882 References 882 39 Future Social Science That Matters for Statecraft 885Kent C. Myers Perspective 885 Recent Observations 885 Interactions with the Intelligence Community 887 Phronetic Social Science 888 Cognitive Domain 891 Reflexive Processes 893 Conclusion 895 References 896 40 Lessons on Decision Aiding for Social-Behavioral Modeling 899Paul K. Davis Strategic Planning Is Not About Simply Predicting and Acting 899 Characteristics Needed for Good Decision Aiding 901 Implications for Social-Behavioral Modeling 918 Acknowledgments 921 References 923 Index 927

Read more less

Book SynopsisA groundbreaking book on the recent advances in chemical finishing, innovative fabrication strategies frequently adopted for the mechanical finishing of textiles, as well as the environmental issues in textile sectors Advanced materials are undoubtedly becoming very popular as substitutes for traditional materials in the textile engineering field. Advanced textile engineering materials are giving way to innovative textile materials with novel functions and are widely perceived as offering huge potential in a wide range of applications such as healthcare, defense, personal protective equipment, textile antennas, garments for motion capture, and sensors, etc. Advanced Engineering Textile Materials contains 13 chapters written by high profile contributors with many years of experience in textile technology, and cover fundamental and advanced approaches associated with the design and development of textile implants, conductive textiles, 3D textiles, smart-stimuli textiles, antiballisticTable of ContentsPart 1: Chemical Aspects 1 1. Application of Stimuli-Sensitive Materials in Smart Textiles 3Ali Akbar Merati 1.1. Introduction 3 1.2. Phase Change Materials 4 1.3. Shape Memory Materials 11 1.4. Chromic Materials 13 1.5. Conjugated Polymers 14 1.6. Conductive Polymers 16 1.7. Piezoelectricity 17 1.8. Optical Fibers 18 1.9. Hydrogels 20 1.10. Smart Textiles and Nanotechnology 22 1.11. Future Trends 23 References 23 2. Functional Finishing of Textile Materials and Its Psychological Aspects 31Muhammad Mohsin and Qurat Ul Ain Malik 2.1. Introduction 31 2.2. Softeners 34 2.3. Oil- and Water-Repellent Finishes 36 2.4. Fire Retardants 39 2.5. Easy Care Finishing 43 2.6. Psychological Aspect of Functional Textiles 47 2.7. Challenges and Future Directions 50 2.8. Conclusion 50 References 51 3. Recent Advances in Protective Textile Materials 55Santanu Basak, Animesh Laha, Mahadev Bar, and Rupayan Roy 3.1. Introduction 56 3.2. Application of the Protective Textile in the Defense Arena 65 3.3. Recent Advancements in Engineering to Create UV-Protective Textiles 70 3.4. Insect-Repellent Textiles 72 3.5. Microorganism Protective Textile Materials 75 3.6. Camouflage Application as Protective Textile 78 3.7. Challenges and Future Directions 79 References 80 4. Antibacterial Aspects of Nanomaterials in Textiles: From Origin to Release 87Zahra Khodaparast, Akram Jahanshahi, and Mohammadreza Khalaj 4.1. Introduction 87 4.2. Nanomaterial Properties 89 4.3. Release 103 4.4. Conclusion 116 Acknowledgement 117 References 117 5. Modification of Wool and Cotton by UV Irradiation for Dyeing and Finishing Processes 125Franco Ferrero, Gianluca Migliavacca, and Monica Periolatto 5.1. Introduction 126 5.2. Interaction of UV Radiation with Textile Fibers 128 5.3. Interaction of UV Radiation with Naturally Present Chromophores of Different Fibers 135 5.4. UV Irradiation on Wool 144 5.5. UV Irradiation on Cotton 162 5.6. Conclusions 168 5.7. Future Perspectives 169 References 170 6. Electroconductive Textiles 177Arobindo Chatterjee and Subhankar Maity 6.1. Introduction 177 6.2. Electrical Conductivity 179 6.3. The Source of Conductivity in Conducting Polymers 182 6.4. Electroconductive Textiles Based on Metals 183 6.5. Electroconductive Textiles Based on Graphene 183 6.6. Electroconductive Textile Based on PPy 184 6.7. Conductive Polymer-Based Textiles 190 6.8. Effect of Various Yarns and Fabrics as Substrate 200 6.9. Applications of Electroconductive Textiles 202 6.10. Durability Properties of Conductive Polymer-Based Textiles 231 6.11. Future Scope and Challenges 239 6.12. Conclusions 239 References 240 7. Coated or Laminated Textiles for Aerostat and Stratospheric Airship 257Bapan Adak and Mangala Joshi 7.1. Introduction 258 7.2. Global Competitors for Making Aerostat/Airship at Present 260 7.3. Working Atmosphere of Aerostats and High Altitude Airship (HAA) 260 7.4. Materials Used in LTA Envelopes 261 7.5. Case Studies on Different Coated or Laminated LTA Envelopes 272 7.6. Advanced Polymer Nanocomposites as Potential Material for LTA Envelopes 274 7.7. Models for Predicting the Performance and Service Life of Aerostats/Airships 280 7.8. Challenges and Future Scopes 281 7.9. Conclusion 282 References 283 8. Woolen Carpet Industry: Environmental Impact and Recent Remediation Approaches 289Anu Mishra 8.1. Introduction 289 8.2. Flowchart of the Manufacture of a Woolen Carpet, Its Use and After-Use Disposal 290 8.3. Wool Fiber Production and Related Environmental Issues 290 8.4. Wool Fiber Cleaning and Related Environmental Issues 295 8.5. Woolen Carpet Yarn Manufacturing and Related Environmental Issues 299 8.6. Bleaching of Woolen Yarn and Related Environmental Issues 302 8.7. Dyeing of Woolen Carpet Yarn and Related Environmental Issues 303 8.8. Manufacture of Woolen Carpets and Related Environmental Issues 308 8.9. Washing of Carpets and Related Environmental Issues 311 8.10. Environmental Issues Related to the Usage of Woolen Carpets 314 8.11. Environmental Issues Related to the Disposal of Used Woolen Carpets 315 8.12. Some Remediation Approaches to Combat Environmental Issues of Wool Carpet Industry 315 8.13. Conclusion 324 References 324 9. Intensification of Textile Wastewater Treatment Processes 329Mahmood Reza Rahimi and Soleiman Mosleh 9.1. Introduction 330 9.2. AOP Techniques 333 9.3. Process Intensification 343 9.4. Equipment and Processes 347 9.5. Catalyst Design and Modification 354 9.6. Economic Evaluation/Justification of AOPs 357 9.7. Industrial and Large-Scale Applications 366 9.8. Application of Nanostructures in Wastewater Treatment 367 9.9. Challenges and Future Directions 370 9.10. Conclusion 371 References 371 10. Visible-Light-Induced Photocatalytic Degradation of Textile Dyes over Plasmonic Silver-Modified TiO2 389Rashmi Acharya, Brundabana Naik, and K. M. Parida 10.1. Introduction 390 10.2. Basic Principle of Photocatalysis 391 10.3. TiO2 as a Versatile Photocatalyst 392 10.4. Silver (Ag)-Modified TiO2 (Ag-TiO2) as Visible-Light-Induced Photocatalyst 393 10.5. Ag-Modified TiO2 with Non-Metal Doping 404 10.6. Ag-TiO2 with Other Plasmonic Metals 408 10.7. Conclusion 410 References Part 2: Mechanical Aspects 419 11. Application of Textile Materials in Composites 421Swati Sharma, Indu Chauhan, and Bhupendra Singh Butola 11.1. Introduction 421 11.2. Essential Properties of Fibers for Composite Applications 427 11.3. Textile Fibers Used for Composite Applications 432 11.4. Surface Modification of Fibers 443 11.5. Manufacturing of Textile Composite Materials 444 11.6. Application of Textile Composites in Various Industries 451 11.7. Conclusions 454 References 455 12. Emerging Trends in Three-Dimensional Woven Preforms for Composite Reinforcements 463R. N. Manjunath and B. K. Behera 12.1. Introduction 463 12.2. Three-Dimensional Fabrics 466 13. Evolution of Soft Body Armor 499Sanchi Arora and Aranya Ghosh 13.1. Introduction 499 13.2. Constituents of Soft Body Armor 501 13.3Performance Evaluation of Materials 526 13.4. Advancements in Soft Body Armor Technology 532 13.5. Conclusion 540 References 541 Index 553

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides a Comprehensive Introduction to Aircraft Design with an Industrial Approach This book introduces readers to aircraft design, placing great emphasis on industrial practice. It includes worked out design examples for several different classes of aircraft, including Learjet 45, Tucano Turboprop Trainer, BAe Hawk and Airbus A320. It considers performance substantiation and compliance to certification requirements and market specifications of take-off/landing field lengths, initial climb/high speed cruise, turning capability and payload/range. Military requirements are discussed, covering some aspects of combat, as is operating cost estimation methodology, safety considerations, environmental issues, flight deck layout, avionics and more general aircraft systems. The book also includes a chapter on electric aircraft design along with a full range of industry standard aircraft sizing analyses. Split into two parts, Conceptual Aircraft Design: An IndustrialTable of ContentsSeries Preface xxxvii Preface xxxix Individual Acknowledgements By Ajoy Kumar Kundu xli By Mark A. Price xlv By David Riordan xlvii List of Symbols and Abbreviations xlix Road Map of the Book lvii Part I Prerequisites 1 1 Introduction 3 1.1 Overview 3 1.2 Brief Historical Background 4 1.3 Aircraft Evolution 10 1.4 Current Aircraft Design Trends for both Civil and Military Aircraft (the 1980s Onwards) 13 1.5 Future Trends 16 1.6 Forces and Drivers 23 1.7 Airworthiness Requirements 23 1.8 Current Aircraft Performance Analyses Levels 25 1.9 Aircraft Classification 26 1.10 Topics of Current Research Interest Related to Aircraft Design (Supersonic/Subsonic) 27 1.11 Cost Implications 30 1.12 The Classroom Learning Process 30 1.13 Units and Dimensions 34 1.14 Use of Semi-Empirical Relations and Datasheets 34 1.15 The Atmosphere 36 References 45 2 Aircraft Familiarity, Aircraft Design Process, Market Study 46 2.1 Overview 46 2.2 Introduction 47 2.3 Aircraft Familiarisation 48 2.4 Typical Aircraft Design Process 53 2.5 Market Survey – Project Identification 53 2.6 Four Phases of Aircraft Design 57 2.7 Typical Task Breakdown in Each Phase 62 2.8 Aircraft Specifications forThree Civil Aircraft Case Studies 67 2.9 MilitaryMarket – Some TypicalMilitary Aircraft Design Specifications 70 2.10 Airworthiness Requirements 73 2.11 Coursework Procedures – Market Survey 75 References 76 3 Aerodynamic Fundamentals, Definitions and Aerofoils 78 3.1 Overview 78 3.2 Introduction 79 3.3 Airflow Behaviour – Laminar and Turbulent 80 3.4 Flow Past an Aerofoil 84 3.5 Generation of Lift 85 3.6 Aircraft Motion, Forces and Moments 86 3.7 Definitions of Aerodynamic Parameters 91 3.8 Aerofoils 91 3.9 Reynolds Number and Surface Condition Effects on Aerofoils – Using NACA Aerofoil Test Data 101 3.10 Centre of Pressure and Aerodynamic Centre 105 3.11 Types of Stall 109 3.12 High-Lift Devices 110 3.13 Flow Regimes 112 3.14 Summary 117 3.15 Aerofoil Design and Manufacture 123 3.16 Aircraft Centre of Gravity, Centre of Pressure and Neutral Point 125 References 125 4 Wings 127 4.1 Overview 127 4.2 Introduction 128 4.3 GenericWing Planform Shapes 128 4.4 Wing Position Relative to Fuselage 132 4.5 Structural Considerations 136 4.6 Wing Parameter Definitions 137 4.7 Spanwise Variation of Aerofoil t/c and Incidence 139 4.8 Mean Aerodynamic Chord (MAC) 140 4.9 Wing Aerodynamics 145 4.10 Wing Load 153 4.11 Compressibility Effect:Wing Sweep 160 4.12 TransonicWings 167 4.13 SupersonicWings 167 4.14 Additional Vortex Lift – LE Suction 170 4.15 High-Lift Devices on theWing – Flaps and Slats 170 4.16 Additional Surfaces on theWing 175 4.17 The Square-Cube Law 176 4.18 Influence ofWing Area and Span on Aerodynamics 177 4.19 Summary ofWing Design 179 References 183 5 Bodies – Fuselages, Nacelle Pods, Intakes and the Associated Systems 184 5.1 Overview 184 5.2 Introduction 185 CIVIL AIRCRAFT 188 5.3 Fuselage Geometry – Civil Aircraft 188 5.4 Fuselage Closures – Civil Aircraft 189 5.5 Fuselage Fineness Ratio (FR) 192 5.6 Fuselage Cross-Sectional Geometry – Civil Aircraft 194 5.7 Fuselage Abreast Seating – Civil Aircraft 195 5.8 Cabin Seat Layout 197 5.9 Fuselage Layout 205 5.10 Fuselage Aerodynamic Considerations 206 5.11 Fuselage Pitching Moment 208 5.12 Nacelle Pod – Civil Aircraft 213 5.13 Exhaust Nozzles – Civil Aircraft 220 MILITARY AIRCRAFT 222 5.14 Fuselage Geometry – Military Aircraft 222 5.15 Pilot Cockpit/Flight Deck – Military Aircraft 224 5.16 Engine Installation – Military Aircraft 224 References 228 6 Empennage and Other Planar Surfaces 229 6.1 Overview 229 6.2 Introduction 230 6.3 Terminologies and Definitions of Empennage 231 6.4 Empennage Mount and Types 232 6.5 Different Kinds of Empennage Design 235 6.6 Empennage Tail Arm 237 6.7 Empennage Aerodynamics 240 6.8 Aircraft Control System 256 6.9 Aircraft Control Surfaces and Trim Tabs 259 6.10 Empennage Design 262 6.11 Other Planar Surfaces 264 References 267 7 Aircraft Statistics, Configuration Choices and Layout 268 7.1 Overview 268 7.2 Introduction 269 CIVIL AIRCRAFT 270 7.3 Civil Aircraft Mission (Payload Range) 270 7.4 Civil Subsonic Jet Aircraft Statistics (Sizing Parameters) 271 7.5 Internal Arrangements of Fuselage – Civil Aircraft 282 7.6 Some Interesting Aircraft Configurations – Civil Aircraft 288 7.7 Summary of Civil Aircraft Design Choices 291 MILITARY AIRCRAFT 292 7.8 Military Aircraft: Detailed Classification, Evolutionary Pattern and Mission Profile 292 7.9 Military Aircraft Mission 299 7.10 Military Aircraft Statistics (Regression Analysis) 299 7.11 Military Aircraft Component Geometries 304 7.12 Miscellaneous Comments 310 7.13 Summary of Military Aircraft Design Choices 310 References 311 Part II Aircraft Design 313 8 Configuring Aircraft – Concept Definition 315 8.1 Overview 315 8.2 Introduction 317 CIVIL AIRCRAFT 321 8.3 Prerequisites to Initiate Conceptual Design of Civil Aircraft 321 8.4 Fuselage Design 325 8.5 Wing Design 327 8.6 Empennage Design 330 8.7 Nacelle and Pylon Design 334 8.8 Undercarriage 337 8.9 Worked-Out Example: Configuring a Bizjet Class Aircraft 337 MILITARY AIRCRAFT 350 8.10 Prerequisite to Initiate Military (Combat/Trainer) Aircraft Design 350 8.11 Fuselage Design (Military – Combat/Trainer Aircraft) 354 8.12 Wing Design (Military – Combat/Trainer Aircraft) 356 8.13 Empennage Design (Military – Combat/Trainer Aircraft) 358 8.14 Engine/Intake/Nozzle (Military – Combat/Trainer Aircraft) 360 8.15 Undercarriage (Military – Combat/Trainer Aircraft) 361 8.16 Worked-Out Example – Configuring Military AJT Class Aircraft 361 8.17 Turboprop Trainer Aircraft (TPT) 374 References 383 9 Undercarriage 384 9.1 Overview 384 9.2 Introduction 385 9.3 Types of Undercarriage 387 9.4 Undercarriage Description 388 9.5 Undercarriage Nomenclature and Definitions 391 9.6 Undercarriage Retraction and Stowage 393 9.7 Undercarriage Design Drivers and Considerations 394 9.8 Tyre Friction with the Ground: Rolling and Braking Friction Coefficient 396 9.9 Load on Wheels and Shock Absorbers 397 9.10 Energy Absorbed 400 9.11 Equivalent Single Wheel Load (ESWL) 402 9.12 Runway Pavement 403 9.13 Airfield/Runway Strength and Aircraft Operating Compatibility 404 9.14 Wheels and Tyres 407 9.15 Tyre Nomenclature, Classification, Loading and Selection 411 9.16 Configuring Undercarriage Layout and Positioning 414 9.17 Worked-Out Examples 417 9.18 Discussion and Miscellaneous Considerations 426 References 427 10 Aircraft Weight and Centre of Gravity Estimation 428 10.1 Overview 428 10.2 Introduction 429 10.3 The Weight Drivers 431 10.4 Aircraft Mass (Weight) Breakdown 432 10.5 Aircraft CG and Neutral Point Positions 433 10.6 Aircraft Component Groups 436 10.7 Aircraft Component Mass Estimation 438 CIVIL AIRCRAFT 443 10.8 Mass Fraction Method – Civil Aircraft 443 10.9 Graphical Method – Civil Aircraft 445 10.10 Semi-Empirical Equation Method (Statistical) 446 10.11 Centre of Gravity Determination 455 10.12 Worked-Out Example – Bizjet Aircraft 456 MILITARY AIRCRAFT 461 10.13 Mass Fraction Method – Military Aircraft 461 10.14 Graphical Method to Predict Aircraft ComponentWeight – Military Aircraft 463 10.15 Semi-Empirical Equations Method (Statistical) – Military Aircraft 463 10.16 CG Determination – Military Aircraft 468 10.17 Classroom Example of Military AJT/CAS Aircraft Mass Estimation 468 10.18 AJT Mass Estimation and CG Location 471 10.19 Classroom Example of a Turboprop Trainer (TPT) Aircraft and COIN Variant Weight Estimation 472 10.20 Classroom Worked-Out TPT Mass Estimation and CG Location 476 10.21 Summary of Concept Definition 478 References 478 11 Aircraft Drag 479 11.1 Overview 479 11.2 Introduction 480 11.3 Parasite Drag Definition 481 11.4 Aircraft Drag Breakdown (Subsonic) 482 11.4.1 Discussion 483 11.5 Understanding Drag Polar 483 11.6 Aircraft Drag Formulation 487 11.7 Aircraft Drag Estimation Methodology (Subsonic) 488 11.8 Minimum Parasite Drag Estimation Methodology 489 11.9 Semi-Empirical Relations to Estimate Aircraft-Component Parasite Drag 491 11.10 Notes on Excrescence Drag Resulting from Surface Imperfections 500 11.11 Minimum Parasite Drag 501 11.12 ΔCDp Estimation 501 11.13 Subsonic Wave Drag 502 11.14 Total Aircraft Drag 503 11.15 Low-Speed Aircraft Drag at Takeoff and Landing 503 11.16 Propeller-Driven Aircraft Drag 508 11.17 Military Aircraft Drag 509 11.18 Supersonic Drag 509 11.19 Coursework Example – Civil Bizjet Aircraft 511 11.20 Classroom Example – Subsonic Military Aircraft (Advanced Jet Trainer – AJT) 519 11.21 Classroom Example – Turboprop Trainer (TPT) 522 11.22 Classroom Example – Supersonic Military Aircraft 527 11.23 Drag Comparison 537 11.24 Some Concluding Remarks 538 References 538 12 Aircraft Power Plant and Integration 540 12.1 Overview 540 12.2 Background 540 12.3 Definitions 543 12.4 Introduction – Air-Breathing Aircraft Engine Types 546 12.5 Simplified Representation of a Gas Turbine (Brayton/Joule) Cycle 551 12.6 Formulation/Theory – Isentropic Case (Trend Analysis) 551 12.7 Engine Integration to Aircraft – Installation Effects 556 12.8 Intake/Nozzle Design 560 12.9 Exhaust Nozzle and Thrust Reverser (TR) 563 12.10 Propeller 566 12.11 Propeller Theory 568 12.12 Propeller Performance – Use of Charts, Practical Engineering Applications 572 References 575 13 Aircraft Power Plant Performance 577 13.1 Overview 577 13.2 Introduction 578 13.3 Uninstalled Turbofan Engine Performance Data – Civil Aircraft 581 13.4 Installed Engine Performance Data of Matched Engines to Coursework Aircraft 590 13.5 Installed Turboprop Performance Data 594 13.6 Piston Engine 598 13.7 Engine Performance Grid 602 13.8 Some Turbofan Data (OPR = Overall Pressure Ratio) 606 References 607 14 Aircraft Sizing, Engine Matching and Variant Derivatives 608 14.1 Overview 608 14.2 Introduction 609 14.3 Theory 610 14.4 Coursework Exercise – Civil Aircraft Design (Bizjet) 615 14.5 Sizing Analysis – Civil Aircraft (Bizjet) 617 14.6 Coursework Exercise – Military Aircraft (AJT) 619 14.7 Sizing Analysis – Military Aircraft (AJT) 623 14.8 Aircraft Sizing Studies and Sensitivity Analyses 625 14.9 Discussion 626 References 630 15 Aircraft Performance 631 15.1 Overview 631 15.2 Introduction 632 15.3 Takeoff Performance 635 15.4 Landing Performance 642 15.5 Climb Performance 644 15.6 Descent Performance 648 15.7 Checking of the InitialMaximum Cruise Speed Capability 649 15.8 Payload-Range Capability – Derivation of Range Equations 649 15.9 In Horizontal Plane (Yaw Plane) – Sustained Coordinated Turn 651 15.10 Aircraft Performance Substantiation –Worked-Out Classroom Examples – Bizjet 653 15.11 Aircraft Performance Substantiation – Military AJT 668 15.12 Propeller-Driven Aircraft – TPT (Parabolic Drag Polar) 677 15.13 Summarised Discussion of the Design 678 References 681 16 Aircraft Cost Considerations 682 16.1 Overview 682 16.2 Introduction 683 16.3 Aircraft Cost and Operational Cost 686 16.4 Rapid Cost Modelling 690 16.5 Aircraft Direct Operating Cost (DOC) 701 16.6 Aircraft Performance Management 707 References 710 Part III Further Design Considerations 713 17 Aircraft Load 715 17.1 Overview 715 17.2 Introduction 715 17.3 Flight Manoeuvres 718 17.4 Aircraft Loads 718 17.5 Theory and Definitions 719 17.6 Limits – Load and Speeds 720 17.7 V-n Diagram 721 17.8 Gust Envelope 726 References 729 18 Stability Considerations Affecting Aircraft Design 730 18.1 Overview 730 18.2 Introduction 730 18.3 Static and Dynamic Stability 731 18.4 Theory 736 18.5 Current Statistical Trends for Horizontal and Vertical Tail Coefficients 741 18.6 Stick Force – Aircraft Control Surfaces and Trim Tabs 741 18.7 Inherent Aircraft Motions as Characteristics of Design 743 18.8 Design Considerations for Stability – Civil Aircraft 747 18.9 Military Aircraft – Non-Linear Effects 750 18.10 Active Control Technology (ACT) – Fly-by-Wire (FBW) 752 18.11 Summary of Design Considerations for Stability 754 References 755 19 Materials and Structures 756 19.1 Overview 756 19.2 Introduction 756 19.3 Function of Structure – Loading 759 19.4 Basic Definitions – Structures 761 19.5 From Structure to Material 762 19.6 Basic Definitions – Materials 763 19.7 Material Properties 765 19.8 Considerations with Respect to Design 766 19.9 Structural Configuration 776 19.10 Materials – General Considerations 784 19.11 Metals 786 19.12 Wood and Fabric 788 19.13 Composite Materials 788 19.14 Structural Configurations 793 19.15 Rules of Thumb and Concept Checks 800 19.16 Finite Element Analysis (FEA)/Finite Element Method (FEM) 804 References 805 20 Aircraft Manufacturing Considerations 806 20.1 Overview 806 20.2 Introduction 808 20.3 Design for Manufacture and Assembly (DFM/A) 808 20.4 Manufacturing Practices 809 20.5 Six-Sigma Concept 811 20.6 Tolerance Relaxation at the Wetted Surface 812 20.7 Reliability and Maintainability (R&M) 814 20.8 The Design Considerations 814 20.9 ‘Design for Customer’ (A Figure of Merit) 817 20.10 Digital Manufacturing Process Management 821 References 824 21 Miscellaneous Design Considerations 825 21.1 Overview 825 21.2 Introduction 826 21.3 History of FAA – the Role of Regulation 827 21.4 Flight Test 831 21.5 Contribution by the Ground Effect on Takeoff 832 21.6 Aircraft Environmental Issues 833 21.7 Flying in Adverse Environments 838 21.8 Military Aircraft Flying Hazards 842 21.9 End-of-Life Disposal 842 21.10 Extended Range Twin-Engine Operation (ETOP) 843 21.11 Flight and Human Physiology 843 21.12 Some Emerging Scenarios 845 References 846 22 Aircraft Systems 847 22.1 Overview 847 22.2 Introduction 848 22.3 Environmental Issues (Noise and Engine Emission) 849 22.4 Safety Issues 851 22.5 Aircraft Flight Deck (Cockpit) Layout 853 22.6 Aircraft Systems 862 22.7 Flying in Adverse Environments and Passenger Utility 874 22.8 Military Aircraft Survivability 878 References 885 23 Computational Fluid Dynamics 886 23.1 Overview 886 23.2 Introduction 887 23.3 Current Status 888 23.4 Approach Road to CFD Analyses 889 23.5 Some Case Studies 892 23.6 Hierarchy of CFD Simulation Methods 893 23.7 Summary of Discussions 896 References 897 24 Electric Aircraft 899 24.1 Overview 899 24.2 Introduction 900 24.3 Energy Storage 902 24.4 Prime Mover – Motors 905 24.5 Electric Powered Aircraft Power Train 906 24.6 Hybrid Electric Aircraft (HEA) 908 24.7 Distributed Electric Propulsion (DEP) 910 24.8 Electric Aircraft Related Theory/Analyses 911 24.9 Electric Powered Aircraft Sizing 914 24.10 Discussion 916 24.11 Worked-Out Example 918 References 919 Appendix A Conversions and Important Equations 920 Appendix B International Standard Atmosphere Table Data from Hydrostatic Equations 923 Appendix C Fundamental Equations (See Table of Contents for Symbols and Nomenclature.) 926 Appendix D Some Case Studies – Aircraft Data 932 Appendix E Aerofoil Data 948 Appendix F Wheels and Tyres 959 Index 965

Read more less

Book SynopsisRobust Control Robust Control Youla Parameterization Approach Discover efficient methods for designing robust control systems In Robust Control: Youla Parameterization Approach, accomplished engineers Dr. Farhad Assadian and Kevin R. Mallon deliver an insightful treatment of robust control system design that does not require a theoretical background in controls. The authors connect classical control theory to modern control concepts using the Youla method and offer practical examples from the automotive industry for designing control systems with the Youla method. The book demonstrates that feedback control can be elegantly designed in the frequency domain using the Youla parameterization approach. It offers deep insights into the many practical applications from utilizing this technique in both Single Input Single Output (SISO) and Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) design. Finally, the book provides an estimation technique using YoulaTable of ContentsPreface xv Acknowledgments xix Introduction xxi About the Companion Website xxix Part I Control Design Using Youla Parameterization: Single Input Single Output (SISO) 1 1 Review of the Laplace Transform 3 1.1 The Laplace Transform Concept 3 1.2 Singularity Functions 3 1.2.1 Definition of the Impulse Function 4 1.2.2 The Impulse Function and the Riemann Integral 5 1.2.3 The General Definition of Singularity Functions 5 1.2.3.1 “Graphs” of Some Singularity Functions 5 1.3 The Laplace Transform 7 1.3.1 Definition of the Laplace Transform 7 1.3.2 Laplace Transform Properties 8 1.3.3 Shifting the Laplace Transform 8 1.3.4 Laplace Transform Derivatives 10 1.3.5 Transforms of Singularity Functions 12 1.4 Inverse Laplace Transform 13 1.4.1 Inverse Laplace Transformation by Heaviside Expansion 13 1.4.1.1 Distinct Poles 13 1.4.1.2 Distinct Poles with G(s) Being Proper 13 1.4.1.3 Repeated Poles 14 1.5 The Transfer Function and the State Space Representations (State Equations) 16 1.5.1 The Transfer Function 16 1.5.2 The State Equations 16 1.5.3 Transfer Function Properties 17 1.5.4 Poles and Zeros of a Transfer Function 18 1.5.5 Physical Realizability 19 1.6 Problems 21 2 The Response of Linear, Time-Invariant Dynamic Systems 25 2.1 The Time Response of Dynamic Systems 25 2.1.1 Final Value Theorem 25 2.1.2 Initial Value Theorem 26 2.1.3 Convolution and the Laplace Transform 27 2.1.4 Transmission Blocking Response 29 2.1.5 Stability 31 2.1.6 Initial Values and Reverse Action 35 2.1.7 Final Values and Static Gain 36 2.1.8 Time Response Metrics 38 2.1.8.1 First-Order System (Single-Pole Response) 38 2.1.8.2 Second-Order System (Quadratic Factor) 39 2.1.9 The Effect of Zeros on Transient Response 41 2.1.10 The Butterworth Pattern 42 2.2 Frequency Response of Dynamic Systems 43 2.2.1 Steady-State Frequency Response of LTI systems 43 2.2.2 Frequency Response Representation 45 2.2.3 Frequency Response: The Real Pole 45 2.2.4 Frequency Response: The Real Zero 47 2.2.5 Frequency Response: The Quadratic Factor 49 2.2.6 Frequency Response: Pure Time Delay 50 2.2.7 Frequency Response: Static Gain 53 2.2.8 Frequency Response: The Composite Transfer Function 53 2.2.9 Frequency Response: Asymptote Formulas 54 2.2.10 Physical Realizability 54 2.2.11 Non-minimum Phase, All-Pass, and Blaschke Factors 55 2.3 Frequency Response Plotting 55 2.3.1 Matlab Codes for Plotting System Frequency Response 56 2.3.1.1 Bode Plot 56 2.3.1.2 Polar Plot/Nyquist Diagram 56 2.4 Problems 57 3 Feedback Principals 61 3.1 The Value of Feedback Control 62 3.1.1 The Advantages of the Closed Loop 63 3.2 Closed-Loop Transfer Functions 64 3.2.1 The Return Ratio 65 3.2.2 Closed-Loop Transfer Functions and the Return Difference 65 3.2.3 Sensitivity, Complementary Sensitivity, and the Youla Parameter 66 3.3 Well-Posedness and Internal Stability 70 3.3.1 Well-Posedness 70 3.3.2 The Internal Stability of Feedback Control 71 3.3.2.1 The Closed-Loop Characteristic Equation and Closed-Loop Poles 72 3.3.2.2 Closed-Loop Zeros 72 3.3.2.3 Pole–Zero Cancellation and The Internal Stability of Feedback Control 73 3.4 The Youla Parameterization of all Internally Stabilizing Compensators 76 3.5 Interpolation Conditions 80 3.6 Steady-State Error 83 3.7 Feedback Design, and Frequency Methods: Input Attenuation and Robustness 83 3.7.1 The Frequency Paradigm 84 3.7.2 Input Attenuation and Command Following 84 3.7.3 Bode Measures of Performance Robustness 85 3.7.4 Graphical Interpretation of Return, Sensitivity, and Complementary Sensitivity 88 3.7.5 Weighting Factors and Performance Robustness 89 3.8 The Saturation Constraints 90 3.8.1 Bandwidth and Response Time 90 3.8.2 The Youla Parameter and Saturation 91 3.9 Problems 93 4 Feedback Design For SISO: Shaping and Parameterization 95 4.1 Closed-Loop Stability Under Uncertain Conditions 95 4.1.1 Harmonic Consistency 95 4.1.2 Nyquist Stability Criterion: Heuristic Justification 96 4.1.3 Stability Margins and Stability Robustness 98 4.1.4 Margins, T(j𝜔) and S(j𝜔), and H∞ Norms (Relationships Between Classical and Neoclassical Approaches) 99 4.1.4.1 Neoclassical Approach 101 4.2 Mathematical Design Constraints 103 4.2.1 Sensitivity/Complementary Sensitivity Point-wise Constraints 103 4.2.2 Sensitivity, Complementary Sensitivity, and Analytic Constraints 104 4.2.2.1 Non-minimum Phase Constraints on Design 104 4.3 The Neoclassical Approach to Internal Stability 104 4.4 Feedback Design And Parameterization: Stable Objects 106 4.4.1 Renormalization of Gains 108 4.4.2 Shaping of the Closed-Loop: Stable SISO 108 4.4.3 Neoclassical Design Principles 109 4.5 Loop Shaping Using Youla Parameterization 110 4.5.1 LHP Zeros of Gp 111 4.5.2 Non-minimum Phase Zeros 112 4.5.3 LHP Poles of Gp 114 4.5.4 Unstable Poles 115 4.6 Design Guidelines 116 4.7 Design Examples 117 4.8 Problems 125 5 Norms of Feedback Systems 129 5.1 The Laplace and Fourier Transform 129 5.1.1 The Inverse Laplace Transform 129 5.1.2 Parseval’s Theorem 131 5.1.3 The Fourier Transform 132 5.1.3.1 Properties of the Fourier Transform 133 5.1.3.2 Inverse Fourier Transformation By Heaviside Expansion 133 5.2 Norms of Signals and Systems 134 5.2.1 Signal Norms 134 5.2.1.1 Particular Norms 135 5.2.1.2 Properties of Norms 136 5.2.2 Norms of Dynamic Systems 137 5.2.3 Input–Output Norms 138 5.2.3.1 Transient Inputs (Energy Bounded) 138 5.2.3.2 Persistent Inputs (Energy Unbounded) 139 5.3 Quantifying Uncertainty 140 5.3.1 The Characterization of Uncertainty in Models 140 5.3.2 Weighting Factors and Stability Robustness 141 5.3.3 Robust Stability (Complementary Sensitivity) and Uncertainty 142 5.3.4 Sensitivity and Performance 145 5.3.5 Performance and Stability 146 5.4 Problems 147 6 Feedback Design By the Optimization of Closed-Loop Norms 149 6.1 Introduction 149 6.1.1 Frequency Domain Control Design Approaches 150 6.2 Optimization Design Objectives and Constraints 151 6.2.1 Algebraic Constraints 151 6.2.2 Analytic Constraints 152 6.2.2.1 Nonminimum Phase Effect 152 6.2.2.2 Bode Sensitivity Integral Theorem 153 6.3 The Linear Fractional Transformation 154 6.4 Setup for Loop-Shaping Optimization 156 6.4.1 Setup for Youla Parameter Loop Shaping 158 6.5 H∞-norm Optimization Problem 160 6.5.1 Solution to a Simple Optimization Problem 161 6.6 H∞ Design 163 6.7 H∞ Solutions Using Matlab Robust Control Toolbox for SISO Systems 164 6.7.1 Defining Frequency Weights 164 6.8 Problems 168 7 Estimation Design for SISO Using Parameterization Approach 173 7.1 Introduction 173 7.2 Youla Controller Output Observer Concept 175 7.3 The SISO Case 177 7.3.1 Output and Feedthrough Matrices 178 7.3.2 SISO Estimator Design 178 7.4 Final Remarks 182 8 Practical Applications 183 8.1 Yaw Stability Control with Active Limited Slip Differential 183 8.1.1 Model and Control Design 183 8.1.2 Youla Control Design Using Hand Computation 187 8.1.3 H∞ Control Design Using Loop-shaping Technique 188 8.2 Vehicle Yaw Rate and Side-Slip Estimation 195 8.2.1 Kalman Filters 195 8.2.2 Vehicle Model – Nonlinear Bicycle Model with Pacejka Tire Model 196 8.2.3 Linearizing the Bicycle Model 197 8.2.4 Uncertainties 197 8.2.5 State Estimation 198 8.2.6 Youla Parameterization Estimator Design 198 8.2.7 Simulation Results 200 8.2.8 Robustness Test 201 8.2.8.1 Vehicle Mass Variation 201 8.2.8.2 Tire–road Coefficient of Friction 203 Part II Control Design Using Youla Parametrization: Multi Input Multi Output (MIMO) 205 9 Introduction to Multivariable Feedback Control 207 9.1 Nonoptimal, Optimal, and Robust Control 207 9.1.1 Nonoptimal Control Methods 208 9.1.2 Optimal Control Methods 208 9.1.3 Optimal Robust Control 209 9.2 Review of the SISO Transfer Function 210 9.2.1 Schur Complement 210 9.2.2 Interpretation of Poles and Zeros of a Transfer Function 211 9.2.2.1 Poles 211 9.2.2.2 Zeros 212 9.2.2.3 Transmission Blocking Zeros 213 9.3 Basic Aspects of Transfer Function Matrices 215 9.4 Problems 215 10 Matrix Fractional Description 217 10.1 Transfer Function Matrices 217 10.1.1 Matrix Fraction Description 218 10.2 Polynomial Matrix Properties 219 10.2.1 Minimum-Degree Factorization 220 10.3 Equivalency of Polynomial Matrices 221 10.4 Smith Canonical Form 222 10.5 Smith–McMillan Form 225 10.5.1 Smith–McMillan Form 225 10.5.2 MFD’s and Their Relations to Smith–McMillan Form 228 10.5.3 Computing an Irreducible (Coprime) Matrix Fraction Description 229 10.6 MIMO Controllability and Observability 234 10.6.1 State-Space Realization 235 10.6.1.1 SISO System 235 10.6.1.2 MIMO System 236 10.6.2 Controllable Form of State-Space Realization of MIMO System 238 10.6.2.1 Mathematical Details 239 10.7 Straightforward Computational Procedures 243 10.8 Problems 245 11 Eigenvalues and Singular Values 247 11.1 Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors 247 11.2 Matrix Diagonalization 248 11.2.1 Classes of Diagonalizable Matrices 250 11.3 Singular Value Decomposition 253 11.3.1 What is a Singular Value Decomposition? 254 11.3.2 Orthonormal Vectors 255 11.4 Singular Value Decomposition Properties 257 11.5 Comparison of Eigenvalue and Singular Value Decompositions 258 11.5.1 System Gain 259 11.6 Generalized Singular Value Decomposition 262 11.6.1 The Scalar Case 264 11.6.2 Input and Output Spaces 264 11.7 Norms 265 11.7.1 The Spectral Norm 265 11.8 Problems 266 12 MIMO Feedback Principals 267 12.1 Mutlivariable Closed-Loop Transfer Functions 267 12.1.1 Transfer Function Matrix, From r to y 268 12.1.2 Transfer Function Matrix From dy to y As Shown in Figure 12.1 268 12.1.3 Transfer Function Matrix From r to e 269 12.1.4 Transfer Function From r to u 269 12.1.5 Realization Tricks 270 12.2 Well-Posedness of MIMO Systems 270 12.3 State Variable Compositions 271 12.4 Nyquist Criterion for MIMO Systems 273 12.4.1 Characteristic Gains 273 12.4.2 Poles and Zeros 274 12.4.3 Internal Stability 275 12.5 MIMO Performance and Robustness Criteria 276 12.6 Open-Loop Singular Values 278 12.6.1 Crossover Frequency 279 12.6.2 Bandwidth Constraints 280 12.7 Condition Number and its Role in MIMO Control Design 281 12.7.1 Condition Numbers and Decoupling 281 12.7.2 Role of Tu and S u in MIMO Feedback Design 282 12.8 Summary of Requirements 282 12.8.1 Closed-Loop Requirements 282 12.8.2 Open-Loop Requirements 283 12.9 Problems 283 13 Youla Parameterization for Feedback Systems 285 13.1 Neoclassical Control for MIMO Systems 285 13.1.1 Internal Model Control 285 13.2 MIMO Feedback Control Design for Stable Plants 286 13.2.1 Procedure to Find the MIMO Controller, G c 287 13.2.2 Interpolation Conditions 287 13.3 MIMO Feedback Control Design Examples 287 13.3.1 Summary of Closed-Loop Requirements 290 13.3.2 Summary of Open-Loop Requirements 290 13.4 MIMO Feedback Control Design: Unstable Plants 294 13.4.1 The Proposed Control Design Method 294 13.4.2 Another Approach for MIMO Controller Design 300 13.5 Problems 301 14 Norms of Feedback Systems 303 14.1 Norms 303 14.1.1 Signal Norms, the Discrete Case 303 14.1.2 System Norms 304 14.1.3 The ℋ 2-Norm 305 14.1.4 The ℋ ∞-Norm 306 14.2 Linear Fractional Transformations (LFT) 307 14.3 Linear Fractional Transformation Explained 309 14.3.1 LFTs in Control Design 310 14.4 Modeling Uncertainties 312 14.4.1 Uncertainties 312 14.4.2 Descriptions of Unstructured Uncertainty 312 14.5 General Robust Stability Theorem 313 14.5.1 SVD Properties Applied 314 14.5.2 Robust Performance 315 14.6 Problems 316 15 Optimal Control in MIMO Systems 319 15.1 Output Feedback Control 319 15.1.1 LQG Control 320 15.1.2 Kalman Filter 322 15.1.3 ℋ 2 Control 323 15.1.3.1 Kalman Filter Dynamic Model 324 15.1.3.2 State Feedback 325 15.2 ℋ ∞ Control Design 325 15.2.1 State Feedback (Full Information) ℋ ∞ Control Design 327 15.2.2 ℋ ∞ Filtering 329 15.3 ℋ ∞- Robust Optimal Control 330 15.4 Problems 332 16 Estimation Design for MIMO Using Parameterization Approach 335 16.1 YCOO Concept for MIMO 335 16.2 MIMO Estimator Design 337 16.3 State Estimation 338 16.3.1 First Decoupled System ( Gsm 1 ) 338 16.3.2 Second Decoupled System ( Gsm 2 ) 338 16.3.3 Coupled System 339 16.4 Applications 339 16.4.1 States Estimation: Four States 340 16.4.2 Input Estimation: Skyhook Based Control 341 16.4.3 Input Estimation: Road Roughness 342 16.5 Final Remarks 344 17 Practical Applications 345 17.1 Active Suspension 345 17.1.1 Model and Control Design 345 17.1.2 MIMO Youla Control Design 348 17.1.3 H ∞ Control Design Technique 350 17.1.4 Uncertain Actuator Model 351 17.1.5 Design Setup 351 17.1.6 Simulation Results 354 17.1.7 Robustness Test: Actuator Model Variations 356 17.2 Advanced Engine Speed Control for Hybrid Vehicles 356 17.2.1 Diesel Hybrid Electric Vehicle Model 357 17.2.2 MISO Youla Control Design 359 17.2.3 First Youla Method 359 17.2.4 Second Youla Method 360 17.2.5 H ∞ Control Design 360 17.2.6 Simulation Results 362 17.2.7 Robustness Test 363 17.3 Robust Control for the Powered Descent of a Multibody Lunar Landing System 364 17.3.1 Multibody Dynamics Model 365 17.3.2 Trajectory Optimization 366 17.3.3 MIMO Youla Control Design 367 17.3.4 Youla Method for Under-Actuated Systems 371 17.4 Vehicle Yaw Rate and Sideslip Estimation 374 17.4.1 Background 375 17.4.2 Vehicle Modeling 376 17.4.2.1 Nonlinear Bicycle Model With Pacejka Tire Model 376 17.4.2.2 Kinematic Relationship 376 17.4.2.3 Multi-Input Model 377 17.4.2.4 Linearizing the Bicycle Model for SISO and MIMO Cases 378 17.4.3 State Estimation 378 17.4.3.1 Youla Parameterization Control Design 378 17.4.4 Simulation and Estimation Result 379 17.4.5 Robustness Test 382 17.4.5.1 Vehicle mass variation 382 17.4.5.2 Tire–road coefficient of friction 382 17.4.6 Sensor Bias 382 17.4.7 Final Remarks 386 A Cauchy Integral 387 A.1 Contour Definitions 387 A.2 Contour Integrals 388 A.3 Complex Analysis Definitions 389 A.4 Cauchy–Riemann Conditions 390 A.5 Cauchy Integral Theorem 392 A.5.1 Terminology 394 A.6 Maximum Modulus Theorem 394 A.7 Poisson Integral Formula 396 A.8 Cauchy’s Argument Principle 398 A.9 Nyquist Stability Criterion 400 B Singular Value Properties 403 B.1 Spectral Norm Proof 403 B.2 Proof of Bounded Eigenvalues 404 B.3 Proof of Matrix Inequality 404 B.3.1 Upper Bound 405 B.3.2 Lower Bound 405 B.3.3 Combined Inequality 406 B.4 Triangle Inequality 406 B.4.1 Upper Bound 406 B.4.2 Lower Bound 406 B.4.3 Combined Inequality 406 C Bandwidth 407 C.1 Introduction 407 C.2 Information as a Precise Measure of Bandwidth 408 C.2.1 Neoclassical Feedback Control 408 C.2.2 Defining a Measure to Characterize the Usefulness of Feedback 408 C.2.3 Computation of New Bandwidth 409 C.3 Examples 410 C.4 Summary 414 D Example Matlab Code 417 D.1 Example 1 417 D.2 Example 2 419 D.3 Example 3 420 D.4 Example 4 422 References 425 Index 427

Read more less

Book SynopsisA revised edition to applied gas dynamics with exclusive coverage on jets and additional sets of problems and examples The revised and updated second edition of Applied Gas Dynamics offers an authoritative guide to the science of gas dynamics. Written by a noted expert on the topic, the text contains a comprehensive review of the topic; from a definition of the subject, to the three essential processes of this science: the isentropic process, shock and expansion process, and Fanno and Rayleigh flows. In this revised edition, there are additional worked examples that highlight many concepts, including moving shocks, and a section on critical Mach number is included that helps to illuminate the concept. The second edition also contains new exercise problems with the answers added. In addition, the information on ram jets is expanded with helpful worked examples. It explores the entire spectrum of the ram jet theory and includes a set of exercise problems to aid in the understanding ofTable of ContentsPreface xv Author Biography xvii About the Companion Website xix 1 Basic Facts 1 1.1 Definition of Gas Dynamics 1 1.2 Introduction 1 1.3 Compressibility 2 1.3.1 Limiting Conditions for Compressibility 3 1.4 Supersonic Flow – What is it? 4 1.5 Speed of Sound 5 1.6 Temperature Rise 7 1.7 Mach Angle 8 1.7.1 Small Disturbance 10 1.7.2 Finite Disturbance 10 1.8 Thermodynamics of Fluid Flow 11 1.9 First Law of Thermodynamics (Energy Equation) 11 1.9.1 Energy Equation for an Open System 12 1.9.2 Adiabatic Flow Process 14 1.10 The Second Law of Thermodynamics (Entropy Equation) 15 1.11 Thermal and Calorical Properties 16 1.11.1 Thermally Perfect Gas 16 1.12 The Perfect Gas 17 1.12.1 Entropy Calculation 18 1.12.2 Isentropic Relations 20 1.12.3 Limitations on Air as a Perfect Gas 25 1.13 Wave Propagation 26 1.14 Velocity of Sound 26 1.15 Subsonic and Supersonic Flows 27 1.16 Similarity Parameters 28 1.17 Continuum Hypothesis 28 1.18 Compressible Flow Regimes 30 1.19 Summary 31 Exercise Problems 34 2 Steady One-Dimensional Flow 43 2.1 Introduction 43 2.2 Fundamental Equations 43 2.3 Discharge from a Reservoir 45 2.3.1 Mass Flow Rate per Unit Area 47 2.3.2 Critical Values 51 2.4 Streamtube Area–Velocity Relation 54 2.5 de Laval Nozzle 57 2.5.1 Mass Flow Relation in Terms of Mach Number 65 2.5.2 Maximum Mass Flow Rate per Unit Area 65 2.6 Supersonic Flow Generation 66 2.6.1 Nozzles 68 2.6.2 Physics of the Nozzle Flow Process 69 2.7 Performance of Actual Nozzles 71 2.7.1 Nozzle Efficiency 71 2.7.2 Nozzle Discharge Coefficient 73 2.8 Diffusers 75 2.8.1 Special Features of Supersonic Diffusers 77 2.8.2 Supersonic Wind Tunnel Diffusers 78 2.8.3 Supersonic Inlets 81 2.8.4 Fixed-Geometry Inlet 82 2.8.5 Variable-Geometry Inlet 83 2.8.6 Diffuser Efficiency 84 2.9 Dynamic Head Measurement in Compressible Flow 88 2.9.1 Compressibility Correction to Dynamic Pressure 91 2.10 Pressure Coefficient 95 2.11 Summary 97 Exercise Problems 99 3 Normal Shock Waves 113 3.1 Introduction 113 3.2 Equations of Motion for a Normal Shock Wave 113 3.3 The Normal Shock Relations for a Perfect Gas 115 3.4 Change of Stagnation or Total Pressure Across a Shock 118 3.5 Hugoniot Equation 121 3.5.1 Moving Shocks 123 3.6 The Propagating Shock Wave 123 3.6.1 Weak Shock 128 3.6.2 Strong Shock 130 3.7 Reflected Shock Wave 133 3.8 Centered Expansion Wave 138 3.9 Shock Tube 139 3.9.1 Shock Tube Applications 142 3.10 Summary 145 Exercise Problems 148 4 Oblique Shock and Expansion Waves 155 4.1 Introduction 155 4.2 Oblique Shock Relations 156 4.3 Relation Between 𝛽 and 𝜃 158 4.4 Shock Polar 160 4.5 Supersonic Flow Over a Wedge 162 4.6 Weak Oblique Shocks 165 4.7 Supersonic Compression 167 4.8 Supersonic Expansion by Turning 169 4.9 The Prandtl–Meyer Expansion 170 4.9.1 Velocity Components Vr and V𝜙 172 4.9.2 The Prandtl–Meyer Function 175 4.9.3 Compression 177 4.10 Simple and Nonsimple Regions 178 4.11 Reflection and Intersection of Shocks and Expansion Waves 178 4.11.1 Intersection of Shocks of the Same Family 181 4.11.2 Wave Reflection from a Free Boundary 183 4.12 Detached Shocks 189 4.13 Mach Reflection 191 4.14 Shock-Expansion Theory 197 4.15 Thin Airfoil Theory 202 4.15.1 Application of Thin Aerofoil Theory 203 4.16 Summary 210 Exercise Problems 212 5 Compressible Flow Equations 221 5.1 Introduction 221 5.2 Crocco’s Theorem 221 5.2.1 Basic Solutions of Laplace’s Equation 224 5.3 General Potential Equation for Three-Dimensional Flow 225 5.4 Linearization of the Potential Equation 226 5.4.1 Small Perturbation Theory 227 5.5 Potential Equation for Bodies of Revolution 229 5.5.1 Conclusions 230 5.5.2 Solution of Nonlinear Potential Equation 231 5.6 Boundary Conditions 231 5.6.1 Bodies of Revolution 232 5.7 Pressure Coefficient 233 5.7.1 Bodies of Revolution 234 5.8 Summary 234 Exercise Problems 237 6 Similarity Rule 239 6.1 Introduction 239 6.2 Two-Dimensional Flow: The Prandtl–Glauert Rule for Subsonic Flow 239 6.2.1 Prandtl–Glauert Transformations 239 6.2.2 The Direct Problem (Version I) 241 6.2.3 The Indirect Problem (Case of Equal Potentials): P–G Transformation (Version II) 243 6.2.4 Streamline Analogy (Version III): Gothert’s Rule 244 6.3 Prandtl–Glauert Rule for Supersonic Flow: Versions I and II 245 6.3.1 Subsonic Flow 246 6.3.2 Supersonic Flow 246 6.4 The von Karman Rule for Transonic Flow 248 6.4.1 Use of the von Karman Rule 249 6.5 Hypersonic Similarity 250 6.6 Three-Dimensional Flow: Gothert’s Rule 252 6.6.1 General Similarity Rule 252 6.6.2 Gothert’s Rule 254 6.6.3 Application toWings of Finite Span 255 6.6.4 Application to Bodies of Revolution and Fuselages 255 6.6.5 The Prandtl–Glauert Rule 257 6.6.6 The von Karman Rule for Transonic Flow 261 6.7 Critical Mach Number 261 6.7.1 Calculation of M∗∞ 264 6.8 Summary 266 Exercise Problems 269 7 Two-Dimensional Compressible Flows 271 7.1 Introduction 271 7.2 General Linear Solution for Supersonic Flow 271 7.2.1 Existence of Characteristics in a Physical Problem 273 7.2.2 Equation for the Streamlines from Kinematic Flow Condition 274 7.3 Flow over a Wave-Shaped Wall 276 7.3.1 Incompressible Flow 276 7.3.2 Compressible Subsonic Flow 277 7.3.3 Supersonic Flow 278 7.3.4 Pressure Coefficient 278 7.4 Summary 280 Exercise Problems 280 8 Flow with Friction and Heat Transfer 283 8.1 Introduction 283 8.2 Flow in Constant Area Duct with Friction 283 8.2.1 The Fanno Line 284 8.3 Adiabatic, Constant-Area Flow of a Perfect Gas 285 8.3.1 Definition of Friction Coefficient 286 8.3.2 Effects of Wall Friction on Fluid Properties 287 8.3.3 Second Law of Thermodynamics 288 8.3.4 Working Relations 289 8.4 Flow with Heating or Cooling in Ducts 294 8.4.1 Governing Equations 294 8.4.2 Simple-Heating Relations for a Perfect Gas 295 8.5 Summary 300 Exercise Problems 303 9 Method of Characteristics 309 9.1 Introduction 309 9.2 The Concepts of Characteristics 309 9.3 The Compatibility Relation 310 9.4 The Numerical Computational Method 312 9.4.1 Solid and Free Boundary Points 313 9.4.2 Sources of Error 316 9.4.3 Axisymmetric Flow 316 9.4.4 Nonisentropic Flow 317 9.5 Theorems for Two-Dimensional Flow 318 9.6 Numerical Computation with Weak Finite Waves 320 9.6.1 Reflection of Waves 320 9.7 Design of Supersonic Nozzle 323 9.7.1 Contour Design Details 324 9.8 Summary 328 10 Measurements in Compressible Flow 329 10.1 Introduction 329 10.2 Pressure Measurements 329 10.2.1 Liquid Manometers 329 10.2.2 Measuring Principle of Manometers 330 10.2.3 Dial-Type Pressure Gauges 332 10.2.4 Pressure Transducers 333 10.3 Temperature Measurements 335 10.4 Velocity and Direction 338 10.5 Density Problems 339 10.6 Compressible Flow Visualization 339 10.6.1 Supersonic Flows 340 10.7 Interferometer 341 10.7.1 Formation of Interference Patterns 341 10.7.2 Quantitative Evaluation 342 10.7.3 Fringe-Displacement Method 344 10.8 Schlieren System 344 10.8.1 Range and Sensitivity of the Schlieren System 347 10.8.2 Optical Components Quality Requirements 347 10.8.3 Sensitivity of the Schlieren Method for Shock and Expansion Studies 350 10.9 Shadowgraph 352 10.9.1 Comparison of the Schlieren and Shadowgraph Methods 353 10.10 Wind Tunnels 354 10.10.1 High-SpeedWind Tunnels 354 10.10.2 Blowdown TypeWind Tunnels 354 10.10.3 Induction Type Tunnels 355 10.10.4 Continuous Supersonic Wind Tunnels 356 10.10.5 Losses in Supersonic Tunnels 357 10.10.6 Supersonic Wind Tunnel Diffusers 358 10.10.7 Effects of Second Throat 360 10.10.8 Compressor Tunnel Matching 362 10.10.9 The Mass Flow Rate 365 10.10.10 Blowdown Tunnel Operation 369 10.10.11 Optimum Conditions 372 10.10.12 Running Time of Blowdown Wind Tunnels 373 10.11 Hypersonic Tunnels 375 10.11.1 Hypersonic Nozzle 377 10.12 Instrumentation and Calibration ofWind Tunnels 380 10.12.1 Calibration of SupersonicWind Tunnels 380 10.12.2 Calibration 381 10.12.3 Mach Number Determination 381 10.12.4 Pitot Pressure Measurement 382 10.12.5 Static Pressure Measurement 382 10.12.6 Determination of Flow Angularity 383 10.12.7 Determination of Turbulence Level 383 10.12.8 Determination of Test-Section Noise 384 10.12.9 Use of Calibration Results 384 10.12.10 Starting of Supersonic Tunnels 384 10.12.11 Starting Loads 385 10.12.12 Reynolds Number Effects 385 10.12.13 Model Mounting-Sting Effects 385 10.13 Calibration and Use of Hypersonic Tunnels 386 10.13.1 Calibration of Hypersonic Tunnels 386 10.13.2 Mach Number Determination 386 10.13.3 Determination of Flow Angularity 388 10.13.4 Determination of Turbulence Level 388 10.13.5 Reynolds Number Effects 389 10.13.6 Force Measurements 389 10.14 Flow Visualization 390 10.15 Summary 390 Exercise Problems 393 11 Ramjet 395 11.1 Introduction 395 11.2 The Ideal Ramjet 396 11.3 Aerodynamic Losses 401 11.4 Aerothermodynamics of Engine Components 404 11.4.1 Engine Inlets 404 11.5 Flow Through Inlets 405 11.5.1 Inlet Flow Process 406 11.5.2 Boundary Layer Separation 406 11.5.3 Flow Over the Inlet 406 11.6 Performance of Actual Intakes 410 11.6.1 Isentropic Efficiency 410 11.6.2 Stagnation Pressure Ratio 411 11.6.3 Supersonic Inlets 411 11.6.4 Supersonic Diffusers 412 11.6.5 Starting Problem 413 11.7 Shock–Boundary Layer Interaction 418 11.8 Oblique Shock Wave Incident on Flat Plate 419 11.9 Normal Shocks in Ducts 420 11.10 External Supersonic Compression 422 11.11 Two-Shock Intakes 423 11.12 Multi-Shock Intakes 427 11.13 Isentropic Compression 429 11.14 Limits of External Compression 431 11.15 External Shock Attachment 433 11.16 Internal Shock Attachment 433 11.17 Pressure Loss 434 11.18 Supersonic Combustion 442 11.19 Summary 444 Exercise Problems 447 12 Jets 451 12.1 Introduction 451 12.1.1 Subsonic Jets 453 12.2 Mathematical Treatment of Jet Profiles 454 12.3 Theory of Turbulent Jets 455 12.3.1 Mean Velocity and Mean Temperature 456 12.3.2 Turbulence Characteristics of Free Jets 457 12.3.3 Mixing Length 458 12.4 Experimental Methods for Studying Jets and the Techniques Used for Analysis 461 12.4.1 Pressure Measurement 462 12.5 Expansion Levels of Jets 464 12.5.1 Overexpanded Jets 464 12.5.2 Correctly Expanded Jets 467 12.5.3 Underexpanded Jets 469 12.6 Control of Jets 471 12.6.1 Classification of Control Methods 473 12.6.2 Role of Shear Layer in Flow Control 474 12.6.3 Supersonic Shear Layers 475 12.6.4 Use of Tabs for Jet Control 477 12.6.5 Evaluation of the Effectiveness of Some Specific Passive Controls 481 12.6.6 Grooves and Cutouts 519 12.7 Noncircular Jets and Shifted Tabs 519 12.7.1 Jet Control with Tabs 523 12.7.2 Shifted Tabs 527 12.7.3 Ventilated Triangular Tabs 532 12.7.4 Tab Edge Effect 535 12.8 Summary 541 Appendix A 547 References 619 Index 625

Read more less

Book SynopsisA practical methodology for designing integrated automation control for systems and processes Implementing digital control within mechanical-electronic (mechatronic) systems is essential to respond to the growing demand for high-efficiency machines and processes. In practice, the most efficient digital control often integrates time-driven and event-driven characteristics within a single control scheme. However, most of the current engineering literature on the design of digital control systems presents discrete-time systems and discrete-event systems separately.Control Of Mechatronic Systems: Model-Driven Design And Implementation Guidelinesunites the two systems, revisiting the concept of automated control by presenting a unique practical methodology for whole-system integration. With its innovative hybrid approach to the modeling, analysis, and design of control systems, this text provides material for mechatronic engineering and process automation courses, asTable of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgment xix About the Companion Website xxi 1 Introduction to the Control of Mechatronic Systems 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Description of Mechatronic Systems 1 1.3 Generic Controlled Mechatronic System and Instrumentation Components 6 1.3.1 The Data Processing and Computing Unit 6 1.3.2 Data Acquisition and Transmission Units 7 1.3.3 Electrically-driven Actuating Units 7 1.3.4 Measuring and Detecting Units 7 1.3.5 Signal Conditioning Units 7 1.4 Functions and Examples of Controlled Mechatronic Systems and Processes 8 1.5 Controller Design Integration Steps and Implementation Strategies 9 Exercises and Problems 16 Bibliography 26 2 Physics-Based Systems and Processes: Dynamics Modeling 27 2.1 Introduction 27 2.2 Generic Dynamic Modeling Methodology 27 2.3 Transportation Systems and Processes 28 2.3.1 Sea Gantry Crane Handling Process 28 2.3.1.1 Model 1 33 2.3.1.2 Model 2 33 2.3.2 Vertical Elevator System 35 2.3.3 Hybrid Vehicle Powertrain with Parallel Configuration 38 2.3.3.1 Motor Driving and Regenerating Model 40 2.3.3.2 Vehicle Gear Box Model 41 2.3.3.3 Brake System Model 41 2.3.4 Driverless Vehicle Longitudinal Dynamics 42 2.3.5 Automated Segway Transportation Systems 45 2.4 Biomedical Systems and Processes 47 2.4.1 Infant Incubator 47 2.4.2 Blood Glucose-Insulin Metabolism 50 2.5 Fluidic and Thermal Systems and Processes 53 2.5.1 Mixing Tank 53 2.5.2 Purified Water Distribution Process 57 2.5.3 Conveyor Cake Oven 60 2.5.4 Poultry Scalding and Defeathering Thermal Process 64 2.6 Chemical Processes 68 2.6.1 Crude Oil Distillation Petrochemical Process 68 2.6.2 Lager Beer Fermentation Tank 73 2.7 Production Systems and Processes 75 2.7.1 Single Axis Drilling System 75 2.7.2 Cement-Based Pozzolana Portal Scraper 78 2.7.3 Variable Pitch Wind Turbine Generator System 81 Exercises and Problems 84 Bibliography 102 3 Discrete-Time Modeling and Conversion Methods 105 3.1 Introduction 105 3.2 Digital Signal Processing Preliminaries 105 3.2.1 Digital Signal Characterization 105 3.2.2 Difference Equation: Discrete-Time Signal Characterization Using Approximation Methods 109 3.2.2.1 Numerical Approximation Using Forward Difference 109 3.2.2.2 Numerical Equivalence Using Backward Difference 110 3.2.2.3 Numerical Equivalence Using Bilinear Transform 110 3.2.3 Z-Transform and Inverse Z-Transform: Theorems and Properties 117 3.2.4 Procedure for Discrete-Time Approximation of the Continuous Process Model 119 3.2.4.1 Z-Transfer Functions and Block Diagram Manipulation 119 3.2.5 Conversion and Reconstruction of the Continuous Signal: Sampling and Hold Device 124 3.2.5.1 Sampler and Hold-Based Process Model 124 3.2.5.2 Construction Methods of a Continuous Signal from a Data Sequence 127 3.3 Signal Conditioning 135 3.4 Signal Conversion Technology 137 3.4.1 Digital-to-Analog Conversion 137 3.4.2 Analog-to-Digital Conversion 140 3.5 Data Logging and Processing 145 3.5.1 Computer Bus Structure and Applications 145 3.6 Computer Interface and Data Sampling Issues 149 3.6.1 Signal Conversion Time Delay Effects 155 3.6.1.1 Nyquist Sampling Theorem and Shannon’s Interpolation Formula 156 3.6.2 Estimation of the Minimum Sampling Rate to Be Selected 157 3.6.2.1 Remarks on Sample Periods 160 Exercises and Problems 161 Bibliography 168 4 Discrete-Time Analysis Methods 169 4.1 Introduction 169 4.2 Analysis Tools of Discrete-Time Systems and Processes 169 4.2.1 Discrete Pole and Zero Location 169 4.2.2 Discrete Frequency Analysis Tools: Fourier Series and Transform (DFT, DTFT, and FFT) 176 4.2.2.1 Discrete System Frequency Response 178 4.2.2.2 Sketching Procedure for the Frequency Response of a Discrete System 179 4.2.2.3 Properties of a Frequency Response 179 4.3 Discrete-Time Controller Specifications 181 4.3.1 Time Domain Specifications 182 4.3.2 Frequency Response Specifications 184 4.4 Discrete-Time Steady-State Error Analysis 186 4.5 Stability Test for Discrete-Time Systems 187 4.5.1 Bound-Input Bound-Output (BIBO) Stability Definition 188 4.5.2 Zero-Input Stability Definition 188 4.5.3 Bilinear Transformation and the Routh–Hurwitz Criterion 188 4.5.4 Jury–Marden Stability Test 190 4.5.5 Frequency-Based Stability Analysis 191 4.6 Performance Indices and System Dynamical Analysis 191 Exercises and Problems 192 Bibliography 194 5 Continuous Digital Controller Design 197 5.1 Introduction 197 5.2 Design of Control Algorithms for Continuous Systems and Processes 197 5.2.1 Direct Design Controller Algorithms 199 5.2.2 Discrete PID Controller Algorithms 201 5.2.2.1 Proportional Control Algorithm 201 5.2.2.2 Derivative Control Algorithm 202 5.2.2.3 Integral Control Algorithm 202 5.2.2.4 PI Control Algorithm 202 5.2.2.5 PD Control Algorithm 202 5.2.2.6 Classical PID Controller Algorithm 202 5.2.2.7 Properties of and Some Remarks on PID Controller Algorithms 204 5.2.3 PID Controller Gains Design Using a Frequency Response Technique 205 5.2.3.1 Design Procedure for PID Controller Design 205 5.2.4 PID Controller Gains Design Using a Root Locus Technique 220 5.2.4.1 Design Procedures 221 5.2.5 Feedforward Control Methods 226 5.2.5.1 Command Input Feedforward Control Algorithm 226 5.2.5.2 Disturbance Feedforward Control Algorithm 234 5.3 Modern Control Topologies 235 5.3.1 State Feedback PID Control Algorithms 235 5.3.2 MPC Algorithms 246 5.3.3 Open-Loop Position Control Using SteppingMotors 249 5.4 Induction Motor Controller Design 252 5.4.1 Scalar Control (V/f Control) 252 5.4.1.1 Open-Loop Scalar Control 253 5.4.1.2 Closed-Loop Scalar Control (Slip Control) 253 5.4.2 Vector Control 253 5.4.2.1 Direct Torque Control 254 5.4.2.2 Speed Control of AC Motors 256 5.4.2.3 Speed Control of DC Motors 257 Exercises and Problems 259 Bibliography 281 6 Boolean-Based Modeling and Logic Controller Design 283 6.1 Introduction 283 6.2 Generic Boolean-Based Modeling Methodology 284 6.2.1 System Operation Description and Functional Analysis 284 6.2.2 Combinatorial and Sequential Logic Systems 288 6.2.2.1 Combinational Modeling Tools: Truth Table, SOP, Product of Sums (POS), K-Maps 289 6.2.2.2 Sequential Modeling Tools: Sequence Table, Switching Theory, and State Diagram 290 6.3 Production Systems 297 6.3.1 Portico Scratcher 297 6.4 Biomedical Systems 299 6.4.1 Robot-Assisted Surgery 299 6.4.2 Laser Surgery Devices 303 6.5 Transportation Systems 307 6.5.1 Elevator Motion Systems 307 6.5.2 Fruit-Picker Arm 311 6.5.3 Driverless Car 313 6.6 Fail-Safe Design and Interlock Issues 317 6.6.1 Logic Control Validation (Commissioning) 317 Exercises and Problems 318 Bibliography 336 7 Hybrid Controller Design 337 7.1 Introduction 337 7.2 Requirements for Monitoring and Control of Hybrid Systems 337 7.2.1 Requirements for Hybrid Control System Design 338 7.2.2 Requirements for Operations Monitoring System Design 338 7.2.3 Process Interlock Design Requirements 339 7.3 Design Methodology for Monitoring and Control Systems 340 7.4 Examples of Hybrid Control and Case Studies 347 7.4.1 Elevator Motion System 347 7.4.2 Bottle-Cleaning Process 350 7.4.3 Cement-Drying Process 352 Exercises and Problems 362 Bibliography 375 8 Mechatronics Instrumentation: Actuators and Sensors 377 8.1 Introduction 377 8.2 Actuators in Mechatronics 378 8.3 Electromechanical Actuating Systems 379 8.3.1 Solenoids 379 8.3.2 Digital Binary Actuators 381 8.3.3 DC Motors 382 8.3.4 AC Motors 387 8.3.5 Stepping Motors 389 8.3.6 Transmission Mechanical Variables 390 8.4 Electro-Fluidic Actuating Systems 393 8.4.1 Electric Motorized Pumps 393 8.4.2 Electric-Driven Cylinders 395 8.4.3 Electrovalves 396 8.5 Electrothermal Actuating Systems 398 8.6 Sensors in Mechatronics 400 8.6.1 Measurement Instruments 402 8.6.1.1 Relative Position (Distance) 402 8.6.1.2 Angular Position Measurement Using an Encoder and a Resolver 409 8.6.1.3 Velocity Measurement 412 8.6.1.4 Acceleration Measurement 414 8.6.1.5 Force Measurement 416 8.6.1.6 Torque Measurement 417 8.6.1.7 Flow Measurement 417 8.6.1.8 Pressure Measurement 419 8.6.1.9 Liquid-Level Measurement 420 8.6.1.10 Radio Frequency-Based Level Measurement 422 8.6.1.11 Smart and Nano Sensors 422 8.6.2 Detection Instruments 423 8.6.2.1 Electromechanical Limit Switches 424 8.6.2.2 Photoelectric Sensors 424 8.6.2.3 RFID-Based Tracking and Detection 424 8.6.2.4 Binary Devices: Pressure Switches and Vacuum Switches 426 Exercises and Problems 426 Bibliography 434 A Stochastic Modeling 437 A.1 Discrete Process Model State-Space Form 437 A.2 Auto-Regressive Model with an eXogenous Input: ARX Model Structure 438 A.3 The Auto-Regressive Model – AR Model Structure 438 A.4 The Moving Average Model – MA Model Structure 438 A.5 The Auto-Regressive Moving Average Model – ARMA Model Structure 439 A.6 The Auto-Regressive Moving Average with eXogenous Input Model – ARMAX Model Structure 439 A.7 Selection of Model Order and Delay 439 A.8 Parameter Estimation Methods 440 A.9 LS Estimation Methods 442 A.10 RLS Estimation Methods 443 A.11 Model Validation 443 A.12 Prediction Error Analysis Methods 444 A.13 Estimation of Confidence Intervals for Parameters 444 A.14 Checking for I/O Consistency for Different Models 445 B Step Response Modeling 447 C Z-Transform Tables 451 D Boolean Algebra, Bus Drivers, and Logic Gates 455 D.1 Some Logic Gates, Flip-Flops, and Drivers 455 D.2 Other Logic Devices: Drivers and Bus Drivers 457 D.3 Gated R − S Latch 459 D.4 D-Type (Delay-Flip-Flop) 459 D.5 Register or Buffer 461 D.6 Adder 461 E Solid-State Devices and Power Electronics 463 E.1 Power Diodes 463 E.2 Diode–Transistor Logic (DTL) 464 E.3 Power Transistors 465 E.4 Resistor–Transistor Logic (RTL) 465 E.5 Transistor–Transistor Logic (TTL) 466 E.6 Metal Oxide Semiconductor FET (MOSFET) 466 E.7 Thyristors 467 Index 469

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides a semi-quantitative approach to recent developments in the study of optical properties of condensed matter systems Featuring contributions by noted experts in the field of electronic and optoelectronic materials and photonics, this book looks at the optical properties of materials as well as their physical processes and various classes. Taking a semi-quantitative approach to the subject, it presents a summary of the basic concepts, reviews recent developments in the study of optical properties of materials and offers many examples and applications. Optical Properties of Materials and Their Applications, 2nd Edition starts by identifying the processes that should be described in detail and follows with the relevant classes of materials. In addition to featuring four new chapters on optoelectronic properties of organic semiconductors, recent advances in electroluminescence, perovskites, and ellipsometry, the book covers: optical properties of disorTable of ContentsList of Contributors xv Series Preface xvii Preface xix 1 Fundamental Optical Properties of Materials I 1S.O. Kasap, W.C. Tan, Jai Singh, and Asim K. Ray 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Optical Constants n and K 2 1.2.1 Refractive Index and Extinction Coefficient 2 1.2.2 n and K, and Kramers–Kronig Relations 5 1.3 Refractive Index and Dispersion 7 1.3.1 Cauchy Dispersion Relation 7 1.3.2 Sellmeier Equation 8 1.3.3 Refractive Index of Semiconductors 10 1.3.3.1 Refractive Index of Crystalline Semiconductors 10 1.3.3.2 Bandgap and Temperature Dependence 11 1.3.4 Refractive Index of Glasses 11 1.3.5 Wemple–DiDomenico Dispersion Relation 14 1.3.6 Group Index 15 1.4 The Swanepoel Technique: Measurement of n and 𝛼 for Thin Films on Substrates 16 1.4.1 Uniform Thickness Films 16 1.4.2 Thin Films with Non-uniform Thickness 22 1.5 Transmittance and Reflectance of a Partially Transparent Plate 25 1.6 Optical Properties and Diffuse Reflection: Schuster–Kubelka–Munk Theory 27 1.7 Conclusions 31 Acknowledgments 31 References 32 2 Fundamental Optical Properties of Materials II 37S.O. Kasap, K. Koughia, Jai Singh, Harry E. Ruda, and Asim K. Ray 2.1 Introduction 37 2.2 Lattice or Reststrahlen Absorption and Infrared Reflection 40 2.3 Free Carrier Absorption (FCA) 42 2.4 Band-to-Band or Fundamental Absorption (Crystalline Solids) 45 2.5 Impurity Absorption and Rare-Earth Ions 48 2.6 Effect of External Fields 54 2.6.1 Electro-Optic Effects 54 2.6.2 Electro-Absorption and Franz–Keldysh Effect 55 2.6.3 Faraday Effect 56 2.7 Effective Medium Approximations 58 2.8 Conclusions 61 Acknowledgments 61 References 62 3 Optical Properties of Disordered Condensed Matter 67Koichi Shimakawa, Jai Singh, and S.K. O’Leary 3.1 Introduction 67 3.2 Fundamental Optical Absorption (Experimental) 69 3.2.1 Amorphous Chalcogenides 69 3.2.2 Hydrogenated Nano-Crystalline Silicon (nc-Si:H) 72 3.3 Absorption Coefficient (Theory) 74 3.4 Compositional Variation of the Optical Bandgap 79 3.4.1 In Amorphous Chalcogenides 79 3.5 Conclusions 80 References 80 4 Optical Properties of Glasses 83Andrew Edgar 4.1 Introduction 83 4.2 The Refractive Index 84 4.3 Glass Interfaces 86 4.4 Dispersion 88 4.5 Sensitivity of the Refractive Index 90 4.5.1 Temperature Dependence 90 4.5.2 Stress Dependence 91 4.5.3 Magnetic Field Dependence—The Faraday Effect 92 4.5.4 Chemical Perturbations—Molar Refractivity 94 4.6 Glass Color 95 4.6.1 Coloration by Colloidal Metals and Semiconductors 95 4.6.2 Optical Absorption in Rare-Earth-Doped Glass 96 4.6.3 Absorption by 3d Metal Ions 99 4.7 Fluorescence in Rare-Earth-Doped Glass 102 4.8 Glasses for Fiber Optics 104 4.9 Refractive Index Engineering 106 4.10 Glass and Glass–Fiber Lasers and Amplifiers 109 4.11 Valence Change Glasses 111 4.12 Transparent Glass Ceramics 114 4.12.1 Introduction 114 4.12.2 Theoretical Basis for Transparency 116 4.12.3 Rare-Earth-Doped Transparent Glass Ceramics for Active Photonics 120 4.12.4 Ferroelectric Transparent Glass Ceramics 121 4.12.5 Transparent Glass Ceramics for X-ray Storage Phosphors 121 4.13 Conclusions 124 References 124 5 Concept of Excitons 129Jai Singh, Harry E. Ruda, M.R. Narayan, and D. Ompong 5.1 Introduction 129 5.2 Excitons in Crystalline Solids 130 5.2.1 Excitonic Absorption in Crystalline Solids 133 5.3 Excitons in Amorphous Semiconductors 135 5.3.1 Excitonic Absorption in Amorphous Solids 137 5.4 Excitons in Organic Semiconductors 139 5.4.1 Photoexcitation and Formation of Excitons 140 5.4.1.1 Photoexcitation of Singlet Excitons Due to Exciton–Photon Interaction 141 5.4.1.2 Excitation of Triplet Excitons 142 5.4.2 Exciton Up-Conversion 147 5.4.3 Exciton Dissociation 148 5.4.3.1 Conversion from Frenkel to CT Excitons 151 5.4.3.2 Dissociation of CT Excitons 152 5.5 Conclusions 153 References 154 6 Photoluminescence 157Takeshi Aoki 6.1 Introduction 157 6.2 Fundamental Aspects of Photoluminescence (PL) in Materials 158 6.2.1 Intrinsic Photoluminescence 159 6.2.2 Extrinsic Photoluminescence 160 6.2.3 Up-Conversion Photoluminescence (UCPL) 162 6.2.4 Other Related Optical Transitions 163 6.3 Experimental Aspects 164 6.3.1 Static PL Spectroscopy 164 6.3.2 Photoluminescence Excitation Spectroscopy (PLE) and Photoluminescence Absorption Spectroscopy (PLAS) 167 6.3.3 Time Resolved Spectroscopy (TRS) 168 6.3.4 Time-Correlated Single Photon Counting (TCSPC) 171 6.3.5 Frequency-Resolved Spectroscopy (FRS) 172 6.3.6 Quadrature Frequency Resolved Spectroscopy (QFRS) 173 6.4 Photoluminescence Lifetime Spectroscopy of Amorphous Semiconductors by QFRS Technique 175 6.4.1 Overview 175 6.4.2 Dual-Phase Double Lock-in (DPDL) QFRS Technique 176 6.4.3 Exploring Broad PL Lifetime Distribution in a-Si:H by Wideband QFRS 178 6.4.3.1 Effects of Excitation Intensity, Excitation, and Emission Energies 179 6.4.3.2 Temperature Dependence 184 6.4.3.3 Effect of Electric and Magnetic Fields 185 6.4.4 Residual PL Decay of a-Si:H 189 6.5 QFRS on Up-Conversion Photoluminescence (UCPL) of RE-Doped Materials 192 6.6 Conclusions 197 Acknowledgments 198 References 198 7 Photoluminescence, Photoinduced Changes, and Electroluminescence in Noncrystalline Semiconductors 203Jai Singh 7.1 Introduction 203 7.2 Photoluminescence 205 7.2.1 Radiative Recombination Operator and Transition Matrix Element 206 7.2.2 Rates of Spontaneous Emission 211 7.2.2.1 At Nonthermal Equilibrium 212 7.2.2.2 At Thermal Equilibrium 214 7.2.2.3 Determining E0 215 7.2.3 Results of Spontaneous Emission and Radiative Lifetime 216 7.2.4 Temperature Dependence of PL 222 7.2.5 Excitonic Concept 223 7.3 Photoinduced Changes in Amorphous Chalcogenides 225 7.3.1 Effect of Photo-Excitation and Phonon Interaction 226 7.3.2 Excitation of a Single Electron–Hole Pair 228 7.3.3 Pairing of Like Excited Charge Carriers 229 7.4 Radiative Recombination of Excitons in Organic Semiconductors 232 7.4.1 Rate of Fluorescence 233 7.4.2 Rate of Phosphorescence 233 7.4.3 Organic Light Emitting Diodes (OLEDs) 234 7.4.3.1 Second- and Third-Generation OLEDs: TADF 235 7.5 Conclusions 236 Acknowledgments 236 References 237 8 Photoinduced Bond Breaking and Volume Change in Chalcogenide Glasses 241Sandor Kugler, Rozália Lukács, and Koichi Shimakawa 8.1 Introduction 241 8.2 Atomic-Scale Computer Simulations of Photoinduced Volume Changes 243 8.3 Effect of Illumination 244 8.4 Kinetics of Volume Change 245 8.4.1 a-Se 245 8.4.2 a-As2Se3 246 8.5 Additional Remarks 248 8.6 Conclusions 249 References 249 9 Properties and Applications of Photonic Crystals 251Harry E. Ruda and Naomi Matsuura 9.1 Introduction 251 9.2 PC Overview 252 9.2.1 Introduction to PCs 252 9.2.2 Nanoengineering of PC Architectures 253 9.2.3 Materials Selection for PCs 255 9.3 Tunable PCs 255 9.3.1 Tuning PC Response by Changing the Refractive Index of Constituent Materials 256 9.3.1.1 PC Refractive Index Tuning Using Light 256 9.3.1.2 PC Refractive Index Tuning Using an Applied Electric Field 256 9.3.1.3 Refractive Index Tuning of Infiltrated PCs 257 9.3.1.4 PC Refractive Index Tuning by Altering the Concentration of Free Carriers (Using Electric Field or Temperature) in Semiconductor-Based PCs 257 9.3.2 Tuning PC Response by Altering the Physical Structure of the PC 258 9.3.2.1 Tuning PC Response Using Temperature 258 9.3.2.2 Tuning PC Response Using Magnetism 258 9.3.2.3 Tuning PC Response Using Strain 258 9.3.2.4 Tuning PC Response Using Piezoelectric Effects 259 9.3.2.5 Tuning PC Response Using MEMS Actuation 260 9.4 Selected Applications of PC 260 9.4.1 Waveguide Devices 261 9.4.2 Dispersive Devices 262 9.4.3 Add/Drop Multiplexing Devices 262 9.4.4 Applications of PCs for Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs) and Lasers 263 9.5 Conclusions 265 Acknowledgments 265 References 265 10 Nonlinear Optical Properties of Photonic Glasses 269Keiji Tanaka 10.1 Introduction 269 10.2 Photonic Glass 271 10.3 Nonlinear Absorption and Refractivity 272 10.3.1 Fundamentals 272 10.3.2 Two-Photon Absorption 275 10.3.3 Nonlinear Refractivity 278 10.4 Nonlinear Excitation-Induced Structural Changes 280 10.4.1 Fundamentals 280 10.4.2 Oxides 281 10.4.3 Chalcogenides 283 10.5 Conclusions 285 10.A Addendum: Perspectives on Optical Devices 286 References 288 11 Optical Properties of Organic Semiconductors 295Takashi Kobayashi and Hiroyoshi Naito 11.1 Introduction 295 11.2 Molecular Structure of π-Conjugated Polymers 296 11.3 Theoretical Models 298 11.4 Absorption Spectrum 300 11.5 Photoluminescence 304 11.6 Non-Emissive Excited States 306 11.7 Electron–Electron Interaction 309 11.8 Interchain Interaction 314 11.9 Conclusions 320 References 321 12 Organic Semiconductors and Applications 323Furong Zhu 12.1 Introduction 323 12.1.1 Device Architecture and Operation Principle 324 12.1.2 Technical Challenges and Process Integration 325 12.2 Anode Modification for Enhanced OLED Performance 327 12.2.1 Low-Temperature High-Performance ITO 327 12.2.1.1 Experimental Methods 328 12.2.1.2 Morphological Properties 329 12.2.1.3 Electrical Properties 331 12.2.1.4 Optical Properties 333 12.2.1.5 Compositional Analysis 336 12.2.2 Anode Modification 339 12.2.3 Electroluminescence Performance of OLEDs 340 12.3 Flexible OLEDs 345 12.3.1 Flexible OLEDs on Ultrathin Glass Substrate 346 12.3.2 Flexible Top-Emitting OLEDs on Plastic Foils 347 12.3.2.1 Top-Emitting OLEDs 348 12.3.2.2 Flexible TOLEDs on Plastic Foils 350 12.4 Solution-Processable High-Performing OLEDs 353 12.4.1 Performance of OLEDs with a Hybrid MoO3-PEDOT:PSS Hole Injection Layer (HIL) 353 12.4.2 Morphological Properties of the MoO3-PEDOT:PSS HIL 361 12.4.3 Surface Electronic Properties of MoO3-PEDOT:PSS HIL 363 12.5 Conclusions 368 References 369 13 Transparent White OLEDs 373Choi Wing Hong and Furong Zhu 13.1 Introduction—Progress in Transparent WOLEDs 373 13.2 Performance of WOLEDs 374 13.2.1 Optimization of Dichromatic WOLEDs 374 13.2.2 J-L-V Characteristics of WOLEDs 377 13.2.3 Electron-Hole Current Balance in Transparent WOLEDs 384 13.3 Emission Behavior of Transparent WOLEDs 386 13.3.1 Visible-Light Transparency of WOLEDs 386 13.3.2 L-J Characteristics of Transparent WOLEDs 390 13.3.3 Angular-Dependent Color Stability of Transparent WOLEDs 395 13.4 Conclusions 400 References 400 14 Optical Properties of Thin Films 403V.-V. Truong, S. Tanemura, A. Haché, and L. Miao 14.1 Introduction 403 14.2 Optics of Thin Films 404 14.2.1 An Isotropic Film on a Substrate 404 14.2.2 Matrix Methods for Multi-Layered Structures 406 14.2.3 Anisotropic Films 407 14.3 Reflection-Transmission Photoellipsometry for Determination of Optical Constants 408 14.3.1 Photoellipsometry of a Thick or a Thin Film 408 14.3.2 Photoellipsometry for a Stack of Thick and Thin Films 410 14.3.3 Remarks on the Reflection-Transmission Photoellipsometry Method 412 14.4 Application of Thin Films to Energy Management and Renewable-Energy Technologies 412 14.4.1 Electrochromic Thin Films 413 14.4.2 Pure and Metal-Doped VO2 Thermochromic Thin Films 414 14.4.3 Temperature-Stabilized V1-xWxO2 Sky Radiator Films 417 14.4.4 Optical Functional TiO2 Thin Film for Environmentally Friendly Technologies 420 14.5 Application of Tunable Thin Films to Phase and Polarization Modulation 424 14.6 Conclusions 430 References 430 15 Optical Characterization of Materials by Spectroscopic Ellipsometry 435J. Mistrík 15.1 Introduction 435 15.2 Notions of Light Polarization 436 15.3 Measureable Quantities 438 15.4 Instrumentation 441 15.5 Single Interface 442 15.6 Single Layer 448 15.7 Multilayer 454 15.8 Linear Grating 458 15.9 Conclusions 462 Acknowledgments 463 References 463 16 Excitonic Processes in Quantum Wells 465Jai Singh and I.-K. Oh 16.1 Introduction 465 16.2 Exciton–Phonon Interaction 466 16.3 Exciton Formation in QWs Assisted by Phonons 467 16.4 Nonradiative Relaxation of Free Excitons 474 16.4.1 Intraband Processes 475 16.4.2 Interband Processes 479 16.5 Quasi-2D Free-Exciton Linewidth 485 16.6 Localization of Free Excitons 491 16.7 Conclusions 499 References 500 17 Optoelectronic Properties and Applications of Quantum Dots 503Jørn M. Hvam 17.1 Introduction 503 17.2 Epitaxial Growth and Structure of Quantum Dots 504 17.2.1 Self-Assembled Quantum Dots 504 17.2.2 Site-Controlled Growth on Patterned Substrates 505 17.2.3 Natural or Interface Quantum Dots 506 17.2.4 Quantum Dots in Nanowires 507 17.3 Excitons in Quantum Dots 508 17.3.1 Quantum-Dot Bandgap 509 17.3.2 Optical Transitions 510 17.4 Optical Properties 513 17.4.1 Radiative Lifetime, Oscillator Strength, and Internal Quantum Efficiency 514 17.4.2 Linewidth, Coherence, and Dephasing 516 17.4.3 Transient Four-Wave Mixing 517 17.5 Quantum Dot Applications 520 17.5.1 Quantum Dot Lasers and Optical Amplifiers 520 17.5.1.1 Gain Dynamics 522 17.5.1.2 Homogeneous Broadening and Dephasing 524 17.5.1.3 Long-Wavelength Lasers 526 17.5.1.4 Nano Lasers 527 17.5.2 Single-Photon Emitters 527 17.5.2.1 Micropillars and Nanowires 530 17.5.2.2 Photonic Crystal Waveguide 531 17.6 Conclusions 533 Acknowledgments 534 References 534 18 Perovskites – Revisiting the Venerable ABX3 Family with Organic Flexibility and New Applications 537Junwei Xu, D.L. Carroll, K. Biswas, F. Moretti, S. Gridin, and R.T.Williams 18.1 Introduction 537 18.1.1 Review 537 18.1.2 The Structures 538 18.1.2.1 Simple Cubic Frameworks 538 18.1.2.2 The Multiplicity of Hybrids 539 18.1.2.3 Structural Variation 540 18.2 Hybrid Perovskites in Photovoltaics 544 18.2.1 Review 544 18.2.2 The Phenomena Characterized as “Defect Tolerance” 548 18.3 Light-Emitting Diodes Using Solution-Processed Lead Halide Perovskites 549 18.3.1 Review 549 18.3.2 Construction and Characterization of LEDs Utilizing CsPbBr3 Nano-Inclusions in Cs4PbBr6 as the Electroluminescent Medium 553 18.4 Ionizing Radiation Detectors Using Lead Halide Perovskite Materials: Basics, Progress, and Prospects 562 18.5 Conclusions 582 Acknowledgments 583 References 583 19 Optical Properties and Spin Dynamics of Diluted Magnetic Semiconductor Nanostructures 589Akihiro Murayama and Yasuo Oka 19.1 Introduction 589 19.2 Quantum Wells 591 19.2.1 Spin Injection 591 19.2.2 Study of Spin Dynamics by Pump-Probe Spectroscopy 594 19.3 Fabrication of Nanostructures by Electron-Beam Lithography 596 19.4 Self-Assembled Quantum Dots 599 19.5 Hybrid Nanostructures with Ferromagnetic Materials 604 19.6 Conclusions 607 Acknowledgments 608 References 609 20 Kinetics of the Persistent Photoconductivity in Crystalline III-V Semiconductors 611Ruben Jeronimo Freitas and Koichi Shimakawa 20.1 Introduction 611 20.2 A Review of PPC in III-V Semiconductors 613 20.3 Key Physical Terms Related to PPC 615 20.3.1 Dispersive Reaction 615 20.3.2 SEF and Power Law 616 20.3.3 Waiting Time Distribution 617 20.4 Kinetics of PPC in III-V Semiconductors 617 20.5 Conclusions 623 Acknowledgments 623 20.A On the Reaction Rate Under the Uniform Distribution 623 References 625 Index 627

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe first book to comprehensively address the theory, kinematic modelling, numerical simulation and applications of vibration assisted machining Vibration Assisted Machining: Theory, Modelling and Applications covers all key aspects of vibration assisted machining, including cutting kinematics and dynamics, the effect of workpiece materials and wear of cutting tools. It also addresses practical applications for these techniques. Case studies provide detailed guidance on the design, modeling and testing of VAM systems. Experimental machining methods are also included, alongside considerations of state-of-the-art research developments on cutting force modeling and surface texture generation. Advances in computational modelling, surface metrology and manufacturing science over the past few decades have led to tremendous benefits for industry. This is the first comprehensive book dedicated to design, modelling, simulation and integration of vibration assistedTable of ContentsPreface xi 1 Introduction to Vibration-Assisted Machining Technology 1 1.1 Overview of Vibration-Assisted Machining Technology 1 1.1.1 Background 1 1.1.2 History and Development of Vibration-Assisted Machining 2 1.2 Vibration-Assisted Machining Process 3 1.2.1 Vibration-Assisted Milling 3 1.2.2 Vibration-Assisted Drilling 3 1.2.3 Vibration-Assisted Turning 5 1.2.4 Vibration-Assisted Grinding 5 1.2.5 Vibration-Assisted Polishing 6 1.2.6 Other Vibration-Assisted Machining Processes 7 1.3 Applications and Benefits of Vibration-Assisted Machining 7 1.3.1 Ductile Mode Cutting of Brittle Materials 7 1.3.2 Cutting Force Reduction 8 1.3.3 Burr Suppression 8 1.3.4 Tool Life Extension 8 1.3.5 Machining Accuracy and Surface Quality Improvement 9 1.3.6 Surface Texture Generation 10 1.4 Future Trend of Vibration-Assisted Machining 10 References 12 2 Review of Vibration Systems 17 2.1 Introduction 17 2.2 Actuators 18 2.2.1 Piezoelectric Actuators 18 2.2.2 Magnetostrictive Actuators 18 2.3 Transmission Mechanisms 18 2.4 Drive and Control 19 2.5 Vibration-Assisted Machining Systems 19 2.5.1 Resonant Vibration Systems 19 2.5.1.1 1D System 20 2.5.1.2 2D and 3D Systems 23 2.5.2 Nonresonant Vibration System 27 2.5.2.1 2D System 29 2.5.2.2 3D Systems 34 2.6 Future Perspectives 35 2.7 Concluding Remarks 36 References 37 3 Vibration System Design and Implementation 45 3.1 Introduction 45 3.2 Resonant Vibration System Design 46 3.2.1 Composition of the Resonance System and Its Working Principle 46 3.2.2 Summary of Design Steps 46 3.2.3 Power Calculation 47 3.2.3.1 Analysis of Working Length Lpu 48 3.2.3.2 Analysis of Cutting Tool Pulse Force Fp 49 3.2.3.3 Calculation of Total Required Power 49 3.2.4 Ultrasonic Transducer Design 49 3.2.4.1 Piezoelectric Ceramic Selection 49 3.2.4.2 Calculation of Back Cover Size 51 3.2.4.3 Variable Cross-Sectional, One-Dimensional Longitudinal Vibration Wave Equation 51 3.2.4.4 Calculation of Size of Longitudinal Vibration Transducer Structure 53 3.2.5 Horn Design 53 3.2.6 Design Optimization 54 3.3 Nonresonant Vibration System Design 55 3.3.1 Modeling of Compliant Mechanism 56 3.3.2 Compliance Modeling of Flexure Hinges Based on the Matrix Method 56 3.3.3 Compliance Modeling of Flexure Mechanism 59 3.3.4 Compliance Modeling of the 2 DOF Vibration Stage 61 3.3.5 Dynamic Analysis of the Vibration Stage 62 3.3.6 Finite Element Analysis of the Mechanism 63 3.3.6.1 Structural Optimization 63 3.3.6.2 Static and Dynamic Performance Analysis 63 3.3.7 Piezoelectric Actuator Selection 65 3.3.8 Control System Design 66 3.3.8.1 Control Program Construction 66 3.3.9 Hardware Selection 66 3.3.10 Layout of the Control System 68 3.4 Concluding Remarks 68 References 69 3.A Appendix 70 4 Kinematics Analysis of Vibration-Assisted Machining 73 4.1 Introduction 73 4.2 Kinematics of Vibration-Assisted Turning 74 4.2.1 TWS in 1D VAM Turning 75 4.2.2 TWS in 2D VAM Turning 78 4.3 Kinematics of Vibration-Assisted Milling 80 4.3.1 Types of TWS in VAMilling 81 4.3.1.1 Type I 81 4.3.1.2 Type II 82 4.3.1.3 Type III 82 4.3.2 Requirements of TWS 83 4.3.2.1 Type I Separation Requirements 83 4.3.2.2 Type II Separation Requirements 85 4.3.2.3 Type III Separation Requirements 87 4.4 Finite Element Simulation of Vibration-Assisted Milling 89 4.5 Conclusion 93 References 93 5 Tool Wear and Burr Formation Analysis in Vibration-Assisted Machining 95 5.1 Introduction 95 5.2 Tool Wear 95 5.2.1 Classification of Tool Wear 95 5.2.2 Wear Mechanism and Influencing Factors 96 5.2.3 Tool Wear Reduction in Vibration-Assisted Machining 98 5.2.3.1 Mechanical Wear Suppression in 1D Vibration-Assisted Machining 98 5.2.3.2 Mechanical Wear Suppression in 2D Vibration-Assisted Machining 101 5.2.3.3 Thermochemical Wear Suppression in Vibration-Assisted Machining 102 5.2.3.4 Tool Wear Suppression in Vibration-Assisted Micromachining 106 5.2.3.5 Effect of Vibration Parameters on Tool Wear 107 5.3 Burr Formation 108 5.4 Burr Formation and Classification 109 5.5 Burr Reduction in Vibration Assisted Machining 109 5.5.1 Burr Reduction in Vibration-Assisted Micromachining 111 5.6 Concluding Remarks 113 5.6.1 Tool Wear 113 5.6.2 Burr Formation 115 References 115 6 Modeling of Cutting Force in Vibration-Assisted Machining 119 6.1 Introduction 119 6.2 Elliptical Vibration Cutting 120 6.2.1 Elliptical Tool Path Dimensions 120 6.2.2 Analysis and Modeling of EVC Process 120 6.2.2.1 Analysis and Modeling of Tool Motion 120 6.2.2.2 Modeling of Chip Geometric Feature 120 6.2.2.3 Modeling of Transient Cutting Force 124 6.2.3 Validation of the Proposed Method 126 6.3 Vibration-Assisted Milling 127 6.3.1 Tool–Workpiece Separation in Vibration Assisted Milling 128 6.3.2 Verification of Tool–Workpiece Separation 131 6.3.3 Cutting Force Modeling of VAMILL 133 6.3.3.1 Instantaneous Uncut Thickness Model 133 6.3.3.2 Cutting Force Modeling of VAMILL 136 6.3.4 Discussion of Simulation Results and Experiments 137 6.4 Concluding Remarks 143 References 143 7 Finite Element Modeling and Analysis of Vibration-Assisted Machining 145 7.1 Introduction 145 7.2 Size Effect Mechanism in Vibration-Assisted Micro-milling 147 7.2.1 FE Model Setup 148 7.2.2 Simulation Study on Size Effect in Vibration-Assisted Machining 151 7.3 Materials Removal Mechanism in Vibration-Assisted Machining 152 7.3.1 Shear Angle 152 7.3.2 Simulation Study on Chip Formation in Vibration-Assisted Machining 154 7.3.3 Characteristics of Simulated Cutting Force and von-Mises Stress in Vibration-Assisted Micro-milling 156 7.4 Burr Control in Vibration-Assisted Milling 158 7.4.1 Kinematics Analysis 159 7.4.2 Finite Element Simulation 160 7.5 Verification of Simulation Models 161 7.5.1 Tool Wear and Chip Formation 162 7.5.2 Burr Formation 163 7.6 Concluding Remarks 164 References 164 8 Surface Topography Simulation Technology for Vibration-Assisted Machining 167 8.1 Introduction 167 8.2 Surface Generation Modeling in Vibration-Assisted Milling 171 8.2.1 Cutter Edge Modeling 172 8.2.2 Kinematics Analysis of Vibration-Assisted Milling 173 8.2.3 Homogeneous Matrix Transformation 174 8.2.3.1 Basic Theory of HMT 174 8.2.3.2 Establishment of HTM in the End Milling Process 174 8.2.3.3 HMT in VAMILL 176 8.2.4 Surface Generation 185 8.2.4.1 Surface Generation Simulation 185 8.3 Vibration-Assisted Milling Experiments 187 8.4 Discussion and Analysis 187 8.4.1 The Influence of the Vibration Parameters on the Surface Wettability 188 8.4.2 Tool Wear Analysis 189 8.5 Concluding Remarks 189 References 189 Index 193

Read more less

Book SynopsisNONLINEAR OPTICAL TECHNOLOGY Comprehensive resources describing today's Nonlinear Optics (NLO) technology, its applications, and concepts behind the technology Taking shape at the unique interdisciplinary engineering school at Dartmouth College, Nonlinear Optical Technology explores the importance of NLO in terms of how it permeates a vast number of applications such as fiber optics, biomedicine, sensors (especially Internet of Things), microscopy, spectroscopy, and machining, under the assumption engineers of all stripes may end up working in technical areas impacted by Nonlinear Optics (NLO) and would benefit from learning about the field. Each section follows a set format, beginning by describing some exciting new technology made possible by NLO. This part is followed by a description of the background information necessary for students to understand the basic NLO concepts for that application. The author occasionally includes personal experiences as

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis groundbreaking book covers the recent advances in sustainable technologies and developments, and describes how green chemistry and engineering practices are being applied and integrated in various industrial sectors. Over the past decade, the population explosion, rise in global warming, depletion of fossil fuel resources and environmental pollution have been the major driving force for promoting and implementing the principles of green chemistry and sustainable engineering in all sectors ranging from chemical to environmental sciences. It plays a growing role in the chemical processing industries. Green chemistry and engineering are relatively new areas focused on minimizing generations of pollution by utilizing alternative feedstocks, developing, selecting, and using less environmentally harmful solvents, finding new synthesis pathways, improving selectivity in reactions, generating less waste, avoiding the use of highly toxic compounds, and much more. In

Read more less

Book SynopsisA design reference for engineers developing composite components for automotive chassis, suspension, and drivetrain applications This book provides a theoretical background for the development of elements of car suspensions. It begins with a description of the elastic-kinematics of the vehicle and closed form solutions for the vertical and lateral dynamics. It evaluates the vertical, lateral, and roll stiffness of the vehicle, and explains the necessity of the modelling of the vehicle stiffness. The composite materials for the suspension and powertrain design are discussed and their mechanical properties are provided. The book also looks at the basic principles for the design optimization using composite materials and mass reduction principles. Additionally, references and conclusions are presented in each chapter. Design and Analysis of Composite Structures for Automotive Applications: Chassis and Drivetrain offers complete coverage of chassis componentsTable of ContentsForeword xiii Series Preface xv List of Symbols and Abbreviations xvii Introduction xxiii About the Companion Website xxxv 1 Elastic Anisotropic Behavior of Composite Materials 1 1.1 Anisotropic Elasticity of Composite Materials 1 1.1.1 Fourth Rank Tensor Notation of Hooke’s Law 1 1.1.2 Voigt’s Matrix Notation of Hooke’s Law 2 1.1.3 Kelvin’s Matrix Notation of Hooke’s Law 5 1.2 Unidirectional Fiber Bundle 7 1.2.1 Components of a Unidirectional Fiber Bundle 7 1.2.2 Elastic Properties of a Unidirectional Fiber Bundle 7 1.2.3 Effective Elastic Constants of Unidirectional Composites 8 1.3 Rotational Transformations of Material Laws, Stress and Strain 10 1.3.1 Rotation of Fourth Rank Elasticity Tensors 11 1.3.2 Rotation of Elasticity Matrices in Voigt’s Notation 11 1.3.3 Rotation of Elasticity Matrices in Kelvin’s Notation 13 1.4 Elasticity Matrices for Laminated Plates 14 1.4.1 Voigt’s Matrix Notation for Anisotropic Plates 14 1.4.2 Rotation of Matrices in Voigt’s Notation 15 1.4.3 Kelvin’s Matrix Notation for Anisotropic Plates 15 1.4.4 Rotation of Matrices in Kelvin’s Notation 16 1.5 Coupling Effects of Anisotropic Laminates 17 1.5.1 Orthotropic Laminate Without Coupling 17 1.5.2 Anisotropic Laminate Without Coupling 17 1.5.3 Anisotropic Laminate With Coupling 17 1.5.4 Coupling Effects in Laminated Thin-Walled Sections 18 1.6 Conclusions 18 References 19 2 Phenomenological Failure Criteria of Composites 21 2.1 Phenomenological Failure Criteria 21 2.1.1 Criteria for Static Failure Behavior 21 2.1.2 Stress Failure Criteria for Isotropic Homogenous Materials 21 2.1.3 Phenomenological Failure Criteria for Composites 22 2.1.4 Phenomenological Criteria Without Stress Coupling 23 2.1.4.1 Criterion of Maximum Averaged Stresses 23 2.1.4.2 Criterion of Maximum Averaged Strains 24 2.1.5 Phenomenological Criteria with Stress Coupling 24 2.1.5.1 Mises–Hill Anisotropic Failure Criterion 24 2.1.5.2 Pressure-Sensitive Mises–Hill Anisotropic Failure Criterion 26 2.1.5.3 Tensor-Polynomial Failure Criterion 27 2.1.5.4 Tsai–Wu Criterion 30 2.1.5.5 Assessment of Coefficients in Tensor-Polynomial Criteria 30 2.2 Differentiating Criteria 33 2.2.1 Fiber and Intermediate Break Criteria 33 2.2.2 Hashin Strength Criterion 33 2.2.3 Delamination Criteria 35 2.3 Physically Based Failure Criteria 35 2.3.1 Puck Criterion 35 2.3.2 Cuntze Criterion 36 2.4 Rotational Transformation of Anisotropic Failure Criteria 37 2.5 Conclusions 40 References 40 3 Micromechanical Failure Criteria of Composites 45 3.1 Pullout of Fibers from the Elastic-Plastic Matrix 45 3.1.1 Axial Tension of Fiber and Matrix 45 3.1.2 Shear Stresses in Matrix Cylinders 51 3.1.3 Coupled Elongation of Fibers and Matrix 53 3.1.4 Failures in Matrix and Fibers 54 3.1.4.1 Equations for Mean Axial Displacements of Fibers and Matrix 54 3.1.4.2 Solutions of Equations for Mean Axial Displacements of Fibers and Matrix 56 3.1.5 Rupture of Matrix and Pullout of Fibers from Crack Edges in a Matrix 57 3.1.5.1 Elastic Elongation (Case I) 57 3.1.5.2 Plastic Sliding on the Fiber Surface (Case II) 58 3.1.5.3 Fiber Breakage (Case III) 58 3.1.6 Rupture of Fibers, Matrix Joints and Crack Edges 59 3.2 Crack Bridging in Elastic-Plastic Unidirectional Composites 60 3.2.1 Crack Bridging in Unidirectional Fiber-Reinforced Composites 60 3.2.2 Matrix Crack Growth 61 3.2.3 Fiber Crack Growth 62 3.2.4 Penny-Shaped Crack 65 3.2.4.1 Crack in a Transversal-Isotropic Medium 65 3.2.4.2 Mechanisms of the Fracture Process 66 3.2.4.3 Crack Bridging in an Orthotropic Body With Disk Crack 66 3.2.4.4 Solution to an Axially Symmetric Crack Problem 68 3.2.5 Plane Crack Problem 72 3.2.5.1 Equations of the Plane Crack Problem 72 3.2.5.2 Solution to the Plane Crack Problem 74 3.3 Debonding of Fibers in Unidirectional Composites 75 3.3.1 Axial Deformation of Unidirectional Fiber Composites 75 3.3.2 Stresses in Unidirectional Composite in Cases of Ideal Debonding or Adhesion 79 3.3.2.1 Equations of an Axially Loaded Unidirectional Compound Medium (A) 79 3.3.2.2 Total Debonding (B) 82 3.3.2.3 Ideal Adhesion (C) 83 3.3.3 Stresses in a Unidirectional Composite in a Case of Partial Debonding 84 3.3.3.1 Partial Radial Load on the Fiber Surface 84 3.3.3.2 Partial Radial Load on the Matrix Cavity Surface 84 3.3.3.3 Partial Debonding With Central Adhesion Region (D) 85 3.3.3.4 Partial Debonding With Central Debonding Region (E) 88 3.3.3.5 Semi-Infinite Debonding With Central Debonding Region (F) 89 3.3.4 Contact Problem for a Finite Adhesion Region 89 3.3.5 Debonding of a Semi-Infinite Adhesion Region 93 3.3.6 Debonding of Fibers from a Matrix Under Cyclic Deformation 95 3.4 Conclusions 98 References 98 4 Optimization Principles for Structural Elements Made of Composites 105 4.1 Stiffness Optimization of Anisotropic Structural Elements 105 4.1.1 Optimization Problem 105 4.1.2 Optimality Conditions 106 4.1.3 Optimal Solutions in Anti-Plane Elasticity 109 4.1.4 Optimal Solutions in Plane Elasticity 109 4.2 Optimization of Strength and Loading Capacity of Anisotropic Elements 110 4.2.1 Optimization Problem 110 4.2.2 Optimality Conditions 113 4.2.3 Optimal Solutions in Anti-Plane Elasticity 114 4.2.4 Optimal Solutions in Plane Elasticity 114 4.3 Optimization of Accumulated Elastic Energy in Flexible Anisotropic Elements 116 4.3.1 Optimization Problem 116 4.3.2 Optimality Conditions 117 4.3.3 Optimal Solutions in Anti-Plane Elasticity 118 4.3.4 Optimal Solutions in Plane Elasticity 119 4.4 Optimal Anisotropy in a Twisted Rod 119 4.5 Optimal Anisotropy of Bending Console 122 4.6 Optimization of Plates in Bending 123 4.7 Conclusions 125 References 125 5 Optimization of Composite Driveshaft 129 5.1 Torsion of Anisotropic Shafts With Solid Cross-Sections 129 5.2 Thin-Walled Anisotropic Driveshaft with Closed Profile 132 5.2.1 Geometry of Cross-Section 132 5.2.2 Main Kinematic Hypothesis 133 5.3 Deformation of a Composite Thin-Walled Rod 135 5.3.1 Equations of Deformation of a AnisotropicThin-Walled Rod 135 5.3.2 Boundary Conditions 138 5.3.2.1 Ideal Fixing 138 5.3.2.2 Ideally Free End 138 5.3.2.3 Boundary Conditions of the Intermediate Type 140 5.3.3 Governing Equations in Special Cases of Symmetry 140 5.3.3.1 Orthotropic Material 140 5.3.3.2 Constant Elastic Properties Along the Arc of a Cross-Section 140 5.3.4 Symmetry of Section 140 5.4 Buckling of Composite Driveshafts Under a Twist Moment 141 5.4.1 Greenhill’s Buckling of Driveshafts 141 5.4.2 Optimal Shape of the Solid Cross-Section for Driveshaft 143 5.4.3 Hollow Circular and Triangular Cross-Sections 144 5.5 Patents for Composite Driveshafts 146 5.6 Conclusions 150 References 150 6 Dynamics of a Vehicle with Rigid Structural Elements of Chassis 155 6.1 Classification of Wheel Suspensions 155 6.1.1 Common Designs of Suspensions 155 6.1.2 Types of Twist-Beam Axles 156 6.1.3 Kinematics of Wheel Suspensions 157 6.2 Fundamental Models in Vehicle Dynamics 159 6.2.1 Basic Variables of Vehicle Dynamics 159 6.2.2 Coordinate Systems of Vehicle and Local Coordinate Systems 161 6.2.2.1 Earth-Fixed Coordinate System 161 6.2.2.2 Vehicle-Fixed Coordinate System 162 6.2.2.3 Horizontal Coordinate System 162 6.2.2.4 Wheel Coordinate System 162 6.2.3 Angle Definitions 162 6.2.4 Components of Force and Moments in Car Dynamics 163 6.2.5 Degrees of Freedom of a Vehicle 163 6.3 Forces Between Tires and Road 167 6.3.1 Tire Slip 167 6.3.2 Side Slip Curve and Lateral Force Properties 168 6.4 Dynamic Equations of a Single-Track Model 170 6.4.1 Hypotheses of a Single-Track Model 170 6.4.2 Moments and Forces in a Single-Track Model 171 6.4.3 Balance of Forces and Moments in a Single-Track Model 173 6.4.4 Steady Cornering 174 6.4.4.1 Necessary Steer Angle for Steady Cornering 174 6.4.4.2 Yaw Gain Factor and Steer Angle Gradient 175 6.4.4.3 Classification of Self-Steering Behavior 176 6.4.5 Non-Steady Cornering 179 6.4.5.1 Equations of Non-Stationary Cornering 179 6.4.5.2 Oscillatory Behavior of Vehicle During Non-Steady Cornering 180 6.4.6 Anti-Roll Bars Made of Composite Materials 181 6.5 Conclusions 182 References 182 7 Dynamics of a Vehicle With Flexible, Anisotropic Structural Elements of Chassis 183 7.1 Effects of Body and Chassis Elasticity on Vehicle Dynamics 183 7.1.1 Influence of Body Stiffness on Vehicle Dynamics 183 7.1.2 Lateral Dynamics of Vehicles With Stiff Rear Axles 184 7.1.3 Induced Effects on Wheel Orientation and Positioning of Vehicles with Flexible Rear Axle 185 7.2 Self-Steering Behavior of a Vehicle With Coupling of Bending and Torsion 188 7.2.1 Countersteering for Vehicles with Twist-Beam Axles 188 7.2.1.1 Countersteering Mechanisms 188 7.2.1.2 Countersteering by Anisotropic Coupling of Bending and Torsion 190 7.2.2 Bending-Twist Coupling of a Countersteering Twist-Beam Axle 192 7.2.3 Roll Angle of Vehicle 193 7.2.3.1 Relationship Between Roll Angle and Centrifugal Force 193 7.2.3.2 Lateral Reaction Forces on Wheels 193 7.2.3.3 Steer Angles on Front Wheels 194 7.2.3.4 Steer Angles on Rear Wheels 194 7.3 Steady Cornering of a Flexible Vehicle 196 7.3.1 Stationary Cornering of a Car With a Flexible Chassis 196 7.3.2 Necessary Steer Angles for Coupling and Flexibility of Chassis 196 7.3.2.1 Limit Case: Lateral Acceleration Vanishes 196 7.3.2.2 Absolutely Rigid Front and Rear Wheel Suspensions 197 7.3.2.3 Bending and Torsion of a Twist Member Completely Decoupled 197 7.3.2.4 General Case of Coupling Between Bending and Torsion of a Twist Member 198 7.3.2.5 Neutral Steering Caused by Coupling Between Bending and Torsion of a Twist Member 198 7.4 Estimation of Coupling Constant for a Twist Member 199 7.4.1 Coupling Between Vehicle Roll Angle and Twist of Cross-Member 199 7.4.2 Stiffness Parameters of a Twist-Beam Axle 200 7.4.2.1 Roll Spring Rate 200 7.4.2.2 Lateral Stiffness 201 7.4.2.3 Camber Stiffness 203 7.5 Design of the Countersteering Twist-Beam Axle 203 7.5.1 Requirements for a Countersteering Twist-Beam Axle 203 7.5.2 Selection and Calculation of the Cross-Section for the Cross-Member 205 7.5.3 Elements of a Countersteering Twist-Beam Axle 208 7.6 Patents on Twist-Beam Axles 211 7.7 Conclusions 214 References 214 8 Design and Optimization of Composite Springs 217 8.1 Design and Optimization of Anisotropic Helical Springs 217 8.1.1 Forces and Moments in Helical Composite Springs 217 8.1.2 Symmetrically Designed Solid Bar With Circular Cross-Section 220 8.1.3 Stiffness and Stored Energy of Helical Composite Springs 223 8.1.4 Spring Rates of Helical Composite Springs 225 8.1.5 Helical Composite Springs of Minimal Mass 228 8.1.5.1 Optimization Problem 228 8.1.5.2 Optimal Composite Spring for the Anisotropic Mises–Hill Strength Criterion 228 8.1.6 Axial and Twist Vibrations of Helical Springs 231 8.2 Conical Springs Made of Composite Material 233 8.2.1 Geometry of an Anisotropic Conical Spring in an Undeformed State 233 8.2.2 Curvature and Strain Deviations 235 8.2.3 Thin-Walled Conical Shells Made of Anisotropic Materials 236 8.2.4 Variation Principle 237 8.2.5 Structural Optimization of a Conical Spring Due to Ply Orientation 239 8.2.6 Conical Spring Made of Orthotropic Material 241 8.2.7 Bounds for Stiffness of a Spring Made of Orthotropic Material 243 8.3 Alternative Concepts for Chassis Springs Made of Composites 244 8.4 Conclusions 248 References 249 9 Equivalent Beams of Helical Anisotropic Springs 255 9.1 Helical Compression Springs Made of Composite Materials 255 9.1.1 Statics of the Equivalent Beam for an Anisotropic Spring 255 9.1.2 Dynamics of an Equivalent Beam for an Anisotropic Spring 258 9.2 Transverse Vibrations of a Composite Spring 260 9.2.1 Separation of Variables 260 9.2.2 Fundamental Frequencies of Transversal Vibrations 262 9.2.3 Transverse Vibrations of a Symmetrically Stacked Helical Spring 264 9.3 Side Buckling of a Helical Composite Spring 265 9.3.1 Buckling Under Axial Force 265 9.3.2 Simplified Formulas for Buckling of a Symmetrically Stacked Helical Spring 266 9.4 Conclusions 267 References 267 10 Composite Leaf Springs 269 10.1 Longitudinally Mounted Leaf Springs for Solid Axles 269 10.1.1 Predominantly Bending-Loaded Leaf Springs 269 10.1.2 Moments and Forces of Leaf Springs in a Pure Bending State 270 10.1.3 Optimization of Leaf Springs for an Anisotropic Mises–Hill Criterion 272 10.2 Leaf-Tension Springs 275 10.2.1 Combined Bending and Tension of a Spring 275 10.2.2 Forces and Rates of Leaf-Tension Springs 277 10.3 Transversally Mounted Leaf Springs 278 10.3.1 Axle Concepts of Transverse Leaf Springs 278 10.3.2 Analysis of a Transverse Leaf Spring 280 10.3.3 Examples and Patents for Transversely Mounted Leaf Springs 283 10.4 Conclusions 286 References 287 11 Meander-Shaped Springs 289 11.1 Meander-Shaped Compression Springs for Automotive Suspensions 289 11.1.1 Bending Stress State of Corrugated Springs 289 11.1.2 “Equivalent Beam” of a Meander Spring 292 11.1.3 Axial and Lateral Stiffness of Corrugated Springs 292 11.1.4 Effective Spring Constants of Meander and Coil Springs for Bending and Compression 293 11.2 Multiarc-Profiled Spring Under Axial Compressive Load 294 11.2.1 Multiarc Meander Spring With Constant Cross-Section 294 11.2.2 Multiarc Meander Spring With Optimal Cross-Section 297 11.2.3 Comparison of Masses for Fixed Spring Rate and Stress 298 11.3 Sinusoidal Spring Under Compressive Axial Load 299 11.3.1 Sinusoidal Meander Spring With Constant Cross-Section 299 11.3.2 Sinusoidal Meander Spring With Optimal Cross-Section 301 11.3.3 Comparison of Masses for Fixed Spring Rate and Stress 302 11.4 Bending Stiffness of Meander Spring With a Constant Cross-Section 303 11.4.1 Bending Stiffness of a Multiarc Meander Spring With a Constant Cross-Section 303 11.4.2 Bending Stiffness of a Sinusoidal Meander Spring with a Constant Cross-Section 303 11.5 Stability of Corrugated Springs 304 11.5.1 Euler’s Buckling of an Axially Compressed Rod 304 11.5.2 Side Buckling of Meander Springs 306 11.6 Patents for Chassis Springs Made of Composites in Meandering Form 307 11.7 Conclusions 314 References 315 12 Hereditary Mechanics of Composite Springs and Driveshafts 317 12.1 Elements of Hereditary Mechanics of Composite Materials 317 12.1.1 Mechanisms of Time-Dependent Deformation of Composites 317 12.1.2 Linear Viscoelasticity of Composites 318 12.1.3 Nonlinear Creep Mechanics of Anisotropic Materials 319 12.1.4 Anisotropic Norton–Bailey Law 321 12.2 Creep and Relaxation of Twisted Composite Shafts 322 12.2.1 Constitutive Equations for Relaxation in Torsion of Anisotropic Shafts 322 12.2.2 Torque Relaxation for an Anisotropic Norton–Bailey Law 322 12.3 Creep and Relaxation of Composite Helical Coiled Springs 323 12.3.1 Compression and Tension Composite Springs 323 12.3.2 Relaxation of Helical Composite Springs 324 12.3.3 Creep of Helical Composite Compression Springs 324 12.4 Creep and Relaxation of Composite Springs in a State of Pure Bending 325 12.4.1 Constitutive Equations for Bending Relaxation 325 12.4.2 Relaxation of the Bending Moment for the Anisotropic Norton–Bailey Law 326 12.4.3 Creep in a State of Bending 326 12.5 Conclusions 327 References 327 Appendix A Mechanical Properties of Composites 331 A.1 Fibers 331 A.1.1 Glass Fibers 331 A.1.2 Carbon Fibers 331 A.1.3 Aramid Fibers 331 A.2 Physical Properties of Resin 332 A.3 Laminates 334 A.3.1 Unidirectional Fiber-Reinforced Composite Material 334 A.3.2 Fabric 334 A.3.3 Non-Woven Fabric 334 References 335 Appendix B Anisotropic Elasticity 337 B.1 Elastic Orthotropic Body 337 B.2 Distortion Energy and Supplementary Energy 338 B.3 Plane Elasticity Problems 339 B.3.1 Plane Strain State 339 B.3.2 Plane Stress State 339 B.4 Generalized Airy Stress Function 340 B.4.1 Plane Stress State 340 B.4.2 Plane Strain State 340 B.4.3 Rotationally Symmetric Elasticity Problems 340 Appendix C Integral Transforms in Elasticity 343 C.1 One-Dimensional Integral Transform 343 C.2 Two-Dimensional Fourier Transform 344 C.3 Potential Functions for Plane Elasticity Problems 344 C.4 Rotationally Symmetric, Spatial Elasticity Problems 346 C.5 Application of the Fourier Transformation to Plane Elasticity Problems 348 C.6 Application of the Hankel Transformation to Spatial, Rotation-Symmetric Elasticity Problems 349 Index 351

Read more less

Book SynopsisComprehensively covers the engineering aspects of corrosion and materials in hydrocarbon production This book captures the current understanding of corrosion processes in upstream operations and provides a brief overview of parameters and measures needed for optimum design of facilities. It focuses on internal corrosion occurring in hydrocarbon production environments and the key issues affecting its occurrence, including: the types and morphology of corrosion damage; principal metallic materials deployed; and mitigating measures to optimise its occurrence. The book also highlights important areas of progress and challenges, and looks toward the future of research and development to enable improved and economical design of facilities for oil and a gas production. Written for both those familiar and unfamiliar with the subjectand by two authors with more than 60 years combined industry experiencethis book covers everything from Corrosion Resistant Alloys (CRAs) tTable of ContentsPreface xvii Acknowledgement xix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Scope and Objectives 2 1.2 The Impact of Corrosion 2 1.3 Principal Types of Corrosion in Hydrocarbon Production 5 1.4 The Way Ahead: Positive Corrosion 7 1.5 Summary 8 References 9 Bibliography 9 2 Carbon and Low Alloy Steels (CLASs) 11 2.1 Steel Products 11 2.2 Development of Mechanical Properties 12 2.3 Strengthening Mechanisms 14 2.4 Hardenability 16 2.5 Weldability 16 2.6 Line Pipe Steels 17 2.7 Well Completion Downhole Tubulars 17 2.8 Internally Clad Materials 18 2.9 Summary 18 Reference 20 Bibliography 20 API/ISO Specifications 20 ASME Standard 21 Further Reading 21 3 Corrosion‐Resistant Alloys (CRAs) 23 3.1 Background 23 3.2 Alloying Elements, Microstructures, and their Significance for Corrosion Performance 24 3.3 Common Types/Grades of CRA Used in the Hydrocarbon Production Systems 30 3.4 Important Metallurgical Aspects of CRAs 33 3.5 Limits of Application 36 3.6 Selection Criteria 37 3.7 Future Demands and Requirements 39 3.8 Summary 40 References 41 Bibliography 42 Specifications 42 Further Reading 42 4 Water Chemistry 43 4.1 Sources of Water 44 4.2 Water Chemistry 45 4.3 Other Impacts on Corrosivity 46 4.4 Water Sampling Locations and Analysis Techniques 49 4.5 Influential Parameters in System Corrosivity 53 4.6 Summary 54 References 54 Bibliography 55 Standards 55 5 Internal Metal Loss Corrosion Threats 57 5.1 CO2 Metal Loss Corrosion 58 5.2 Key Influential Factors 60 5.3 Metal Loss CO2 Corrosion Prediction 63 5.4 Metal Loss Corrosion in Mixed H2S/CO2 Containing Streams 66 5.5 Summary 68 References 69 Bibliography 71 6 Environmental Cracking (EC) 73 6.1 Environmental Cracking Threat in Steels 73 6.2 EC Associated with Hydrogen Sulphide 74 6.3 Current Industry Practices 83 6.4 ISO 15156 83 6.5 Summary 86 Bibliography 87 7 Corrosion in Injection Systems 89 7.1 The Intent 90 7.2 Injection Systems 90 7.3 Water Treatment Methods 92 7.4 Water Corrosivity 94 7.5 Means of Corrosion Prediction 95 7.6 Materials Options 97 7.7 Supplementary Notes 100 7.8 Hydrotesting 101 7.9 Summary 103 References 104 Bibliography 104 8 Corrosion Mitigation by the Use of Inhibitor Chemicals 105 8.1 Inhibitor Characteristics 105 8.2 Inhibitor Testing and Application 111 8.3 Inhibitor Application/Deployment 116 8.4 Summary 119 References 120 9 Coating Systems 123 9.1 External Pipeline Coatings 123 9.2 Internal Coating and Lining 128 9.3 External Painting of Structures 130 9.4 Summary 132 References 132 Bibliography 132 10 Corrosion Trending 133 10.1 The Purpose of Corrosion Trending 134 10.2 Corrosion Monitoring 135 10.3 Corrosion Barrier Monitoring 142 10.4 Collection and Analysis of Real‐Time Monitoring Data 143 10.5 Downhole Corrosion Monitoring 145 10.6 Inspection Techniques 146 10.7 Intelligent Pigging 147 10.8 Future Considerations 149 10.9 Summary 150 References 150 Bibliography 151 Specifications 151 11 Microbiologically Influenced Corrosion (MIC) 153 11.1 Main Features 154 11.2 The Primary Causes 155 11.3 The Motive for Promotion of Corrosion by Micro‐organisms 157 11.4 Most Susceptible Locations and Conditions 161 11.5 Potential Prevention Measures 165 11.6 Means of Monitoring 168 11.7 Summary 170 References 171 Bibliography 172 12 Dense Phase CO2 Corrosion 173 12.1 Background 173 12.2 CO2 Stream Composition 175 12.3 Corrosion in the Presence of Aqueous Phases 177 12.4 Means of Corrosion Prediction 178 12.5 Method of Corrosion Mitigation 179 12.6 Summary 181 References 181 13 Corrosion Under Insulation (CUI) 183 13.1 Historical Context 183 13.2 Key Parameters Affecting CUI 184 13.3 CUI Prevention Methods 189 13.4 CUI Mitigation Strategy 192 13.5 CUI Inspection 193 13.6 NDE/NDT Techniques to Detect CUI 195 13.7 Summary 196 References 197 14 Metallic Materials Optimisation Routes 199 14.1 Background 199 14.2 Production Facilities 200 14.3 The Operating Regimes 204 14.4 System Corrosivity 205 14.5 Oxygen Corrosion 206 14.6 Metallic Materials Optimisation Methodology 206 14.7 Materials Options 207 14.8 Internal Corrosion Mitigation Methods 208 14.9 Whole Life Cost (WLC) Analysis 210 14.10 Materials Optimisation Strategy 211 14.11 Summary 212 References 212 Bibliography 213 15 Non‐metallic Materials: Elastomer Seals and Non‐metallic Liners 215 15.1 Elastomer Seals 215 15.2 Non‐metallic Liner Options for Corrosion Control 221 15.3 Flexible Pipes 226 15.4 Summary 229 References 230 Bibliography 230 16 Cathodic Protection (CP) 231 16.1 Key Points of Effectiveness 232 16.2 Cathodic Protection in Environmental Waters 232 16.3 Cathodic Protection and Hydrogen‐Induced Cracking (HAC) 237 16.4 Cathodic Protection of Structures in Contact with the Ground 238 16.5 Cathodic Protection of Well Casings 240 16.6 Cathodic Protection and AC Interference 241 16.7 Inspection and Testing 242 16.8 Internal Cathodic Protection Systems 242 16.9 Summary 242 16.10 Terminologies 243 References 244 Bibliography 245 17 Corrosion Risk Analysis 247 17.1 Risk 248 17.2 The Bow Tie Concept 248 17.3 Risk Matrix 249 17.4 Corrosion RBA Process 250 17.5 Corrosion RBA: Input 251 17.6 Corrosion RBA: Analysis 252 17.7 Corrosion RBA: Output 255 17.8 Corrosion RBA: Overall Process 257 17.9 Risky Business 258 17.10 Behaviours 258 17.11 Bayes’ Theorem 259 17.12 Moving Forward 260 17.13 Summary 260 References 261 18 Corrosion and Integrity Management 263 18.1 Integrity Management (IM) 263 18.2 Corrosion Management (CM) 266 18.3 Data Management 271 18.4 The Future 274 18.5 Summary 275 References 276 Bibliography 276 19 Corrosion and Materials Challenges in Hydrocarbon Production 277 19.1 Energy Viewpoint and the Role of Technology 277 19.2 Future Focus Areas and Horizon 278 19.3 Challenges in Materials and Corrosion Technology 278 19.4 Shortfalls in Technology Implementation and Knowledge Partnership 279 19.5 Summary 284 References 284 Bibliography 286 Abbreviations 287 Index 291

Read more less

Book SynopsisA newly updated and expanded edition that combines theory and applications of turbomachinery while covering several different types of turbomachinery In mechanical engineering, turbomachinery describes machines that transfer energy between a rotor and a fluid, including turbines, compressors, and pumps. Aiming for a unified treatment of the subject matter, with consistent notation and concepts, this new edition of a highly popular book provides all new information on turbomachinery, and includes 50% more exercises than the previous edition. It allows readers to easily move from a study of the most successful textbooks on thermodynamics and fluid dynamics to the subject of turbomachinery. The book also builds concepts systematically as progress is made through each chapter so that the user can progress at their own pace. Principles of Turbomachinery, 2nd Edition provides comprehensive coverage of everything readers need to know, including chapters on: therTable of ContentsForeword xv Acknowledgments xvii About the Companion Website xix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Energy and Fluid Machines 1 1.1.1 Energy conversion of fossil fuels 1 1.1.2 Steam turbines 2 1.1.3 Gas turbines 3 1.1.4 Hydraulic turbines 4 1.1.5 Wind turbines 5 1.1.6 Compressors 5 1.1.7 Pumps and blowers 5 1.1.8 Other uses and issues 6 1.2 Historical Survey 7 1.2.1 Water power 7 1.2.2 Wind turbines 8 1.2.3 Steam turbines 9 1.2.4 Jet propulsion 10 1.2.5 Industrial turbines 11 1.2.6 Pumps and compressors 11 1.2.7 Note on units 12 2 Principles of Thermodynamics and Fluid Flow 15 2.1 Mass Conservation Principle 15 2.2 First Law of Thermodynamics 17 2.3 Second Law of Thermodynamics 19 2.3.1 Tds-equations 19 2.4 Equations of State 20 2.4.1 Properties of steam 21 2.4.2 Ideal gases 27 2.4.3 Air tables and isentropic relations 29 2.4.4 Ideal gas mixtures 32 2.4.5 Incompressibility 36 2.4.6 Stagnation state 37 2.5 Efficiency 37 2.5.1 Efficiency measures 37 2.5.2 Thermodynamic losses 43 2.5.3 Incompressible fluid 45 2.5.4 Compressible flows 46 2.6 Momentum Balance 48 Exercises 56 3 Compressible Flow 63 3.1 Mach Number and The Speed of Sound 63 3.1.1 Mach number relations 65 3.2 Isentropic Flow with Area Change 67 3.2.1 Converging nozzle 71 3.3 Influence of Friction on Flow Through Nozzles 73 3.3.1 Polytropic efficiency 73 3.3.2 Loss coefficients 77 3.3.3 Nozzle efficiency 81 3.3.4 Combined Fanno flow and area change 82 3.4 Supersonic Nozzle 87 3.5 Normal Shocks 90 3.5.1 Rankine–Hugoniot relations 95 3.6 Moving Shocks 98 3.7 Oblique shocks and Expansion Fans 100 3.7.1 Mach waves 100 3.7.2 Oblique shocks 101 3.7.3 Supersonic flow over a rounded concave corner 107 3.7.4 Reflected shocks and shock interactions 108 3.7.5 Mach reflection 110 3.7.6 Detached oblique shocks 110 3.7.7 Prandtl–Meyer theory 112 Exercises 124 4 Gas Dynamics of Wet Steam 131 4.1 Compressible Flow of Wet Steam 132 4.1.1 Clausius–Clapeyron equation 132 4.1.2 Adiabatic exponent 133 4.2 Conservation Equations for Wet Steam 137 4.2.1 Relaxation times 139 4.2.2 Conservation equations in their working form 144 4.2.3 Sound speeds 146 4.3 Relaxation Zones 149 4.3.1 Type I wave 149 4.3.2 Type II wave 154 4.3.3 Type III wave 157 4.3.4 Combined relaxation 157 4.3.5 Flow in a variable area nozzle 159 4.4 Shocks in Wet Steam 161 4.4.1 Evaporation in the flow after the shock 164 4.5 Condensation Shocks 167 4.5.1 Jump conditions across a condensation shock 169 Exercises 174 5 Principles of Turbomachine Analysis 177 5.1 Velocity Triangles 178 5.2 Moment of Momentum Balance 181 5.3 Energy Transfer in Turbomachines 182 5.3.1 Trothalpy and specific work in terms of velocities 186 5.3.2 Degree of reaction 189 5.4 Utilization 191 5.5 Scaling and Similitude 198 5.5.1 Similitude 198 5.5.2 Incompressible flow 199 5.5.3 Shape parameter or specific speed and specific diameter 202 5.5.4 Compressible flow analysis 206 5.6 Performance Characteristics 208 5.6.1 Compressor performance map 208 5.6.2 Turbine performance map 209 Exercises 210 6 Steam Turbines 215 6.1 Introduction 215 6.2 Impulse Turbines 217 6.2.1 Single-stage impulse turbine 217 6.2.2 Pressure compounding 226 6.2.3 Blade shapes 230 6.2.4 Velocity compounding 233 6.3 Stage with Zero Reaction 238 6.4 Loss Coefficients 241 Exercises 243 7 Axial Turbines 247 7.1 Introduction 247 7.2 Turbine Stage Analysis 249 7.3 Flow and Loading Coefficients and Reaction Ratio 253 7.3.1 Fifty percent (50%) stage 258 7.3.2 Zero percent (0%) reaction stage 262 7.3.3 Off-design operation 263 7.3.4 Variable axial velocity 265 7.4 Three-Dimensional Flow and Radial Equilibrium 267 7.4.1 Free vortex flow 269 7.4.2 Fixed blade angle 273 7.4.3 Constant mass flux 273 7.5 Turbine Efficiency and Losses 276 7.5.1 Soderberg loss coefficients 276 7.5.2 Stage efficiency 277 7.5.3 Stagnation pressure losses 279 7.5.4 Performance charts 285 7.5.5 Zweifel correlation 290 7.5.6 Further discussion of losses 291 7.5.7 Ainley–Mathieson correlation 293 7.5.8 Secondary loss 296 7.6 Multistage Turbine 302 7.6.1 Reheat factor in a multistage turbine 302 7.6.2 Polytropic or small-stage efficiency 304 Exercises 305 8 Axial Compressors 311 8.1 Compressor Stage Analysis 312 8.1.1 Stage temperature and pressure rise 313 8.1.2 Analysis of a repeating stage 315 8.2 Design Deflection 321 8.2.1 Compressor performance map 324 8.3 Radial Equilibrium 326 8.3.1 Modified free vortex velocity distribution 327 8.3.2 Velocity distribution with zero-power exponent 330 8.3.3 Velocity distribution with first-power exponent 331 8.4 Diffusion Factor 333 8.4.1 Momentum thickness of a boundary layer 335 8.5 Efficiency and Losses 339 8.5.1 Efficiency 339 8.5.2 Parametric calculations 342 8.6 Cascade Aerodynamics 343 8.6.1 Blade shapes and terms 344 8.6.2 Blade forces 345 8.6.3 Other losses 347 8.6.4 Diffuser performance 348 8.6.5 Flow deviation and incidence 349 8.6.6 Multi-stage compressor 351 8.6.7 Compressibility effects 352 8.6.8 Design of a compressor 353 Exercises 359 9 Centrifugal Compressors and Pumps 363 9.1 Compressor Analysis 364 9.1.1 Slip factor 365 9.1.2 Pressure ratio 367 9.2 Inlet Design 374 9.2.1 Choking of the inducer 379 9.3 Exit Design 381 9.3.1 Performance characteristics 381 9.3.2 Diffusion ratio 384 9.3.3 Blade height 385 9.4 Vaneless Diffuser 387 9.5 Centrifugal Pumps 391 9.5.1 Specific speed and specific diameter 395 9.6 Fans 403 9.7 Cavitation 404 9.8 Diffuser and Volute Design 406 9.8.1 Vaneless diffuser 406 9.8.2 Volute design 407 Exercises 411 10 Radial Inflow Turbines 415 10.1 Turbine Analysis 416 10.2 Efficiency 421 10.3 Specific Speed and Specific Diameter 425 10.4 Stator Flow 431 10.4.1 Loss coefficients for stator flow 436 10.5 Design of the Inlet of a Radial Inflow Turbine 440 10.5.1 Minimum inlet Mach number 441 10.5.2 Blade stagnation Mach number 447 10.5.3 Inlet relative Mach number 449 10.6 Design of the Exit 450 10.6.1 Minimum exit Mach number 450 10.6.2 Radius ratio r3s/r2 453 10.6.3 Blade height-to-radius ratio b2/r2 454 10.6.4 Optimum incidence angle and the number of blades 455 Exercises 460 11 Hydraulic Turbines 463 11.1 Hydroelectric Power Plants 463 11.2 Hydraulic Turbines and their Specific Speed 465 11.3 Pelton Wheel 467 11.4 Francis Turbine 475 11.5 Kaplan Turbine 483 11.6 Cavitation 486 Exercises 488 12 Hydraulic Transmission of Power 491 12.1 Fluid Couplings 491 12.1.1 Fundamental relations 492 12.1.2 Flow rate and hydrodynamic losses 494 12.1.3 Partially filled coupling 496 12.2 Torque Converters 497 12.2.1 Fundamental relations 497 12.2.2 Performance 500 Exercises 504 13 Wind Turbines 507 13.1 Horizontal-Axis Wind Turbine 508 13.2 Momentum Theory of Wind Turbines 509 13.2.1 Axial momentum 509 13.2.2 Ducted wind turbine 514 13.2.3 Wake rotation 516 13.2.4 Irrotational wake 518 13.3 Blade Element Theory 522 13.3.1 Nonrotating wake 522 13.3.2 Wake with rotation 525 13.3.3 Ideal wind turbine 530 13.3.4 Prandtl’s tip correction 532 13.4 Turbomachinery and Future Prospects for Energy 535 Exercises 536 Appendix A: Streamline Curvature and Radial Equilibrium 539 A.1 Streamline Curvature Method 539 A.1.1 Fundamental equations 539 A.1.2 Formal solution 543 Appendix B: Thermodynamic Tables 545 References 559 Index 565

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe 78th Glass Problem Conference (GPC) including the 11th Advances in Fusion and Processing of Glass (AFPG) Symposium is organized by the Kazuo Inamori School of Engineering, The New York State College of Ceramics, Alfred University, Alfred, NY 14802 and The Glass Manufacturing Industry Council (GMIC), Westerville, OH 43082. The Program Director was S. K. Sundaram, Inamori Professor of Materials Science and Engineering, Kazuo Inamori School of Engineering, The New York State College of Ceramics, Alfred University, Alfred, NY 14802. The Conference Director was Robert Weisenburger Lipetz, Executive Director, Glass Manufacturing Industry Council (GMIC), Westerville, OH 43082. Donna Banks of the GMIC coordinated the events and provided support. The Conference started with a half-day plenary session followed by technical sessions. The themes and chairs of four half-day technical sessions were as follows: Modeling, Sensors, and Furnace DesignJames Uhlik, Toledo EngineTable of ContentsForeword ix Preface xi Acknowledgments xiii 78th GLASS PROBLEMS CONFERENCE Modeling, Sensors, and Furnace Design Optimization of Regenerator Design 5Oscar Verheijen, Luuk Thielen, Goetz Heilemann, and Elias Carrillo Glass Defects Identification using a Mass Spectrometer, SEMEDX Microanalysis and HTO Analysis 13Martina Jezikova, Filip Janos, Jiri Ullrich, and Erik Muijsenberg A New Radiometric Measurement Device for the Temperature of Ribbon Zones in Tin Bath and Lehrs 29Wolf Kuhn Furnace Design and Equipment for Extended Furnace Life 39Christoph Jatzauk Use of Continuous Infrared Temperature Image to Optimize Furnace Operations 4Neil G. Simpson, Mark Bennett, and S. Fiona Turner Refractories & Testing Acceptance Test of Fused Cast AZS Sidewall Blocks using Ground Penetrating Radar 59Dan Swiler and Daniel Ragland New Industry Standard in Furnace Inspection 75Yakup Bayram, Jon Wechsel, and Elmer Sperry Combustion Design and Implementation of OPTIMELT™ Heat Recovery for an Oxy-Fuel Furnace at Libbey Leerdam 89M. van Valburg and E. Sperry, S. Laux, R. Bell, A. Francis, and H. Kobayashi Maintaining Full Production in Furnaces with Failing Regenerators using Oxy-Fuel Combustion 99William J. Horan Heat-Oxy-Combustion Bi-Fuel Burner - Heavy Fuel Oil Trials 111S. Juma, X. Paubel, T. Kang, and L. Jarry Environmental & Safety Glass Furnace Catalytic Ceramic Filter Installation and Operation Experience 123Weijian Chen and Martin Schroter Glassil Dustshield™: A Materials Engineering Solution to Meet OSHA’S New Respirable Silica Regulations 157Greg Bedford, Ashley Rich, Emma Hansen, and John Jackson Deadly Dust: Reducing the Risks of Silica Dust in Glass Working Operations 165Greg Carmichael New Approach to Safety Estimation of Heat Soak Tested Thermally Toughened Safety Glass 169Andreas M. Kasper ADVANCES IN FUSION AND PROCESSING OF GLASS SYMPOSIUM Design of SLS Compositions for Accelerated Chemical StrengtheningWilliam C. LaCourse Warp Reduction in Thin Chemically Strengthened Float Glasses 191Arun K. Varshneya Research and Development of New Energy-Saving, Environmentally Friendly Fiber Glass Technology 201Hong Li The Relation between Furnace Efficiency and the Physics and Chemistry of the Melting Process 221Reinhard Conradt Gyrotron Based Melting 233Paul P. Woskov How the Industrial Revolution 4.0 Will Impact the Glass Industry Image Analysis that is Part of ES 4.0 is a Key Component towards Industry 4.0 247Erick Muijsenberg Modification of the Glass Surface during Manufacturing 263J.W. McCamy, A. Ganjoo, and C-H Hung

Read more less

Book SynopsisBOW-TIE INDUSTRIAL RISK MANAGEMENT ACROSS SECTORS Explore an approachable but rigorous treatment of systematic barrier-based approaches to risk management and failure analysisIn Bow-Tie Industrial Risk Management Across Sectors: A Barrier-Based Approach, accomplished researcher and author Luca Fiorentini delivers a practical guide to risk management tools, with a particular emphasis on a systematic barrier-based approach called bow-tie. The book includes discussions of two barrier-based methods, Bow-Tie and Layers of Protection Analysis (LOPA), for risk assessment, and one barrier-based method for incident analysis, Barrier Failure Analysis (BFA). The author also describes a traditional methodRoot Cause Analysisand three quantitative methodsFMEA/FMECA, Fault Tree (FTA), and Event Tree (ETA) with a discussion about their link with barriers.Written from the ground up to be in full compliance with recent ISO 31000 standards on enterprise risk management, and Table of ContentsList of Figures List of Tables List of Acronyms Preface 1 Riccardo Ghini Preface 2 Bernardino Chiaia Preface 3 Luca Marmo Preface 4 Giuseppe Conti Preface 5 Claudio De Angelis Preface 6 Damiano Tranquilli Preface 7 Enzo Matticoli Preface 8 Salvatore Bagnato Author Preface Acknowledgements Chapter 1 Introduction to Risk and Risk Management 1.1 Risk Is Everywhere, and Risk Management Became a Critical Issue in Several Sectors 1.2 ISO 31000 Standard 1.3 ISO 31000 Risk Management Workflow 1.4 Uncertainty and the Human Factor 1.5 Enterprise Complexity and (Advanced) Risk Management (ERM) 1.6 Proactive and Reactive Culture of Organizations Dealing with Risk Management 1.7 A Systems Approach to Risk Management Chapter 2 Bow-Tie Method 2.1 Hazards and Risks 2.2 Methods of Risk Management 2.3 The Bow-Tie Method 2.4 The Bow-Tie Method and the Risk Management Workflow from ISO 31000 2.5 Application of Bow-Ties 2.6 Level of Abstraction 2.7 Building a Bow-Tie 2.8 Hazards 2.9 Top Events 2.10 Threats 2.11 Consequences 2.12 Barriers 2.13 Escalation Factors and Associated Barriers 2.14 Layer of Protection Analysis (LOPA): A Quantified Bow-Tie to Measure Risks 2.15 Bow-Tie as a Quantitative Method to Measure Risks and Develop a Dynamic Quantified Risk Register 2.16 Advanced Bow-Ties: Chaining and Combination Chapter 3 Barrier Failure Analysis 3.1 Accidents, Near-Misses, and Non-Conformities in Risk Management 3.2 The Importance of Operational Experience 3.3 Principles of Accident Investigation 3.4 The Barrier Failure Analysis (BFA) 3.5 From Root Cause Analysis (RCA) to BFA 3.6 BFA from Bow-Ties Chapter 4 Workflows and Case Studies 4.1 Bow-Tie Construction Workflow with a Step-by-Step Guide 4.2 LOPA Construction Workflow with a Step-by-Step Guide 4.3 BFA Construction Workflow with a Step-by-Step Guide 4.4 Worked Examples Conclusions Appendix 1 Bow-Tie Easy Guide Appendix 2 BFA Easy Guide Appendix 3 Human Error and Reliability Assessment (HRA) References and Further Reading Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisDescribes in one volume the data received during experiments on detonation in high explosive charges This book brings together, in one volume, information normally covered in a series of journal articles on high explosive detonation tests, so that developers can create new explosive technologies. It focuses on the charges that contain inert elements made of materials in which a sound velocity is significantly higher than a detonation velocity. It also summarizes the results of experimental, numerical, and theoretical investigations of explosion systems, which contain high modulus ceramic components. The phenomena occurring in such systems are described in detail: desensitization of high explosives, nonstationary detonation processes, energy focusing, and Mach stems formation. Formation of hypersonic flows of ceramic particles arising due to explosive collapse of ceramic tubes is another example of the issues discussed. Explosion Systems with Inert HighTable of ContentsPreface vii 1 Examples of Nonstationary Propagation of Detonation in Real Processes 1 1.1 Channel Effect 1 1.2 Detonation of Elongated High Explosive Charges with Cavities 4 1.3 The Effects of Wall and Shell Material, Having Sound Velocity Greater Than Detonation Velocity, on the Detonation Process 9 1.4 Summary 14 References 15 2 Phenomena in High Explosive Charges Containing Rod‐Shaped Inert Elements 17 2.1 “Smoothing” of Shock Waves in Silicon Carbide Rods 17 2.1.1 Experiments with Ceramic Rods 17 2.1.2 Numerical Simulation of Shock Wave Propagation in Silicon Carbide Rods 22 2.2 Desensitization of Heterogeneous High Explosives after Loading by Advanced Waves Passing Through Silicon Carbide Elements 26 2.2.1 The Experiments on Detonation Transmission 28 2.2.2 Modeling of the Detonation Transmission Process under Initiating Through Inert Inserts 33 2.3 The Phenomenon of Energy Focusing in Passive High Explosive Charges 37 2.3.1 Characterization of Steel Specimens Deformed in Experiments on Energy Focusing 39 2.3.2 Optical Recording in Streak Mode 43 2.3.3 Optical Recording in Frame Mode 46 2.3.4 Numerical Modeling of the Energy Focusing Phenomenon 51 2.4 Summary 52 References 54 3 Nonstationary Detonation Processes at the Interface between High Explosive and Inert Wall 59 3.1 Measurements with Manganin Gauges 60 3.2 Optical Recording in Streak Mode 64 3.3 Modeling of Detonation in High Explosive Charges Contacting with Ceramic Plates 68 3.4 Summary 76 References 77 4 Peculiar Properties of the Processes in High Explosive Charges with Cylindrical Shells 79 4.1 Nonstationary Detonation Processes in High Explosive Charges with Silicon Carbide Shells 79 4.2 Numerical Analysis of the Influence of Shells on the Detonation Process 93 4.3 Summary 101 References 106 5 Hypervelocity of Shaped Charge Jets 109 5.1 Experimental Investigation of Ceramic Tube Collapse by Detonation Products 110 5.2 Modeling of Jet Formation Process 115 5.3 The Effect of Hypervelocity Jet Impact against a Steel Target 123 5.4 Modeling of Fast Jet Formation under Explosion Collision of Two‐Layer Alumina/Copper Tubes 129 5.5 Summary 136 References 140 6 Protective Structures Based on Ceramic Materials 143 6.1 Detonation Transmission through Dispersed Ceramic Media 143 6.2 Applications of the Protective Properties of Ceramic Materials 149 6.3 Summary 151 References 151 7 Structure of the Materials Loaded Using Explosion Systems with High‐Modulus Components 155 7.1 Materials Behavior at High Strain Rate Loading 155 7.2 Postmortem Investigation of Materials Structure for Indirect Evaluation of Explosive Loading 164 7.3 Structure of Materials Loaded Under Conditions of Energy Focusing 169 7.4 Effect of High‐Velocity Cumulative Jets on Structure of Metallic Substrates 178 7.5 Summary 183 References 183 Conclusions 187 Appendix A Dynamic Properties of High‐Modulus Materials 193 Appendix B Methods Used to Investigate Explosion Systems Containing High‐Modulus Inert Materials 205 Index 211

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsAbout the Author xv Acknowledgments xvii About the Companion Website xix Introduction xxi 1 The Role and the Challenge 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.1.1 Why Do We Care About Engineering Project Management? 2 1.1.2 The Opportunity For You 5 1.2 The Project 5 1.2.1 Where Do Projects Come From? 8 1.2.2 Customers 8 1.2.3 Attributes of Projects 8 1.2.4 The Project Life‐Cycle 9 1.2.5 Goals of the Project/Factors in Tension With Each Other 9 1.3 The Project Manager 12 1.3.1 The Role 12 1.3.2 You as the Manager of an Engineering Project 15 1.4 Engineering Processes Can Help You 18 1.5 The Engineering Project Manager Mind‐Set 20 1.6 Next 22 1.7 About Facilitated Lab Sessions and Practical Exercises 22 1.8 This Week’s Facilitated Lab Session 23 1.8.1 Exemplars 23 1.8.2 Points for Discussion 25 2 Performing Engineering on Projects (Part I) 29 2.1 The Systems Method 29 2.1.1 Motivation and Description 29 2.1.2 Life‐Cycle Shapes 37 2.1.3 Progress Through the Stages 43 2.2 Requirements 47 2.3 Design 55 2.3.1 The Design and its Process 55 2.3.2 The Design Hierarchy is Not the Same as the Requirements Hierarchy 64 2.3.3 Modeling 64 2.3.4 Design Patterns 66 2.3.5 Do the Hard Parts First 67 2.3.6 Designs and Your Team 68 2.3.7 Summary: Design 69 2.4 Interaction of the Requirements and Design Processes with Project Management Processes 69 2.5 Your Role in All of This 72 2.6 Next 75 2.7 This Week’s Facilitated Lab Session 75 3 Performing Engineering on Projects (Part II) 77 3.1 The Remaining Stages of the Project Life‐Cycle 77 3.1.1 Implementation 77 3.1.2 Integration 77 3.1.3 Testing – Verification and Validation 81 3.1.4 Testing – Planning, Procedures, Test Levels, Other Hints About Testing 85 3.1.4.1 Unscripted Use of the System 88 3.1.4.2 Realistic Operating Conditions 88 3.1.4.3 Off‐Nominal Operating Conditions 89 3.1.5 Production 90 3.1.6 Deployment: Use in Actual Mission Operations 92 3.1.7 Non‐project Life‐Cycle Stages 93 3.1.7.1 Logistics 93 3.1.7.2 Phase‐Out and Disposal 97 3.1.7.3 Summary for the Post‐Deployment Stages 98 3.2 Next 98 3.3 This Week’s Facilitated Lab Session 98 4 Understanding Your Users and Your Other Stakeholders 99 4.1 The Four Steps to Understanding Your Users and Your Other Stakeholders 99 4.2 Case Study About the Value of Using the Customer’s Coordinate System of Value: Role‐Based Processing 110 4.3 Special Topic: Designing the User Experience 113 4.4 Summary: Understanding Your Users and Your Other Stakeholders 118 4.5 Next 119 4.6 This Week’s Facilitated Lab Session 119 5 How Do Engineering Projects Get Created? 121 5.1 Engineering Projects are Created in Response to a Need, or a Vision 121 5.2 How to Win 124 5.2.1 Approach #1: The Heilmeier Questions 130 5.2.2 Approach #2: Neil’s Approach: Achieve Positive Competitive Differentiation 131 5.3 Your Role in All of This 143 5.4 Summary: How to Win 144 5.5 Next 144 5.6 This Week’s Facilitated Lab Session 144 6 Organizing and Planning 147 6.1 The Work‐Breakdown Structure 147 6.2 The Statement of Work 154 6.3 The Organization Chart 157 6.4 The Project Plan 162 6.5 Your Role in All of This 167 6.6 Summary: Organizing and Planning 168 6.7 Next 168 6.8 This Week’s Facilitated Lab Session 168 7 Creating Credible Predictions for Schedule and Cost: the Activity Network 171 7.1 Setting the Stage 171 7.2 Estimating the Schedule For Your Project 174 7.2.1 Step 1: Define the Tasks 174 7.2.2 Step 2: Identify the Interdependencies Between Tasks 175 7.2.3 Step 3: Estimate, in a Statistical Fashion, the Duration of Each Task 177 7.2.4 Step 4: Fixed Dates vs. Derived Dates 179 7.2.5 Examples 180 7.3 Estimating the Cost of Your Project 181 7.4 Injecting Realism Into Your Estimates 183 7.4.1 The S‐Curve 183 7.4.2 Another Aspect of Realism in Schedules: Margin and Slack 184 7.4.3 Calibrate Against Top‐Down Estimation Methods 185 7.4.4 Resource Leveling 187 7.5 Cost vs. Price 188 7.6 Your Role in All of This 189 7.7 The Intersection With Engineering 190 7.8 Next 191 7.9 This Week’s Facilitated Lab Session 191 8 Drawing Valid Conclusions From Numbers 193 8.1 In Engineering, We Must Make Measurements 193 8.2 The Data and/or the Conclusions are Often Wrong 194 8.2.1 The Fallacy of the Silent Evidence 199 8.2.2 Logical Flaws in the Organization of System Testing 201 8.2.3 The Problem of Scale 205 8.2.4 Signal and Noise 207 8.2.5 A Special Type of Measurement: The Test 210 8.2.6 The Decision Tree: A Method That Properly Accounts For Conditional Probabilities 211 8.3 What Engineering Project Managers Need to Measure 214 8.4 Implications for the Design and Management Processes 215 8.4.1 We Need Measurements in Order to Create Good Designs 215 8.4.2 Projects Provide an Opportunity for Time Series 215 8.4.3 Interpreting the Data 215 8.4.4 How Projects Fail 216 8.4.5 Avoid “Explaining Away” the Data 217 8.4.6 Keep a Tally of Predictions 217 8.4.7 Social Aspects of Measurement 218 8.4.8 Non‐linear Effects 219 8.4.9 Sensitivity Analysis 221 8.4.10 Keep it Simple 221 8.4.11 Modeling 222 8.4.12 Ground Your Estimates and Predictions in the Past 222 8.5 Your Role in All of This 223 8.6 Summary: Drawing Valid Conclusions From Numbers 224 8.7 Next 224 8.8 This Week’s Facilitated Lab Session 224 9 Risk and Opportunity Management 225 9.1 Things Can Go Wrong With Our Project: How Do We Cope? 225 9.2 The Steps of Risk Management 229 9.2.1 Step a: Identify the Potential Risks and Opportunities 229 9.2.2 Step b: Identify the Symptoms 231 9.2.3 Step c: Select the Item to be Measured, and the Measurement Methods 232 9.2.4 Step d: Score Each Risk for Both Likelihood and Impact 232 9.2.5 Step e: Create Mitigation and Exploitation Plans 235 9.2.6 Step f: Create Triggers and Timing Requirements for Those Mitigation Plans 237 9.2.7 Step g: Create a Method to Aggregate All Risk Assessments Into a Periodic Overall Project Impact Prediction 238 9.2.8 Step h: Create and Use Some Sort of Periodic “Management Rhythm,” Wherein You Periodically Make Decisions About Risk Mitigation and Opportunity Exploitation Actions, Based on the Periodic Assessment 239 9.2.9 Step i: When Risks Actually Occur (Transition from Risks to Issues), Perform a Root‐Cause Analysis 240 9.3 Two Special Types of Risks 241 9.3.1 The Low‐Likelihood, High‐Impact Event 241 9.3.2 The Risks That We Have Not Yet Identified 243 9.4 Lessons Learned From Risk Management 245 9.5 Your Role in All of This 246 9.6 Summary: Risk and Opportunity Management 246 9.7 Next 246 9.8 This Week’s Facilitated Lab Session 246 10 Monitoring the Progress of Your Project (Part I) 249 10.1 Monitoring Progress Via Updated Predictions to Schedule and Cost 249 10.2 Making the Updated Predictions 251 10.2.1 Creating the Updated Prediction for the Schedule 252 10.2.2 Preview: Variance Analysis 255 10.2.3 Creating the Updated Prediction for the Cost 255 10.2.4 Taking Earned Value 255 10.2.5 The Rolling Wave 257 10.3 Using the Updated Predictions 258 10.3.1 Calculating the Schedule and Cost Variances 258 10.3.2 Time Variance 262 10.3.3 Variance Analysis 263 10.4 Financial Measures About Which Your Company Will Care 263 10.4.1 Sales 264 10.4.2 Profit 264 10.4.3 Cash Flow 265 10.4.4 Day‐Sales Receivables 265 10.5 Your Role in All of This 265 10.6 Summary: Monitoring the Progress of your Project (Part I) 266 10.7 Next 267 10.8 This Week’s Facilitated Lab Session 267 11 Monitoring the Progress of Your Project (Part II) 269 11.1 How the Manager of an Engineering Project Ought to Allocate His/Her Time 269 11.2 A Big Claim on Our Time: The Periodic Management Rhythm 270 11.2.1 Sequence and Interaction of Steps 274 11.3 The Steps of the Periodic Management Rhythm 274 11.3.1 Updating the Predictions of Operational and Technical Performance 274 11.3.2 Updating the Predictions for the Schedule 276 11.3.3 Updating the Predictions for the Cost 278 11.3.4 Updating the Risk Assessment and Initiating Risk Mitigation 278 11.3.5 The Monthly Calendar 279 11.3.6 The Accounting Calendar 280 11.3.7 Management Reserve Funding 280 11.4 The Social Benefits of the Periodic Management Rhythm 282 11.5 Your Role in All of This 283 11.6 Summary: Monitoring the Progress of Your Project (Part II) 284 11.7 Next 284 11.8 This Week’s Facilitated Lab Session 284 12 Four Special Topics 285 12.1 Launching Your Project 285 12.1.1 The Project Start‐Up Process 285 12.1.2 The Earned‐Value Baseline: A Special Project Start‐Up Task 291 12.1.3 Preparing to Operate at a Large Scale 292 12.1.4 Summary for Starting a Project 293 12.2 Systems and Projects With Large Amounts of Software 294 12.2.1 The Benefits 294 12.2.2 The Problems 294 12.2.2.1 Scale 295 12.2.3 Lessons Learned for the Project Manager About Software 296 12.3 The Agile Software Development Methodology 299 12.4 Ending Your Project 302 12.5 Your Role in All of This 303 12.6 Next 305 12.7 This Week’s Facilitated Lab Session 305 13 The Social Aspects of Engineering Project Management 307 13.1 Dealing With People, Becoming a Leader 308 13.2 Alignment 308 13.3 The Sine Qua Non of Leadership 311 13.4 Motivating Your Team 312 13.5 Recognizing and Resolving Conflict 316 13.6 Siegel’s Mechanics of Project Management 323 13.7 Dealing With Special People 325 13.7.1 Your Management 325 13.7.2 Your Customers 327 13.7.3 The Human Resources Department – An Important Partner 327 13.8 Your Career as an Engineer 329 13.9 Change on Your Project 333 13.10 Coping With Career Change 334 13.10.1 Foundational Knowledge 335 13.10.2 Lifelong Learning 335 13.10.3 On‐the‐Job Learning 335 13.10.4 Know and Grow 336 13.10.5 Summary: How to Cope With Career Change 337 13.10.6 Examples of Mid‐career Changes I Have Known 337 13.11 Getting Ahead 338 13.11.1 Preparing Yourself for Leadership 338 13.11.2 Getting Ahead: Understanding Your Boss 338 13.11.3 Enablers 341 13.11.4 Leadership vs. Management 341 13.11.5 Disablers and Pitfalls: How to Fail at Getting Ahead 341 13.11.6 Summary: Getting Ahead 342 13.12 Two Special Topics 343 13.12.1 Special Topic 1: Projects Whose Work is Geographically Distributed Across More Than One Work Site 343 13.12.2 Special Topic 2: Projects That Include Teams Located in Multiple Countries 344 13.13 Summary: Social Aspects of Engineering Project Management 345 13.14 Next 346 13.15 This Week’s Facilitated Lab Session 346 14 Achieving Quality 347 14.1 Defining the Term Quality 347 14.2 One Motivation for Quality: A Good Reputation 347 14.2.1 Quality Control and Audits 348 14.3 Quality Initiatives 348 14.3.1 6‐Sigma 349 14.3.1.1 Defect Rates 352 14.3.1.2 Justified Variation 354 14.3.1.3 Defects in Assembly 354 14.3.2 ISO‐ 9000 355 14.3.3 Capability Maturity Model 355 14.4 Processes for Engineering and for Project Management 356 14.5 Procurement and Subcontracting 357 14.5.1 Vendor Partnerships 358 14.6 The Effects of Quality 359 14.7 The Bill of Materials 360 14.8 Your Role in All of This 360 14.9 Next 361 14.10 This Week’s Facilitated Lab Session 361 14.A Appendix: What Distributions Actually Look Like in the Real World of Engineering Projects 361 15 Applying Our Ideas in the Real World, Ethics in Engineering 365 15.1 Applying Our Ideas in the Real World 365 15.2 Ethics in Engineering 367 15.2.1 When Does Bad Engineering Become Bad Ethics? 368 15.2.1.1 How Do Engineers Get Into Situations of Ethical Lapse? 368 15.2.1.2 Characteristics of Modern Engineered Systems that Create the Risk of Ethical Lapse 369 15.2.1.3 Complexity and Scale Introduce Non‐linearities 369 15.2.1.4 Reliability and Availability are Under‐emphasized 370 15.2.1.5 Treating Operator‐Induced Failures as Being Outside Our Design Responsibilities 370 15.2.1.6 Ignoring the Potential That Our Systems Will Be Used in Ways Other Than We Intended 371 15.2.2 Corrective Actions 372 15.2.3 Conclusions About Ethics in Engineering 374 15.3 Thank You 375 Index 377

Read more less

Book SynopsisA solid collection of interdisciplinary review articles on the latest developments in adhesion science and adhesives technology With the ever-increasing amount of research being published, it is a Herculean task to be fully conversant with the latest research developments in any field, and the arena of adhesion and adhesives is no exception. Thus, topical review articles provide an alternate and very efficient way to stay abreast of the state-of-the-art in many subjects representing the field of adhesion science and adhesives. Based on the success of the preceding volumes in this series Progress in Adhesion and Adhesives), the present volume comprises 12 review articles published in Volume 5 (2017) of Reviews of Adhesion and Adhesives. The subject of these 12 reviews fall into the following general areas: 1. Nanoparticles in reinforced polymeric composites. 2. Wettability behavior and its modification, including superhydrophobic surfaces. 3. Ways to promote adhesion, includTable of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Nanoparticles as Interphase Modifiers in Fiber Reinforced Polymeric Composites: A Critical Review 1Kyle B. Caldwell and John C. Berg 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Grown Interphases from Fiber Surfaces 3 1.2.1 Introduction 3 1.2.2 ZnO Nanowhiskers 5 1.2.2.1 Effects of NW Diameter and Length 6 1.2.2.2 Effects of Reinforcing Fiber Surface Chemistry and Roughness 9 1.2.3 Carbon Nanotubes 10 1.2.3.1 Effects of CNT Length 11 1.2.3.2 Effects of CVD Conditions 14 1.2.4 Electroless Plating 15 1.2.5 Conclusions: Grown Interphases from Fiber Surfaces 17 1.3 Deposited Interphases 19 1.3.1 Introduction 19 1.3.2 Advanced Sizing Packages 20 1.3.3 Electrophoretic Deposition 22 1.3.4 Electrostatic Attraction 26 1.3.4.1 Layer-by-layer Deposition 26 1.3.5 Reaction Deposited Interphases 28 1.3.6 Conclusions: Deposited Interphases 30 1.4 Self-assembled Interphases 30 1.4.1 Introduction 30 1.4.2 Migrating Agents 32 1.4.3 Phase Separation 34 1.4.4 Depletion Interaction 35 1.4.5 Conclusions: Self-assembled Interphases 40 1.5 Summary 41 Acknowledgments 43 List of Abbreviations (Alphabetized) 44 References 44 2 Fabrication of Micro/Nano Patterns on Polymeric Substrates Using Laser Ablation Methods to Control Wettability Behaviour: A Critical Review 53Salma Falah Toosi, Sona Moradi and Savvas G. Hatzikiriakos 2.1 Introduction 53 2.2 Wetting States, Regimes, and Roughness 54 2.2.1 Contact Angle 54 2.2.2 Contact Angle Hysteresis 57 2.3 Laser Ablation: Experimental Setup 58 2.4 Laser Ablation of Polymeric Surfaces 59 2.4.1 Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) 61 2.4.2 Polylactide (PLA and PLLA) 64 2.4.3 Poly(methyl methacrylate) (PMMA) 66 2.4.4 Poly(dimethylsiloxane) (PDMS) 67 2.5 Summary 69 References 70 3 Plasma Processing of Aluminum Alloys to Promote Adhesion: A Critical Review 77Vinay Kumar Patel and Shantanu Bhowmik 3.1 Introduction 78 3.2 Plasma Processing of Aluminum for Improved Wettability and Adhesion 79 3.3 Plasma Processing of Aluminum Alloy for Improved Corrosion Resistance 85 3.4 Plasma Processing of Aluminum Alloy for Improved Bond Strength 87 3.5 Plasma Processing of Aluminum Alloy for Enhanced Tribological and Mechanical Performance 89 3.6 Summary 95 References 97 4 UV-Curing of Adhesives: A Critical Review 101Alessandra Vitale, Giuseppe Trusiano and Roberta Bongiovanni 4.1 Introduction 101 4.2 Basics of Radiation Curing 102 4.3 UV-Curing for the Production of Adhesives 112 4.4 Adhesives Obtained by a Single Direct UV-Curing Step 120 4.5 Adhesives Obtained by a Dual-Cure Process 129 4.5.1 UV-Curing and Thermal Cure 130 4.5.2 UV-Curing and Anaerobic Cure 131 4.5.3 UV-Curing and Moisture Cure 132 4.5.4 Other Types of Dual-Cure 133 4.6 Photocurable Adhesives for Medical Applications 135 4.6.1 Tissue Adhesives 135 4.6.2 Bioinspired Tissue Adhesives 136 4.6.3 Dental Adhesives 138 4.7 Light-Induced Reversible Bonding/Debonding 140 4.8 Summary 143 References 144 5 Stress and Failure Analyses of Functionally Graded Adhesively Bonded Joints of Laminated FRP Composite Plates and Tubes: A Critical Review 155S.V. Nimje and S. K. Panigrahi 5.1 Introduction 156 5.2 Stress Analysis of Adhesively Bonded Joints 157 5.2.1 Stress Analysis of Adhesively Bonded Joints of Laminated FRP Composite Plates 157 5.2.2 Stress Analysis of Adhesively Bonded Joints of Laminated FRP Composite Tubes 162 5.3 Failure Analysis of Adhesively Bonded Joints of Laminated FRP Composite Plates 163 5.4 Failure Analysis of Adhesively Bonded Tubular Joints of Laminated FRP Composites 165 5.5 Failure Analysis of Functionally Graded Bonded Joints 166 5.5.1 Effect of Functionally Graded Plates/Tubes on Joint Failure 167 5.5.2 Effect of Functionally Graded Adhesive on Joint Failure 168 5.6 Summary 178 References 179 6 Adhesion Between Unvulcanized Elastomers: A Critical Review 185K. Dinesh Kumar, Ganesh C. Basak and Anil K. Bhowmick 6.1 Introduction 186 6.2 Autohesive Tack 187 6.2.1 Autohesive Tack Criteria 188 6.2.2 Theories Related to Autohesive Tack 189 6.2.2.1 Diffusion Theory 189 6.2.2.2 Contact Theory 190 6.2.3 Factors Affecting Autohesive Tack Bond Formation Process 192 6.2.3.1 Effect of Contact Time 192 6.2.3.2 Effect of Contact Pressure 195 6.2.3.3 Effect of Contact Temperature 195 6.2.3.4 Effect of Surface Roughness 197 6.2.4 Factors Affecting Autohesive Tack Bond Destruction Process 198 6.2.4.1 Effect of Test Rate 198 6.2.4.2 Effect of Test Temperature 198 6.2.4.3 Effect of Bond Thickness 198 6.2.5 Effect of Molecular Properties on Autohesive Tack 199 6.2.5.1 Effect of Molecular Weight 199 6.2.5.2 Effect of Microstructure 200 6.2.5.3 Effect of Crystallinity 200 6.2.5.4 Effect of Polar Groups 201 6.2.6 Environmental Effects on Autohesive Tack 202 6.2.6.1 Effect of Surface Oxidation 202 6.2.6.2 Effect of Humidity 202 6.2.7 Effect of Compounding Ingredients on Autohesive Tack 202 6.2.7.1 Effect of Processing Oil 202 6.2.7.2 Effect of Tackifiers 202 6.2.7.2.1 Tackification Mechanism in Pressure-Sensitive Adhesives 203 6.2.7.2.2 Effect of Tackifiers on Autohesive Tack of Elastomers Used in the Rubber Industry 207 6.2.8 Effect of Fillers 230 6.2.8.1 Effect of Carbon Black and Silica on Autohesive Tack of Elastomers Used in the Rubber Industry 230 6.2.8.2 Effect of Nanoclay on Autohesive Tack of Elastomers Used in the Rubber Industry 233 6.3 Self - Healing Elastomers: Future Scope Based on Tack Behavior of Elastomers 240 6.4 Summary 242 Acknowledgements 244 List of Symbols 245 List of Abbreviations 246 References 247 7 Dielectrowetting for Digital Microfluidics: Principle and Application. A Critical Review 253Hongyao Geng and Sung Kwon Cho 7.1 Introduction 254 7.2 Electrostatic Forces on a Liquid 257 7.3 Electrowetting on Dielectric (EWOD) 258 7.4 Liquid-Dielectrophoresis (L-DEP) 261 7.5 L-DEP in Microfluidics 265 7.6 Dielectrowetting 266 7.7 Droplet Manipulations by Dielectrowetting 273 7.7.1 Experimental Setup 273 7.7.2 Droplet Splitting and Transporting 275 7.7.3 Multi-Splitting and Merging of Droplets 275 7.7.4 Droplet Creating 276 7.7.5 Manipulations of Aqueous Droplets 277 7.8 Concluding Remarks and Outlook 278 7.9 Acknowledgement 281 References 281 8 Control of Biofilm at the Tooth-Restoration Bonding Interface: A Question for Antibacterial Monomers? A Critical Review 287Mary Anne S. Melo, Michael D. Weir, Fang Li, Lei Cheng, Ke Zhang and Hockin H. K. Xu 8.1 Introduction 288 8.2 Tooth-Restoration Bonding Interface Failure: The Bacterial Factor 290 8.3 Mechanism of Adhesive-Bacteria Interaction 292 8.4 Current Antibacterial Approaches via Components of Tooth/Restoration Interface Bonding Materials (Dental Primers and Adhesives) 293 8.5 Incorporation of Quaternary Ammonium-Based Monomers and its Impact on the Mechanical Properties 295 8.6 Long-Lasting Antibacterial Activity 297 8.7 Biocompatibility 298 8.8 Limitations 299 8.9 Prospects 301 8.10 Summary 301 References 301 9 Easy-to-Clean Superhydrophobic Coatings Based on Sol-Gel Technology: A Critical Review 307S. Czyzyk, A.Dotan, H. Dodiuk, and S. Kenig 9.1 Introduction 308 9.2 Superhydrophobicity: Key Concepts 308 9.2.1 Morphology Characterization of a Superhydrophobic Surface 312 9.2.1.1 Roughness Characterization 313 9.2.1.2 Porosity Characterization 315 9.2.2 Superhydrophobicity Fabrication Methods 315 9.2.2.1 Top-Down 315 9.2.2.2 Bottom-Up 316 9.3 Sol-Gel Process 316 9.3.1 Process Stages 317 9.3.1.1 Factors Affecting the Reaction Kinetics and the Final Product 319 9.3.1.1.1 Main Factors Affecting the Sol-Gel Process 319 9.3.2 Organofunctional Alkoxysilane – A Hybrid Sol-Gel 322 9.3.2.1 Hybrid Sol-Gel Fabrication Methods 323 9.3.2.2 Easy-to-Clean Superhydrophobic Sol-Gel Coatings 327 9.3.2.3 Properties of Superhydrophobic Coatings Fabricated via Sol-Gel Method 329 9.4 Summary 333 Acknowledgement 334 List of Abbreviations 334 References 335 10 Cyanoacrylates: Towards High Temperature Resistant Instant Adhesives. A Critical Review 341Barry Burns 10.1 Introduction 341 10.2 Industrial Production of Cyanoacrylates 343 10.3 Reactivity and Polymerisation of Cyanoacrylates 344 10.4 Durability and Degradation of Polycyanoacrylate Polymers 347 10.4.1 Durability of Cyanoacrylate Adhesive Bonds 349 10.4.2 Hot Strength Performance 349 10.4.3 Thermal Resistance Performance 350 10.5 Strategies to Improve Thermal Durability 351 10.5.1 Crosslinking Strategies 352 10.5.1.1 Multifunctional or Bis-Cyanoacrylate Cross-Linking Approaches 352 10.5.1.2 Alkyl-2-Cyanopentadienoate Cross-Linking Approaches 353 10.5.1.3 Allyl Cyanoacrylate Crosslinking Approaches 356 10.5.2 Additive Strategies 357 10.6 Summary 361 Acknowledgements 364 References 364 11 Strategies to Inactivate the Endogenous Dentin Proteases to Promote Resin-Dentin Bond Longevity in Adhesive Dentistry: A Critical Review 369Regina Guenka Palma-Dibb, Lourenço de Moraes Rego Roselino, Pedro Turrini Neto and Juliana Jendiroba Faraoni 11.1 Introduction 369 11.2 Enzymes in Dentin 370 11.3 Enzymes Inactivation/Collagen Cross-Linking 373 11.3.1 Natural Crosslinkers 374 11.3.1.1 Proanthocianidin – Grape Seed Extract (PA) 374 11.3.1.2 Chitosan (CH) 375 11.3.1.3 Epigallocatechin-3-gallate (EGCG) 376 11.3.1.4 Low Dose Riboflavin/UVA-Activated Riboflavin 376 11.3.1.5 Genipin 377 11.3.1.6 Hesperidin 377 11.3.1.7 Galardin 377 11.3.2 Synthetic Crosslinkers 377 11.3.2.1 Chlorhexidine (CHX) 377 11.3.2.2 Glutaraldehyde (GA) 378 11.3.2.3 Carbodiimide 378 11.3.2.4 Quaternary Ammoniun Compounds (QACs) 379 11.3.2.5 Ethylenediaminetetraacetic Acid (EDTA) 380 11.3.2.6 Tetracycline 380 11.4 Clinical Considerations 380 11.5 Summary 380 Acknowledgment 382 References 382 12 Effects of Nanoparticles on Nanocomposites Mode I and II Fracture: A Critical Review 391P. Ghabezi and M. Farahani 12.1 Introduction 391 12.2 Energy Release Rate 392 12.3 Traction-Separation Laws 394 12.4 Effect of Nanoparticles on Mode I and II Fracture 396 12.5 Traction – Separation Laws in Mode I and II (Case Study) 405 12.5.1 Materials, Geometry and Test Parameters 406 12.6 Summary 407 Acknowledgement 408 Nomenclature 408 References 408

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis timely and important book aims to help achieve a more sustainable textile industry; researchers from both textile and environmental domains will benefit from reading it. Since it is imperative to rehabilitate our damaged environmental ecosystems, there is a pressing demand for more sustainable green processes in the textile and clothing industry. As a consequence, greater emphasis needs to be placed on research into eco-friendly processes particularly suited for this industry. With this goal in mind, all environmental aspects relating to the textile and clothing industry are discussed in this book in four broad areas: Highlights the negative impact on the environment by textile industries; Discusses textiles finishing by natural or eco-friendly means; Promotes natural dyes as environment-friendly alternatives to synthetics; Reviews textile effluents remediation via chemical, physical and bioremediation. Include

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides a comprehensive treatment of investing chemical processing incidents. It presents on-the-job information, techniques, and examples that support successful investigations. Issues related to identification and classification of incidents (including near misses), notifications and initial response, assignment of an investigation team, preservation and control of an incident scene, collecting and documenting evidence, interviewing witnesses, determining what happened, identifying root causes, developing recommendations, effectively implementing recommendation, communicating investigation findings, and improving the investigation process are addressed in the third edition. While the focus of the book is investigating process safety incidents the methodologies, tools, and techniques described can also be applied when investigating other types of events such as reliability, quality, occupational health, and safety incidents.Table of ContentsPreface xxv Acknowledgments xxvii Acronyms and Abbreviations xxix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Building on the Past 1 1.2 Investigation Basics 2 1.2.1 The First Step 2 1.2.2 The Second Step 4 1.2.3 The Third Step 4 1.2.4 The Fourth step 4 1.2.5 The Fifth Step 5 1.2.6 The Sixth Step 5 1.3 Who Should Read This Book? 5 1.4 The Guideline’s Objectives 6 1.5 The Guideline’s Content and Organization 6 1.6 The Continuing Evolution of Incident Investigation 11 2 Overview of Chemical Process Incident Causation 13 2.1 Stages of a Process-Related Incident 14 2.1.1 Three Phase Model of Process-Related Incidents 14 2.1.2 Event Tree 14 2.1.3 Swiss Cheese Model 16 2.1.4 Importance of Latent Failures 17 2.2 Key Causation Concepts 18 2.2.1 Loss of Containment or Energy 18 2.2.2 Management System Failure 20 2.2.3 Human Factors 21 2.2.4 Multiple Causation 22 2.2.5 Events vs Root Causes 22 2.2.6 Controlling Risk 23 2.3 Summary 24 3 An Overview of Investigation Methodologies 26 3.1 History of Investigation Methodologies and Tools 29 3.1.1 One-on-One Interview 29 3.1.2 Brainstorming 29 3.1.3 What If Analysis 30 3.1.4 5-Whys 30 3.1.5 Process of Elimination 31 3.1.6 Timelines 31 3.1.7 Sequence Diagrams 31 3.1.8 Predefined Trees 33 3.2 Tools for Use in Preparation for Root Cause Analysis 34 3.2.1 Timelines 34 3.2.2 Sequence Diagrams 35 3.2.3 Scientific Method 35 3.2.4 Causal Factor Identification 36 3.3 Structured Root Cause Analysis Methodologies 37 3.3.1 Checklists 37 3.3.2 Predefined Trees 38 3.3.3 Team-Developed Logic Trees 39 3.4 Selecting an Appropriate Methodology 43 3.4.1 Methodologies Used by CCPS Members 46 4 Designing An Incident Investigation Management System 47 4.1 System Considerations 49 4.1.1 An Organization’s Responsibilities 49 4.1.2 Workforce Responsibilities 51 4.1.3 Role of the Management System Developers 53 4.1.4 Integration with Other Functions and Teams 54 4.1.5 Involvement by Regulatory Agencies 55 4.2 Typical Management System Topics 58 4.2.1 Classifying Incidents 58 4.2.2 Specifying and Managing Documentation 59 4.2.3 Legal Considerations 60 4.2.4 Describing Team Organization and Functions 63 4.2.5 Electronic Process Data and Control Systems 64 4.2.6 Defining Training Requirements 65 4.2.7 Emphasizing Root Causes 69 4.2.8 Fostering a Blame-Free Policy 70 4.2.9 Developing Recommendations 70 4.2.10 Recommendation Responsibilities 71 4.2.11 Implementing the Recommendations and Follow-up Activities 72 4.2.12 Providing a Template for Formal Reports 73 4.2.13 Management System Review and Approval 73 4.2.14 Planning for Continuous Improvement 73 4.3 Management System 74 4.3.1 Initial Implementation— Training 75 4.3.2 Developing a Specific Investigation Plan 75 5 Initial Notification, Classification and Investigation of Process Safety Incidents 79 5.1 Internal Reporting 79 5.2 Incident Classification 81 5.2.1 Severity Classification 82 5.2.2 Local Jurisdiction 89 5.2.3 Other Options for Establishing Classification Criteria 89 5.3 Incident Notification 90 5.3.1 Corporate Notification 90 5.3.2 Agency Notification 91 5.3.3 Other Stakeholder Notification 91 5.3.4 Other Notifications 92 5.4 Type of Investigation 92 5.4.1 Which Investigation System to Use? 92 5.4.2 Investigation Approach 93 5.5 Summary 94 6 Building and Leading An Incident Investigation Team 96 6.1 Team Approach 96 6.2 Advantages of the Team Approach 97 6.3 Leading a Process Safety Incident Investigation Team 98 6.4 Potential Team Composition 100 6.5 Building a Team for a Specific Incident 104 6.5.1 Composition and Size of Investigation Team 104 6.6 Team Activities 106 6.7 Summary 108 7 Witness Management 110 7.1 Overview 110 7.1.1 Witness Issues Following a Major Occurrence 111 7.1.2 Investigation Team Priorities for Managing Witnesses 112 7.2 Identifying Witnesses 113 7.3 Witness Interviews 115 7.3.1 Human Factors Related to Interviews 115 7.3.2 Collecting Information from Witnesses 118 7.3.3 Initial Witness Statements 120 7.3.4 Conducting the Interview 121 7.4 Conducting Follow-up Activities 134 7.5 Conducting Follow-up Interviews 135 7.6 Reliability of Witness Statements 135 7.7 Summary 135 8 Evidence Identification, Collection and Management 137 8.1 Overview 137 8.1.1 Developing a Specific Plan 138 8.1.2 Investigation Environment Following a Major Occurrence 139 8.1.3 Priorities for Managing an Incident Investigation Team 141 8.2 Sources of Evidence 144 8.2.1 Types of Sources 144 8.2.2 Physical Evidence and Data 147 8.2.3 Paper Evidence and Data 149 8.2.4 Electronic Evidence and Data 152 8.2.5 Position Evidence and Data 153 8.3 Evidence Gathering 156 8.3.1 Initial Site Visit 157 8.3.2 Identifying and Documenting Evidence 159 8.3.3 Tools and Supplies 162 8.3.4 Photography and Video 164 8.4 Timelines and Sequence Diagrams 168 8.4.1 Constructing a Timeline 168 8.4.2 Constructing a Sequence Diagram 174 8.5 Summary 176 9 Evidence Analysis and Causal Factor Determination 178 9.1 Scientific Method 178 9.2 Confirmation Bias 181 9.3 Evidence Analysis 181 9.3.1 Data Organization - Timelines 182 9.3.2 Use of Protocols 182 9.3.3 Mechanical Failure Analysis 184 9.3.4 Advanced Data Systems 187 9.4 Hypothesis Formulation 187 9.4.1 Fact/Hypothesis Matrix 188 9.5 Hypothesis Testing 190 9.5.1 Engineering Analysis 190 9.5.2 Computational Modeling 191 9.5.3 Reconstruction 191 9.5.4 Test the Items under Simulated Conditions 192 9.5.5 Testing of Human Input/Performance 192 9.6 Select the Final Hypothesis 193 9.6.1 Causal Factor Identification 193 9.6.2 Causal Factor Charting 198 9.6.3 Developing a Causal Factor Chart 200 9.7 Summary 202 10 Determining Root Causes—Structured Approaches 203 10.1 Concept of Root Cause Analysis 203 10.2 Case Histories 206 10.3 Methodologies for Root Cause Analysis 208 10.3.1 5 Whys Technique 208 10.3.2 Structured Root Cause Determination 212 10.4 Root Cause Determination Using Logic Trees 214 10.4.1 Gather Evidence and List Facts 215 10.4.2 Timeline Development 215 10.4.3 Logic Tree Development 215 10.5 Building a Logic Tree 219 10.5.1 Choosing the Top Event 220 10.5.2 Logic Tree Basics 220 10.5.3 Example—Chemical Spray Injury 228 10.5.4 What to Do if the Process Stalls 232 10.5.5 Guidelines for Stopping Tree Development 232 10.6 Example Applications 235 10.6.1 Fire and Explosion Incident—Fault Tree 235 10.6.2 Data-Driven Cause Analysis 239 10.6.3 Logic Tree Summary 241 10.7 Root Cause Determination Using Predefined Trees 242 10.7.1 Scenario Determination 244 10.7.2 Causal Factors 244 10.7.3 Predefined Tree 245 10.8 Using Predefined Trees 246 10.8.1 Predefined Tree Methodology 247 10.8.2 Example—Environmental Incident 248 10.8.2 Quality Assurance 255 10.8.3 Predefined Tree Summary 255 10.9 Checklists 256 10.9.1 Use of Checklists 257 10.9.2 Checklist Summary 258 10.10 Human Factors Applications 258 10.11 Summary 259 11 The Impact of Human Factors 261 11.1 Human Factors Concepts 262 11.2 Incorporating Human Factors into the Incident Investigation Process 267 11.2.1 Human Factors Before and During the Incident 268 11.2.2 Human Factors during the Causal Analysis 269 11.2.3 Human Factors in Developing Recommendations 275 11.2.4 After the Investigation 275 11.3 Other References 276 11.4 Summary 276 12 Developing Effective Recommendations 278 12.1 Key Concepts 278 12.2 Developing Effective Recommendations 280 12.2.1 Team Responsibilities 280 12.2.2 Attributes of Good Recommendations 280 12.3 Types of Recommendations 283 12.3.1 Inherently Safer Design 284 12.3.2 Layers of Protection 285 12.3.3 Commendation/Disciplinary Action 289 12.3.4 The “Further Action Required” Recommendation 289 12.4 The Recommendation Process 290 12.4.1 Select Each Cause 290 12.4.2 Perform a Completeness Test 290 12.4.3 Assessing the Effectiveness 291 12.4.4 Prepare to Present Recommendations 291 12.4.5 Review Recommendations with Management 293 12.4.6 Tracking and Closure of Recommendations 293 12.5 Summary 294 13 Preparing the Final Report 295 13.1 Report Scope 295 13.2 Interim Reports 296 13.3 Writing the Report 297 13.4 Sample Report Format 299 13.4.1 Executive Summary 300 13.4.2 Introduction 301 13.4.3 Background 301 13.4.4 Sequence of Events and Description of the Incident 302 13.4.5 Findings 302 13.4.6 Causal Factors 303 13.4.7 Root Causes 304 13.4.8 Recommendations 304 13.4.9 Noncontributory Factors 306 13.4.10 Attachments or Appendices 306 13.5 Report Review and Quality Assurance 307 13.5.1 Reviewing the Report 307 13.5.2 Avoiding Common Mistakes 308 13.6 Investigation Document and Evidence Retention 310 13.7 Summary 311 14 Implementing Recommendations 314 14.1 Activities Related to Recommendation Implementation 315 14.2 Validation of Effectiveness – Case Studies 317 14.2.1 Nuclear Plant Incident 317 14.2.2 Aircraft Incident 318 14.2.3 Petrochemical Plant Incident 318 14.2.4 Challenger Space Shuttle Incident 318 14.2.5 Typical Plant Incidents 319 14.3 Practical Suggestions for Successful Recommendation Implementation 319 14.3.1 Assigning a Responsible Individual 320 14.3.2 Due Dates and Priorities to Implement Recommendations 320 14.3.3 Challenges to Resolving Recommendations 321 14.3.4 Tracking Action Items 323 14.3.5 Follow-up Verification 323 15 Continuous Improvement for the Incident Investigation System 326 15.1 Regulatory Compliance Review 327 15.2 Investigation Quality Assessment 329 15.3 Causal Category Analysis 331 15.4 Review of Near-Miss Events 334 15.5 Recommendations Review 334 15.6 Investigation Follow-up Review 336 15.7 Key Performance Indicators 337 15.8 Summary 338 16 Lessons Learned 340 16.1 Various Sources of Learning from Incidents 341 16.1.1 Internal Sources 341 16.1.2 External Sources 341 16.1.3 Cross-Industry 343 16.2 Identifying Learning Opportunities 343 16.3 Sharing and Institutionalizing Lessons Learned 345 16.4 Senior Management – Incident Sharing and Commitment 347 16.5 Examples of Sharing Lessons Learned 348 16.5.1 Creating a Process Safety Alert from a Case Study 348 16.5.2 Safety Newsletter 350 16.5.3 Videos of Incidents 355 16.5.4 Detailed Incident Reports and Databases 355 16.6 Summary 355 Appendix A. Photography Guidelines for Maximum Results 357 Appendix B. Example Protocol – Checking Position of a Chain Valve 362 Appendix C. Process Safety Events Leveling Criteria 366 Appendix D. Example Case Study 368 Appendix E. Quick Checklist for Investigators 398 Appendix F. Evidence Preservation Checklist – Prior to Arrival of the Investigation Team 404 Appendix G. Guidance On Classifying Potential Severity of a Loss of Primary Containment 406 Glossary 416 References 427 Index 437

Read more less

Book SynopsisOxide Electronics Multiple disciplines converge in this insightful exploration of complex metal oxides and their functions and propertiesOxide Electronics delivers a broad and comprehensive exploration of complex metal oxides designed to meet the multidisciplinary needs of electrical and electronic engineers, physicists, and material scientists. The distinguished author eschews complex mathematics whenever possible and focuses on the physical and functional properties of metal oxides in each chapter. Each of the sixteen chapters featured within the book begins with an abstract and an introduction to the topic, clear explanations are presented with graphical illustrations and relevant equations throughout the book. Numerous supporting references are included, and each chapter is self-contained, making them perfect for use both as a reference and as study material. Readers will learn how and why the field of oxide electronics is a key area of research and exploitation in materials scTable of ContentsSeries Preface xiii Preface xv List of Contributors xvii 1 Graphene Oxide for Electronics 1Fenghua Liu, Lifeng Zhang, Lijian Wang, Binyuan Zhao and WeipingWu 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Synthesis and Characterizations of Graphene Oxide 2 1.2.1 Chemical Reduction of Graphene Oxide (GO) 2 1.2.2 Microwave Method 2 1.2.3 Plasma Method 3 1.2.4 Laser Method 4 1.3 Energy Harvest Applications of Graphene Oxide 5 1.3.1 Solar Cells 5 1.3.2 Solar Thermal Energy Harvest Devices 7 1.4 Energy Storage Applications of Graphene Oxide 7 1.4.1 Supercapacitors 7 1.4.2 Batteries 10 1.5 Electronic Device Applications of Graphene Oxide 12 1.6 Large Area Electronics Applications of Graphene Oxide 13 References 16 2 Flexible and Wearable Graphene-Based E-Textiles 21Nazmul Karim, Shaila Afroj, Damien Leech and Amr M. Abdelkader 2.1 Introduction to Wearable E-Textiles 21 2.2 Synthesis of Graphene Derivatives 22 2.2.1 Graphene Oxide 22 2.2.2 Reduced Graphene Oxide 24 2.3 Graphene-BasedWearable E-Textiles 25 2.3.1 Graphene-Based Textile Fibres 26 2.3.2 Graphene-Coated Textiles 27 2.3.3 Graphene-PrintedWearable E-Textiles 28 2.3.3.1 Screen Printing 30 2.3.3.2 Inkjet Printing 30 2.4 Surface Pre- and Post-Treatment of Substrates 32 2.5 Applications 34 2.5.1 Sensors 34 2.5.2 Supercapacitor 36 2.5.3 Rechargeable Batteries 38 2.5.4 Optoelectronics 39 2.6 Challenges and Outlook 40 References 41 3 Magnetic Interactions in the Cubic Mott Insulators NiO, MnO, and CoO and the Related Oxides CuO and FeO 51David J. Lockwood andMichael G. Cottam 3.1 Introduction 51 3.2 Spin–Spin Interactions 52 3.2.1 Magnetic Ordering Below TN 52 3.2.2 Magnetostriction 53 3.2.3 Magnetic and Electronic Excitations 54 3.3 Spin–Phonon Interactions 59 3.3.1 Phonon and Magnon Temperature Dependences 60 3.3.2 Phonon Mode Splitting Below TN 62 3.4 Other Related Materials 64 3.4.1 Cupric Oxide 64 3.4.2 Iron Monoxide 65 3.5 Conclusions 68 Acknowledgments 68 References 68 4 High-𝜿 Dielectric Oxides for Electronics 75Tong Zhang, Xiaoyang Zhang, Yi Yang and WeipingWu 4.1 Introduction of High-𝜅 Dielectric Oxides 75 4.1.1 Group IIIA Dielectric Oxides 77 4.1.2 Group IIIB High-𝜅 Dielectric Oxides 77 4.1.3 Group IVB High-𝜅 Dielectric Oxides 77 4.2 The Deposition of High-𝜅 Oxide Dielectrics 78 4.3 High-𝜅 Dielectric Oxides for Field-Effect Transistors 80 4.3.1 High-𝜅 Dielectric Oxides for the MOSFETs 80 4.3.2 High-𝜅 Dielectric Oxides for Tunnel Field-Effect Transistors 84 4.4 High-𝜅 Dielectric Oxides for Memory Devices 85 4.4.1 High-𝜅 Dielectric Oxides for DRAM 85 4.4.2 High-𝜅 Dielectric Oxides for ReRAM 87 References 88 5 Low Temperature Growth of Germanium Oxide Nanowires by Template Based Self Assembly and their Raman Characterization 93Raisa Fabiha, Abigail Casey, Gregory Triplett and Supriyo Bandyopadhyay 5.1 Introduction 93 5.2 Synthesis 93 5.3 Characterization 96 5.4 Raman Measurements 96 5.5 Conclusion 98 References 99 6 Electronic Phenomena, Electroforming, Resistive Switching, and Defect Conduction Bands in Metal-Insulator-Metal Diodes 101ThomasW. Hickmott 6.1 Introduction 101 6.2 Experimental 103 6.3 Electroforming, Electroluminescence, and Electron Emission 104 6.3.1 Electroforming of Al-Al2O3-Ag Diodes 104 6.3.2 Electroluminescence from Al-Al2O3-Ag Diodes 104 6.3.3 Electron Emission from Al-Al2O3-Ag Diodes 105 6.3.4 VCNR, EL, and EM in Other Insulators 107 6.3.5 Temperature Dependence of EM 108 6.4 Electrode Effects in Resistive Switching of Nb-Nb2O5-Metal Diodes 109 6.4.1 Resistive Switching in Nb-Nb2O5-Metal Diodes 109 6.4.2 Resistive Switching at Low Temperatures 109 6.4.3 Structure in I-V Curves of Electroformed Nb-Nb2O5-Metal Diodes 110 6.5 Conduction, Electroluminescence, and Photoconductivity Before Electroforming MIM Diodes 112 6.5.1 Conduction in Nb-Nb2O5-Au Diodes 112 6.5.2 Electroluminescence in Nb-Nb2O5-Au Diodes 112 6.5.3 Conduction and Electroluminescence in MIM Diodes with TiO2 and Ta2O5 115 6.5.4 Photoconductivity in MIM Diodes 115 6.6 Discussion 118 6.6.1 Defect Conduction Bands in Amorphous Al2O3 119 6.6.2 Defect Conduction Bands in Amorphous Nb2O5 121 6.6.3 Defect Conduction Bands in Amorphous Insulators 123 6.7 Summary and Conclusions 125 References 125 7 Lead Oxide as Material of Choice for Direct Conversion Detectors 129Alla Reznik and Oleksii Semeniuk 7.1 Introduction 129 7.2 Crystal Structure and Electronic Properties of PbO 130 7.2.1 Crystal Structure of Tetragonal PbO (𝛼-PbO) 131 7.2.2 Crystal Structure of Orthorhombic PbO (𝛽-PbO) 132 7.2.3 Electronic Properties of 𝛼- and 𝛽-PbO 133 7.3 Deposition Process of PbO Layers 135 7.4 Charge Transport Mechanism in Lead Oxide 147 7.4.1 Electron Transport in poly-PbO 148 References 151 8 ZnO Varistors: From Grain Boundaries to Power Applications 157Felix Greuter 8.1 Introduction 157 8.2 Manufacturing Process of ZnO Varistors 160 8.3 Microstructure and Grain Boundaries 162 8.4 Grain Boundary Potential Barriers 168 8.5 The ‘Double Schottky Barrier Defect Model’ 174 8.6 Hot Electron Effects Controlling the Breakdown Region 181 8.7 Hot Electron Effects and Dynamic Response 185 8.8 From Single Grain Boundaries to Microstructures and Varistor Devices 196 8.9 Ageing and Long-Term Stability of Varistor Materials 207 8.10 Energy Absorption Capability and High Current Impulse Stresses 218 8.11 Summary and Outlook 223 Acknowledgements 226 References 226 9 Fundamental Properties and Power Electronic Device Progress of Gallium Oxide 235Xuanhu Chen, Chennupati Jagadish and Jiandong Ye 9.1 Introduction 235 9.2 Electronic Properties and Defects of Ga2O3 236 9.2.1 Bulk Crystals, Epitaxy, and n–type Doping 237 9.2.2 Electronic Band Structure and Feasibility of p–type Doping 240 9.2.3 Defect Behaviour in Bulk Crystals and Epitaxial Films 245 9.3 Basic Device Characteristics 250 9.3.1 Metal-Semiconductor Contact 250 9.3.1.1 Barrier Formation 250 9.3.1.2 Image-Force Lowering 252 9.3.1.3 Carrier Transport and Breakdown 254 9.3.2 Physics of Deep Depletion Ga2O3 MOSFETs 257 9.3.2.1 Metal-Insulator-Semiconductor Capacitors 257 9.3.2.2 Basic Device Characteristics of DepletionMode MOSFETs Based on Ga2O3 270 9.3.2.3 Approaches to Enhancement-Mode 𝛽-Ga2O3 MOSFETs 280 9.3.3 Relevant Figure of Merit in Ga2O3 282 9.4 Ga2O3 Schottky Rectifiers 286 9.4.1 Edge Terminations 287 9.4.2 Ga2O3 Schottky Rectifiers 295 9.4.3 Ga2O3 p-n Heterojunction Diodes 301 9.5 Ga2O3 Transistors 307 9.5.1 Ohmic Contacts to Ga2O3 307 9.5.2 Dielectric Materials for Ga2O3 and MOSCaps 308 9.5.3 Lateral Ga2O3 FETs 313 9.5.4 𝛽-Ga2O3 MODFETs 324 9.5.5 Vertical Ga2O3 MOSFETs 330 9.6 Summary 335 References 336 10 Emerging Trends, Challenges, and Applications in Solid-State Laser Cooling 353Jyothis Thomas, LauroMaia, Yannick Ledemi, YounesMessaddeq and Raman Kashyap 10.1 Introduction 353 10.2 Theory 355 10.3 Experimental Design Considerations for Cooling 357 10.3.1 Experimental Setups Used for Solid-state Laser Cooling 357 10.3.1.1 Crystals 357 10.3.1.2 Glasses 358 10.3.1.3 Silica Glass Optical Fibres 360 10.3.1.4 Semiconductor Nanoribbons 361 10.3.2 Techniques to Analyse Background Absorption (𝛼b) Coefficient 361 10.3.3 Temperature Measurement Techniques in Solid-State Laser Cooling 362 10.3.3.1 Thermal Imaging 362 10.3.3.2 Photoluminescence (PL)Thermometry 363 10.3.3.3 Temperature Measurement Using Fibre Bragg Gratings 363 10.3.3.4 Thermocouples 364 10.3.3.5 Photothermal Deflection Spectroscopy (PTDS) 364 10.3.3.6 Interferometric Technique 364 10.4 Laser Cooling Materials and Properties 365 10.4.1 Crystals 366 10.4.2 Semiconductors 368 10.4.3 Optical Fibres 370 10.4.4 Nanocrystalline Powders 371 10.5 Oxyfluoride Glass-Ceramics: Recent Developments in Solid-State Laser Cooling 373 10.5.1 Earth-Doped Oxyfluoride Pseudo-Binary Glasses and Glass-Ceramics for Optical Refrigeration 375 10.5.1.1 Materials and Methods 376 10.5.1.2 Results and Discussion 376 10.5.1.3 Summary on Pseudo-Binary Oxyfluoride Glass Ceramics 381 10.6 Optical Cryocooler Devices 382 10.7 Future Prospects and Conclusions 386 Acknowledgements 388 References 388 11 ElectrodeMaterials for Sodium Ion Rechargeable Batteries 397TaniaMajumder, Anwesa Mukherjee, Debasish Das and S.B.Majumder 11.1 Introduction – Review of the Constituents Used in Na – Ion Cells 397 11.2 Cathode Materials for Na Ion Rechargeable Cells 397 11.2.1 Transition Metal Oxides with Layered Structure 397 11.2.2 Prussian Blue Analogue 398 11.2.3 Sodium Superionic Conductors (NASICON) 399 11.2.4 Other Cathodes 400 11.3 Current Collectors, Binder, and Electrolyte 400 11.4 Anode Materials for Na Ion Rechargeable Cells 401 11.4.1 Carbonaceous Materials 401 11.4.2 Alloying Type Anodes 401 11.4.3 Conversion Type Anodes 402 11.4.4 Other Anodes 402 11.5 Outstanding Research Issues and Statement of the Problem 402 11.6 Synthesis and Electrochemical Characterization of Electrodes 404 11.6.1 Ilmenite NiTiO3 as Anode 404 11.6.1.1 Synthesis and Characterization 404 11.6.2 Electrochemical Characterization 404 11.6.3 Electrophoretic Deposition of NiTiO3-Based Anode 406 11.6.4 Electrochemical Performance of EPD Grown NTO Anodes 408 11.7 Na2Ti3O7 as Anode 409 11.7.1 Synthesis and Characterization 409 11.7.2 Electrochemical Characterization of Pristine NaTO 410 11.7.3 Electrochemical Performance of Carbon-Coated NaTO Anode 411 11.7.4 Electrochemical Performance of NaTO/rGO Composite Anode 413 11.8 PBA as Cathode 414 11.8.1 Nickel Hexacyanoferrate (NiHCF) 415 11.8.2 Iron Hexacyanoferrate (FeHCF) 417 11.9 Summary and Conclusions 418 Acknowledgement 419 References 419 12 Perovskites for Photovoltaics 423Hooman Mehdizadeh Rad, David Ompong and Jai Singh 12.1 Introduction 423 12.2 Diffusion Length 424 12.2.1 Methodology 425 12.2.2 Results of Simulated Diffusion Length and Discussions 427 12.3 Open-Circuit Voltage 432 12.3.1 Results of Open-Circuit Voltage and Discussions 433 12.3.2 Bimolecular Recombination 436 12.4 Influence of Density of Tail States at Interfaces 437 12.4.1 Methods 437 12.4.2 Results of Density of States and Discussions 441 12.5 Conclusions 444 References 447 13 Advanced Characterizations of Oxides for Optoelectronic Applications 453U. Onwukwe, L. Anguilano and P. Sermon 13.1 A Brief History of Optoelectronic Devices 453 13.1.1 Semiconductors 454 13.1.1.1 n-Type Extrinsic Semiconductors 455 13.1.1.2 p-Type Extrinsic Semiconductors 456 13.2 Interaction of Semiconductors and the Optoelectronic Phenomenon 457 13.2.1 Direct Band Gap Semiconductors 457 13.2.1.1 Indirect Band Gap Semiconductors 458 13.2.2 Oxides for Optoelectronics: Introduction 459 13.2.3 Major Types of MO for Optoelectronics 460 13.2.3.1 ITO 460 13.2.3.2 ZnO 460 13.2.3.3 AZO 461 13.2.3.4 IGZO 461 13.2.3.5 Perovskite Oxides 462 13.2.3.6 Reduced Graphene Oxide-Miscellaneous Materials 463 13.2.4 Method of Preparation of Optoelectronic Structures 467 13.2.4.1 Nanowires/Nanorods 467 13.2.4.2 Thin Films 467 13.2.4.3 Mixed Morphologies Fabrication 468 13.3 Characterization Techniques and their Use for Metal Oxide Optoelectronics 470 13.3.1 Rutherford Backscattering Spectrometry (RBS) 470 13.3.2 Fourier-Transform Infra-Red (FTIR) 471 13.3.2.1 Raman Spectroscopy 473 13.3.3 Scanning Electron Microscopy (SEM) 475 13.3.4 Transmission Electron Microscope (TEM) 477 13.3.5 Luminescence Techniques 480 13.3.6 X-Ray Diffraction 482 13.4 Facilities and Case Studies 484 13.4.1 Case Study I – Leaf Biotemplate Derived TiO2 485 References 488 14 Future Tuning Optoelectronic Oxides from the Inside: Sol-Gel (TiO2)x-(SiO2)100-x 497M.P.Worsley, J.G. Leadley, R.M.A. MacGibbon, T. Salvesen, P.A. Sermon and J.M. Charnock 14.1 Introduction and Background 497 14.1.1 Photons and Wavetrains 497 14.1.2 Optoelectronic Oxides and Devices 497 14.1.3 TiO2 498 14.1.4 TiO2-SiO2 498 14.1.5 Alkoxide and Sol-Gel Routes to TiO2-SiO2 500 14.1.6 Miscibility and the % TiO2 (x) Added in TiO2-SiO2 500 14.1.7 Doping of TiO2-SiO2 501 14.1.8 Local Structure in TiO2-SiO2 501 14.2 Hypothesis 503 14.3 Experimental 504 14.3.1 Materials 504 14.3.2 Preparations 504 14.3.3 Characterization Methods 504 14.4 Characterization Results 505 14.5 Discussion on Future Automated CALPHAD Design, Dip-Coating Mechanical, and High-Throughput Screening of Novel Optoelectronic Oxides and Devices 510 14.6 Conclusions on TiO2-SiO2 Use 510 Acknowledgements 513 References 513 15 Binary Calcia-Alumina Thin Films: Synthesis and Properties and Applications 525Asim K. Ray 15.1 Introduction 525 15.2 Structural and Physical Properties of C12A7 526 15.2.1 Thermal Stability 528 15.2.2 Ionic Conductivity and Mechanisms of Oxide–Ion Migration 529 15.3 Atomic and Electronic Structure 530 15.3.1 Synthesis of C12A7 531 15.3.2 Single Powders 531 15.3.3 Single Crystal 532 15.3.4 Polycrystalline Bulk 533 15.3.5 Thin Film 535 15.3.6 Ion Doping in C12A7 536 15.3.6.1 Heat Treatment in H2 Atmosphere 537 15.3.6.2 Thermoelectricity 537 15.4 Optical Properties 540 15.4.1 Reflectivity 541 15.4.2 Luminescence 542 15.5 Applications of C12A7 543 15.6 Summary 545 Acknowledgements 546 References 546 16 Oxide Cathodes 553Ian Alberts 16.1 Historical Aspects 553 16.1.1 The Edison Effect 555 16.1.2 ArthurWehnelt 555 16.1.3 Thermionic Emission Research in the Early Twentieth Century 556 16.1.4 Oxide Cathodes for the CRT 556 16.2 Physics of Thermionic Emission 557 16.2.1 Derivation of the Richardson-Dushman Equation 558 16.2.2 Space Charge and the Child-Langmuir Law 559 16.3 Oxide Cathode Development 560 16.3.1 The Barium-Coated Cathode 561 16.3.2 The Rise and Subsequent Fall of the Impregnated Cathode 562 16.3.3 Cermet Cathodes 565 16.3.4 State of the Art 565 16.4 Future Trends and Ongoing Applications 567 16.4.1 Vacuum X-Ray Tubes 568 16.4.2 Military Telecommunications 568 16.4.3 Klystrons 570 16.4.4 Gyrotron 571 16.4.5 Thermionic Energy Conversion 571 16.4.6 Triboelectric Nanogenerators 573 16.4.7 Frontiers in Thermionic Research: Vacuum Nanoelectronics 575 16.4.8 Field Emission Displays (FED) 575 16.5 Conclusion 577 References 577 Index 583

Read more less

Book SynopsisGroundbreaking Handbook Offers Detailed Research and Valuable Methodology to Address Dangerous and Costly Aviation Hazard Though annual damages from bird and bat collisions with aircraft have been estimated at $400 million in the United States and up to $1.2 billion in commercial aviation worldwide and despite numerous conferences and councils dedicated to the issue, very little has been published on this expensive and sometimes-lethal flying risk. Bird Strike in Aviation seeks to fill this gap, providing a comprehensive guide to preventing and minimizing damage caused by bird strike on aircraft. Based on a thorough and comprehensive examination of the subject, Dr. El-Sayed offers different approaches to reducing bird strikes, including detailed coverage of the three categories necessary for such reduction, namely, awareness/education, bird management (active and passive control), and aircraft design. In addition, the text discusses the importance Table of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Bird Strike: Foreign Object Damage (FOD) 2 1.3 A Brief History of Bird Strike 6 1.4 Brief Statistics of Bird Strike 8 1.5 Classification of Birds Based on Size 10 1.5.1 Small Birds (Less than 2 lb) 10 1.5.2 Small–Medium Birds (2–4 lb) 11 1.5.3 Medium–Large Birds (4–8 lb) 11 1.5.4 Large Birds (8–12 lb) 11 1.5.5 Massive Birds (12–30 lb) 13 1.6 Bird Strike Risk 14 1.6.1 Civilian Aircraft 14 1.6.2 Military Aircraft 15 1.6.3 Helicopters 17 1.7 Severity of Bird Strikes 17 1.8 Field Experience of Aircraft Industry and Airlines Regarding Bird Ingestion into Aero Engines 18 1.8.1 Pratt & Whitney (USA) 18 1.8.2 General Electric Aviation (USA) 18 1.8.3 Southwest Airlines (USA) 19 1.8.4 MTU (Germany) 19 1.8.5 FL Technics (Vilnius, Lithuania) 19 1.9 Bird Strike Committees 19 References 20 2 Aircraft Damage 23 2.1 Introduction 23 2.2 Accidents vs. Incidents 25 2.2.1 Accident 25 2.2.2 Serious Injury 25 2.2.3 Incident 26 2.3 Consequences of Bird Strike 26 2.4 Impact Force 28 2.5 Locations of Bird Strike Damage for Airliners 30 2.5.1 Nose and Radar Dome (Radome) 30 2.5.2 Windshield and Flight Cockpit 33 2.5.3 Landing Gear and Landing Gear Systems 37 2.5.4 Fuselage 39 2.5.5 Wings 40 2.5.6 Empennage 40 2.5.7 Power Plant 41 2.5.8 Propeller 53 2.5.9 V‐22 Osprey as a Military Example 53 2.5.10 Other Strikes to Aircraft Instruments 54 2.6 Helicopters 56 2.7 Some Accident Data 59 2.7.1 Fixed‐Wing Aircraft 59 2.7.2 Rotary‐Wing Aircraft (Helicopters) 60 References 63 3 Statistics for Different Aspects of Bird Strikes 67 3.1 Introduction 68 3.2 Statistics for Bird Strike 69 3.3 Classifying Bird Strikes 70 3.3.1 Single or Multiple Large Bird(s) 70 3.3.2 Relatively Small Numbers of Medium‐Sized Birds (2–10 Birds) 70 3.3.3 Large Flocks of Relatively Small Birds (Greater Than 10 Birds) 70 3.4 Classification of Birds Based on Critical Sites in the Aerodrome 70 3.4.1 Birds Flying or Soaring Over the Aerodrome or Approach Paths (100–4000 ft AGL) 71 3.4.2 Birds Flying, Sailing Low, or Hovering Over Active Runway and Shoulders (2200 ft AGL) 72 3.4.3 Birds Perching and Walking on Runway/Shoulders 72 3.4.4 Birds Squatting on the Runway to Rest 72 3.4.5 Birds Feeding on Live or Dead Insects or Animals on the Runway 73 3.4.6 Birds Perched on Runway Lights, Floodlight Towers, Electric Poles, and Other Perches 73 3.5 Bird Impact Resistance Regulation for Fixed‐Wing Aircraft 74 3.5.1 Transport Aircraft (Airliners, Civilian, and Military Cargo) 74 3.5.1.1 Airframe 74 3.5.1.2 Engines 74 3.5.2 General Aviation Aircraft 75 3.5.3 Light Non‐Commuter Aircraft 75 3.6 Bird Impact Resistance Regulation for Rotorcrafts 75 3.6.1 Large Rotorcraft 75 3.6.2 Small Rotorcraft 75 3.7 Statistics for Fixed‐Wing Civilian Aircraft 75 3.7.1 Critical Parts of Turbofan/Turbojet Aircraft 76 3.7.2 Critical Modules of Turboprop/Piston Aircraft 81 3.7.3 Bird Strike Versus Altitude 83 3.7.4 Bird Strike by the Phase of Flight 87 3.7.5 Annual Bird Strike Statistics 89 3.7.6 Monthly Bird Strike Statistics 91 3.7.7 Bird Strike by the Time of Day 93 3.7.8 Bird Strike by Continent 95 3.7.9 Bird Strike by Weight of Birds 95 3.7.10 Bird Strike by Aircraft Category 96 3.7.11 Bird Strike by Bird Species 98 3.7.12 Populations of Some Dangerous Bird Species in North America 100 3.7.13 Dangerous Bird Species in Europe 102 3.8 Military Aviation 103 3.8.1 Introduction 103 3.8.2 Annual Bird Strike with Military Aircraft 104 3.8.3 Annual Costs of Bird Strike with Military Aircraft 106 3.8.4 Statistics of Bird Strike by Altitude 107 3.8.5 Bird Strike by Aircraft Type 108 3.8.6 Bird Strike by Flight Phase 109 3.8.7 Bird Strike by the Distance from the Base 109 3.8.8 Bird Strike by Month 110 3.8.9 Bird Strike by the Time of Day 110 3.8.10 Bird Strike by Part 110 3.8.11 Critical Bird Species 112 3.9 Bird Strikes on Helicopters (Rotating Wing Aircraft) 112 3.9.1 Bird Strike with Civilian Helicopters 112 3.9.2 Bird Strike with Military Helicopters 114 3.10 Birds Killed in Strikes with Aircraft 115 References 116 4 Fatal Bird Strike Accidents 119 4.1 Introduction 120 4.2 Civil Aircraft 120 4.2.1 Introduction 120 4.2.2 Statistics of Annual Fatal Accidents Due to Bird Strike 121 4.2.3 Statistics of Critical Flight Phases 124 4.3 Fatal Accidents of Civil Aircraft 125 4.4 Statistics for Civil Aircraft Accidents 146 4.4.1 Statistics for Critical Damaged Parts of Aircraft 146 4.4.2 Statistics for Strikes with Different Types of Engines 148 4.4.3 Effects of the Wildlife Strike on the Flight 148 4.4.4 Dangerous Birds 149 4.5 Statistics for Bird Strike Incidents/Accidents in the USA (1990–2015) 150 4.6 Statistics for Russian Accidents (1988–1990) 150 4.7 Military Aircraft 153 4.7.1 Introduction 153 4.7.2 Statistics for Military Aircraft Accidents 154 4.7.3 Statistics for Ex‐Soviet Union Air Force in East Germany 157 4.7.4 Details of Some Accidents for Military Aircraft 159 4.7.5 Details of Accidents for Military Aircraft in Norway in 2016 163 4.7.6 Comparison between Bird Strikes with Civilian and Military Aircraft 166 4.8 Helicopters 166 4.8.1 Introduction 166 4.8.2 Statistics for Bird Strikes with Civil and Military Helicopters in the USA 168 4.8.3 Statistics for Bird Strikes with a Flight Phase 169 4.8.4 Statistics for Bird Strikes with Time of Day 170 4.8.5 Statistics for Parts of Helicopters Struck by Birds (January 2009 Through February 2016) 170 4.8.6 Statistics for Bird Species Striking and Damaging Helicopters 170 4.8.7 Fatal Accidents 170 4.9 Conclusions 173 References 174 5 Bird Migration 179 5.1 Introduction 179 5.2 Why Do Birds Migrate? 182 5.3 Some Migration Facts 183 5.4 Basic Types of Migration 183 5.4.1 Classification of Migration Based on the Pattern 184 5.4.2 Classification of Migration Based on the Type of Motion 186 5.4.3 Classification of Migration Based on Distance Traveled 186 5.4.4 Permanent Residents 187 5.5 Flight Speed of Migrating Birds 187 5.6 Navigation of Migrating Birds 187 5.7 Migration Threats 188 5.8 Migratory Bird Flyways 188 5.8.1 Introduction 188 5.8.2 North American Migration Flyways – The Four Ways 191 5.8.2.1 The Atlantic Flyway 191 5.8.2.2 The Mississippi Flyway 193 5.8.2.3 The Central Flyway 193 5.8.2.4 The Pacific Flyway 194 5.8.3 The Americas Bird Migration 194 5.8.3.1 North–South Americas 194 5.8.3.2 Alaska’s Flyways 194 5.8.4 Africa Eurasia Flyways 194 5.8.5 East Asian–Australian Flyways 199 5.9 Radio Telemetry 200 References 202 6 Bird Strike Management 205 6.1 Introduction 206 6.2 Why Birds Are Attracted to Airports 206 6.2.1 Food 206 6.2.2 Water 207 6.2.3 Cover 208 6.3 Misconceptions or Myths 209 6.4 The FAA National Wildlife Strike Database for Civil Aviation 209 6.5 Management for Fixed‐Wing Aircraft 214 6.5.1 Reduction of Bird Strike Hazard 214 6.5.2 Awareness 214 6.5.3 Airfield Bird Control 215 6.5.4 Aircraft Design 215 6.6 Control of Airport and Surroundings 215 6.7 Active Controls 215 6.7.1 Auditory (or Bioacoustic) Methods 216 6.7.1.1 Pyrotechnics 216 6.7.1.2 Gas Cannons 217 6.7.1.3 Bioacoustics 217 6.7.2 Visual Techniques 219 6.7.2.1 Lasers 219 6.7.2.2 Falconry 221 6.7.2.3 Dogs 222 6.7.2.4 Scarecrow 223 6.7.2.5 Human Scarer 223 6.7.2.6 Radio‐Controlled Craft 224 6.7.2.7 All‐Terrain Vehicles (ATV) 224 6.7.2.8 Pulsating Lights 224 6.7.2.9 Scaring Aircraft 224 6.7.2.10 The Robotic Peregrine, Hawk and Falcon (Robop and Robird) 224 6.7.2.11 Corpses 227 6.7.3 Lethal Techniques 228 6.7.3.1 Shooting 228 6.7.3.2 Live Trapping 230 6.7.3.3 Removal of Nests and Young 230 6.7.3.4 Egg Manipulation 231 6.7.4 Chemical Repellents 233 6.7.4.1 Polybutene 233 6.7.4.2 Anthraquinone 233 6.7.4.3 Methyl Anthranilate 233 6.7.4.4 Naphthalene 234 6.7.4.5 Avitrol 234 6.7.5 Exclusion 234 6.7.5.1 Netting 234 6.7.5.2 Porcupine Wire (Nixalite) 235 6.7.5.3 Bird‐B‐Gone 235 6.7.5.4 Avi‐Away 235 6.7.5.5 Fine Wires (Large‐Area Applications) 235 6.7.5.6 Bird Balls™ 235 6.8 Habitat Modification or Passive Management Techniques 236 6.8.1 Food Control 236 6.8.2 Water Control 238 6.8.3 Shelter Control 238 6.8.3.1 Managing Reforested Areas 240 6.8.3.2 Landscaping 240 6.9 Air Traffic Service Providers 240 6.9.1 Controllers and Flight‐Service Specialists 240 6.9.2 Terminal Controllers 242 6.9.3 Tower and Ground Controllers 244 6.9.4 Flight Service Specialists (FSS) 244 6.9.5 Pilots 244 6.9.5.1 Preflight Preparation 244 6.9.5.2 Taxiing for Takeoff 245 6.9.5.3 Takeoff 245 6.9.5.4 Climb 245 6.9.5.5 En Route 245 6.9.5.6 Approach and Landing 245 6.9.5.7 Post‐Flight 246 6.9.6 Air Operators 246 6.9.6.1 Introduction 246 6.9.6.2 Air Operator General Flight Planning and Operating Principles 247 6.9.6.3 Flight Planning 247 6.9.6.4 Managing Agricultural Programs in Airfields 247 6.10 Aircraft Design 247 6.10.1 Certification Standards 248 6.10.1.1 Airframe Certification Standards 248 6.10.1.2 Engine Certification Standards 248 6.10.1.3 Improved Design and Material Developments of Both Airframe and Engine Parts 249 6.10.2 Additional Requirements 249 6.10.2.1 New Aircraft Categories 249 6.10.2.2 Aircraft Modules 249 6.11 Rotary‐Wing Aviation 250 6.11.1 Helicopters 250 6.11.2 Heliports 251 6.12 Bird Avoidance 252 6.12.1 Avian Radar 252 6.12.1.1 Avian Radar Fundamentals 252 6.12.1.2 Integration into Airport Operations 254 6.12.2 Optical Systems 260 References 262 7 Airframe and Engine Bird Strike Testing 267 7.1 Introduction 267 7.2 Bird Impact Test Facilities 268 7.2.1 Introduction 268 7.2.2 Test Facilities 269 7.2.2.1 USA 269 7.2.2.2 Canada 269 7.2.2.3 Europe 269 7.3 Details of Some Test Facilities 269 7.3.1 Aircraft Windshield and Airframe Testing 270 7.3.1.1 Chicken Gun or Chicken Cannon 270 7.3.1.2 Alenia Plant Testing 270 7.3.2 Engine Testing 270 7.3.3 Artificial Birds Versus Real Birds 271 7.3.3.1 Real Birds 272 7.3.3.2 Artificial Birds 272 7.4 Certification Requirements 273 7.5 Airframe Testing of Transport Aircraft 273 7.5.1 Wing Testing 273 7.5.1.1 Case Study 274 7.5.2 Empennage Testing 275 7.5.2.1 Case Study 1 275 7.5.2.2 Case Study 2 276 7.6 Airframe Testing of Military Aircraft 277 7.6.1 Canopy and Windscreen 278 7.6.2 Lift Fan Inlet Door (STOVL Mode) 279 7.7 Engine Testing of Civil and Military Aircraft 280 7.7.1 Certification Regarding Bird Strike 280 7.7.2 Typical Damage to Turbofan Modules 283 7.8 Helicopters 283 References 285 8 Numerical Simulation of Bird Strike 287 8.1 Introduction 287 8.2 Numerical Steps 289 8.2.1 Pre‐processing 290 8.2.2 Solution 290 8.2.3 Post‐processing 291 8.3 Bird Impact Modeling 291 8.3.1 Modeling the Geometry and Material of Birds 291 8.3.2 Impact Modeling 293 8.4 Numerical Approaches for Bird Strike 296 8.4.1 Mathematical Models 296 8.4.2 The Lagrangian Method 297 8.4.3 The Eulerian Approach 298 8.4.4 The Arbitrary Lagrangian Eulerian (ALE) 299 8.4.5 Smoothed Particles Hydrodynamics (SPH) 300 8.5 Case Study 301 8.5.1 Leading Edges of Wing/Tail 302 8.5.1.1 Wing 302 8.5.1.2 Vertical Tail 306 8.5.1.3 Horizontal Tail 307 8.5.2 Sidewall Structure of an Aircraft Nose 308 8.5.3 Windshield 309 8.5.4 Fan 312 8.5.5 Helicopter Windshield 316 8.5.6 Helicopter Rotor and Spinner 318 References 318 9 Bird Identification 323 9.1 Introduction 323 9.2 Collecting Bird Strike Material 325 9.2.1 Feathers 325 9.2.2 Tissue/Blood (“Snarge”) 325 9.2.2.1 Dry Material 325 9.2.2.2 Fresh Material 325 9.3 Reporting and Shipping 326 9.4 Methods Used to Identify Bird Strike Remains 327 9.4.1 Examination by Eye 327 9.4.2 Microscopic Examination 328 9.4.3 Keratin Electrophoresis 330 9.4.4 DNA Analysis 330 9.5 Accident Analysis 331 References 332 Index 335

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive volume on photocatalytic functional materials for environmental remediation As the need for removing large amounts of pollution and contamination in air, soil, and water grows, emerging technologies in the field of environmental remediation are of increasing importance. The use of photocatalysisa green technology with enormous potential to resolve the issues related to environmental pollutionbreaks down toxic organic compounds to mineralized products such as carbon dioxide and water. Due to their high performance, ease of fabrication, long-term stability, and low manufacturing costs, photofunctional materials constructed from nanocomposite materials hold great potential for environmental remediation. Photocatalytic Functional Materials for Environmental Remediationexamines the development of high performance photofunctional materials for the treatment of environmental pollutants. This timely volume assembles and reviews a broad range of ideas from leading experts Table of ContentsList of Contributors xi Preface xv 1 Titanium Dioxide and Carbon Nanomaterials for the Photocatalytic Degradation of Organic Dyes 1Nagamalai Vasimalai Abbreviations 1 1.1 Introduction 2 1.1.1 Impact of Dye Effluents on the Environment and Health 3 1.2 Principles and Mechanism of Photocatalysis 6 1.2.1 Direct Photocatalytic Pathways 7 1.2.1.1 The Langmuir–Hinshel Wood Process 8 1.2.1.2 The Eley–Rideal Process 8 1.2.2 Indirect Photocatalytic Mechanisms 8 1.3 Importance of Titanium Dioxide 9 1.3.1 Rutile 10 1.3.2 Anatase 10 1.3.3 Brookite 10 1.4 Titanium Dioxide for the Photocatalytic Degradation of Organic Dyes 11 1.4.1 Approaches Enhance the Photocatalytic Activity of TiO2 12 1.4.2 Metal and Multi‐Atom Doped TiO2 13 1.5 Carbon Nanomaterials for the Photocatalytic Degradation of Organic Dyes 15 1.5.1 Activated Carbon 16 1.5.2 Graphite 17 1.5.3 Graphene 19 1.5.4 Carbon Nanotubes and Fullerenes 20 1.5.5 Carbon Black 21 1.5.6 Carbon Nanofibers 22 1.5.7 Carbon Quantum Dots 22 1.5.8 Mesoporous Carbon 24 1.6 Conclusion and Trends 26 References 27 2 Visible Light Photocatalytic Degradation of Environmental Pollutants Using Metal Oxide Semiconductors 41 S. Thangaraj Nishanthi 2.1 Introduction 41 2.2 Photocatalysis 42 2.3 Mechanism and Fundamentals of Photocatalytic Reactions 42 2.4 Synthesis of Different Photocatalysts 44 2.4.1 Hydrothermal/Solvothermal Methods 45 2.4.2 Electrodeposition 46 2.4.3 Chemical Bath Deposition 46 2.4.4 Sol‐Gel Process 47 2.4.5 Chemical Precipitation 47 2.5 Factors Affecting Photocatalytic Degradation 47 2.5.1 Catalyst Loading 47 2.5.2 pH of the Solution 48 2.5.3 Size and Structure of the Photocatalyst 49 2.5.4 Reaction Temperature 49 2.5.5 Concentration and Nature of Pollutants 49 2.5.6 Inorganic Ions 50 2.6 Metal Oxide Semiconductors 50 2.7 Ternary/Quaternary Oxides 54 2.8 Composites Semiconductors 55 2.9 Sensitization 56 2.10 Conclusions 57 References 57 3 Contemporary Achievements of Visible Light‐Driven Nanocatalysts for the Environmental Applications 69 Panneerselvam Sathishkumar, Nalenthiran Pugazhenthiran, Ramalinga V. Mangalaraja, Kiros Guesh, David Contreras, and Sambandam Anandan 3.1 Introduction 69 3.1.1 Langmuir–Hinshelwood Approach 71 3.1.2 The Eley–Rideal Approach 71 3.1.3 Indirect Photocatalytic Approach 72 3.2 Types of Photocatalytic Reactor Models 73 3.3 Modification of Semiconductor Nanoparticles 90 3.3.1 Metal Nanoparticles 90 3.3.2 Non‐Metal Deposition 91 3.4 Emerging Photocatalysts 95 3.4.1 Perovskite Photocatalysts 95 3.4.2 C3N4‐Supported Photocatalysts 96 3.5 Mechanisms of Photocatalysis 99 3.6 Conclusion 116 References 121 4 Application of Nanocomposites for Photocatalytic Removal of Dye Contaminants 131 Sivaraman Somasundaram, Pitchaimani Veerakumar, King‐Chuen Lin, and Vignesh Kumaravel 4.1 Nanocomposites and Applications 131 4.2 Dyes: Introduction, Classification, and Impacts on the Environment 131 4.3 Strategies of Dye Contaminant Removal 133 4.4 Photodegradation and the Removal of Dyes Using Nanocomposites 134 4.4.1 Zeolite‐Based Nanocomposites 153 4.4.2 Clay‐Supported Nanocomposites 153 4.4.3 Polymer‐Based Nanocomposites 154 4.5 Photocatalytic Reactors for Dye Degradation 156 4.6 Summary 156 References 157 5 Photocatalytic Active Silver Phosphate for Photoremediation of Organic Pollutants 163 Sachin V. Otari and Hemraj M. Yadav 5.1 Introduction 163 5.2 Properties of Ag3PO4 165 5.2.1 Structural Features 165 5.2.2 Antimicrobial Properties 166 5.3 Photoremediation of Organic Pollutants 167 5.3.1 Effect of Morphology 168 5.3.1.1 Size and Structure of the Photocatalyst 168 5.3.1.2 Facet‐Dependent Photocatalysts 171 5.3.2 Effect of Composition 172 5.3.2.1 Carbon Materials 173 5.3.2.2 Semiconductor Materials 176 5.3.2.3 Magnetic Particles 179 5.3.2.4 Metal Particles 179 5.3.3 Doping Effect 182 5.4 Conclusions and Future Prospects 182 Acknowledgements 183 References 183 6 Plasmonic Ag‐ZnO: Charge Carrier Mechanisms and Photocatalytic Applications 191 Raghavachari Kavitha, Shivashankar Girish Kumar, and Channe Gowda Sushma 6.1 ZnO‐Based Photocatalysis 191 6.2 Why Deposit Silver on ZnO Surface? 192 6.3 Methods to Decorate Silver NPs on the Surface of ZnO 193 6.4 Mechanism of Charge Carrier Transfer Dynamics in Ag‐ZnO 197 6.4.1 Schottky Barrier and Charge Transfer Process 198 6.4.2 Surface Plasmon Resonance Effects 198 6.4.3 Defect Chemistry of Ag‐ZnO 199 6.5 Influence of Silver Content on Optimizing the Photocatalytic Activity 200 6.6 Structure–Morphology Relationship on Photocatalytic Activity 201 6.7 Co‐modification of Ag‐ZnO for Photocatalysis 204 6.8 Conclusion and Future Prospects 207 References 208 7 Multifunctional Hybrid Materials Based on Layered Double Hydroxide towards Photocatalysis 215 Lagnamayee Mohapatra and Dhananjaya Patra 7.1 Introduction 215 7.2 Hybrid LDHs from LDH Precursors 216 7.3 Photocatalytic Applications of Different LDH‐Based Hybrid Materials 217 7.3.1 LDH‐Based Mixed Metal Oxides (MMO) 221 7.3.2 Hybrid MMOs for Dye Degradation 225 7.3.3 LDH Nanocomposites 227 7.3.4 Intercalated LDH 231 7.4 Conclusions 233 References 234 8 Magnetically Separable Iron Oxide‐Based Nanocomposite Photocatalytic Materials for Environmental Remediation 243 Sakthivel Thangavel, Nivea Raghavan, and Gunasekaran Venugopal 8.1 Introduction 243 8.2 Synthesis Techniques for Magnetic Nanophotocatalyst Composites 246 8.3 Three Types of Semiconductor Magnetic‐Based Nanocomposites 249 8.4 Graphene‐Based Magnetically Separable Composites 251 8.4.1 Metal Di‐Chalcogenides‐Magnetic Nanocomposite Photocatalysts 252 8.4.2 Graphitic Carbon Nitride‐Based Magnetic Photocatalysts 254 8.5 The Effect of Iron Oxide‐Based Photocatalysts on Pollutants 255 8.5.1 Organic Dye Pollutant Degradation 255 8.5.2 Non‐Dye or Colorless Compounds 256 8.5.3 Heavy Metals 258 8.5.4 Pharmaceutical Waste 259 8.6 Summary 260 References 260 9 Photo Functional Materials for Environmental Remediation 267 Pazhanivel Devendran and Meenakshisundaram Swaminathan 9.1 Introduction 267 9.2 Photoelectric Effect 267 9.3 Photo Functional Materials (Photocatalysts) 268 9.4 Photodegradation of Textile Dyes 271 9.5 Semiconductor‐Based Photocatalysts 272 9.6 Carbon Nanotubes (CNTs) 274 9.7 Photo Functional Semiconductors on CNT Hybrid Materials for Tunable Optoelectronic Devices 275 9.8 Fabrication of CdS Quantum Dot Sensitized Solar Cells Using Nitrogen‐Functionalized CNTs/TiO2 Nanocomposites 276 9.9 Graphene Sheet 280 9.10 CdS/G Nanocomposites for Efficient Visible Light Driven Photocatalysis 281 9.11 Graphitic Carbon Nitride (g‐C3N4) 283 9.12 Conclusions 284 References 285 10 Graphitic Carbon Nitride‐Based Nanostructured Materials for Photocatalytic Applications 291 Jayaraman Theerthagiri, Kumaraguru Duraimurugan, Hyun‐Seok Kim, and Jagannathan Madhavan 10.1 Introduction 291 10.2 General Mechanism: Reaction Pathway 292 10.3 g‐C3N4 and Composites in Photocatalytic Degradation 294 10.4 Conclusions and Future Directions 304 Acknowledgements 305 References 305 11 Metal–Organic Frameworks for Photocatalytic Environmental Remediation 309 Mohan Sakar and Trong‐On Do 11.1 Introduction 309 11.2 Structural Features of MOFs 310 11.3 Synthesis of MOFs 312 11.3.1 Evaporation Method 313 11.3.2 Vapor Diffusion Method 313 11.3.3 Gel Crystallization Process 313 11.3.4 Solvothermal Synthesis 313 11.3.5 Microwave‐Assisted Synthesis 314 11.3.6 Sonochemical Methods 314 11.3.7 Electrochemical Synthesis 314 11.3.8 Mechanochemical Synthesis 315 11.4 Photocatalytic MOFs by Design 315 11.5 Photocatalytic Applications of MOFs 317 11.5.1 Degradation of Organic Pollutants 317 11.5.2 CO2 Reduction 320 11.5.3 Heavy Metal Reduction 323 11.5.4 Others 326 11.6 Conclusions and Future Prospects 327 Acknowledgements 329 References 329 12 Active Materials for Photocatalytic Reduction of Carbon Dioxide 343 Balasubramanian Viswanathan 12.1 Introduction 343 12.2 CO2 Photoreduction – Essentials 345 12.3 Heterogeneous Photocatalytic Reduction of Carbon Dioxide with Water 348 12.4 Nanomaterials and New Combinations of Materials for Carbon Dioxide Reduction 350 12.5 Selection of Materials 355 12.6 Material Modifications for Improving Efficiency 359 12.7 Perspectives in the Photocatalytic Reduction of Carbon Dioxide 363 Acknowledgements 367 References 367 Index 373

Read more less

Book SynopsisCovers experiment planning, execution, analysis, and reporting This single-source resource guides readers in planning and conducting credible experiments for engineering, science, industrial processes, agriculture, and business. The text takes experimenters all the way through conducting a high-impact experiment, from initial conception, through execution of the experiment, to a defensible final report. It prepares the reader to anticipate the choices faced during each stage. Filled with real-world examples from engineering science and industry, Planning and Executing Credible Experiments: A Guidebook for Engineering, Science, Industrial Processes, Agriculture, and Business offers chapters that challenge experimenters at each stage of planning and execution and emphasizes uncertainty analysis as a design tool in addition to its role for reporting results. Tested over decades at Stanford University and internationally, the text employs two powerful, free, Table of ContentsAbout the Authors xxi Preface xxiii Acknowledgments xxvii About the Companion Website xxix 1 Choosing Credibility 1 1.1 The Responsibility of an Experimentalist 2 1.2 Losses of Credibility 2 1.3 Recovering Credibility 3 1.4 Starting with a Sharp Axe 3 1.5 A Systems View of Experimental Work 4 1.6 In Defense of Being a Generalist 5 Panel 1.1 The Bundt Cake Story 6 References 6 Homework 6 2 The Nature of Experimental Work 7 2.1 Tested Guide of Strategy and Tactics 7 2.2 What Can Be Measured and What Cannot? 8 2.2.1 Examples Not Measurable 8 2.2.2 Shapes 9 2.2.3 Measurable by the Human Sensory System 10 2.2.4 Identifying and Selecting Measurable Factors 11 2.2.5 Intrusive Measurements 11 2.3 Beware Measuring Without Understanding: Warnings from History 12 2.4 How Does Experimental Work Differ from Theory and Analysis? 13 2.4.1 Logical Mode 13 2.4.2 Persistence 13 2.4.3 Resolution 13 2.4.4 Dimensionality 15 2.4.5 Similarity and Dimensional Analysis 15 2.4.6 Listening to Our Theoretician Compatriots 16 Panel 2.1 Positive Consequences of the Reproducibility Crisis 17 Panel 2.2 Selected Invitations to Experimental Research, Insights from Theoreticians 18 Panel 2.3 Prepublishing Your Experiment Plan 21 2.4.7 Surveys and Polls 22 2.5 Uncertainty 23 2.6 Uncertainty Analysis 23 References 24 Homework 25 3 An Overview of Experiment Planning 27 3.1 Steps in an Experimental Plan 27 3.2 Iteration and Refinement 28 3.3 Risk Assessment/Risk Abatement 28 3.4 Questions to Guide Planning of an Experiment 29 Homework 30 4 Identifying the Motivating Question 31 4.1 The Prime Need 31 Panel 4.1 There’s a Hole in My Bucket 32 4.2 An Anchor and a Sieve 33 4.3 Identifying the Motivating Question Clarifies Thinking 33 4.3.1 Getting Started 33 4.3.2 Probe and Focus 34 4.4 Three Levels of Questions 35 4.5 Strong Inference 36 4.6 Agree on the Form of an Acceptable Answer 36 4.7 Specify the Allowable Uncertainty 37 4.8 Final Closure 37 Reference 38 Homework 38 5 Choosing the Approach 39 5.1 Laying Groundwork 39 5.2 Experiment Classifications 40 5.2.1 Exploratory 40 5.2.2 Identifying the Important Variables 40 5.2.3 Demonstration of System Performance 41 5.2.4 Testing a Hypothesis 41 5.2.5 Developing Constants for Predetermined Models 41 5.2.6 Custody Transfer and System Performance Certification Tests 42 5.2.7 Quality-Assurance Tests 42 5.2.8 Summary 43 5.3 Real or Simplified Conditions? 43 5.4 Single-Sample or Multiple-Sample? 43 Panel 5.1 A Brief Summary of “Dissertation upon Roast Pig” 44 Panel 5.2 Consider a Spherical Cow 44 5.5 Statistical or Parametric Experiment Design? 45 5.6 Supportive or Refutative? 47 5.7 The Bottom Line 47 References 48 Homework 48 6 Mapping for Safety, Operation, and Results 51 6.1 Construct Multiple Maps to Illustrate and Guide Experiment Plan 51 6.2 Mapping Prior Work and Proposed Work 51 6.3 Mapping the Operable Domain of an Apparatus 53 6.4 Mapping in Operator’s Coordinates 57 6.5 Mapping the Response Surface 59 6.5.1 Options for Organizing a Table 59 6.5.2 Options for Presenting the Response on a Scatter-Plot-Type Graph 61 Homework 64 7 Refreshing Statistics 65 7.1 Reviving Key Terms to Quantify Uncertainty 65 7.1.1 Population 65 7.1.2 Sample 66 7.1.3 Central Value 67 7.1.4 Mean, μ or Ȳ 67 7.1.5 Residual 67 7.1.6 Variance, σ2 or S2 68 7.1.7 Degrees of Freedom, Df 68 7.1.8 Standard Deviation, σY or SY 68 7.1.9 Uncertainty of the Mean, δμ 69 7.1.10 Chi‐Squared, χ2 69 7.1.11 p‐Value 70 7.1.12 Null Hypothesis 70 7.1.13 F‐value of Fisher Statistic 71 7.2 The Data Distribution Most Commonly Encountered The Normal Distribution for Samples of Infinite Size 71 7.3 Account for Small Samples: The t‐Distribution 72 7.4 Construct Simple Models by Computer to Explain the Data 73 7.4.1 Basic Statistical Analysis of Quantitative Data 73 7.4.2 Model Data Containing Categorical and Quantitative Factors 75 7.4.3 Display Data Fit to One Categorical Factor and One Quantitative Factor 76 7.4.4 Quantify How Each Factor Accounts for Variation in the Data 76 7.5 Gain Confidence and Skill at Statistical Modeling Via the R Language 77 7.5.1 Model and Plot Results of a Single Variable Using the Example Data diceshoe.csv 77 7.5.2 Evaluate Alternative Models of the Example Data hiloy.csv 78 7.5.2.1 Inspect the Data 78 7.5.3 Grand Mean 78 7.5.4 Model by Groups: Group‐Wise Mean 78 7.5.5 Model by a Quantitative Factor 78 7.5.6 Model by Multiple Quantitative Factors 78 7.5.7 Allow Factors to Interact (So Each Group Gets Its Own Slope) 79 7.5.8 Include Polynomial Factors (a Statistical Linear Model Can Be Curved) 80 7.6 Report Uncertainty 80 7.7 Decrease Uncertainty (Improve Credibility) by Isolating Distinct Groups 81 7.8 Original Data, Summary, and R 82 References 83 Homework 83 8 Exploring Statistical Design of Experiments 87 8.1 Always Seeking Wiser Strategies 87 8.2 Evolving from Novice Experiment Design 87 8.3 Two‐Level and Three‐Level Factorial Experiment Plans 88 8.4 A Three‐Level, Three‐Factor Design 89 8.5 The Plackett–Burman 12‐Run Screening Design 93 8.6 Details About Analysis of Statistically Designed Experiments 95 8.6.1 Model Main Factors to Original Raw Data 95 8.6.2 Model Main Factors to Original Data Around Center of Each Factor 96 8.6.3 Model Including All Interaction Terms 97 8.6.4 Model Including Only Dominant Interaction Terms 97 8.6.5 Model Including Dominant Interaction Term Plus Quadratic Term 98 8.6.6 Model All Factors of Example 2, Centering Each Quantitative Factor 99 8.6.7 Refine Model of Example 2 Including Only Dominant Terms 100 8.7 Retrospect of Statistical Design Examples 101 8.8 Philosophy of Statistical Design 101 8.9 Statistical Design for Conditions That Challenge Factorial Designs 102 8.10 A Highly Recommended Tool for Statistical Design of Experiments 103 8.11 More Tools for Statistical Design of Experiments 103 8.12 Conclusion 103 Further Reading 104 Homework 104 9 Selecting the Data Points 107 9.1 The Three Categories of Data 107 9.1.1 The Output Data 107 9.1.2 Peripheral Data 108 9.1.3 Backup Data 108 9.1.4 Other Data You May Wish to Acquire 108 9.2 Populating the Operating Volume 109 9.2.1 Locating the Data Points Within the Operating Volume 109 9.2.2 Estimating the Topography of the Response Surface 109 9.3 Example from Velocimetry 109 9.3.1 Sharpen Our Approach 110 9.3.2 Lessons Learned from Velocimetry Example 111 9.4 Organize the Data 112 9.4.1 Keep a Laboratory Notebook 112 9.4.2 Plan for Data Security 112 9.4.3 Decide Data Format 112 9.4.4 Overview Data Guidelines 112 9.4.5 Reasoning Through Data Guidelines 113 9.5 Strategies to Select Next Data Points 114 9.5.1 Overview of Option 1: Default Strategy with Intensive Experimenter Involvement 115 9.5.1.1 Choosing the Data Trajectory 115 9.5.1.2 The Default Strategy: Be Bold 115 9.5.1.3 Anticipate, Check, Course Correct 116 9.5.1.4 Other Aspects to Keep in Mind 116 9.5.1.5 Endpoints 117 9.5.2 Reintroducing Gosset 118 9.5.3 Practice Gosset Examples (from Gosset User Manual) 119 9.6 Demonstrate Gosset for Selecting Data 120 9.6.1 Status Quo of Experiment Planning and Execution (Prior to Selecting More Samples) 120 9.6.1.1 Specified Motivating Question 120 9.6.1.2 Identified Pertinent Candidate Factors 121 9.6.1.3 Selected Initial Sample Points Using Plackett–Burman 121 9.6.1.4 Executed the First 12 Runs at the PB Sample Conditions 122 9.6.1.5 Analyzed Results. Identified Dominant First-Order Factors. Estimated First-Order Uncertainties of Factors 123 9.6.1.6 Generated Draft Predictive Equation 124 9.6.2 Use Gosset to Select Additional Data Samples 125 9.6.2.1 Example Gosset Session: User Input to Select Next Points 125 9.6.2.2 Example Gosset Session: How We Chose User Input 126 9.6.2.3 Example Gosset Session: User Input Along with Gosset Output 128 9.6.2.4 Example Gosset Session: Convert the Gosset Design to Operator Values 131 9.6.2.5 Results of Example Gosset Session: Operator Plots of Total Experiment Plan 132 9.6.2.6 Execute Stage Two of the Experiment Plan: User Plus Gosset Sample Points 132 9.7 Use Gosset to Analyze Results 133 9.8 Other Options and Features of Gosset 133 9.9 Using Gosset to Find Local Extrema in a Function of Several Variables 134 9.10 Summary 137 Further Reading 137 Homework 137 10 Analyzing Measurement Uncertainty 143 10.1 Clarifying Uncertainty Analysis 143 10.1.1 Distinguish Error and Uncertainty 144 10.1.1.1 Single-Sample vs. Multiple-Sample 145 10.1.2 Uncertainty as a Diagnostic Tool 146 10.1.2.1 What Can Uncertainty Analysis Tell You? 146 10.1.2.2 What is Uncertainty Analysis Good For? 148 10.1.2.3 Uncertainty Analysis Can Redirect a Poorly Conceived Experiment 148 10.1.2.4 Uncertainty Analysis Improves the Quality of Your Work 148 10.1.2.5 Slow Sampling and “Randomness” 149 10.1.2.6 Uncertainty Analysis Makes Results Believable 150 10.1.3 Uncertainty Analysis Aids Management Decision-Making 150 10.1.3.1 Management’s Task: Dealing with Warranty Issues 150 10.1.4 The Design Group’s Task: Setting Tolerances on Performance Test Repeatability 152 10.1.5 The Performance Test Group’s Task: Setting the Tolerances on Measurements 152 10.2 Definitions 153 10.2.1 True Value 153 10.2.2 Corrected Value 153 10.2.3 Data Reduction Program 153 10.2.4 Accuracy 153 10.2.5 Error 154 10.2.6 XXXX Error 154 10.2.7 Fixed Error 154 10.2.8 Residual Fixed Error 154 10.2.9 Random Error 154 10.2.10 Variable (but Deterministic) Error 155 10.2.11 Uncertainty 155 10.2.12 Odds 155 10.2.13 Absolute Uncertainty 155 10.2.14 Relative Uncertainty 155 10.3 The Sources and Types of Errors 156 10.3.1 Types of Errors: Fixed, Random, and Variable 156 10.3.2 Sources of Errors: The Measurement Chain 156 10.3.2.1 The Undisturbed Value 158 10.3.2.2 The Available Value 158 10.3.2.3 The Achieved Value 158 10.3.2.4 The Observed Value 159 10.3.2.5 The Corrected Value 159 10.3.3 Specifying the True Value 160 10.3.3.1 If the Achieved Value is Taken as the True Value 160 10.3.3.2 If the Available Value is Taken as the True Value 163 10.3.3.3 If the Undisturbed Value is Taken as the True Value 166 10.3.3.4 If the Mixed Mean Gas Temperature is Taken as the True Value 167 10.3.4 The Role of the End User 167 10.3.4.1 The End-Use Equations Implicitly Define the True Value 167 10.3.5 Calibration 168 10.4 The Basic Mathematics 170 10.4.1 The Root-Sum-Squared (RSS) Combination 170 10.4.2 The Fixed Error in a Measurement 171 10.4.3 The Random Error in a Measurement 172 10.4.4 The Uncertainty in a Measurement 173 10.4.5 The Uncertainty in a Calculated Result 174 10.4.5.1 The Relative Uncertainty in a Result 176 10.5 Automating the Uncertainty Analysis 178 10.5.1 The Mathematical Basis 178 10.5.2 Example of Uncertainty Analysis by Spreadsheet 179 10.6 Single-Sample Uncertainty Analysis 181 10.6.1 Assembling the Necessary Inputs 184 10.6.2 Calculating the Uncertainty in the Result 185 10.6.3 The Three Levels of Uncertainty: Zeroth-, First-, and Nth-Order 185 10.6.3.1 Zeroth-Order Replication 186 10.6.3.2 First-Order Replication 187 10.6.3.3 Nth-Order Replication 188 10.6.4 Fractional-Order Replication for Special Cases 188 10.6.5 Summary of Single-Sample Uncertainty Levels 189 10.6.5.1 Zeroth-Order 189 10.6.5.2 First-Order 190 10.6.5.3 Nth-Order 190 References 190 Further Reading 191 Homework 191 11 Using Uncertainty Analysis in Planning and Execution 197 11.1 Using Uncertainty Analysis in Planning 197 11.1.1 The Physical Situation and Energy Analysis 198 11.1.2 The Steady‐State Method 199 11.1.3 The Transient Method 200 11.1.4 Reflecting on Assumptions Made During DRE Derivations 201 11.2 Perform Uncertainty Analysis on the DREs 202 11.2.1 Uncertainty Analysis: General Form 202 11.2.2 Uncertainty Analysis of the Steady‐State Method 203 11.2.3 Uncertainty Analysis – Transient Method 204 11.2.4 Compare the Results of Uncertainty Analysis of the Methods 205 11.2.5 What Does the Calculated Uncertainty Interval Mean? 206 11.2.6 Cross‐Checking the Experiment 207 11.2.7 Conclusions 207 11.3 Using Uncertainty Analysis in Selecting Instruments 208 11.4 Using Uncertainty Analysis in Debugging an Experiment 209 11.4.1 Handling Overall Scatter 209 11.4.2 Sources of Scatter 210 11.4.3 Advancing Toward Calibration 211 11.4.4 Selecting Thresholds 212 11.4.5 Iterating Analysis 212 11.4.6 Rechecking Situational Uncertainty 212 11.5 Reporting the Uncertainties in an Experiment 213 11.5.1 Progress in Uncertainty Reporting 214 11.6 Multiple‐Sample Uncertainty Analysis 214 11.6.1 Revisiting Single‐Sample and Multiple‐Sample Uncertainty Analysis 214 11.6.2 Examples of Multiple‐Sample Uncertainty Analysis 215 11.6.3 Fixed Error and Random Error 216 11.7 Coordinate with Uncertainty Analysis Standards 216 11.7.1 Describing Fixed and Random Errors in a Measurement 217 11.7.2 The Bias Limit 217 11.7.2.1 Fossilization 218 11.7.2.2 Bias Limits 218 11.7.3 The Precision Index 219 11.7.4 The Number of Degrees of Freedom 220 11.8 Describing the Overall Uncertainty in a Single Measurement 220 11.8.1 Adjusting for a Single Measurement 220 11.8.2 Describing the Overall Uncertainty in a Result 221 11.8.3 Adding the Overall Uncertainty to Predictive Models 222 11.9 Additional Statistical Tools and Elements 222 11.9.1 Pooled Variance 222 11.9.1.1 Student’s t‐Distribution – Pooled Examples 223 11.9.2 Estimating the Standard Deviation of a Population from the Standard Deviation of a Small Sample: The Chi‐Squared χ2 Distribution 223 References 225 Homework 226 12 Debugging an Experiment, Shakedown, and Validation 231 12.1 Introduction 231 12.2 Classes of Error 231 12.3 Using Time-Series Analysis in Debugging 232 12.4 Examples 232 12.4.1 Gas Temperature Measurement 232 12.4.2 Calibration of a Strain Gauge 233 12.4.3 Lessons Learned from Examples 234 12.5 Process Unsteadiness 234 12.6 The Effect of Time-Constant Mismatching 235 12.7 Using Uncertainty Analysis in Debugging an Experiment 236 12.7.1 Calibration and Repeatability 236 12.7.2 Stability and Baselining 238 12.8 Debugging the Experiment via the Data Interpretation Program 239 12.8.1 Debug the Experiment via the DIP 239 12.8.2 Debug the Interface of the DIP 239 12.8.3 Debug Routines in the DIP 240 12.9 Situational Uncertainty 241 13 Trimming Uncertainty 243 13.1 Focusing on the Goal 243 13.2 A Motivating Question for Industrial Production 243 13.2.1 Agreed Motivating Questions for Industrial Example 244 13.2.2 Quick Answers to Motivating Questions 244 13.2.3 Challenge: Precheck Analysis and Answers 245 13.3 Plackett–Burman 12-Run Results and Motivating Question #3 245 13.4 PB 12-Run Results and Motivating Question #1 247 13.4.1 Building a Predictive Model Equation from R-Language Linear Model 248 13.4.2 Parsing the Dual Predictive Model Equation 249 13.4.3 Uncertainty of the Intercept in the Dual Predictive Model Equation 250 13.4.4 Mapping an Answer to Motivating Question #1 251 13.4.5 Tentative Answers to Motivating Question #1 252 13.5 Uncertainty Analysis of Dual Predictive Model and Motivating Question #2 252 13.5.1 Uncertainty of the Constant in the Dual Predictive Model Equation 252 13.5.2 Uncertainty of Other Factors in the Dual Predictive Model Equation 253 13.5.3 Include All Coefficient Uncertainties in the Dual Predictive Model Equation 254 13.5.4 Overall Uncertainty from All Factors in the Predictive Model Equation 254 13.5.5 Improved Tentative Answers to Motivating Questions, Including Uncertainties 256 13.5.6 Search for Improved Predictive Models 256 13.6 The PB 12-Run Results and Individual Machine Models 256 13.6.1 Individual Machine Predictive Model Equations 258 13.6.2 Uncertainty of the Intercept in the Individual Predictive Model Equations 258 13.6.3 Uncertainty of the Constant in the Individual Predictive Model Equations 259 13.6.4 Uncertainty of Other Factors in the Individual Predictive Model Equation 259 13.6.4.1 Uncertainties of Machine 1 259 13.6.4.2 Uncertainties of Machine 2 260 13.6.4.3 Including Instrument and Measurement Uncertainties 260 13.6.5 Include All Coefficient Uncertainties in the Individual Predictive Model Equations 260 13.6.6 Overall Uncertainty from All Factors in the Individual Predictive Model Equations 261 13.6.7 Quick Overview of Individual Machine Performance Over the Operating Map 262 13.7 Final Answers to All Motivating Questions for the PB Example Experiment 263 13.7.1 Answers to Motivating Question #1 263 13.7.2 Answers to Motivating Question #2 263 13.7.3 Answers to Motivating Question #3 (Expanded from Section 13.3) 263 13.7.4 Answers to Motivating Question #4 264 13.7.5 Other Recommendations (to Our Client) 264 13.8 Conclusions 265 Homework 266 14 Documenting the Experiment: Report Writing 269 14.1 The Logbook 269 14.2 Report Writing 269 14.2.1 Organization of the Reports 270 14.2.2 Who Reads What? 270 14.2.3 Picking a Viewpoint 271 14.2.4 What Goes Where? 271 14.2.4.1 What Goes in the Abstract? 272 14.2.4.2 What Goes in the Foreword? 272 14.2.4.3 What Goes in the Objective? 273 14.2.4.4 What Goes in the Results and Conclusions? 273 14.2.4.5 What Goes in the Discussion? 274 14.2.4.6 References 274 14.2.4.7 Figures 275 14.2.4.8 Tables 276 14.2.4.9 Appendices 276 14.2.5 The Mechanics of Report Writing 276 14.2.6 Clear Language Versus “JARGON” 277 Panel 14.1 The Turbo-Encabulator 278 14.2.7 “Gobbledygook”: Structural Jargon 279 Panel 14.2 U.S. Code, Title 18, No. 793 279 14.2.8 Quantitative Writing 281 14.2.8.1 Substantive Versus Descriptive Writing 281 Panel 14.3 The Descriptive Bank Statement 281 14.2.8.2 Zero-Information Statements 281 14.2.8.3 Change 282 14.3 International Organization for Standardization, ISO 9000 and other Standards 282 14.4 Never Forget. Always Remember 282 Appendix A: Distributing Variation and Pooled Variance 283 A.1 Inescapable Distributions 283 A.1.1 The Normal Distribution for Samples of Infinite Size 283 A.1.2 Adjust Normal Distributions with Few Data: The Student’s t-Distribution 283 A.2 Other Common Distributions 286 A.3 Pooled Variance (Advanced Topic) 286 Appendix B: Illustrative Tables for Statistical Design 289 B.1 Useful Tables for Statistical Design of Experiments 289 B.1.1 Ready-made Ordering for Randomized Trials 289 B.1.2 Exhausting Sets of Two-Level Factorial Designs (≤ Five Factors) 289 B.2 The Plackett–Burman (PB) Screening Designs 289 Appendix C: Hand Analysis of a Two-Level Factorial Design 293 C.1 The General Two-Level Factorial Design 293 C.2 Estimating the Significance of the Apparent Factor Effects 298 C.3 Hand Analysis of a Plackett–Burman (PB) 12-Run Design 299 C.4 Illustrative Practice Example for the PB 12-Run Pattern 302 C.4.1 Assignment: Find Factor Effects and the Linear Coefficients Absent Noise 302 C.4.2 Assignment: Find Factor Effects and the Linear Coefficients with Noise 303 C.5 Answer Key: Compare Your Hand Calculations 303 C.5.1 Expected Results Absent Noise (compare C.4.1) 303 C.5.2 Expected Results with Random Gaussian Noise (cf. C.4.2) 304 C.6 Equations for Hand Calculations 305 Appendix D: Free Recommended Software 307 D.1 Instructions to Obtain the R Language for Statistics 307 D.2 Instructions to Obtain LibreOffice 308 D.3 Instructions to Obtain Gosset 308 D.4 Possible Use of RStudio 309 Index 311

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe book Modeling in Membranes and Membrane-Based Processes is based on the idea of developing a reference which will cover most relevant and state-of-the-art approaches in membrane modeling. This book explores almost every major aspect of modeling and the techniques applied in membrane separation studies and applications. This includes first principle-based models, thermodynamics models, computational fluid dynamics simulations, molecular dynamics simulations, and artificial intelligence-based modeling for membrane separation processes. These models have been discussed in light of various applications ranging from desalination to gas separation. In addition, this breakthrough new volume covers the fundamentals of polymer membrane pore formation mechanisms, covering not only a wide range of modeling techniques, but also has various facets of membrane-based applications. Thus, this book can be an excellent source for a holistic perspective on membranes in general, as well as aTable of ContentsAcknowledgement xiii 1 Introduction: Modeling and Simulation for Membrane Processes 1Anirban Roy, Aditi Mullick, Anupam Mukherjee and Siddhartha Moulik References 6 2 Thermodynamics of Casting Solution in Membrane Synthesis 9Shubham Lanjewar, Anupam Mukherjee, Lubna Rehman, Amira Abdelrasoul and Anirban Roy 2.1 Introduction 10 2.2 Liquid Mixture Theories 11 2.2.1 Theories of Lattices 11 2.2.1.1 The Flory-Huggins Theory 11 2.2.1.2 The Equation of State Theory 12 2.2.1.3 The Gas-Lattice Theory 13 2.2.2 Non-Lattice Theories 13 2.2.2.1 The Strong Interaction Model 13 2.2.2.2 The Heat of Mixing Approach 13 2.2.2.3 The Solubility Parameter Approach 14 2.2.3 The Flory–Huggins Model 15 2.3 Solubility Parameter and Its Application 18 2.3.1 Scatchard-Hildebrand Theory 18 2.3.1.1 The Regular Solution Model 18 2.3.1.2 Application of Hildebrand Equation to Regular Solutions 19 2.3.2 Solubility Scales 20 2.3.3 Role of Molecular Interactions 21 2.3.3.1 Types of Intermolecular Forces 21 2.3.4 Intermolecular Forces: Effect on Solubility 23 2.3.5 Interrelation Between Heat of Vaporization and Solubility Parameter 24 2.3.6 Measuring Units of Solubility Parameter 25 2.4 Dilute Solution Viscometry 26 2.4.1 Types of Viscosities 27 2.4.2 Viscosity Determination and Analysis 28 2.5 Ternary Composition Triangle 32 2.5.1 Typical Ternary Phase Diagram 33 2.5.2 Binodal Line 34 2.5.2.1 Non-Solvent/Solvent Interaction 36 2.5.2.2 Non-Solvent/Polymer Interaction 36 2.5.2.3 Solvent/Polymer Interaction 36 2.5.3 Spinodal Line 36 2.5.4 Critical Point 37 2.5.5 Thermodynamic Boundaries and Phase Diagram 38 2.6 Conclusion 40 2.7 Acknowledgment 40 List of Abbreviations and Symbols 40 Greek Symbols 42 References 42 3 Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) Modeling in Membrane-Based Desalination Technologies 47Pelin Yazgan-Birgi, Mohamed I. Hassan Ali and Hassan A. Arafat 3.1 Desalination Technologies and Modeling Tools 48 3.1.1 Desalination Technologies 48 3.1.2 Tools in Desalination Processes Modeling 49 3.1.3 CFD Modeling Tool in Desalination Processes 55 3.2 General Principles of CFD Modeling in Desalination Processes 56 3.2.1 Reverse Osmosis (RO) Technology 61 3.2.2 Forward Osmosis (FO) Technology 65 3.2.3 Membrane Distillation (MD) Technology 68 3.2.4 Electrodialysis and Electrodialysis Reversal (ED/EDR) Technologies 73 3.3 Application of CFD Modeling in Desalination 77 3.3.1 Applications in Reverse Osmosis (RO) Technology 77 3.3.2 Applications in Forward Osmosis (FO) Technology 95 3.3.3 Applications in Membrane Distillation (MD) Technology 108 3.3.4 Applications in Electrodialysis and Electrodialysis Reversal (ED/EDR) Technologies 121 3.4 Commercial Software Used in Desalination Process Modeling 122 Conclusion 132 References 133 4 Role of Thermodynamics and Membrane Separations in Water-Energy Nexus 145Anupam Mukherjee, Shubham Lanjewar, Ridhish Kumar, Arijit Chakraborty, Amira Abdelrasoul and Anirban Roy 4.1 Introduction: 1st and 2nd Laws of Thermodynamics 146 4.2 Thermodynamic Properties 148 4.2.1 Measured Properties 148 4.2.2 Fundamental Properties 149 4.2.3 Derived Properties 149 4.2.4 Gibbs Energy 149 4.2.5 1st and 2nd Law for Open Systems 152 4.3 Minimum Energy of Separation Calculation: A Thermodynamic Approach 153 4.3.1 Non-Idealities in Electrolyte Solutions 154 4.3.2 Solution Thermodynamics 154 4.3.2.1 Solvent 155 4.3.2.2 Solute 155 4.3.2.3 Electrolyte 156 4.3.3 Models for Evaluating Properties 157 4.3.3.1 Evaluation of Activity Coefficients Using Electrolyte Models 157 4.3.4 Generalized Least Work of Separation 159 4.3.4.1 Derivation 160 4.4 Desalination and Related Energetics 164 4.4.1 Evaporation Techniques 166 4.4.2 Membrane-Based New Technologies 167 4.5 Forward Osmosis for Water Treatment: Thermodynamic Modelling 173 4.5.1 Osmotic Processes 173 4.5.1.1 Osmosis 174 4.5.1.2 Draw Solutions 175 4.5.2 Concentration Polarization in Osmotic Process 177 4.5.2.1 External Concentration Polarization 177 4.5.2.2 Internal Concentration Polarization 178 4.5.3 Forward Osmosis Membranes 180 4.5.4 Modern Applications of Forward Osmosis 180 4.5.4.1 Wastewater Treatment and Water Purification 181 4.5.4.2 Concentrating Dilute Industrial Wastewater 181 4.5.4.3 Concentration of Landfill Leachate 181 4.5.4.4 Concentrating Sludge Liquids 182 4.5.4.5 Hydration Bags 182 4.5.4.6 Water Reuse in Space Missions 182 4.6 Pressure Retarded Osmosis for Power Generation: A Thermodynamic Analysis 183 4.6.1 What is Pressure Retarded Osmosis? 183 4.6.2 Pressure Retarded Osmosis for Power Generation 184 4.6.3 Mixing Thermodynamics 186 4.6.3.1 Gibbs Energy of Solutions 186 4.6.3.2 Gibbs Free Energy of Mixing 187 4.6.4 Thermodynamics of Pressure Retarded Osmosis 188 4.6.5 Role of Membranes in Pressure Retarded Osmosis 190 4.6.6 Future Prospects of Pressure Retarded Osmosis 191 4.7 Conclusion 192 4.8 Acknowledgment 192 Nomenclature 192 1. Roman Symbols 192 2. Greek Symbols 193 3. Subscripts 194 4. Superscripts 194 5. Acronyms 194 References 195 5 Modeling and Simulation for Membrane Gas Separation Processes 201Samaneh Bandehali, Hamidreza Sanaeepur, Abtin Ebadi Amooghin and Abdolreza Moghadassi Abbreviations 201 Nomenclatures 202 Subscripts 203 5.1 Introduction 203 5.2 Industrial Applications of Membrane Gas Separation 205 5.2.1 Air Separation or Production of Oxygen and Nitrogen 205 5.2.2 Hydrogen Recovery 206 5.2.3 Carbon Dioxide Removal from Natural Gas and Syn Gas Purification 210 5.3 Modeling in Membrane Gas Separation Processes 210 5.3.1 Mathematical Modeling for Membrane Separation of a Gas Mixture 210 5.3.2 Modeling in Acid Gas Separation 218 5.4 Process Simulation 221 5.4.1 Gas Treatment Modeling in Aspen HYSYS 222 5.5 Modeling of Gas Separation by Hollow-Fiber Membranes 225 5.6 CFD Simulation 227 5.6.1 Hollow Fiber Membrane Contactors (HFMCs) 227 5.7 Conclusions 228 References 229 6 Gas Transport through Mixed Matrix Membranes (MMMs): Fundamentals and Modeling 237Rizwan Nasir, Hafiz Abdul Mannan, Danial Qadir, Hilmi Mukhtar, Dzeti Farhah Mohshim and Aymn Abdulrahman 6.1 History of Membrane Technology 237 6.2 Separation Mechanisms for Gases through Membranes 238 6.3 Overview of Mixed Matrix Membranes 242 6.3.1 Material and Synthesis of Mixed Matrix Membrane 242 6.3.2 Performance Analysis of Mixed Matrix Membranes 242 6.4 MMMs Performance Prediction Models 243 6.4.1 New Approaches for Performance Prediction of MMMs 246 6.5 Future Trends and Conclusions 246 6.6 Acknowledgment 253 References 253 7 Application of Molecular Dynamics Simulation to Study the Transport Properties of Carbon Nanotubes-Based Membranes 257Maryam Ahmadzadeh Tofighy and Toraj Mohammadi 7.1 Introduction 258 7.2 Carbon Nanotubes (CNTs) 259 7.3 CNTs Membranes 263 7.4 MD Simulations of CNTs and CNTs Membranes 265 7.5 Conclusions 271 References 272 8 Modeling of Sorption Behaviour of Ethylene Glycol-Water Mixture Using Flory-Huggins Theory 277Haresh K Dave and Kaushik Nath 8.1 Introduction 278 8.2 Materials and Method 281 8.2.1 Chemicals 281 8.2.2 Preparation and Cross-Linking of Membrane 281 8.2.3 Determination of Membrane Density 281 8.2.4 Sorption of Pure Ethylene Glycol and Water in the Membrane 282 8.2.5 Sorption of Binary Solution in the Membrane 282 8.2.6 Model for Pure Solvent in PVA/PES Membrane Using F-H Equation 283 8.2.7 Model for Binary EG-Water Sorption Using F-H Equation 285 8.3 Results and Discussion 289 8.3.1 Sorption in the PVA-PES Membrane 289 8.3.2 Determination of F-H Parameters Between Water and Ethylene Glycol (Xw−EG) 290 8.3.3 Determination of F-H Parameters for Solvent and Membrane (χwm and χEGm) 292 8.3.4 Modeling of Sorption Behaviour Using F-H Parameters 293 8.4 Conclusions 296 Nomenclature 297 Greek Letters 298 Acknowledgement 298 References 298 9 Artificial Intelligence Model for Forecasting of Membrane Fouling in Wastewater Treatment by Membrane Technology 301Khac-Uan Do and Félix Schmitt 9.1 Introduction 302 9.1.1 Membrane Filtration in Wastewater Treatment 302 9.1.2 Membrane Fouling in Membrane Bioreactors and its Control 302 9.1.3 Models for Membrane Fouling Control 304 9.1.4 Objectives of the Study 305 9.2 Materials and Methods 305 9.2.1 AO-MBR System 305 9.2.2 The AI Modeling in this Study 305 9.2.3 Analysis Methods 307 9.3 Results and Discussion 308 9.3.1 Membrane Fouling Prediction Based on AI Model 308 9.3.2 Discussion on Using AI Model to Predict Membrane Fouling 316 9.4 Conclusion 320 Acknowledgements 321 References 321 10 Membrane Technology: Transport Models and Application in Desalination Process 327Lubna Muzamil Rehman, Anupam Mukherjee, Zhiping Lai and Anirban Roy 10.1 Introduction 328 10.2 Historical Background 331 10.3 Theoretical Background and Transport Models 335 10.3.1 Classical Solution Diffusion Model 336 10.3.2 Extended Solution-Diffusion Model 339 10.3.3 Modified Solution-Diffusion-Convection Model 341 10.3.4 Pore Flow Model (PFM) 342 10.3.5 Electrolyte Transport and Electrokinetic Models 344 10.3.6 Kedem–Katchalsky Model – An Irreversible Thermodynamics Model 346 10.3.7 Spiegler–Kedem Model 346 10.3.8 Mixed-Matrix Membrane Models 347 10.3.9 Thin Film Composite Membrane Transport Models 348 10.3.10 Membrane Distillation 349 10.4 Limitations of Current Membrane Technology 351 10.4.1 External Concentration Polarisation 351 10.4.2 Internal Concentration Polarisation 352 10.4.3 External Concentration Polarisation Due to Membrane Biofouling 354 10.5 Recent Advances of Membrane Technology in RO, FO, and PRO 355 10.5.1 Hybrids 358 10.5.2 Other Membrane Desalination Technologies 359 10.5.2.1 Membrane Distillation 359 10.5.2.2 Reverse Electrodialysis (RED) 360 10.6 Techno-Economical Analysis 360 10.7 Conclusion 362 List of Abbreviations and Symbols 363 Greek Symbols 365 Suffix 366 References 366 Index 375

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe authoritative introduction to all aspects of plastics engineering offering both academic and industry perspectives in one complete volume. Introduction to Plastics Engineering provides a self-contained introduction to plastics engineering. A unique synergistic approach explores all aspects of material use concepts, mechanics, materials, part design, part fabrication, and assembly required for converting plastic materials, mainly in the form of small pellets, into useful products. Thermoplastics, thermosets, elastomers, and advanced composites, the four disparate application areas of polymers normally treated as separate subjects, are covered together. Divided into five parts Concepts, Mechanics, Materials, Part Processing and Assembly, and Material Systems this inclusive volume enables readers to gain a well-rounded, foundational knowledge of plastics engineering. Chapters cover topics including the structure of polymers, how concepts from polymer physics explain the macro Trade ReviewAlthough Author Dr. Vijay Stokes humbly includes ″introduction″ in the book title, the treatment in this book is quite extensive and inclusive, with 25 chapters and over 1000 pages. This volume essentially contains every facet of plastics engineering from materials and fabrication methods to advanced composites. It endorses a unique synergistic approach to implementing the ideas of mechanistic principles and polymer physics to practical applications of polymers and composites. Engineers are natural readers of this book. In this book, concepts from polymer physics explain the macro behavior of plastics, including deformation, flow and rheology, which are of vital importance in design and fabrication with plastics. Engineers would therefore learn the new tool sets to tailor plastics in various engineering applications. Materials scientists who have an interest in applications of polymers would greatly benefit from this book as well. The book also contains detailed derivations and design analysis and may be used as a textbook for college seniors or students at an introductory graduate level. --Professor Donggang Yao, Journal of Manufacturing Science and Engineering The book, Introduction of Plastics Engineering, is a great resource both for students beginning to learn about plastics, and for practicing engineers trying to clarify concepts unique to polymers. The author writes that he started working on plastics in mid career;the learning process he went through is reflected in how he has organized the material in the over 1000 pages in this book. It works. As a reviewer who has worked with polymers for almost four decades, I give this book high marks. --Professor Tim A. Osswald, International Polymer Processing Overall, this is an important addition to the plastics engineering series available in the market. While most books on plastics engineering emphasize materials' aspects and most design books are based on mechanical engineering concepts, this book uses mechanics based engineering principles to understand plastics engineering. Hence, the book covers the existing gap. The principles are discussed with basic knowledge of mathematics and easy to follow. --Professor Anil K. Bhowmick, AIChE JournalThis expansive 1000-page book authored by Professor Stokes is certainly a great addition to the bookshelves of both practicing plastics engineers and academics… Each chapter of the book has been put together meticulously and thoughtfully with informative illustrations, mechanics-based models, and empirical data. With many chapters of the book containing author’s own works besides others, the monograph is very authentic and I strongly recommend it as a textbook and research monograph. --Professor Hareesh Tippur, Journal of Engineering Materials and Technology Table of ContentsSeries Preface xxix Preface xxxi Part I Introduction 1 Outlines for Chapters 1 and 2 1 Introductory Survey 3 1.1 Background 3 1.2 Synergy Between Materials Science and Engineering 4 1.3 Plastics Engineering as a Process (the Plastics Engineering Process) 7 1.4 Types of Plastics 9 1.5 Material Characteristics Determine Part Shapes 11 1.6 Part Fabrication (Part Processing) 27 1.7 Part Performance 28 1.8 Assembly 32 1.9 Concluding Remarks 33 2 Evolving Applications of Plastics 35 2.1 Introduction 35 2.2 Consumer Applications 36 2.3 Medical Applications 67 2.4 Automotive Applications 70 2.5 Infrastructure Applications 77 2.6 Wind Energy 88 2.7 Airline Applications 90 2.8 Oil Extraction 91 2.9 Mining 92 2.10 Concluding Remarks 93 Part II Mechanics 95 Outlines for Chapters 3 through 8 3 Introduction to Stress and Deformation 97 3.1 Introduction 97 3.2 Simple Measures for Load Transfer and Deformation 97 3.3 *Strains as Displacement Gradients 99 3.4 *Coupling Between Normal and Shear Stresses 101 3.5 *Coupling Between Normal and Shear Strains 102 3.6 **Two-Dimensional Stress 103 3.7 Concluding Remarks 105 4 Models for Solid Materials 107 4.1 Introduction 107 4.2 Simple Models for the Mechanical Behavior of Solids 107 4.3 Elastic Materials 108 4.4 *Anisotropic Materials 109 4.5 Thermoelastic Effects 111 4.6 Plasticity 113 4.7 Concluding Remarks 116 5 Simple Structural Elements 119 5.1 Introduction 119 5.2 Bending of Beams 119 5.3 Deflection of Prismatic Beams 123 5.4 Torsion of Thin-Walled Circular Tubes 127 5.5 Torsion of Thin Rectangular Bars and Open Sections 129 5.6 Torsion of Thin-Walled Tubes 130 5.7 *Torsion of Multicellular Sections 131 5.8 Introduction to Elastic Stability 133 5.9 *Elastic Stability of an Axially Loaded Column 138 5.10 Twist-Bend Buckling of a Cantilever 142 5.11 Stress Concentration 142 5.12 The Role of Numerical Methods 145 5.13 Concluding Remarks 145 6 Models for Liquids 147 6.1 Introduction 147 6.2 Simple Models for Heat Conduction 147 6.3 Kinematics of Fluid Flow 149 6.4 Equations Governing One-Dimensional Fluid Flow 151 6.5 Simple Models for the Mechanical Behavior of Liquids 157 6.6 Simple One-Dimensional Flows 159 6.7 Polymer Rheology 171 6.8 Concluding Remarks 173 7 Linear Viscoelasticity 175 7.1 Introduction 175 7.2 Phenomenology of Viscoelasticity 176 7.3 Linear Viscoelasticity 179 7.4 Simple Models for Stress Relaxation and Creep 182 7.5 Response for Constant Strain Rates 189 7.6 *Sinusoidal Shearing 190 7.6.1 Dynamic Mechanical Analysis (DMA) 191 7.6.1.1 DMA Curves for Three-Parameter Model 192 7.6.2 *Energy Storage and Loss 192 7.7 Isothermal Temperature Effects 193 7.7.1 Thermorheologically Simple Materials 194 7.7.2 Physical Interpretation for Time-Temperature Shift 195 7.8 *Variable Temperature Histories 195 7.9 *Cooling of a Constrained Bar 196 7.10 Concluding Remarks 196 8 Stiffening Mechanisms 199 8.1 Introduction 199 8.2 Continuous Fiber Reinforcement 199 8.3 Discontinuous Fiber Reinforcement 203 8.4 The Halpin–Tsai Equations 211 8.5 Reinforcing Materials 211 8.6 Concluding Remarks 213 Further Reading 213 Part III Materials 215 Outlines for Chapters 9 through 15 9 Introduction to Polymers 217 9.1 Introduction 217 9.2 Thermoplastics 217 9.3 Molecular Weight Distributions 226 9.4 Thermosets 227 9.5 Concluding Remarks 227 10 Concepts from Polymer Physics 229 10.1 Introduction 229 10.2 Chain Conformations 229 10.3 Amorphous Polymers 234 10.4 Semicrystalline Polymers 240 10.5 Liquid Crystal Polymers 243 10.6 Concluding Remarks 245 11 Structure, Properties, and Applications of Plastics 247 11.1 Introduction 247 11.2 Resin Grades 248 11.3 Additives and Modifiers 248 11.4 Polyolefins 251 11.5 Vinyl Polymers 254 11.6 High-Performance Polymers 258 11.7 High-Temperature Polymers 265 11.8 Cyclic Polymers 271 11.9 Thermoplastic Elastomers 272 11.10 Historical Notes 273 11.11 Concluding Remarks 274 12 Blends and Alloys 277 12.1 Introduction 277 12.2 Blends 278 12.3 Historical Notes 282 12.4 Concluding Remarks 282 13 Thermoset Materials 285 13.1 Introduction 285 13.2 Thermosetting Resins 285 13.3 High-Temperature Thermosets 296 13.4 Thermoset Elastomers 304 13.5 Historical Notes 309 13.6 Concluding Remarks 311 14 Polymer Viscoelasticity 313 14.1 Introduction 313 14.2 Phenomenology of Polymer Viscoelasticity 313 14.3 Time-Temperature Superposition 319 14.4 Sinusoidal Oscillatory Tests 323 14.5 Concluding Remarks 328 15 Mechanical Behavior of Plastics 331 15.1 Introduction 331 15.2 Deformation Phenomenology of Polycarbonate 332 15.3 Tensile Characteristics of PEI 360 15.4 Deformation Phenomenology of PBT 363 15.5 Stress-Deformation Behavior of Several Plastics 376 15.6 Phenomenon of Crazing 387 15.7 *Multiaxial Yield 393 15.8 *Fracture 401 15.9 Fatigue 403 15.10 Impact Loading 412 15.11 Creep 419 15.12 Stress-Deformation Behavior of Thermoset Elastomers 419 15.13 Concluding Remarks 420 Further Reading 420 Part IV Part Processing and Assembly 421 Outlines for Chapters 16 through 21 16 Classification of Part Shaping Methods 423 16.1 Introduction 423 16.2 Part Fabrication (Processing) Methods for Thermoplastics 424 16.3 Evolution of Part Shaping Methods 429 16.4 Effects of Processing on Part Performance 431 16.5 Bulk Processing Methods for Thermoplastics 439 16.6 Part Processing Methods for Thermosets 440 16.7 Part Processing Methods Advanced Composites 442 16.8 Processing Methods for Rubber Parts 443 16.9 Concluding Remarks 445 17 Injection Molding and Its Variants 447 17.1 Introduction 447 17.2 Process Elements 447 17.3 Fountain Flow 462 17.4 Part Morphology 473 17.5 Part Design 475 17.6 Large- Versus Small-Part Molding 493 17.7 Molding Practice 504 17.8 Variants of Injection Molding 526 17.8.7 In-Mold Decoration and Lamination 552 17.9 Concluding Remarks 553 References 553 18 Dimensional Stability and Residual Stresses 555 18.1 Introduction 555 18.2 Problem Complexity 556 18.3 Shrinkage Phenomenology 556 18.4 Pressure-Temperature Volumetric Data 563 18.5 Simple Model for How Processing Affects Shrinkage 567 18.6 *Solidification of a Molten Layer 578 18.7 **Viscoelastic Solidification Model 585 18.8 **Warpage Induced by Differential Mold-Surface Temperatures 602 18.9 Concluding Remarks 609 19 Alternatives to Injection Molding 615 19.1 Introduction 615 19.2 Extrusion 615 19.3 Blow Molding 627 19.4 Rotational Molding 643 19.5 Thermoforming 659 19.6 Expanded Bead and Extruded Foam 669 19.7 3D Printing 670 19.8 Concluding Remarks 672 20 Fabrication Methods for Thermosets 675 20.1 Introduction 675 20.2 Gel Point and Curing 675 20.3 Compression Molding 678 20.4 Transfer Molding 681 20.5 Injection Molding 681 20.6 Reaction Injection Molding (RIM) 683 20.7 Open Mold Forming 685 20.8 Fabrication of Advanced Composites 686 20.9 Fabrication of Rubber Parts 698 20.10 Concluding Remarks 708 21 Joining of Plastics 711 21.1 Introduction 711 21.2 Classification of Joining Methods 712 21.3 Mechanical Fastening 713 21.4 Adhesive Bonding 721 21.5 Welding 722 21.6 Thermal Bonding 723 21.7 Friction Welding 741 21.8 Electromagnetic Bonding 762 21.9 Concluding Remarks 770 Part V Material Systems 771 Outlines for Chapters 22 through 25 22 Fiber-Filled Material Materials – Materials with Microstructure 773 22.1 Introduction 773 22.2 Fiber Types 773 22.3 Processing Issues 774 22.4 Material Complexity 774 22.5 Tensile and Flexural Moduli 780 22.6 Short-Fiber-Filled Systems 784 22.7 Long-Fiber Filled Systems 817 22.8 *Fiber Orientation 833 22.9 Concluding Remarks 851 23 Structural Foams –Materials with Millistructure 853 23.1 Introduction 853 23.2 Material Complexity 855 23.3 Foams as Nonhomogeneous Continua 856 23.4 Effective Bending Modulus for Thin-Walled Prismatic Beams 860 23.5 Skin-Core Models for Structural Foams 863 23.6 Stiffness and Strength of Structural Foams 866 23.7 The Average Density and the Effective Tensile and Flexural Moduli of Foams 879 23.8 Density and Modulus Variation Correlations 884 23.9 Flexural Modulus 887 23.10 **Torsion of Nonhomogeneous Bars 890 23.11 Implications for Mechanical Design 898 23.12 Concluding Remarks 899 24 Random Glass Mat Composites –Materials with Macrostructure 901 24.1 Introduction 901 24.2 GMT Processing 901 24.3 Problem Complexity 904 24.4 Effective Tensile and Flexural Moduli of Nonhomogeneous Materials 906 24.5 Insights from Model Materials 909 24.6 Characterization of the Tensile Modulus 921 24.7 Characterization of the Tensile Strength 924 24.8 Statistical Characterization of the Tensile Modulus Experimental Data 934 24.9 Statistical Properties of Tensile Modulus Data Sets 943 24.10 Gauge-Length Effects and Large-Scale Material Stiffness 946 24.11 Methodology for Predicting the Stiffness of Parts 951 24.12 *Statistical Approach to Strength 962 24.13 Implications for Mechanical Design 969 24.14 Concluding Remarks 969 25 Advanced Composites –Materials with Well-Defined Reinforcement Architectures 973 25.1 Introduction 973 25.2 Resins, Fibers, and Fabrics 974 25.3 Advanced Composites 977 25.4 Rubber-Based Composites 990 25.5 Concluding Remarks 1008 Index 1011

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book covers the area of tribology broadly, providing important introductory chapters to fundamentals, processing, and applications of tribology. The book is designed primarily for easy and cohesive understanding for students and practicing scientists pursuing the area of tribology with focus on materials. This book helps students and practicing scientists alike understand that a comprehensive knowledge about the friction and wear properties of advanced materials is essential to further design and development of new materials. The description of the wear micromechanisms of various materials will provide a strong background to the readers as how to design and develop new tribological materials. This book also places importance on the development of new ceramic composites in the context of tribological applications. Some of the key features of the book include: Fundamentals section highlights the salient issues of ceramic processing and mechanical properties of imporTable of ContentsAbout the Authors xiii Foreword by Dr. Sanak Mishra xvii Foreword by Prof. Koji Kato xviii Preface xix Section I Fundamentals of Ceramics: Processing and Properties 1 1 Introduction: Ceramics and Tribology 3 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Classification of Engineering Materials 6 1.3 Engineering Ceramics 8 1.4 Structural Ceramics: Typical Properties and Tribological Applications 9 1.5 Structure of the Book 14 1.6 Closure 17 References 17 2 Processing of Bulk Ceramics and Coatings 21 2.1 Introduction 21 2.2 Conventional Processing of Ceramics 21 2.2.1 Sintering Mechanism 22 2.2.2 Conventional Processing of Ceramics 24 2.2.2.1 Powder Processing and Compaction 24 2.2.2.2 Pressureless Sintering 27 2.2.3 Advanced Processing of Ceramics 28 2.2.3.1 Hot Pressing 28 2.2.3.2 Microwave Sintering 28 2.2.3.3 Spark Plasma Sintering 29 2.3 Thermal Spray-Based Coating Deposition 30 2.3.1 Basics of Thermal Spray Deposition 33 2.3.1.1 Plasma Spray Deposition 33 2.3.1.2 Flame Spray Deposition 34 2.3.1.3 Wire Arc Spray Deposition 35 2.3.1.4 High-Velocity Oxy-Fuel Spray Deposition 36 2.3.1.5 Detonation Spray Coating 36 2.3.2 Bond Strength of Thermal Spray Coatings 39 2.3.2.1 Bond Mechanism 39 2.3.2.2 Test Methods 40 2.3.3 Coating Structure 42 2.3.3.1 Particle and Substrate Material Properties 42 2.3.3.2 Particle Temperature and Velocity 42 2.3.4 Case Study: WC-Co Coatings 42 2.4 Closure 49 References 49 3 Conventional and Advanced Machining Processes 53 3.1 Introduction 53 3.2 Conventional Machining 54 3.3 Advanced Machining Processes 57 3.3.1 Electro-Discharge Machining 57 3.3.1.1 Working Principle 59 3.3.1.2 EDM Process Variables 61 3.3.1.3 EDM Parameters 62 3.3.1.4 Surface Analysis 63 3.3.1.5 EDM of Ceramic-Based Composites 64 3.4 Closure 66 References 66 4 Mechanical Properties of Ceramics 71 4.1 Defining Stress and Strain 71 4.2 Comparison of Tensile Behavior 78 4.3 Brittle Fracture of Ceramics 80 4.4 Cracking in Brittle Materials 84 4.5 Experimental Assessment of Mechanical Properties 87 4.5.1 Hardness 87 4.5.2 Compressive Strength 88 4.5.3 Flexural Strength 89 4.5.4 Tensile Strength 91 4.5.5 Elastic Modulus 91 4.5.6 Fracture Toughness 95 4.5.6.1 Notched Beam Test 96 4.5.6.2 Indentation Microfracture Method 97 4.5.7 Practical Guidelines for Reliable Measurements 98 4.6 Closure 99 References 100 Section II Fundamentals of Tribology 103 5 Contact Surface Characteristics 105 5.1 Nature and Roughness of Contact Surfaces 105 5.2 Surface Roughness Measurement 108 5.2.1 Stylus Method 108 5.2.2 Atomic Force Microscopy 109 5.2.3 Optical Interferometry 110 5.2.4 Laser Surface Profilometry 111 5.2.5 Scanning Electron Microscopy 111 5.3 Bearing Area Curve and Cumulative Distribution Function 111 5.4 Nominal Versus Real Contact Area 112 5.5 Hertzian Contact Stress 115 5.6 Closure 116 References 118 6 Friction and Interface Temperature 119 6.1 Theory of Friction 119 6.1.1 Friction Laws and Mechanisms 120 6.2 Types of Friction 125 6.2.1 Static and Kinetic Friction 125 6.2.2 Slip-Stick Friction 126 6.2.3 Rolling Friction 126 6.3 Friction of Engineering Material Classes 127 6.4 Frictional Heating and Temperature at the Interface 139 6.4.1 Heating Due to Friction 140 6.4.2 Understanding the Temperature in the Contact: The Bulk and Flash Temperatures 141 6.5 Analytical Models Used to Predict the Temperatures in the Contact 145 6.6 Implications of the Important Contact Temperature Models 146 6.6.1 Archard Model 147 6.6.2 Kong–Ashby Model 148 6.7 Closure 149 References 150 7 Wear of Ceramics and Lubrication 155 7.1 Introduction 155 7.2 Testing Methods and Quantification of Wear of Materials 157 7.3 Classification of Wear Mechanisms 158 7.3.1 Tribomechanical Wear 159 7.3.1.1 Adhesive Wear 159 7.3.1.2 Abrasive Wear 161 7.3.1.3 Fatigue Wear 164 7.3.1.4 Fretting Wear 165 7.3.1.5 Erosive Wear 167 7.3.2 Tribochemical Wear 171 7.3.2.1 Oxidative Wear 174 7.4 Lubrication 175 7.4.1 Regimes of Lubrication and the Stribeck Curve 175 7.4.2 Influence of Lubricant Composition, Contact Pressure, and Temperature on Lubrication 178 7.5 Closure 181 References 182 Section III Case Study: Sliding Wear of Ceramics 185 8 Sliding Wear of SiC Ceramics 187 8.1 Introduction 187 8.2 Materials and Experiments 188 8.3 Friction and Wear Behavior of SiC Ceramics Sintered with a Small Amount of Yttria Additive 189 8.4 Influence of Mechanical Properties on Sliding Wear of SiC Ceramics 191 8.5 Wear Mechanisms 191 8.6 Closure 192 References 193 9 Sliding Wear of SiC-WC Composites 195 9.1 Introduction 195 9.2 Microstructure and Mechanical Properties of SiC-WC Composites 196 9.3 Influence of Mating Material and WC Content on Tribological Properties 197 9.3.1 Friction and Wear Behavior 197 9.3.2 Mechanisms of Material Removal 198 9.3.3 Friction and Wear of SiC-WC Composites: System-Dependent Properties 202 9.3.4 Wear Mechanisms 202 9.4 Reciprocated Sliding Wear Behavior of SiC-WC Composites 203 9.4.1 Frictional and Wear Behavior 205 9.4.2 Critical Analysis of Wear Mechanisms 206 9.4.2.1 Wear Debris Analysis 206 9.4.2.2 Effect of Temperature 208 9.4.2.3 Effect of Test Configuration on Wear Behavior 208 9.5 Closure 209 References 210 10 Sliding Wear of Zirconia-Toughened Alumina 215 10.1 Introduction 215 10.2 Mechanical Properties of ZTA 216 10.3 Sliding Wear Properties of ZTA 219 10.4 Correlation with Theoretical Analysis 222 10.5 Closure 224 References 225 11 Abrasive Wear of Detonation Sprayed WC-12Co Coatings 227 11.1 Introduction 227 11.2 Coatings and Abrasive Wear 228 11.3 Abrasive Wear Results 230 11.4 Surface and Subsurface Damage Mechanisms 231 11.5 Closure 233 References 234 12 Solid–Lubricant Interaction and Friction at Lubricated Contacts 237 12.1 Introduction 237 12.2 Materials and Sliding Wear Experiments 239 12.3 Wetting and Spreading Properties 240 12.4 Surface Energies of Different Classes of Materials 242 12.5 Wetting Evaluation of Engineering Surfaces 242 12.6 Effect of Wetting on EHL Friction 246 12.7 Correlation Between Spreading Parameter and Friction 247 12.8 Closure 249 References 250 Section IV Case Study: Erosive Wear of Ceramics 253 13 Erosive Wear of SiC-WC Composites 255 13.1 Introduction 255 13.2 Materials and Erosion Tests 256 13.3 Influence of Type of Erodent on Erosive Wear Behavior 256 13.4 Influence of Impingement Angle and WC Content on Erosive Wear Behavior 258 13.5 Correlating Erosive Wear Behavior with Microstructural Characteristics 259 13.6 Correlating Erosive Wear Behavior with Mechanical Properties 259 13.7 Erosive Wear Behavior at High Temperature 260 13.8 Closure 262 References 263 14 Thermo-Erosive Behavior of ZrB2-SiC Composites 265 14.1 Introduction 265 14.2 High-Temperature Erosion Tests and Computational Modeling 267 14.3 Computational Modeling of Thermo-Erosive Behavior 269 14.4 High-Temperature Erosion Test Results 270 14.5 Transient Thermal Studies Using FE Analysis 271 14.6 Coupled Thermo-Structural Analysis 271 14.7 Thermo-Erosive Behavior 273 14.8 Closure 274 References 275 15 Erosive Wear of WC-Co Coating 279 15.1 Introduction 279 15.2 Materials and Erosion Experiments 280 15.3 Erosive Wear Mechanisms (Surface Damage) 282 15.4 Erosive Wear Mechanisms (Subsurface Damage) 287 15.5 Correlating Wear Mechanism with Erodent and Coating Properties 290 15.6 Closure 293 References 293 Section V Case Study: Machining-Induced Wear of Cermets 295 16 Crater Wear of TiCN Cermets in Conventional Machining 297 16.1 Introduction 297 16.2 TiCN Cermets and Machining Conditions 298 16.3 Wear Mechanisms of TiCN-WC-Ni Cermets 299 16.4 Machining with TiCN-WC-TaC-Ni-Co Cermet Tools 300 16.5 Correlating Cermet Composition, Microstructure, and Wear During Machining 304 16.6 Closure 306 References 306 17 Wear of TiCN-Based Cermets in Electrodischarge Machining 309 17.1 Introduction 309 17.2 Materials and EDM Tests 310 17.3 Wear of TiCN-Cermets During EDM 310 17.4 Mechanisms of Material Removal During EDM 311 17.5 Closure 313 References 313 Section VI Future Scope 317 18 Perspective 319 18.1 Innovation Cycle for Wear-Resistant Materials 319 18.2 In Situ Diagnosis of Tribological Interaction 321 18.3 High-Temperature Wear Testing 321 18.4 Modeling and Simulation in Tribology 322 18.5 Tribomaterialomics– A New Concept 323 18.6 Education and Mentoring of Next-Generation Researchers 327 References 328 Appendix: Appraisal 329 A.I Multiple Choice Questions 329 A.II Select the Appropriate Combination 350 A.III Fill in the Blanks with the Most Appropriate Response 352 A.IV Mention the Appropriate Material/Equipment in the Blank 353 A.V Identify Whether the Following Statements are True/False 354 A.VI Short Review Questions and Descriptive Questions 354 A.VII Analytical Questions 363 A.VIII Model Answers 366 Index 369

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis volume contains 20 manuscripts presented during the Materials Science & Technology 2017 Conference (MS&T''17), held October 8-12, 2017 at the David L. Lawrence Convention Center, Pittsburgh, PA. Papers from the following symposia are included in this volume: 9th International Symposium on Green and Sustainable Technologies for Materials Manufacturing and Processing Advances in Dielectric Materials and Electronic Devices Construction and Building Materials for a Better Environment Innovative Processing and Synthesis of Ceramics, Glasses and Composites Materials Issues in Nuclear Waste Management in the 21st Century Materials Development for Nuclear Applications and Extreme Environments Materials for Nuclear Energy Applications Nanotechnology for Energy, Healthcare andIndustry Processing and Performance of Materials Using Microwaves, Electric and Magnetic Fields, Ultrasound, Lasers, and MechanicaTable of ContentsPreface ix MATERIALS FOR NUCLEAR ENERGY APPLICATIONS Westinghouse Accident Tolerant Fuel Materials 3Frank Boylan, Peng Xu, Javier Romero, and Ed Lahoda Investigations of Capacitor Discharge Welding for the Attachment of Endcaps to Molybdenum-Based Nuclear Fuel Rod Cladding 7Jerry E. Gould, Cem Topbasi, and Bo Cheng Evaluation of U3Si2 Fuel Pellets Sintered in an Argon vs. Vacuum Environment 21Rita Hoggan, Jason Harp, and Lingfeng He PROCESSING AND PERFORMANCE OF MATERIALS USING MICROWAVES, ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS, ULTRA-SOUND, LASERS, AND MECHANICAL WORK—RUSTUM ROY SYMPOSIUM Microwave-Augmented Crystallization and Decrystallization in Ceramic Processing —A Phenomenology-Based Commentary 29Boon Wong Effects of Elastic Waves at Several Frequencies on Biofilm Formation in Circulating Types of Laboratory Biofilm Reactors 43Hideyuki Kanematsu, Shogo Maeda, Dana M. Barry, Senshin Umeki,Kazuyuki Tohji, Nobumitsu Hirai, Akiko Ogawa, Takeshi Kogo, Hajime Ikegai, and Yoshimitsu Mizunoe Resilient Graphitic Carbons from Electro-Thermal Fluidized Bed Reactor 53Soeren Koester, Eric Salmon, and Carsten Wehling Heavy Clay Body Properties for Hybrid Microwave Firing 59Garth V A Tayler, Mike Anderson, and Mike Hamlyn Effective Permittivity and Microwave Heating Characteristics of Electric Conductor and Insulator (Dielectrics) Mixtures 69Noboru Yoshikawa Porous Ceramic/Metal Composite Body for DPF (Diesel Particulate Filter) and the Microwave Heating Behavior 79Noboru Yoshikawa, Chang Chuan Lee, Naoki Inoue, Shoji Taniguchi, and Sergey Komarov CONSTRUCTION AND BUILDING MATERIALS FOR A BETTER ENVIRONMENT Study on Preparation of Portland Cement by Using Coal Fly Ash 87Hui Sun, Miaolian Bian, Dongyang Ma, Shichao Chen, Zhicheng Cao, and Daohong Wu Corrosion Behaviour of Steel-Reinforcement in C3H7NO2 S-Admixed Concrete Immersed in Saline/Marine Simulating-Environment 95Joshua Olusegun Okeniyi and Abimbola Patricia Idowu Popoola C4H11NO Performance on Steel-Rebar Corrosion in Industrial/ Microbial Simulating Environment 109Joshua Olusegun Okeniyi and Abimbola Patricia Idowu Popoola INNOVATIVE PROCESSING AND SYNTHESIS OF CERAMICS, GLASSES AND COMPOSITES Numerical Investigation of Heat Transfer and Reaction Kinetics during the Self-Propagating High-Temperature Synthesis of Silicon Nitride 123Venkata V. K. Doddapaneni and Sidney Lin Synthesis of Carbide Ceramics from Activated Carbon Precursors Loaded with Tungstate, Molybdate, and Silicate Anions 137Grant Wallace, Jerome Downey, Jannette Chorney, Katie Schumacher, Trenin Bayless, Alaina Mallard, Auva Speiser, and Elizabeth Raiha ADVANCES IN DIELECTRIC MATERIALS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES Observation of TI-TI Bonding In TI/CU/PT-Supported Rutile TiO2 (110) Surface: AB Initio Calculations 153Lei Li, Wenshi Li, Han Qin, Jianfeng Yang, Canyan Zhu, and Ling-Feng Mao Effect of Processing Conditions on Electric and Dielectric Properties of Polymer-Derived SiC Ceramics 165Chengying Xu THE 9TH INTERNATIONAL SYMPOSIUM ON GREEN AND SUSTAINABLE TECHNOLOGIES FOR MATERIALS MANUFACTURING AND PROCESSING Study on Energy Utilization of High Phosphorus Oolitic Hematite by Different Ironmaking Technologies 177Hui Sun, Miaolian Bian, Shichao Chen, Dongyang Ma, Zhicheng Cao, and Daohong Wu NANOTECHNOLOGY FOR ENERGY, ENVIRONMENT, ELECTRONICS, HEALTHCARE AND INDUSTRY APPLICATIONS Nanosensors for Detecting Pollutants in Water 187Shobhan Paul HYBRID ORGANIC-INORGANIC MATERIALS FOR ALTERNATIVE ENERGY Electrodeposition of Hybrid Sol-Gel Glass Coatings on 304 Stainless Steel for Corrosion Protection 205Q. Picard, G. Akalonu, J. Mercado, J. Mosa, M. Aparicio, L. C. Klein, and A. Jitianua SURFACE PROPERTIES OF BIOMATERIALS Biofilm Formation on Titanium Alloy Surfaces in a Laboratory Biofilm Reactor 221Hideyuki Kanematsu, Shun Kanesaki, Hikonaru Kudara, Dana M. Barry,Akiko Ogawa, Takeshi Kougo, Daisuke Kuroda, Nobumitsu Hirai, Hajime Ikegai, and Yoshimitsu Mizunoe

Read more less

Book SynopsisProceeding of the 42nd International Conference on Advanced Ceramics and Composites, Ceramic Engineering and Science Proceedings Volume 39, Issue 2, 2018 Jonathan Salem, Dietmar Koch, Peter Mechnich, Mihails Kusnezoff, Narottam Bansal, Jerry LaSalvia, Palani Balaya, Zhengyi Fu, and Tatsuki Ohji, Editors Valerie Wiesner and Manabu Fukushima, Volume Editors This proceedings contains a collection of 25 papers from The American Ceramic Society's 41st International Conference on Advanced Ceramics and Composites, held in Daytona Beach, Florida, January 21-26, 2018. This issue includes papers presented in the following symposia: Symposium 1: Mechanical Behavior and Performance of Ceramics and Composites Symposium 2: Advanced Ceramic Coatings for Structural, Environmental, and Functional Applications Symposium 3: 15th International Symposium on Solid Oxide Fuel Cells (SOFC) Symposium 4: Armor Ceramics: Challenges and New DevelopmenTable of ContentsIntroduction ix MECHANICAL BEHAVIOR AND PERFORMANCE OF CERAMICS AND COMPOSITES Fracture Toughness of Modern and Ancient Glasses and Glass Ceramics as Measured by the SEPB Method 3G. D. Quinn, J. J. Swab, and P. Patel Erosion Behavior in a Gas Turbine Grade Oxide/Oxide Ceramic Matrix Composite 15M. J. Presby, N. Kedir, L. J. Sanchez, C. Gong, D. C. Faucett, S. R. Choi,and G. N. Morscher Applying ASTM International C1421 to Glasses and Optical Ceramics 27Jonathan A. Salem and Michael G. Jenkins Effect of Control Mode and Test Rate on the Measured Fracture Toughness of Advanced Ceramics 41Bronson D. Hausmann and Jonathan A. Salem In-Situ Study on SiC-Si Interfacial Bonding Strength of Reaction Bonded SiC/Si Composites 51C. Hsu, Y. Zhang, P. Karandikar, F. Deng, and C. Ni Evaluation of New Technique to Estimate Yield Stress in Brittle Materials via Spherical Indentation Testing 61B. L. Hackett, A. A. Wereszczak, and G. M. Pharr ADVANCED CERAMIC COATINGS FOR STRUCTURAL,ENVIRONMENTAL, AND FUNCTIONAL APPLICATIONS Oxidation Study of an Ultra High Temperature Ceramic Coating Based on HFSiCN 75Dagny Sacksteder, Deborah L. Waters, and Dongming Zhu 15TH INTERNATIONAL SYMPOSIUM ON SOLID OXIDE FUEL CELLS (SOFC): MATERIALS, SCIENCE, AND TECHNOLOGY Investigation of (La1-X,CaX)(Ni0.25Fe0.25Cr0.25Co0.25)O3 for Solid Oxide Fuel Cells Cathode Materials 87Sai Ram Gajjala, Zhezhen Fu, and Rasit Koc Development of Cathode Contacting for SOFC Stacks 99K. Sick, N. Grigorev, N.H. Menzler, and O. Guillon Microstruct ure Modification in the Electrodes to Enhance Performance of the Anode-Supported Solid Oxide Fuel Cell 113Chun-Yen Yeh, Tai-Nan Lin, Hong-Yi Kuo, Ming-Wei Liao, Yu-Ming Chen,Wei-Xin Kao, Ruey-Yi Lee, and Sheng-Wei Lee Preparation and Characterization of BaY0.2Ce0.7Zr0.1O3-δ Ceramic Powder by Glycine Nitrate Combustion (GNC) Process for Proton-conducting Solid Oxide Fuel Cell 123Wei-Xin Kao, Tai-Nan Lin, Ming-Wei Liao, Hong-Yi Kuo, Chun-Yen Yeh, Yu-Ming Chen, and Ruey-yi Lee Effects of Composite Ratio of Vermiculite/Talc Seal Material on Gas Leak Properties 131Jie Xu and Seiichi Suda Performance Test for Anode-Supported and Metal-Supported Solid Oxide Electrolysis Cell under Different Current Densities 139Szu-Han Wu, Jing-Kai Lin, Wei-Hong Shiu, Chien-Kuo Liu, Tai-Nan Lin, Ruey-Yi Lee, Huan-Chan Ting, Hung-Hsiang Lin, and Yung-Neng Cheng Protective Coatings for SOFC Metallic Interconnects 149Mark K. King Jr. and Manoj K. Mahapatra Development of Portable Solid Oxide Fuel Cell System Driven by Hydrocarbon and Alcohol Fuels 159Hirofumi Sumi, Hiroyuki Shimada, Toshiaki Yamaguchi, Yoshinobu Fujishiro and Masanobu Awano Phase Field Modelling of Microstructural Changes in Ni/YSZ Solid Oxide Electrolysis Cell Electrodes 165M. Trini, S. De Angelis, P. S. Jørgensen, A. Hauch, M. Chen and P. V. Hendriksen Development of Fe/Cr Alloy-Supported Solid Oxide Fuel Cell by Plasma Technique 177Sheng-Fu Yang , Chun-Huang Tsai, Chun-Liang Chang, Cheng-Yun Fu,Ruey-Yi Lee, Chien-Kuo Liu, and Huei-Long Lee ARMOR CERAMICS: CHALLENGES AND NEW DEVELOPMENTS Effects of Hardness and Toughness of Ceramic in a Ceramic Armour Module against Long Rod Impacts 187W. L. Goh, B. Luo, Z. Zeng, J. Yuan, and K. W. Ng Mesoscale Simulations of Boron Carbide Subjected to Shockwave Propagation 199Brady Aydelotte, Jennifer Sietins, Clara Mock, Carli Moorehead and Timothy Holmquist First Principles Model of Yttrium Adsorption on Boron Suboxide (0001) Surface 205J. Synowczynski-Dunn, K. Behler, J. C. LaSalvia, C. Marvel, and M. Harmer Generation of Polycrystalline Microstructures for the Discretization On-The-Fly of FE Models for Multi-Scale Simulations 213S. Falco, N. Bombace, and N. Petrinic ADVANCED MATERIALS AND TECHNOLOGIES FOR DIRECT THERMAL ENERGY CONVERSION AND RECHARGEABLE ENERGY STORAGE The Tape-Casting and PAS Sintering of LLZO Ceramic Membrane Electrolyte 223Fei Chen, Shiyu Cao, Xing Xiang, Dunjie Yang, Wenping Zha, Junyang Li, Qiang Shen, and Lianmeng Zhang 12TH INTERNATIONAL SYMBOSIUM ON ADVANCED PROCESSING & MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGIES FOR STRUCTURAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES FOR STRUCTURAL & MULTIFUNCTIONAL MATERIALS AND SYSTEMS Thermal Expansion Coefficient Controlled Cu-ZrW2-xMoxO8 Cermet Materia l Prepared using Spark Plasma Sintering 233Hui Wei, Midori Oe, Ryo Inoue, Akihisa Aimi, Kenjiro Fujimoto, and Keishi Nishio Influences of Laser Condition and Slit Shape on Joinability of (Zircaloy-SiC/SiC Composite Tube Joint 241Hisashi Serizawa, Yuji Sato, Masahiro Tsukamoto, Hirotaka Motoki, Yuuki Asakura, Joon-Soo Park, Akira Kohyama, Naofumi Nakazato,and Hirotatsu Kishimoto Electroconductive Oxide Ceramics with Graphene-Encapsulated Fillers 251I. Hussainova, M. Drozdova, R. Ivanov, S. Kale, and I. Jasiuk Introduction ix MECHANICAL BEHAVIOR AND PERFORMANCE OF CERAMICS AND COMPOSITES Fracture Toughness of Modern and Ancient Glasses and Glass Ceramics as Measured by the SEPB Method 3G. D. Quinn, J. J. Swab, and P. Patel Erosion Behavior in a Gas Turbine Grade Oxide/Oxide Ceramic Matrix Composite 15M. J. Presby, N. Kedir, L. J. Sanchez, C. Gong, D. C. Faucett, S. R. Choi,and G. N. Morscher Applying ASTM International C1421 to Glasses and Optical Ceramics 27Jonathan A. Salem and Michael G. Jenkins Effect of Control Mode and Test Rate on the Measured Fracture Toughness of Advanced Ceramics 41Bronson D. Hausmann and Jonathan A. Salem In-Situ Study on SiC-Si Interfacial Bonding Strength of Reaction Bonded SiC/Si Composites 51C. Hsu, Y. Zhang, P. Karandikar, F. Deng, and C. Ni Evaluation of New Technique to Estimate Yield Stress in Brittle Materials via Spherical Indentation Testing 61B. L. Hackett, A. A. Wereszczak, and G. M. Pharr ADVANCED CERAMIC COATINGS FOR STRUCTURAL,ENVIRONMENTAL, AND FUNCTIONAL APPLICATIONS Oxidation Study of an Ultra High Temperature Ceramic Coating Based on HFSiCN 75Dagny Sacksteder, Deborah L. Waters, and Dongming Zhu 15TH INTERNATIONAL SYMPOSIUM ON SOLID OXIDE FUEL CELLS (SOFC): MATERIALS, SCIENCE, AND TECHNOLOGY Investigation of (La1-X,CaX)(Ni0.25Fe0.25Cr0.25Co0.25)O3 for Solid Oxide Fuel Cells Cathode Materials 87Sai Ram Gajjala, Zhezhen Fu, and Rasit Koc Development of Cathode Contacting for SOFC Stacks 99K. Sick, N. Grigorev, N.H. Menzler, and O. Guillon Microstruct ure Modification in the Electrodes to Enhance Performance of the Anode-Supported Solid Oxide Fuel Cell 113Chun-Yen Yeh, Tai-Nan Lin, Hong-Yi Kuo, Ming-Wei Liao, Yu-Ming Chen,Wei-Xin Kao, Ruey-Yi Lee, and Sheng-Wei Lee Preparation and Characterization of BaY0.2Ce0.7Zr0.1O3-δ Ceramic Powder by Glycine Nitrate Combustion (GNC) Process for Proton-conducting Solid Oxide Fuel Cell 123Wei-Xin Kao, Tai-Nan Lin, Ming-Wei Liao, Hong-Yi Kuo, Chun-Yen Yeh, Yu-Ming Chen, and Ruey-yi Lee Effects of Composite Ratio of Vermiculite/Talc Seal Material on Gas Leak Properties 131Jie Xu and Seiichi Suda Performance Test for Anode-Supported and Metal-Supported Solid Oxide Electrolysis Cell under Different Current Densities 139Szu-Han Wu, Jing-Kai Lin, Wei-Hong Shiu, Chien-Kuo Liu, Tai-Nan Lin, Ruey-Yi Lee, Huan-Chan Ting, Hung-Hsiang Lin, and Yung-Neng Cheng Protective Coatings for SOFC Metallic Interconnects 149Mark K. King Jr. and Manoj K. Mahapatra Development of Portable Solid Oxide Fuel Cell System Driven by Hydrocarbon and Alcohol Fuels 159Hirofumi Sumi, Hiroyuki Shimada, Toshiaki Yamaguchi, Yoshinobu Fujishiro and Masanobu Awano Phase Field Modelling of Microstructural Changes in Ni/YSZ Solid Oxide Electrolysis Cell Electrodes 165M. Trini, S. De Angelis, P. S. Jørgensen, A. Hauch, M. Chen and P. V. Hendriksen Development of Fe/Cr Alloy-Supported Solid Oxide Fuel Cell by Plasma Technique 177Sheng-Fu Yang , Chun-Huang Tsai, Chun-Liang Chang, Cheng-Yun Fu,Ruey-Yi Lee, Chien-Kuo Liu, and Huei-Long Lee ARMOR CERAMICS: CHALLENGES AND NEW DEVELOPMENTS Effects of Hardness and Toughness of Ceramic in a Ceramic Armour Module against Long Rod Impacts 187W. L. Goh, B. Luo, Z. Zeng, J. Yuan, and K. W. Ng Mesoscale Simulations of Boron Carbide Subjected to Shockwave Propagation 199Brady Aydelotte, Jennifer Sietins, Clara Mock, Carli Moorehead and Timothy Holmquist First Principles Model of Yttrium Adsorption on Boron Suboxide (0001) Surface 205J. Synowczynski-Dunn, K. Behler, J. C. LaSalvia, C. Marvel, and M. Harmer Generation of Polycrystalline Microstructures for the Discretization On-The-Fly of FE Models for Multi-Scale Simulations 213S. Falco, N. Bombace, and N. Petrinic ADVANCED MATERIALS AND TECHNOLOGIES FOR DIRECT THERMAL ENERGY CONVERSION AND RECHARGEABLE ENERGY STORAGE The Tape-Casting and PAS Sintering of LLZO Ceramic Membrane Electrolyte 223Fei Chen, Shiyu Cao, Xing Xiang, Dunjie Yang, Wenping Zha, Junyang Li, Qiang Shen, and Lianmeng Zhang 12TH INTERNATIONAL SYMBOSIUM ON ADVANCED PROCESSING & MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGIES FOR STRUCTURAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES FOR STRUCTURAL & MULTIFUNCTIONAL MATERIALS AND SYSTEMS Thermal Expansion Coefficient Controlled Cu-ZrW2-xMoxO8 Cermet Materia l Prepared using Spark Plasma Sintering 233Hui Wei, Midori Oe, Ryo Inoue, Akihisa Aimi, Kenjiro Fujimoto, and Keishi Nishio Influences of Laser Condition and Slit Shape on Joinability of (Zircaloy-SiC/SiC Composite Tube Joint 241Hisashi Serizawa, Yuji Sato, Masahiro Tsukamoto, Hirotaka Motoki, Yuuki Asakura, Joon-Soo Park, Akira Kohyama, Naofumi Nakazato,and Hirotatsu Kishimoto Electroconductive Oxide Ceramics with Graphene-Encapsulated Fillers 251I. Hussainova, M. Drozdova, R. Ivanov, S. Kale, and I. Jasiuk

Read more less

Book SynopsisProceeding of the 42nd International Conference on Advanced Ceramics and Composites, Ceramic Engineering and Science Proceedings Volume 39, Issue 3, 2018 Jingyang Wang, Waltraud Kriven, Tobias Fey, Paolo Colombo, William J. Weber, Jake Amoroso, William G. Fahrenholtz, Kiyoshi Shimamura, Michael Halbig, Soshu Kirihara, Yiquan Wu, and Kathleen Shurgart, Editors Valerie Wiesner and Manabu Fukushima, Volume Editors This proceedings contains a collection of 22 papers from The American Ceramic Society''s 42nd International Conference on Advanced Ceramics and Composites, held in Daytona Beach, Florida, January 21-26, 2018. This issue includes papers presented in the following symposia: Advancing Frontiers of Ceramics for Sustainable Societal Development International Symposium in Honor of Dr. Mrityunjay Singh Symposium 9: Porous Ceramics: Novel Developments and Applications Symposium 10: Virtual Materials (Computational) Design anTable of ContentsIntroduction ADVANCING FRONTIERS OF CERAMICS FOR SUSTAINABLE SOCIETAL DEVELOPMENT: INTERNATIONAL SYMPOSIUM IN HONOR OF DR. MRITYUNJAY SINGH Progress in Polymer-Derived SiC-Based Fibers: Improvement of Surface Roughness The Influence of Casting-Calendering Process on the Microstructure of Pure Al2O3 Ceramic Substrate 15S. X. Wang, H. F. Lan, W. J. Wang, Y. J. Huang, and S. J. Li Improved Shielding Method for Reducing Magnetic Field Leakage through Magnetically Shielded Room Openings 23H. Sugiyama, T. Tokuda, K. Kamata, T. Nakayama, T. Suzuki, and H. Suematsu Oxynitride Glasses for Potential Bio medical Usage 33Stuart Hampshire, Ahmed Bachar, Cyrille Mercier, Arnaud Tricoteaux, Anne Leriche, and Claudine Follet Development of Ultra Low Density Refractory Granules (ULDRG) 53 for KilnsL. K. Sharma and D. P. Karmakar POROUS CERAMICS: NOVEL DEVELOPMENTS AND APPLICATIONS Optical Response of Mesoporous Silica Layer on Plasmonic Array to Isopropanol Vapor 61Shunsuke Murai, Hiroyuki Sakamoto, Koji Fujita, and Katsuhisa Tanaka Fabrication and Microstructures of Porous Alumina with Porous-and-Denser Zebra-Patterned Surfaces Created by One-Pot Direct Blowing Method 69Akihiro Shimamura, Mikinori Hotta, and Naoki Kondo Fabrication Procedure for Porous Carbon Material with Three Dimensionally Networked Structure 77Yusei Kaneda, Ryo Inoue, and Yasuo Kogo VIRTUAL M ATERIALS (COMPUTATIONAL) DESIGN AND CERAMIC GENOME Numerical Modeling of the 2D Crack Propagation in Carbon-Carbon Composites 89R. Piat, Y. Zuo, and P. Megyesi MATERIALS FOR EXTREME ENVIRONMENTS: ULTRAHIGH TEMPERATURE CERAMICS (UHTCS) AND NANO-LAMINATED TERNARY CARBIDES AND NITRIDES (MAX PHASES) Synthesis and Characterization of Novel Ni-Ti3SiC2 Composites 107M. Dey, M. Fuka, F. AlAnazi, and S. Gupta ADVANCED MATERIALS FOR SUSTAINABLE NUCLEAR FISSION AND FUSION ENERGY Preliminary Characterization and Projections of PVD Coatings on SiC Cladding for Light Water Reactors 119Caen Ang, David Carpenter, Kurt Terrani, and Yutai Katoh SINGLE CRYSTALLINE MATERIALS FOR ELECTRICALS, OPTICAL MEDICAL APPLICATIONS Advanced Sensors for CMC Gas Turbine Engine Components 137Kevin Rivera, Matt Ricci, and Otto Gregory ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING AND 3D PRINTING TECHNOLOGIES Additive Manufacturing of Ceramics for Protection Systems:Additive Manufacturing of Ceramics for Protection Systems:Technical Challenges and Opportunities 147Tyrone L Jones Three Dimensional Ceramics Printed via Ink Jet Methods 163David Crenshaw, Patrick Cigno, Phillip Kurtis, Gerry Wynick, Xingwu Wang,Ryan Jeffrey, Carol Craig, Sam Deriso, and Jim Royston GEOPOLYMERS,CHEMIACLLY BONDED CERAMICS,ECO-FRIENDLY AND SUSTAINABLE MATERIALS Microstructure and Flexure Strengths of Dolomite Particulate-Reinforced Geopolymer Composites 173Patrick F. Keane and Waltraud M. Kriven One-Part Geopolymers and Aluminosilicate Gel-Zeolite Composites Based on Silica: Factors Influencing Microstructure and Engineering Properties 183G. J. G. Gluth, P. Sturm, S. Greiser, C. Jäger, and H.-C. Kühne G.J. G. Gluth, P. Sturm, S. Greiser, C. Jäger, and H.-C. Kühne Thermal Resistant Alkali-Activated Materials Using Argillite and Two Types of Solution 197Colin Dupuy, Myriam Fricheteau, Manon Elie, Ameni Gharzouni, Nathalie Texier-Mandoki, Xavier Bourbon and Sylvie Rossignol Preliminary Mix Design Procedure for Alkali Activated Cement Mortars Based on Metakaolin and Industrial Waste Products Activated with Potasium Silicate 209 Luke Oakes, Allistair Wilkinson, and Bryan Magee Geopolymer Roof Tile 225A. Reggiani BIO-INSPIRED PROCESSING OF ADVANCED MATERIALS Microstructure and Composition Characterization of Teeth from Different Species 235Jun Tian, Hui Zeng, Hang Ping, Wei Ji, Jingjing Xie, Wenhao Chi, Hao Xie and Zhengyi Fu 7TH GLOBAL YOUNG INVESTIGATORS FORUM (GYIF) Evaluation of Power Generation from Biomass using Solid Oxide Fuel Cell (SOFC) and Downdraft Gasifiers245Shimpei Yamaguchi, Kazuaki Katagiri, Takuya Ehiro, Tomoatsu Ozaki and Atsushi Kakitsuji

Read more less

Book SynopsisDiscover how to measure, control, model, and plan peopleflow within modern buildings with this one-stop resource from a leading professional People Flow in Buildingsdeliversa comprehensive and insightfuldescription of peopleflow,analysiswithsoftware-basedtools. The book offers readers an up-to-date overview of mathematical optimization methodsused incontrol systemsandtransportationplanningmethods used to managevertical and horizontal transportation. The text offers a starting point for selecting the optimal transportation equipment for new buildings andthosebeing modernized. It provides insight into making passenger journeys pleasant and smooth, while providing readers with an examination of how modern trends in building usage, like increasingly tall buildings and COVID-19, effect peopleflow planning in buildings. People Flow in Buildingsclearly defines the terms and symbols it includes andthen moves on to deal with the measurement, control, modelling, and planning of peopleflow withinTable of ContentsSymbols and Abbreviations Preface Scope of the book PART I 1. Building design population 1.1 Office building population 1.2 Number of inhabitants in residential buildings 1.3 Number of hotel guests 1.4 People arriving from parking areas 1.5 Population in hospitals 1.6 Other types of populated buildings 2. People counting methods 2.1. Counting technology inside and outside buildings 2.2. Passenger traffic components 2.3. Manual people-counting 2.4. Use of optical vision 2.5. Visitor-counting with photocell signals and infra-red beams 2.6. People-counting with access control system 2.7. Passenger-counting by load-weighing device 2.8. Elevator monitoring systems 2.9. External traffic measurement devices 2.10. Smart sensing and mobile computing 3. Passenger arrival process in buildings 3.1 Introduction 3.2 Poisson arrival process 3.2.1 Probability density function 3.2.2 Example of passenger arrivals through security cages 3.3 Passenger arrivals in batches 3.3.1 Batch arrivals in elevator lobbies 3.3.2 Batch arrivals in escalators 3.3.3 Observed batch size distributions in several building types 3.3.4 Batch size variation in elevator lobbies during the day 3.3.5 Modelling of batch size distribution 4. Daily vertical passenger traffic profiles 4.1 Introduction 4.1 Vertical building traffic components 4.1 Two-way traffic profiles 4.1 Effect of inter-floor traffic 4.1 Occupancy in buildings 4.2 Passenger trips with elevators 4.3 People flow in office buildings 4.3.1 Traffic in offices 4.3.2 Observed daily two-way traffic profiles 4.3.3 Daily traffic profiles with interfloor traffic 4.4 People flow in hotels 4.4.1 Traffic in hotels 4.4.2 Daily traffic profiles in hotels 4.5 People flow in residential buildings 4.5.1 Traffic in residential buildings 4.5.2 Traffic profiles in residential buildings 4.6 People flow profiles in hospitals 4.6.1 Hospital traffic 4.6.2 Daily traffic in hospitals 4.7 People flow in commercial and public buildings 4.7.1 Traffic in commercial and public buildings 4.7.2 Daily people flow in escalators 4.7.3 Daily people flow in elevators in shopping centers 4.7.4 Duration of a visit in a shopping centre 4.7.5 People flow by GPS in public buildings 4.8 People flow on cruise ships 4.8.1 Traffic in cruisers 4.8.2 Daily traffic profiles for typical days 5. Monitored elevator traffic data 5.1 Introduction 5.2 Service quality parameters 5.3 Measured passenger service level 5.3.1 Measured passenger traffic with external device 5.3.2 Call time distribution 5.3.3 Waiting time distribution with destination control 5.3.4 Monthly service times 5.4 Measured elevator performance 5.4.1 Number of starts during a month 5.4.2 Correlation between cycle time and round trip time Part II: People flow solutions 6. Historical overview 7. Push button control systems 7.1 Signal operation 7.2 Single-button collective control 7.3 Down collective control 7.4 Interconnected full collective control principle 8. Collective group control system 8.1 Software-based collective control system 8.2 Bunching 8.3 Next car up 8.4 Dynamic sub-zoning 8.5 Channeling 8.6 Queue selective control system 9. Intelligent group control systems 9.1 Performance requirements 9.2 Control system architectures 10. Artificial Intelligence in elevator dispatching 10.1 Introduction 10.2 AI architectures 10.3 Traffic forecasting 10.4 Fuzzy logic 10.5 Genetic algorithm 10.6 Neural networks 10.7 Optimization objective functions 10.8 Elevator lobby with collective control system 10.9 Hospital service modes 11. Destination control system 11.1 Adaptive call allocation algorithm 11.2 Destination control system 11.3 Hybrid destination control system 11.4 “Harmonized” elevator dispatching 11.5 Elevator lobby with destination control system 12. Multi-car control systems 12.1 Introduction 12.2 Paternoster 12.3 Odyssey 12.4 Double-deck elevators 12.4.1 Functional principle of double-deck elevators 12.4.2 Double-deck collective control 12.4.3 Double-deck destination control 12.4.4 Harmonized dispatching for double-deck elevators 12.5 TWIN 12.6 MULTI 12.7 Other possible multi-car elevator control systems 13. Access control systems 2.11. Application areas 2.12. Access control by an external provider 2.13. Access control embedded in an elevator control 14. Architectural considerations of elevators 14.1 Layouts with conventional control 14.2 Layouts with destination control system 14.3 Dimensions of passenger elevators 14.1 Vertical elevator dimensions 14.2 Lobby arrangement with double-deck elevators 15. Architectural considerations of other people flow solutions 15.1 Escalator arrangements 15.2 Horizontal escalator dimensions 15.3 Vertical escalator dimensions 15.4 Dimensions of moving walkways 15.5 Staircase dimensions 15.6 Building door types Part III: People flow calculation methods 16. Introduction 17. Elevator traffic calculation methods 17.1 Elevator performance parameters 17.2 Elevator handling capacity equation 17.3 Elevator kinematics 17.3.1 Elevator rated speed 17.3.2 Flight time calculation 17.4 Up-peak roundtrip time equations 17.4.1 Uniform passenger arrivals 17.4.2 Poisson arrival process 17.4.3 Uniform arrival process for r-floor elevator jumps 17.4.4 Poisson arrival process for r-floor elevator jumps 17.4.5 Uniform arrival process for elevator jumps between floor pairs 17.4.6 Poisson arrival process for elevator jumps between floor pairs 17.4.7 A generalized roundtrip time formula 17.5 Round trip time related equations 17.5.1 Shuttle elevators 17.5.2 Express zones 17.5.3 Dynamic zoning in up-peak 17.5.4 Unsymmetric elevator groups 17.5.5 Multiple entrance floors 17.5.6 Two-way traffic 17.6 Multicar traffic analysis 17.6.1 Paternoster performance 17.6.2 Double-deck performance 17.6.3 Number of MULTI cabins and shafts 18. Passenger service level 18.1 Queuing theoretical approach 18.1.1 Waiting times 18.1.2 Transit times 18.1.3 Journey time 18.2 Queuing at hot spots 18.3 Egress time with elevators 19. Pedestrian traffic 19.1 People flow density 19.1.1 Level of Service 19.1.2 Human body size 19.1.3 Passenger characteristics 19.1.4 Passenger space demand in elevators 19.2 Escalator handling capacity 19.3 Handling capacity of moving walkways 19.4 People flow in walkways 19.5 People flow in staircases 19.6 People flow in corridors and doorways 19.7 Handling capacities of turnstiles and ticket counters 19.8 Number of destination operation panels Part IV: People flow simulation methods 20. Introduction 21. Traffic simulation methods 21.1 Monte Carlo simulation 21.2 Passenger traffic generation 21.3 Traffic simulation of an elevator group 21.4 Building traffic simulation 21.5 People flow simulation 21.5.1 Simulation software architecture 21.5.2 Passenger routing model 22. Simulation procedure 22.1 Simulated handling capacity 22.2 Initial transient 22.3 Stepwise or ramp arrival profiles 22.4 Traffic patterns 22.4.1 Introduction 22.4.2 Office traffic templates 22.4.3 Hotel traffic templates 22.4.4 Traffic templates of residential buildings 23. Validation of elevator traffic simulation software 23.1 Introduction 23.2 Verification of simulator models 23.3 Validation of the elevator traffic simulator 24. Simulated elevator performance and passenger service level 24.1 Introduction 24.1 Up-peak boosting 24.1.1 Traffic boosting with destination control 24.1.2 Boosting with double-deck system 24.1.3 Effect of elevator group size 24.2 Traffic simulations with diverse control systems 24.2.1 Simulation setup for an example building 24.2.2 Conventional control with single-car elevator system 24.2.3 Destination control with single-car elevator system 24.2.4 Conventional control double-deck system 24.2.5 Destination control double-deck system 24.3 Comparison handling capacities 24.4 Service time distributions with conventional system Part V: People flow planning and evacuation 25. Introduction 26. ISO 8100-32 26.1 Background 26.2 Design process 26.3 ISO calculation method 26.1 ISO simulation method 26.2 Selection of rated load based on mass 26.3 Selection of rated load based on area and mass 27. Design criteria 27.1 ISO 8100-32 design criteria 27.2 BCO design criteria for offices 27.3 Other design criteria 28. Elevatoring low and mid-rise buildings 28.1 Offices 28.2 Hotels 28.3 Residential buildings 28.4 Hospitals 28.5 Parking areas 29. People transportation in commercial and public buildings 29.1 Mass transits 29.2 Public transportation buildings 29.3 Commercial buildings 29.4 Observation decks 30. Elevatoring tall buildigs 30.1 Background 30.2 Zoning of supertall buildings 30.3 Example zonings of a supertall building 30.4 Arrangements with zoning from the ground 30.4.1 Elevator arrangement selection with ISO simulation method 30.4.2 Elevator group lobby layouts 30.4.3 Main entrance core areas 30.5 Sky lobby arrangement 30.5.1 Double-deck shuttle elevators 30.5.2 Multi-car shuttle elevators 30.5.3 Elevator selection with ISO simulation method 30.5.4 Elevator group loofbby layouts 30.5.5 Main entrance core areas for sky lobby arrangements 31. Core space of different arrangements 32. Building evacuation 32.1 Introduction 32.2 Egress time calculation in building design 32.2.1 Background 32.2.2 Egress by stairs 32.2.3 Egress by elevators 32.3 Generic emergency evacuation types 32.3.1 Non-fire emergency evacuation 32.3.2 Fire evacuation modes 32.3.3 Scenatio configuration from BMS 32.4 Elevator evacuation-related standards and guidelines 32.4.1 Evacuation elevator requirements 32.4.2 Firefighters lifts - EN 81-72:2015 32.4.3 Evacuation of disabled persons using lifts - CEN/TS 81-76:2011 32.4.4 Occupant Evacuation Operation - ASME A17.1:2013 32.4.5 Elevators used to assist in building evacuation - ISO/TS 18870:2014 32.5 Evacuation strategies of megatall buildings 32.5.1 Introduction 32.5.2 Jeddah Tower 32.5.3 Shanghai Tower 32.5.4 Royal Clock Tower, Makkah 32.5.5 One World Trade Center, New York 33. How high can we go? Epilogue Bibliography Glossary

Read more less

Book SynopsisSummarizes the analysis and design of today's gas heat engine cycles This book offers readers comprehensive coverage of heat engine cycles. From ideal (theoretical) cycles to practical cycles and real cycles, it gradually increases in degree of complexity so that newcomers can learn and advance at a logical pace, and so instructors can tailor their courses toward each class level. To facilitate the transition from one type of cycle to another, it offers readers additional material covering fundamental engineering science principles in mechanics, fluid mechanics, thermodynamics, and thermochemistry. Fundamentals of Heat Engines: Reciprocating and Gas Turbine Internal-Combustion Engines begins with a review of some fundamental principles of engineering science, before covering a wide range of topics on thermochemistry. It next discusses theoretical aspects of the reciprocating piston engine, starting with simple air-standard cycles, followed by theoretical Table of ContentsSeries Preface ix Preface xi Glossary xiii About the Companion Website xvii Part I Fundamentals of Engineering Science 1 Introduction I: Role of Engineering Science 2 1 Review of Basic Principles 4 1.1 Engineering Mechanics 4 1.2 Fluid Mechanics 11 1.3 Thermodynamics 19 Problems 39 2 Thermodynamics of Reactive Mixtures 45 2.1 Fuels 45 2.2 Stoichiometry 45 2.3 Chemical Reactions 47 2.4 Thermodynamic Properties of the Combustion Products 56 2.5 First Law Analysis of Reacting Mixtures 59 2.6 Adiabatic Flame Temperature 67 2.7 Entropy Change in Reacting Mixtures 73 2.8 Second Law Analysis of Reacting Mixtures 74 2.9 Chemical and Phase Equilibrium 75 2.10 Multi-Species Equilibrium Composition of Combustion Products 81 Problems 90 Part II Reciprocating Internal Combustion Engines 95 Introduction II: History and Classification of Reciprocating Internal Combustion Engines 96 3 Ideal Cycles for Natural-Induction Reciprocating Engines 99 3.1 Generalised Cycle 99 3.2 Constant-Volume Cycle (Otto Cycle) 104 3.3 Constant Pressure (Diesel) Cycle 106 3.4 Dual Cycle (Pressure-Limited Cycle) 108 3.5 Cycle Comparison 114 Problems 116 4 Ideal Cycles for Forced-Induction Reciprocating Engines 119 4.1 Turbocharged Cycles 119 4.2 Supercharged Cycles 126 4.3 Forced Induction Cycles with Intercooling 129 4.4 Comparison of Boosted Cycles 138 Problems 140 5 Fuel-Air Cycles for Reciprocating Engines 143 5.1 Fuel-Air Cycle Assumptions 143 5.2 Compression Process 144 5.3 Combustion Process 145 5.4 Expansion Process 148 5.5 Mean Effective Pressure 148 5.6 Cycle Comparison 150 Problems 151 6 Practical Cycles for Reciprocating Engines 153 6.1 Four-Stroke Engine 153 6.2 Two-Stroke Engine 157 6.3 Practical Cycles for Four-Stroke Engines 160 6.4 Cycle Comparison 172 6.5 Cycles Based on Combustion Modelling (Wiebe Function) 173 6.6 Example of Wiebe Function Application 182 6.7 Double Wiebe Models 184 6.8 Computer-Aided Engine Simulation 186 Problems 188 7 Work-Transfer System in Reciprocating Engines 189 7.1 Kinematics of the Piston-Crank Mechanism 189 7.2 Dynamics of the Reciprocating Mechanism 193 7.3 Multi-Cylinder Engines 206 7.4 Engine Balancing 215 Problems 224 8 Reciprocating Engine Performance Characteristics 228 8.1 Indicator Diagrams 228 8.2 Indicated Parameters 231 8.3 Brake Parameters 233 8.4 Engine Design Point and Performance 235 8.5 Off-Design Performance 239 Problems 247 Part III Gas Turbine Internal Combustion Engines 251 Introduction III: History and Classification of Gas Turbines 252 9 Air-Standard Gas Turbine Cycles 254 9.1 Joule-Brayton Ideal Cycle 254 9.2 Cycle with Heat Exchange (Regeneration) 258 9.3 Cycle with Reheat 260 9.4 Cycle with Intercooling 263 9.5 Cycle with Heat Exchange and Reheat 265 9.6 Cycle with Heat Exchange and Intercooling 267 9.7 Cycle with Heat Exchange, Reheat, and Intercooling 268 9.8 Cycle Comparison 270 Problems 272 10 Irreversible Air-Standard Gas Turbine Cycles 274 10.1 Component Efficiencies 275 10.2 Simple Irreversible Cycle 280 10.3 Irreversible Cycle with Heat Exchange (Regenerative Irreversible Cycle) 284 10.4 Irreversible Cycle with Reheat 287 10.5 Irreversible Cycle with Intercooling 288 10.6 Irreversible Cycle with Heat Exchange and Reheat 290 10.7 Irreversible Cycle with Heat Exchange and Intercooling 292 10.8 Irreversible Cycle with Heat Exchange, Reheat, and Intercooling 294 10.9 Comparison of Irreversible Cycles 295 Problems 297 11 Practical Gas Turbine Cycles 299 11.1 Simple Single-Shaft Gas Turbine 299 11.2 Thermodynamic Properties of Air 300 11.3 Compression Process in the Compressor 301 11.4 Combustion Process 302 11.5 Expansion Process in the Turbine 314 Problems 316 12 Design-Point Calculations of Aviation Gas Turbines 317 12.1 Properties of Air 317 12.2 Simple Turbojet Engine 322 12.3 Performance of Turbojet Engine – Case Study 328 12.4 Two-Spool Unmixed-Flow Turbofan Engine 337 12.5 Performance of Two-Spool Unmixed-Flow Turbofan Engine – Case Study 350 12.6 Two-Spool Mixed-Flow Turbofan Engine 357 12.7 Performance of Two-Spool Mixed-Flow Turbofan Engine – Case Study 369 Problems 373 13 Design-Point Calculations of Industrial Gas Turbines 376 13.1 Single-Shaft Gas Turbine Engine 376 13.2 Performance of Single-Shaft Gas Turbine Engine – Case Study 379 13.3 Two-Shaft Gas Turbine Engine 387 13.4 Performance of Two-Shaft Gas Turbine Engine – Case Study 390 Problems 394 14 Work-Transfer System in Gas Turbines 398 14.1 Axial-Flow Compressors 398 14.2 Radial-Flow Compressors 404 14.3 Axial-Flow Turbines 407 14.4 Radial-Flow Turbines 422 Problems 427 15 Off-Design Performance of Gas Turbines 429 15.1 Component-Matching Method 429 15.2 Thermo-Gas-Dynamic Matching Method 446 Problems 464 Bibliography 466 Appendix A Thermodynamic Tables 469 Appendix B Dynamics of the Reciprocating Mechanism 485 Appendix C Design Point Calculations – Reciprocating Engines 492 C.1 Engine Processes 492 Appendix D Equations for the Thermal Efficiency and Specific Work of Theoretical Gas Turbine Cycles 497 Nomenclature 498 Index 499

Read more less

Book SynopsisPresents the components, challenges, and solutions of wireless automation as enablers for industry 4.0 This timely book introduces the state of the art in industrial automation techniques, concentrating on wireless methods for a variety of applications, ranging from simple smart homes to heavy-duty complex industrial setting with robotics accessibility. It covers a wide range of topics including the industrial revolution enablers, applications, challenges, their possible solutions, and future directions. Wireless Automation as an Enabler for the Next Industrial Revolution opens with an introduction to wireless sensor networks and their applications in various domains, emphasizing industrial wireless networks and their future uses. It then takes a look at life-span extension for sensor networks in the industry, followed by a chapter on multiple access and resource sharing for low latency critical industrial networks. Industrial automation is covered next, as is the subject of ultra reliable low latency communications. Other topics include: self healing in wireless networks; cost efficiency optimization for industrial automation; a non event-based approach for non-intrusive load monitoring; wireless networked control; and caching at the edge in low latency wireless networks. The book finishes with a chapter on the application of terahertz sensing at nano-scale for precision agriculture. Introduces the future evolving dimension in industrial automation and discusses the enablers of the industrial revolutionPlaces particular emphasis on wireless communication techniques which make industrial automation reliable, efficient, and cost-effectiveCovers many of the associated topics and concepts like robotics, AI, internet-of-things, telesurgery, and remote manufacturingOf great interest to researchers from academia and industry who are looking at the industrial development from various perspectives Wireless Automation as an Enabler for the Next Industrial Revolution is an excellent book for telecom engineers, IoT experts, and industry professionals. It would also greatly benefit researchers, professors, and doctorate and postgraduate students involved in automation and industry 4.0.Table of ContentsList of Contributors xiii Preface xvii 1 Industrial Wireless Sensor Networks Overview 1 Mohsin Raza and Huan X. Nguyen 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Industry 4.0 3 1.3 Industrial Wireless Sensor Networks (IWSNs) 6 1.4 Applications of IWSNs 8 1.4.1 Feedback Control Systems 8 1.4.2 Motion and Robotics 9 1.4.3 Safety Applications 9 1.4.4 Environmental Monitoring 9 1.4.5 Machine/Structural Health Monitoring 10 1.5 Communication Topologies in IWSNs 10 1.6 Research Developments and Communications Standards for Industry 11 1.6.1 IEEE 802.15.4 12 1.6.2 IEEE 802.15.4e 13 1.6.3 Zigbee 13 1.6.4 WirelessHART 14 1.6.5 ISA100.11a 14 1.6.6 6LoWPAN 14 Bibliography 15 2 Life-span Extension for Sensor Networks in the Industry 19 Metin Ozturk, Mona Jaber, and Muhammad A. Imran 2.1 Introduction 19 2.2 Wireless Sensor Networks 21 2.3 Industrial WSNs 24 2.3.1 Requirements and Challenges 25 2.3.2 Protocols and Standards 26 2.3.3 IWSN Applications 27 2.4 Life-span Extension for WSNs 28 2.4.1 Energy Harvesting 29 2.4.1.1 Solar Energy Harvesting 31 2.4.1.2 Wind Energy Harvesting 31 2.4.1.3 Radio Frequency Energy Harvesting 32 2.4.1.4 Piezoelectric Energy Harvesting 32 2.4.1.5 Thermal Energy Harvesting 33 2.4.2 Energy Conservation 33 2.4.2.1 Duty Cycling 34 2.4.2.2 Data Driven Approaches 35 2.4.2.3 Mobility Based Approaches 35 2.4.2.4 Q Learning Assisted Energy Efficient Smart Connectivity 36 2.5 Conclusion 40 Bibliography 41 3 Multiple Access and Resource Sharing for Low Latency Critical Industrial Networks 47 Mohsin Raza, Anas Amjad, and Sajjad Hussain 3.1 Introduction 47 3.2 Research Developments 51 3.2.1 CSMA/CA Based MAC Schemes 53 3.2.2 TDMA Based MAC Schemes 53 3.2.3 Multichannel MAC Schemes 54 3.2.4 Priority Based MAC Schemes 55 3.3 Priority Based Information Scheduling and Transmission 56 3.4 Summary 61 Bibliography 61 4 Narrowband Internet of Things (NB-IoT) for Industrial Automation 65 Hassan Malik, Muhammad Mahtab Alam, Alar Kuusik, Yannick Le Moullec, and Sven Pärand 4.1 Introduction 65 4.2 Overview of NB-IoT 65 4.3 NB-IoT Design Characteristics 68 4.3.1 Low Device Complexity and Low Cost 68 4.3.2 Coverage Enhancement (CE) 70 4.3.3 Long Device Battery Lifetime 70 4.3.4 Massive Device Support 71 4.3.5 Deployment Flexibility 72 4.3.6 Small Data Packet Transmission Support 74 4.3.6.1 Control Plane CIoT EPS Optimization (CP) 74 4.3.6.2 User Plane CIoT EPS Optimization (UP) 76 4.3.7 Multicast Transmission Support 76 4.3.8 Mobility Support 76 4.4 NB-IoT Frame Structure 77 4.4.1 Downlink Transmission Scheme 78 4.4.1.1 Narrowband Reference Signal (NRS) 78 4.4.1.2 Narrowband Primary and Secondary Synchronization Signals (NPSS and NSSS) 78 4.4.1.3 Narrowband Physical Broadcast Channel (NPBCH) 79 4.4.1.4 Narrowband Physical Downlink Control Channel (NPDCCH) 79 4.4.1.5 Narrowband Physical Downlink Shared Channel (NPDSCH) 80 4.4.2 Uplink Transmission Scheme 80 4.4.2.1 Demodulation Reference Signal (DMRS) 80 4.4.2.2 Narrowband Physical Random Access Channel (NPRACH) 81 4.4.2.3 Narrowband Uplink Shared Channel (NPUSCH) 81 4.4.3 NB-IoT Design Modification in Relation to LTE 81 4.5 NB-IoT as an Enabler for Industry 4.0 81 4.5.1 Process Automation 83 4.5.2 Human–Machine Interfaces 84 4.5.3 Logistics and Warehousing 84 4.5.4 Maintenance and Monitoring 85 4.6 Summary 85 Bibliography 86 5 Ultra Reliable Low Latency Communications as an Enabler For Industry Automation 89 João Pedro Battistella Nadas, Guodong Zhao, Richard Demo Souza, and Muhammad A. Imran 5.1 Introduction 89 5.2 Opportunities for URLLC in Industry Automation 91 5.2.1 URLLC Industrial Applications 91 5.2.2 New Business Models 93 5.3 Existing Solutions 94 5.3.1 LTE 94 5.3.2 WirelessHART and ISA100.11a 95 5.4 Enabling Technologies 96 5.4.1 Faster Channel Coding 96 5.4.2 Latency Aware HARQ 97 5.4.3 Joint Design 98 5.4.3.1 Communication Model 100 5.4.3.2 Proposed Solution 100 5.4.3.3 Numerical Results and Conclusion 103 5.5 Conclusion 104 Bibliography 104 6 Anomaly Detection and Self-healing in Industrial Wireless Networks 109 Ahmed Zoha, Qammer H. Abbasi, and Muhammad A. Imran 6.1 Introduction 109 6.2 System Design 113 6.2.1 COD Stage 113 6.2.2 COC Stage 115 6.3 Cell Outage Detection Framework 115 6.3.1 Profiling Phase 115 6.3.1.1 Local Outlier Factor Based Detector (LOFD) 119 6.3.1.2 One-Class Support Vector Machine based Detector (OCSVMD) 120 6.3.2 Detection and Localization Phase 122 6.4 Cell Outage Compensation 122 6.5 Simulation Results 124 6.5.1 Simulation Setup 124 6.5.1.1 Parameter Estimation and Evaluation 124 6.5.2 Cell Outage Detection Results 127 6.5.3 Localization 135 6.5.4 Compensation 136 6.6 Conclusion 138 Bibliography 138 7 Cost Efficiency Optimization for Industrial Automation 141 Hafiz Husnain Raza Sherazi, Luigi Alfredo Grieco, Gennaro Boggia, and Muhammad A. Imran 7.1 Introduction 141 7.2 The Evolution of Low Energy Networking Protocols for Industrial Automation 144 7.2.1 Radio Frequency Identification and Near Field Communication 144 7.2.2 Bluetooth 145 7.2.3 Zigbee 145 7.2.4 Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) 145 7.2.5 Wi-Fi 146 7.2.6 IPv6 Over Low Power Wireless Personal Area Networks (6LoWPAN) 146 7.2.7 Low Power Wide Area Networks (LPWAN) 146 7.2.7.1 Long Range Wide Area Networks (LoRaWAN) 148 7.2.7.2 Sigfox 149 7.2.7.3 Narrowband IoT (NB-IoT) 150 7.3 An Overview of the Costs Involved in Industry 4.0 151 7.3.1 Battery Replacement Cost 152 7.3.2 Damage Penalty 152 7.3.3 Cost Relationships and Trade-off Analysis 152 7.4 Evaluating Costs in an Industrial Environment: A LoRaWAN Case study 153 7.4.1 Battery Lifetime of Monitoring Nodes 155 7.4.2 Battery Replacement Cost 156 7.4.3 Damage Penalty 157 7.5 Cost Analysis for Industrial Automation 158 7.5.1 Statistics for Energy Consumption 158 7.5.2 Statistics for Battery Replacement Cost 159 7.5.3 Statistics for Damage Penalty in a Plain Industrial Environment 161 7.5.4 The Cumulative Cost 163 7.6 Cost Optimization through Energy Harvesting in Industrial Automation 164 7.6.1 Extending the Battery Lifetime 165 7.6.2 Tuning the Sensing Interval 165 7.7 Conclusion 168 Bibliography 168 8 A Non-Event Based Approach for Non-Intrusive Load Monitoring 173 Ahmed Zoha, Qammer H. Abbasi, and Muhammad A. Imran 8.1 Introduction 173 8.2 Probabilistic Modelling for Load Disaggregation 175 8.2.1 Model Definition 177 8.2.2 Inference 178 8.3 Experimental Evaluations 180 8.3.1 Experiment Design 181 8.3.2 Feature Sub-Groups 182 8.3.3 Performance Evaluation 183 8.3.3.1 Binary and Multi-State Classification 183 8.4 Live Deployment 187 8.4.1 Energy Estimation 188 8.5 Conclusion 190 Bibliography 191 9 Wireless Networked Control 193 Zhen Meng and Guodong Zhao 9.1 Introduction 193 9.2 Industrial Automation 194 9.3 WNC System Model 196 9.3.1 WNC Model 196 9.3.1.1 Wireless Networks 197 9.3.1.2 Control System 198 9.3.2 WNC System Requirements 199 9.3.2.1 System Structure 199 9.3.2.2 Real-Time Performance 200 9.3.2.3 High Reliability 201 9.3.2.4 Determinism 201 9.3.2.5 Sample Data Traffic and Event Order 201 9.3.3 Analysis of Influencing Factors 202 9.3.3.1 Sampling Period 202 9.3.3.2 Time Delay 202 9.3.3.3 Packet Loss 203 9.4 Network and System Control Co-design 203 9.5 Conclusion 204 Bibliography 204 10 Caching at the Edge in Low Latency Wireless Networks 209 Ramy Amer, M. Majid Butt, and Nicola Marchetti 10.1 Introduction 209 10.2 Living on the Edge 211 10.3 Classifications of Wireless Caching Networks 214 10.3.1 Wireless Caching Architecture 215 10.4 Caching for Low Latency Wireless Networks 217 10.5 Inter-cluster Cooperation for Wireless D2D Caching Networks 218 10.5.1 Proposed Network Model 219 10.5.2 Content Placement and Traffic Characteristics 222 10.5.3 Caching Problem Formulation 224 10.5.3.1 Arrival and Service Rates 224 10.5.3.2 Network Average Delay 225 10.5.4 Proposed Caching Schemes 226 10.5.4.1 Caching Popular Files 226 10.5.4.2 Greedy Caching Algorithm 227 10.5.4.3 Outage Probability 228 10.6 Results and Discussions 230 10.7 Chapter Summary 234 Bibliography 235 11 Application of Terahertz Sensing at Nano-Scale for Precision Agriculture 241 Adnan Zahid, Hasan T. Abbas, Aifeng Ren, Akram Alomainy, Muhammad A. Imran, and Qammer H. Abbasi 11.1 Introduction 241 11.1.1 Limitations of Conventional Methods 243 11.1.2 Transformation from Micro- to Nanotechnology 243 11.1.3 Evolution of Nanotechnology 245 11.1.4 Potential Benefits of Nanotechnology in Agriculture 245 11.1.5 Challenges in Nanotechnology 246 11.1.5.1 Health and Environmental Impacts 246 11.1.5.2 High Production Costs 246 11.1.5.3 Risk Assessment 247 11.1.6 Evolving Applications of Terahertz (THz) Technology 247 11.1.7 Materials and Methods 249 11.1.7.1 Experimental Setup 249 11.1.7.2 Sample 249 11.1.7.3 Thickness of Leaves 250 11.1.8 Measurement Results 250 11.1.8.1 Transmission Response 250 11.1.8.2 Path-loss Response of Leaves 253 11.1.9 Conclusion 254 Bibliography 255 Index 259

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe updated third edition of the only textbook on colour The revised third edition of Colour and the Optical Properties of Materialsfocuses on the ways that colour is produced, both in the natural world and in a wide range of applications. The expert author offers an introduction to the science underlying colour and optics and explores many of the most recent applications. The text is divided into three main sections: behaviour of light in homogeneous media, which can largely be explained by classical wave optics; the way in which light interacts with atoms or molecules, which must be explained mainly in terms of photons; and the interaction of light with insulators, semiconductors and metals, in which the band structure notions are of primary concern. The updated third edition retains the proven concepts outlined in the previous editions and contains information on the significant developments in the field with many figures redrawn and new material addedTable of ContentsPreface xv About the Companion Website xvii 1 Light and Colour 1 1.1 Light and Colour 1 1.1.1 Light rays 1 1.1.2 Light waves 2 1.1.3 Photons 3 1.1.4 Energy levels 4 1.1.5 Waves and particles 5 1.1.6 Colour 6 1.2 Light Waves 6 1.3 Light Waves and Colour 8 1.4 Interference 9 1.4.1 Two waves with the same wavelength 9 1.4.2 Two waves with different wavelengths 10 1.4.3 Phase and group velocity 11 1.4.4 Light pulses 12 1.4.5 Superluminal and subluminal light 14 1.5 Light Sources 15 1.6 Incandescence 16 1.6.1 Incandescence and black-body radiation 16 1.6.2 The colour of incandescent objects 17 1.7 Luminescence 18 1.8 Laser Light 20 1.8.1 Emission and absorption of radiation 20 1.8.2 Energy-level populations 22 1.8.3 Rates of absorption and emission 23 1.8.4 Cavity modes 25 1.8.5 Coherence length and bandwidth 26 1.8.6 Supercontinuum light 27 1.9 Vision 28 1.10 Colour Perception 33 1.11 Additive Coloration 34 1.12 Subtractive Coloration 37 1.13 The Interaction of Light with a Material: Appearance 39 1.13.1 Reflection 39 1.13.2 Diffuse reflectance 40 1.13.3 Elastic scattering 41 1.13.4 Inelastic scattering 42 1.13.5 Absorption 42 1.13.6 Attenuation 43 1.13.7 Structural colour, iridescence, and electron excitation colour 45 Further Reading 46 Problems and Exercises 48 2 Colour Due to Refraction and Dispersion 51 2.1 Refraction and the Refractive Index of a Material 51 2.2 Total Internal Reflection 55 2.2.1 Refraction at an interface 55 2.2.2 Evanescent waves 56 2.3 Refractive Index and Polarisability 58 2.4 Refractive Index and Density 61 2.5 Invisible Animals, GRINS, and Mirages 63 2.6 Dispersion and Colours Produced by Dispersion 65 2.7 Rainbows 68 2.8 Halos 74 2.9 Fibre Optics 74 2.9.1 Optical communications 74 2.9.2 Optical fibres 75 2.9.3 Attenuation in glass fibres 77 2.9.4 Chemical impurities 78 2.9.5 Dispersion and optical fibre design 80 2.10 Metamaterials and Negative Refractive Index 83 2.10.1 Metamaterials 83 2.10.2 Hyperlenses 84 2.10.3 Invisibility cloaks 87 2.10.4 Metasurfaces and flat lenses 88 2.11 The Electro-Optic Effect and Photorefractive Materials 88 Further Reading 90 Problems and Exercises 92 3 The Production of Colour by Reflection 95 3.1 Reflection from a Single Surface 96 3.1.1 Reflection from a transparent plate 96 3.1.2 Data storage using reflection 97 3.2 Reflection from a Single Thin Film in Air 98 3.2.1 Reflection perpendicular to the film 98 3.2.2 Variation with viewing angle 101 3.2.3 Transmitted beams 102 3.3 The Colour of a Single Thin Film in Air 103 3.4 The Reflectivity of a Single Thin Film in Air 105 3.5 The Colour of a Single Thin Film on a Substrate 106 3.6 The Reflectivity of a Single Thin Film on a Substrate 107 3.7 Low-Reflection and High-Reflection Films 108 3.7.1 Antireflection coatings 108 3.7.2 Antireflection layers 109 3.7.3 Graded index antireflection coatings 111 3.7.4 High reflectivity surfaces 113 3.7.5 Interference modulated (IMOD) displays 113 3.8 Multiple Thin Films 114 3.8.1 Dielectric mirrors 114 3.8.2 Multilayer stacks 116 3.8.3 Interference filters and distributed Bragg reflectors 117 3.9 Fibre Bragg Gratings 118 3.10 ‘Smart’ Windows 120 3.10.1 Low-emissivity windows 121 3.10.2 Self-cleaning windows 122 3.11 Thin-Film Colours in Nature 123 3.11.1 Single thin-film reflection 123 3.11.2 Multilayer mirrors 124 3.11.3 Multilayer colour generation 125 3.11.4 Multilayer reflectors in blue butterflies 127 Further Reading 128 Problems and Exercises 129 4 Polarised Light and Crystals 135 4.1 Polarisation of Light 135 4.2 Polarised Light and Vision 137 4.3 Polarisation by Reflection 138 4.4 Polars 141 4.5 Crystal Symmetry and Refractive Index 143 4.6 Double Refraction: Calcite as an Example 144 4.6.1 Double refraction 144 4.6.2 Refractive index and crystal structure 147 4.7 The Description of Double Refraction Effects 148 4.7.1 Uniaxial crystals 148 4.7.2 Biaxial crystals 150 4.8 Colour Produced by Polarisation and Birefringence 152 4.9 Dichroism, Trichroism, and Pleochroism 154 4.10 Nonlinear Effects 156 4.10.1 Nonlinear crystals 156 4.10.2 Second and third harmonic generation 158 4.10.3 Frequency mixing 160 4.10.4 Optical parametric amplifiers and oscillators 161 4.11 Frequency Matching and Phase Matching 162 4.12 More on Second Harmonic Generation 164 4.12.1 Polycrystalline solids and powders 164 4.12.2 Second harmonic generation in glass 165 4.12.3 Second harmonic and sum frequency generation by organic materials 166 4.12.4 Second harmonic generation at interfaces 166 4.12.5 Second harmonic microscopy 168 4.13 Optical Activity 168 4.13.1 The rotation of polarised light by molecules 168 4.13.2 The rotation of polarised light by crystals 170 4.13.3 Circular birefringence and dichroism 171 4.14 Liquid Crystals 172 4.14.1 Liquid crystal mesophases 172 4.14.2 Liquid crystal displays 174 Further Reading 177 Problems and Exercises 179 5 Colour Due to Scattering 183 5.1 Scattering and Extinction 183 5.2 Tyndall Blue and Rayleigh Scattering 186 5.3 Blue Skies, Red Sunsets 187 5.4 Scattering and Polarisation 190 5.5 Mie Scattering 192 5.6 Blue Eyes, Blue Feathers, and Blue Moons 195 5.7 Paints, Sunscreens, and Related Matters 197 5.8 Multiple Scattering 199 5.9 Gold Sols and Ruby Glass 199 5.10 The Lycurgus Cup and Other Stained Glass 201 Further Reading 204 Problems and Exercises 205 6 Colour Due to Diffraction 209 6.1 Diffraction and Scattering 209 6.2 Diffraction and Colour Production by a Slit 210 6.3 Diffraction and Colour Production by a Rectangular Aperture 212 6.4 Diffraction and Colour Production by a Circular Aperture 213 6.5 The Diffraction Limit of Optical Instruments 215 6.6 Colour Production by Linear Diffraction Gratings 216 6.7 Two-Dimensional Gratings 221 6.8 Estimation of the Wavelength of Light by Diffraction 223 6.9 Diffraction by Crystals and Crystal-Like Structures 224 6.9.1 Bragg’s law 224 6.9.2 Opals 226 6.10 Photonic Crystals 229 6.10.1 Artificial and inverse opal structures 229 6.10.2 Diffraction from cubic photonic crystals 232 6.10.3 The effective refractive index of cubic photonic crystals 232 6.10.4 Dynamical form of Bragg’s law 234 6.10.5 Photonic bandgaps 235 6.10.6 Photonic crystals in nature 236 6.10.7 Photonic crystal fibres 238 6.11 Diffraction from Disordered Gratings 239 6.11.1 Random specks and droplets 239 6.11.2 Halos, coronae, and glories 240 6.11.3 Colour from cholesteric liquid crystals 242 6.11.4 Natural helicoidal structures 246 6.11.5 Disordered two- and three-dimensional gratings 247 6.12 Diffraction by Sub-Wavelength Structures 248 6.12.1 Diffraction by moth-eye antireflection structures 249 6.12.2 The cornea of the eye 250 6.12.3 Some blue feathers 251 6.13 Holograms 252 6.13.1 Holograms and interference patterns 252 6.13.2 Transmission holograms 253 6.13.3 Reflection holograms 255 6.13.4 Rainbow holograms 256 6.13.5 Hologram recording media 259 6.13.6 Embossed holograms 261 6.14 Hologram Formation 262 6.14.1 Interference of two coherent light waves 262 6.14.2 Image formation 263 Further Reading 266 Problems and Exercises 268 7 Colour from Atoms and Ions 273 7.1 The Spectra of Atoms and Ions 273 7.2 The Spectrum of Hydrogen 276 7.3 Terms and Levels 278 7.4 Atomic Spectra and Chemical Analysis 280 7.5 Fraunhofer Lines and Stellar Spectra 282 7.6 Neon Signs and Plasma Displays 283 7.7 The Helium–Neon Laser 285 7.8 Sodium and Mercury Street Lights 287 7.9 Atomic and Optical Clocks 289 7.9.1 Clocks 289 7.9.2 Atomic clocks 290 7.9.3 The 133Cs atomic clock 291 7.9.4 Optical clocks 291 7.10 Transition-Metal Cation Colours: Overview 291 7.11 Crystal Field Splitting 292 7.11.1 d-orbital interactions 292 7.11.2 Term splitting 295 7.11.3 Energies 297 7.11.4 Selection rules 297 7.12 The Crystal Field Colours of Transition-Metal Ions 299 7.12.1 3d1, 3d4, 3d5, 3d6, and 3d9 cations 299 7.12.2 3d2, 3d3, 3d7, and 3d8 cations 301 7.12.3 Octahedral and tetrahedral coordination 304 7.12.4 Thermochromism, piezochromism, and crystal-field splitting 306 7.13 Crystal Field Colours in Minerals and Gemstones 306 7.13.1 The colour of ruby 306 7.13.2 Emerald, chrome alum, and alexandrite 309 7.13.3 Malachite, azurite, and turquoise 311 7.14 Colour as a Structural Probe 311 7.15 Transition-Metal-Ion Lasers 313 7.15.1 The ruby laser: a three-level laser 313 7.15.2 The titanium-sapphire laser 314 7.16 Colours from Lanthanoid Ions 315 7.16.1 Lanthanoid ion colours: general 315 7.16.2 The colour of Ce3+ and Eu2+ 316 7.16.3 f-f colours: Pr3+, Tm3+, Nd3+, and Dy3+ 319 7.17 The Neodymium (Nd3+) Solid State Laser: A Four-Level Laser 319 7.18 Optical Amplifiers 322 7.18.1 Amplification of optical fibre signals 322 7.18.2 Fibre lasers 323 7.19 Transition Metal, Lanthanoid, and Actinoid Pigments 324 Further Reading 326 Problems and Exercises 327 8 Colour from Molecules 331 8.1 The Energy Levels of Molecules 331 8.1.1 Electronic, vibrational, and rotational energy levels 331 8.1.2 Molecular orbitals 333 8.1.3 Molecular orbitals in large molecules 333 8.1.4 Origin of molecular colours 336 8.2 The Colours Arising in Some Inorganic Molecules 337 8.2.1 Halogens 337 8.2.2 Auroras 338 8.2.3 Candles and fireworks 338 8.3 The Colour of Water 339 8.4 Ultramarine Pigments and Related Colours 341 8.5 Organic Chromophores, Chromogens, and Auxochromes 344 8.6 Conjugated Bonds in Organic Molecules: Carotenoids 345 8.7 Nonlinear Conjugated Bonds Involving N Atoms: Pterins 348 8.8 Conjugated Bonds Circling Metal Atoms: Porphyrins and Phthalocyanines 353 8.8.1 Porphin 353 8.8.2 Chlorophylls 354 8.8.3 Haemoglobins and related molecules 356 8.8.4 Phthalocyanins 358 8.9 Naturally Occurring Colourants: Flavonoid Pigments 358 8.9.1 Flavone-related colours: yellows 358 8.9.2 Anthocyanin-related colours: reds and blues 360 8.9.3 The colour of red wine 364 8.10 Autumn Leaves 364 8.11 Some Dyes and Pigments 367 8.11.1 Indigo, Tyrian purple, and mauve 367 8.11.2 Tannins 369 8.11.3 Melanins 370 8.12 Charge Transfer Colours 372 8.12.1 Charge transfer processes 372 8.12.2 Cation-to-cation (intervalence) charge transfer 373 8.12.3 Anion-to-cation charge transfer 377 8.12.4 Iron-containing minerals 378 8.13 Colour-Change Sensors 379 8.13.1 The detection of metal ions 380 8.13.2 Indicators 380 8.13.3 Colorimetric sensor films and arrays 383 8.13.4 Markers 384 8.14 Dye Lasers 384 8.15 Photochromic Organic Molecules 388 8.16 Biological Cell Stains 389 Further Reading 391 Problems and Exercises 393 9 Luminescence 397 9.1 Photoluminescence: Activators, Sensitisers, and Fluorophores 397 9.2 Photonic Processes in Photoluminescence 399 9.2.1 Fluorescence 400 9.2.2 Phosphorescence 402 9.2.3 Thermally activated delayed fluorescence (TADF) 402 9.2.4 Anti-Stokes-shift luminescence 404 9.3 Atomic Processes in Photoluminescence 405 9.3.1 Quantum yield and reaction rates 405 9.3.2 Structural interactions 407 9.3.3 Quenching 407 9.3.4 Ultralong organic phosphorescence (OLP) 412 9.3.5 Aggregation-induced fluorescence 413 9.4 Inorganic Luminescence 413 9.4.1 Fluorescent lamps 414 9.4.2 Halophosphate lamps 414 9.4.3 Trichromatic lamps 415 9.4.4 Other fluorescent lamps 417 9.5 Plasma Displays 418 9.6 Fluorescent Organic Molecules 419 9.6.1 Fluorescent molecular tags and proteins 420 9.6.2 Green fluorescent protein 421 9.6.3 Other fluorescent proteins 421 9.6.4 Photoactivatable fluorescent proteins (PA-FPs) 424 9.6.5 The mechanism of photoswitching 424 9.6.6 Synthetic fluorescent dyes 425 9.7 Microscopy 427 9.7.1 Fluorescence microscopy 427 9.7.2 Multiphoton excitation microscopy 428 9.7.3 Super-resolution imaging 429 9.8 Upconversion 434 9.8.1 Upconversion via lanthanoid cations 434 9.8.2 Ground state absorption and excited state absorption 435 9.8.3 Energy transfer 437 9.8.4 Other lanthanoid upconversion processes 439 9.8.5 Organic molecule sensitisers 440 9.8.6 Triplet-triplet annihilation 441 9.9 Quantum Cutting (Downconversion) 444 9.10 Fluorescent Markers and Sensors 445 9.11 Long-Lifetime Emission 447 9.11.1 Persistent luminescence 447 9.11.2 Photostimulable luminescence 450 9.11.3 Radiophotoluminescence 451 9.11.4 Optically stimulated luminescence in thermochronometry 451 9.11.5 Thermoluminescence 452 9.12 Scintillators 453 9.13 Chemiluminescent Light Emission 454 9.13.1 Chemiluminescence 454 9.13.2 Bioluminescence 455 9.13.3 Electrochemiluminescence 458 9.14 Mechanoluminescence and Related Light Emission 462 9.14.1 Triboluminescence 462 9.14.2 Sonoluminescence 463 9.15 Phosphor Electroluminescent Displays 463 9.16 Organic Molecule Electroluminescence and OLEDs 467 9.16.1 Molecular electroluminescence 467 9.16.2 Early OLED development 470 9.16.3 Later developments 472 9.16.4 White OLEDs and lighting 474 Further Reading 475 Problems and Exercises 476 10 Colour in Insulators, Semiconductors, and Metals 481 10.1 The Colours of Insulators 482 10.2 Excitons 484 10.3 Impurity Colours in Insulators 485 10.4 Colour Centres 486 10.4.1 The F Centre 487 10.4.2 Electron-Excess and Hole-Excess Centres 489 10.4.3 Impurity Colours in Diamond 491 10.4.4 Surface Colour Centres 494 10.4.5 Complex Colour Centres: Laser Action 495 10.4.6 Tenebrescence 496 10.5 The Colours of Inorganic Semiconductors 496 10.5.1 Coloured Semiconductors 496 10.5.2 Transparent Conducting Oxides 498 10.6 The Colours of Semiconductor Alloys 499 10.7 Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs) 501 10.7.1 Direct and Indirect Bandgaps 501 10.7.2 Idealised Diode Structure 501 10.7.3 High Brightness LEDs 503 10.7.4 Impurity Doping in LEDs 504 10.7.5 LED Displays and White Light Generation 505 10.7.6 Perovskite LEDs 506 10.8 Semiconductor Diode Lasers 507 10.9 Semiconductor Nanostructures 508 10.9.1 Nanostructures 508 10.9.2 Quantum Wells 509 10.9.3 Two-Dimensional Light-Emitting Layered Structures 512 10.9.4 Quantum Wires and Rods 514 10.9.5 Quantum Dots 514 10.9.6 QLEDs 517 10.10 Electrochromic Films 517 10.10.1 Tungsten Trioxide Electrochromic Films 518 10.10.2 Inorganic Electrochromic Materials 521 10.10.3 Electrochromic Polymers 522 10.11 Photovoltaics 524 10.11.1 Photovoltaics and Photoconductivity 524 10.11.2 Photodiodes and Solar Cells 525 10.11.3 Dye-Sensitised Solar Cells 526 10.11.4 Perovskite Solar Cells 528 10.12 Digital Photography 530 10.12.1 Charge Coupled Devices (CCDs) 530 10.12.2 CCD Imaging 531 10.13 The Colours of Metals 532 10.13.1 Metallic Materials 532 10.13.2 Reflectivity of Metals 533 10.13.3 Reflectivity and Free Electron Theory 533 10.13.4 The Colour of Copper, Silver, and Gold 535 10.14 The Colours of Metal Nanoparticles 536 10.14.1 Surface Plasmons and Polaritons 536 10.14.2 Polychromic Glass 538 10.14.3 Photochromic Glass 539 10.14.4 Metal Nanoparticle Sensors and SERS 541 10.15 Extraordinary Light Transmission and Plasmonic Crystals 542 Further Reading 542 Problems and Exercises 543 Appendix A Definitions, Units, and Conversion Factors 549 A.1 Constants, Energy, and Conversion Factors 549 A.2 Waves 550 A.3 SI Units Associated with Radiation and Light 552 Appendix B The Colour of a Thin Film in White Light 555 Appendix C Hologram Formation 557 C.1 Interference of Two Coherent Light Waves 557 C.2 Image Formation 559 C.3 Wave Overlap and Interference 560 Appendix D Atomic Electron Configurations and Energy Levels 563 D.1 Electron Configurations of the Lighter Atoms 563 D.2 The 3d Transition Metals 564 D.3 The Lanthanoid Elements 565 D.4 The Vector Model of the Atom 566 D.5 Energy Levels and Terms of Many Electron Atoms 567 D.6 The Ground State Term of an Atom 569 D.7 Energy Levels of Many Electron Atoms 569 Index 571

Read more less

Book SynopsisComposites are materials made from two or more constituent materials with significantly different physical or chemical properties. The two materials combine together to give a new material with higher strength, toughness, stiffness, but also a higher resistance to creep, corrosion, wear or fatigue compared to conventional materials. It is composed primarily of a matrix i.e. a continuous phase which is armoured with secondary discontinues reinforcement phase. These materials have been used in a variety of products viz. spacecrafts, sporting goods, catalyst, sensors, actuators, biomedical materials, batteries, cars, furniture, aircraft components, etc. This book focusses on processing, properties of various types of composite materials, as well as their environmental engineering applications. This book examines the current state of art, new challenges, and opportunities of composites in environmental engineering. The chapters in this book covers nearly every topic related to compositeTable of ContentsPreface xvii 1 Composites: Types, Method of Preparation and Application as An Emerging Tool for Environmental Remediation 1Bushra Fatima, Geetanjali Rathi, Rabia Ahmad and Saif Ali Chaudhry 1.1 Introduction 2 1.2 Classification Based on Matrix 4 1.2.1 Metal Matrix Composites (MMC) 5 1.2.2 Methods for Synthesizing Metal-Matrix Composites 5 1.2.3 Bonding in Metal Matrix Composites 9 1.2.4 Applications of Metal Matrix Composites 10 1.3 Polymer Matrix Composites 10 1.3.1 Classification of Polymer Matrix Composites 12 1.3.2 Methods for Synthesizing of Polymer Composites 13 1.3.3 Bonding in Polymer Matrix Composites 15 1.3.4 Applications of Polymer Matrix Composites 16 1.4 Ceramic Matrix Composites 16 1.4.1 Methods for Synthesizing Ceramic Matrix Composites 17 1.4.2 Advantage of Ceramic Matrix Composites 18 1.4.3 Disadvantages of Ceramic Matrix Composites 18 1.4.4 Applications of Ceramic Matrix Composites 18 1.5 Classification Based on Reinforcement 19 1.5.1 Fiber-Reinforced Composites 19 1.5.2 Particle Reinforced Composites 20 1.5.3 Structural Reinforced Composites 20 1.6 Recent Advancement in Composites 21 1.6.1 Methods for Synthesizing Green Composites 22 1.6.2 Advantages and Disadvantages of Green Composites over Traditional Composites 22 1.6.3 Applications of Green Composites 22 1.7 Advantages of Composites 23 1.8 Disadvantages of Composites 23 1.9 Conclusion 24 1.10 Future Prospects 24 1.11 Acknowledgement 25 References 25 2 Applications of Composites Materials for Environmental Aspects 33Pintu Pandit, Kunal Singha, Akshay Jadhav, T.N. Gayatri and Utpal Dhara 2.1 Introduction 34 2.2 History of Composites for Eco-Friendly Engineering 35 2.3 Composites for Greenhouses 36 2.4 Polymers have been Reinforced by Fiber (FRP) for Greenhouse 36 2.4.1 Composites Employed in Controlling Humidity in the Home which is Green 36 2.4.2 Composite Films for Optical Transmission of Greenhouse 37 2.5 Composites Employed in Acoustic Applications 37 2.6 Natural Fiber Composites 40 2.6.1 Pretreatment of Natural Fiber 40 2.6.2 Factors Impacting on Bodily Functioning of Natural Fiber Composites 41 2.6.2.1 Fiber Selection 41 2.6.2.2 Matrix Selection 42 2.6.2.3 Interface Strength 42 2.6.2.4 Fiber Orientation 42 2.6.3 Jute-Coir Composites for Constructions 43 2.6.4 Bamboo Composites for Construction 43 2.7 Effective Factors for Low Frequency Acoustic Absorption 44 2.7.1 Fiber Size 44 2.7.2 Feed Size 45 2.7.3 Majority Density 45 2.7.4 Sample Layer Thickness 46 2.8 Composites Employed in Wind Energy 46 2.9 Composites Used in Wind Turbines 47 2.9.1 Impact of Wind Hit on the Composite Material 47 2.10 Composite Materials for the Marine Environment 48 2.11 Composite Materials for Aerospace Engineering 49 2.12 Composites Materials for Civil Engineering 50 2.13 Composite Materials Employed in Solar Energy Panels 50 2.14 Conclusions 51 References 52 3 The Application of Mechano-Chemistry in Composite Preparation 57S. C. Onwubu, P. S. Mdluli, S. Singh, and M. U. Makgobole 3.1 Introduction 57 3.2 The Science of Mechanochemistry 58 3.3 Brief History of Mechanochemistry Application 59 3.4 Mechanochemical Tools 60 3.5 Applications of Mechanochemistry in the Milling of Eggshell Powder 63 3.6 Conclusions 65 References 66 4 Fiber-Reinforced Composites for Environmental Engineering 69Gayatri T. Nadathur, Pintu Pandit and Kunal Singha 4.1 Introduction 69 4.2 Strength of FRC Materials 72 4.3 Composite Manufacturing 74 4.4 Environmental Sustainability of Composites 77 4.5 Green Composites 80 4.6 Composite Filtration Membranes/Media 85 4.7 Liquid (Water or Oil) Filtration Media 86 4.8 Air Filtration Media 88 4.9 Filtration/Separation of Oil-Water Liquid Mixtures 88 4.10 FRCs for Noise Reduction 91 4.11 Fire Resistant FRCs 92 4.12 Conclusions 94 References 94 5 Polymer Nanocomposites: Alternative to Reduce Environmental Impact of Non-Biodegradable Food Packaging Materials 99Shiji Mathew and Radhakrishnan EK 5.1 Introduction 99 5.2 Role of Food Packaging Materials 101 5.3 Environmental Impact of Food Packaging 102 5.4 Polymer Nanocomposites 103 5.5 Biopolymers as Packaging Materials 104 5.6 Advantages of Biopolymers 105 5.7 Reinforcements used in Bionanocomposites 106 5.7.1 Nanoclays-Layered Clays/Silicates 106 5.7.2 Metal and Metal Oxide Nanoparticles 107 5.8 Bionanocomposites 108 5.9 Polysaccharide-Based Bionanocomposites 108 5.9.1 Starch-Based Packaging Material 108 5.10 Protein-Based Bionanocomposites 109 5.10.1 Gelatin Bionanocomposites 110 5.11 Biodegradable Synthetic Polymers 111 5.11.1 Polylactic Acid-Based Packaging Materials 111 5.11.2 Poly (Vinyl) Alcohol-Based Packaging Materials 112 5.12 Properties of Bionanocomposites 113 5.12.1 Mechanical Properties 115 5.12.2 Barrier Properties 115 5.12.3 Thermal Properties 117 5.12.4 Biodegradability 117 5.13 Changes Occurring during Biodegradation Process 119 5.14 Methods of Preparation of Bionanocomposites 120 5.14.1 In Situ Polymerization 120 5.14.2 Melt Intercalation Technique 120 5.14.3 Solvent Casting 121 5.15 Bionanocomposite Characterization 121 5.16 Conclusions 123 References 124 6 Environmental Science and Engineering Applications of Polymer and Nanocellulose-Based Nanocomposites 135Niranjan Thondavada, Rajasekhar Chokkareddy, Nuthalapati Venkatasubba Naidu and G. G. Redhi 6.1 Introduction 136 6.2 Preparation of Polymer Nanocomposites 137 6.2.1 Direct Compounding 137 6.2.2 In-Situ Synthesis 138 6.3 Environmental Applications of PNCs 141 6.3.1 Catalytic and Redox Degradation of Pollutants 141 6.4 Biocatalytic Nanocomposites 142 6.4.1 Adsorption of Pollutants 151 6.5 Preparation of Nanocellulose 155 6.5.1 Nanocellulose-Based Nanocomposites 158 6.5.2 Antimicrobial Filters 162 6.5.3 Catalysis 162 6.5.4 Energy Applications 164 6.6 Conclusion 166 References 166 7 Nanocomposites of ZnO for Water Remediation 179Parita Basnet and Somenath Chatterjee 7.1 Introduction 180 7.2 Aqueous Pollutants 182 7.3 Types of ZnO NCs 184 7.3.1 M-ZnO NCs as Photocatalyst 185 7.3.1.1 Metal Doped/Incorporated-ZnO NCs as Photocatalyst 185 7.3.1.2 Metal Deposited-ZnO NCs as Photocatalyst 188 7.3.2 Semiconductor-ZnO (S-ZnO) NCs as Photocatalyst 191 7.3.3 Polymer-ZnO (P-ZnO) NCs as Photocatalyst 193 7.3.4 Mixed Metal, Semiconductor and/or Polymer-ZnO NCs as Photocatalyst 197 7.3.4.1 Bimetallic-ZnO NCs as Photocatalyst 197 7.3.4.2 Metal-Semiconductor-ZnO (M-S-ZnO) NCs as Photocatalyst 199 7.4 Other Applications Related to the Photocatalytic Activities of ZnO NCs 201 7.5 Conclusion 206 7.6 Acknowledgement 222 References 222 8 Degradation of Organic Compounds by the Applications of Metal Nanocomposites 235Iffat Zareen Ahmad and Mohammed Kuddus 8.1 Introduction 237 8.2 Metal Oxides Used in Photocatalytic Degradation of Organic Pollutants in Wastewater 244 8.2.1 Titanium Dioxide 244 8.2.2 Graphene Oxide 248 8.2.3 Zinc Oxide 249 8.2.4 Cesium Oxide 250 8.2.5 Silver Salts 250 8.2.6 Bismuth Compounds 251 8.2.7 Copper Compounds 252 8.2.8 Gold Compounds 254 8.3 Conclusion 255 References 256 9 Nanocomposites in Environmental Engineering 263Mohammad Nadeem Lone and Irshad A. Wani 9.1 Introduction 264 9.2 Polymeric Nanocomposites 265 9.2.1 PNC’s as Catalysts and Redox Active Media 265 9.2.2 PNC’s for Adsorption and Degradation of Pollutants 285 9.3 Magnetic Polymer Based Nanocomposites 287 9.3.1 Types of Magnetic Nanocomposites 287 9.3.1.1 Type I: Inorganic Core Shell Nanocomposites 287 9.3.1.2 Type II: Self Assembled Colloidal Nanocomposites 288 9.3.1.3 Type III: Organic–Inorganic Nanocomposites 288 9.3.2 Synthesis of Magnetic Nanocomposites (MNC’s) 289 9.3.2.1 Ex-Situ Synthesis 289 9.3.2.2 In-Situ Synthesis 290 9.3.3 Environmental Applications 294 9.3.3.1 Elimination of Heavy Metals 294 9.3.3.2 Elimination of Toxic Dyes and Effluents 297 9.3.3.3 Removal of Oil from Water 298 9.4 Future Perspectives and Conclusion 299 References 300 10 Bio-Composites from Food Wastes 319Pintu Choudhary, Priyanga Suriyamoorthy, J. A. Moses and C. Anandharamakrishnan 10.1 Introduction 319 10.2 Vegetables Waste 326 10.3 Fruit Waste 329 10.4 Coffee and Tea Waste 332 10.5 Animal-Based Food Waste 333 10.6 Food Grain Waste 337 References 339 11 Properties of Food Packaging Biocomposites and Its Impact on Environment 347K.S. Yoha, M. Maria Leena, J.A. Moses and C. Anandharamakrishnan 11.1 Introduction 348 11.2 Importance of Food Packaging 350 11.3 Packaging Materials Impact on Environment 351 11.4 Risks of Elemental Migration from Packaging Material 352 11.4.1 Contact Migration 354 11.4.2 Non-Contact Migration 355 11.5 Selection of Food Packaging Material 355 11.6 Biodegradable Polymers 356 11.6.1 Polysaccharides 358 11.6.1.1 Sugar-Based Biopolymers 358 11.6.1.2 Starch-Based Biopolymers 358 11.6.1.3 Cellulose-Based Biopolymers 359 11.6.1.4 Pectin 359 11.6.2 Proteins 360 11.6.2.1 Collagen 360 11.6.2.2 Casein 361 11.6.2.3 Zein 361 11.6.2.4 Gluten 362 11.6.3 Seaweed Polymers 362 11.6.4 Plants Seed Mucilage 366 11.6.5 Micro-Organisms Synthesized Biopolymers 367 11.6.5.1 Polyhydroxyalkanoates (PHA) 367 11.6.5.2 Polyhydroxybutyrate (PHB) 367 11.6.5.3 Polyhydroxybutyrate-Co-Hydroxyvalerate (PHBV) 368 11.6.6 Bio-Derived Synthetic Polymers 368 11.6.6.1 Poly-Lactic Acid (PLA) 368 11.6.6.2 Poly Glycolic Acid (PGA) 369 11.6.6.3 Poly-Lactic-Co-Glycolic Acid (PLGA) 370 11.7 Bio-Based Polymeric Composite Materials 370 11.7.1 Starch-Based Composites 370 11.7.2 Poly(Hydroxyalkanoate)-Based Composites 371 11.8 Thermal and Mechanical Properties of Composites 371 11.9 Surface Modifications of Biocomposites 372 11.10 Conclusion 373 References 374 12 Environmentally Benign Protocols for the Synthesis of Transition Metal Oxide: A Brief Outlook 383Neha D. Desai, Kishorkumar V. Khot, Tukaram D. Dongale, Atul Khot and Popatrao N. Bhosale 12.1 Introduction 384 12.2 Titanium Dioxide (TiO2) 385 12.2.1 Introduction 385 12.2.2 Method of Synthesis 387 12.2.3 Experimental of TiO2 Thin Film 389 12.2.4 Results and Discussions 389 12.3 Molybdenum Trioxide (MoO3) 392 12.3.1 Introduction 392 12.3.2 Experimental 394 12.3.3 Growth Mechanism 395 12.3.4 Structural Analysis 396 12.4 Zinc Oxide (ZnO) 398 12.4.1 Introduction 398 12.4.2 Experimental 400 12.4.3 TiO2 Memristor Devices 404 12.4.4 ZnO Memristor Devices 406 References 409 Index 421

Read more less

Book SynopsisUnique state-of-the-art book on an important topic in renewable materials The purpose of this monograph is to provide a thorough outlook on the topic related to the synthesis and characterization of original macromolecular materials derived from plant oils, an important part of the broader steadily growing discipline of polymers from renewable resources. The interest in vegetable oils as sources of biodiesel and materials has witnessed a remarkable growth of scientific and industrial interest since the beginning of the third millennium responding to the pressing drive to implement sustainability in the energy and materials sectors. The book highlights the most relevant strategies being pursued to elaborate polymers derived from a variety of common oils, by direct activation or through chemical modifications yielding novel monomers. Because glycerol is the main byproduct of biodiesel production, it is treated here as the other logical source of macromolecular synTable of ContentsPreface to First Edition vii Preface to the Second Edition ix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Setting the Stage 1 References 7 2 Basic Chemical Notions 9 2.1 Drying Mechanism 9 2.2 Reactive Sites 11 2.2.1 Reactions of the Ester Group 12 2.2.2 Reactions of Unsaturated Bonds 13 References 19 3 Polymerisation of Pristine Oils and their Fatty Acids 23 3.1 Polymerisation of Unsaturated Oils and Fatty Acids 23 3.2 Specific Case of Castor Oil 26 References 31 4 Monomers and Polymers from Chemically Modified Plant Oils and their Fatty Acids 33 4.1 Epoxidised Structures 33 4.1.1 Direct Polymerisation 33 4.1.2 Reactions with Amines and Anhydrides 36 4.1.3 Acrylation Reactions 39 4.2 Polyol Structures for Polyurethanes 43 4.3 Polyisocyanates for Polyurethanes 47 4.4 Polyether and Polyester Diols for Thermoplastic Polyurethanes 49 4.5 Diols and Diacids for Linear Polyesters 51 4.6 Monomers for Linear Polyamides and Polycarbonates 57 4.7 Vinyl, Acrylic and Other Monomers for Linear Chain-growth Polymerisation 59 4.8 Monomers for Other, Less Common Linear Polymers 64 4.9 Special Cases of Castor Oil and Ricinoleic Acid 64 4.10 Special Case of Glycerol 69 References 73 5 Metathesis Reactions Applied to Plant Oils and Polymers Derived from the Ensuing Products 83 5.1 General Considerations 83 5.2 Metathesis Reactions as Tools for the Synthesis of Monomers and Polymers Derived from Vegetable Oils 87 5.2.1 Metathesis Reactions for Monomer Synthesis 87 5.2.2 Olefin Metathesis Applied to Polymer Synthesis 92 5.2.2.1 Acyclic Diene Metathesis Polymerisation 92 5.2.2.2 Acyclic Triene Metathesis Polymerisation 97 5.2.2.3 Ring-opening Metathesis Polymerisation 98 5.2.2.4 Special Cases of Acetal Metathesis Polymerisation and Alternating Diene Metathesis Polymerisation 101 References 104 6 Thiol-ene and Thiol-yne Reactions for the Transformation of Oleochemicals into Monomers and Polymers 109 6.1 General Considerations 109 6.2 Thiol-ene Reaction as a Tool for the Synthesis of Monomers and Polymers Derived from Vegetable Oils 112 6.2.1 Thiol-ene Reactions for Monomer Synthesis 112 6.2.2 Thiol-ene Reactions Applied to Polymer Synthesis 120 6.2.3 Thiol-ene Reactions for Chemical Modifications after Polymerisation 125 6.3 Thiol-yne Reaction as a Tool for the Synthesis of Monomers and Polymers Derived from Vegetable Oils 127 6.4 Final Considerations 130 References 130 7 Diels–Alder Reactions and Polycondensations Applied to Vegetable Oils and their Derivatives 135 References 142

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe book provides clear explanations for newcomers to the subject as well as contemporary details and theory for the experienced user in plastics waste management. It is seldom that a day goes by without another story or photo regarding the problem of plastics waste in the oceans or landfills. While important efforts are being made to clear up the waste, this book looks at the underlying causes and focuses on plastics waste management. Plastics manufacturers have been slow to recognize their environmental impact compared with more directly polluting industries. However, the environmental pressures concerning plastics have forced the industry to examine their own recycling operations and implement plastics waste management. Plastics Waste Managementrealizes two ideals: That all plastics should be able to persist for as long as plastics are required, and that all plastics are recycled in a uniform manner regardless of the length of time for which it persistTable of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Introduction 1 References 4 2 Plastics and Additives 7 2.1 Polymers 7 2.2 Plastics 8 2.3 Plastics Raw Material 9 2.4 Thermoplastics 9 2.4.1 Polyolefin 10 2.4.1.1 Polyethylene 11 2.4.1.2 Polypropylene 12 2.4.1.3 Polystyrene 14 2.4.1.4 Polyvinyl Chloride 14 2.4.2 Polyester 16 2.4.3 Polycarbonate 17 2.4.4 Polyamide 18 2.4.5 Biodegradable Plastics 18 2.5 Thermosets 19 2.5.1 Phenol-formaldehyde 20 2.5.2 Unsaturated Polyester 20 2.6 Additives 20 2.6.1 Antioxidants 22 2.6.2 Slip Additives 22 2.6.3 Ultraviolet Stabilizers 23 2.6.4 Heat Stabilizers 23 2.6.5 Plasticizers 24 2.6.6 Lubricants 25 2.6.7 Flame Retardants 25 2.6.8 Mold Release Agents 26 2.6.9 Nucleating Agents 28 2.6.10 Fillers 29 2.7 Plastics – Applications 29 2.8 Remarks 30 References 30 3 Plastics and Environment 37 3.1 Plastics and Conventional Materials – Comparison 37 3.2 Effects of Plastics Products and Environment 39 3.3 Landsite Effects 39 3.4 Chemical Environment 39 3.5 Marine Environment 40 3.6 Packaging Materials 42 3.7 Agricultural Fields 42 3.8 Waste Accumulation 43 3.9 Degradation of Plastics 43 3.9.1 Process Degradation 43 3.9.2 Environmental Degradation 45 3.10 Environmental Burdens 46 3.11 Industrial Ecosystem 47 3.12 Remarks 47 References 47 4 Plastics Processing Technology 53 4.1 Background 53 4.2 Management – Plastics Processing 54 4.3 Plastic Materials – Variations 55 4.4 Technology 56 4.4.1 Injection Molding 58 4.4.2 Blow Molding 60 4.4.3 Extrusion 62 4.4.4 Thermoforming 63 4.4.5 Rotational Molding 64 4.4.6 Compression Molding 66 4.5 Productivity and Task 67 4.6 Waste Processing 68 4.7 Reprocess Material in Plastics Processing 69 4.8 Challenges and Opportunities 70 4.9 Remarks 71 References 71 5 Plastics Waste – Consumer and Industry 73 5.1 Background 74 5.2 Plastics Waste 74 5.3 Polyolefin 75 5.4 Polypropylene 76 5.5 Polystyrene 76 5.6 Polyvinylchloride 76 5.7 Bioplastics 77 5.8 Additives and Environment 78 5.8.1 Heat Stabilizers 78 5.8.2 Plasticizers 78 5.8.3 Flame Retardants 79 5.8.4 Compatibilizers 79 5.9 Technological Aspects 80 5.10 Factors Influencing Plastics Waste 80 5.11 Waste Resources 81 5.11.1 Domestic Waste 81 5.11.2 Packaging Waste 82 5.11.3 E-Waste 83 5.11.4 Automotive Waste 84 5.11.5 Medical Plastics Waste 84 5.11.6 Agriculture Plastics Waste 85 5.11.7 Marine Plastics Waste 85 5.11.8 Mixed or Contaminated Plastics 86 5.12 Plastics Waste Reduction 86 5.13 Advantages of Waste Prevention 88 5.14 Waste Reduction and Performance 89 5.15 Recovery of Plastics 89 5.16 Remarks 90 References 91 6 Plastics Waste Management 97 6.1 Principles 97 6.2 Objective 98 6.3 Requirements 98 6.4 Management Concept 99 6.5 Waste Collection 99 6.6 Separation and Cleaning 100 6.7 Scientific Thinking 101 6.8 Outcome 101 6.9 Effective Management 101 6.10 Dynamic Thinking 102 6.11 Multi-Phase Approach 103 6.12 Significance 103 6.13 Progressive Management Characteristics 104 6.14 Risks in Plastics Waste Management 105 6.15 Factors – Affect, Suffer, and Influence 105 6.16 Operational Problems 106 6.17 Sustainability and Symbolic Management 106 6.18 Environmental Conservation 107 6.19 Decision-Making Process 107 6.20 Integrated Plastics Waste Management 108 6.21 Assignments 109 6.22 Advantages 110 6.23 Shortcomings 111 References 112 7 Recycling Technology 115 7.1 Man-Made Material – Plastics 116 7.2 Substantial Prerequisite 117 7.3 Philosophy 117 7.4 Purpose of Recycling Technology 118 7.5 Fortune of Plastics Material 119 7.6 Methods of Recycling 119 7.7 Plastics Waste – Stream 121 7.8 Mixed Plastics Waste – Separation 123 7.9 Origination of Plastics Waste 124 7.10 Problems of Recycling and Controls 125 7.10.1 Problems 125 7.10.2 Controls 126 7.11 Physical Characterization and Identification 126 7.12 Recycling – A Resource 127 7.13 Recycling Technology 128 7.14 Primary Recycling 129 7.14.1 Reprocessing Essentials 130 7.15 Mechanical Recycling 130 7.15.1 Limitations 132 7.15.2 Processing Problems 132 7.16 Chemical Recycling 133 7.17 Energy Recovery 136 7.18 Pyrolysis 136 7.19 Types of Reactors and Process Design 140 7.19.1 Batch and Semi-Batch Reactor 140 7.19.2 Fluidized Bed Reactor 141 7.19.3 Conical Spouted Bed Reactor 142 7.19.4 Two-Stage Pyrolysis System 142 7.19.5 Microwave-Assisted Pyrolysis (MAP) 143 7.19.6 Pyrolysis in Supercritical Water (SCW) 144 7.19.7 Fluid Catalytic Cracking 144 7.20 Thermal Co-Processing 145 7.20.1 Advantages 146 7.21 Gasification 146 7.22 Plastics Waste and Recycling 147 7.22.1 Polyolefin 147 7.22.2 Polyvinyl Chloride 148 7.22.3 Polyethylene Terephthalate 148 7.23 Environmental Burdens 150 7.23.1 Incineration – Open Air 150 7.23.2 Plastics Waste in Concrete 151 7.23.3 Plastics Waste in Tar for Road Laying 151 7.24 Plastics Waste as Blends and Composites 152 7.25 Remarks 153 References 153 8 Economy and Recycle Market 163 8.1 Economical Background 163 8.2 Growth Trajectory 164 8.3 Value of Plastics Waste 164 8.4 Economic Issues 165 8.5 Market Dynamics and Uncertainty 166 8.6 Fiscal Waste 167 8.7 Waste to Value 168 8.8 Industrial Ecology 169 8.9 Industrial Symbioses (ISs) 170 8.10 Economic Advantages 171 8.11 Economic Implications 171 8.12 Marketing Strategy 172 8.13 Modern Marketing Philosophy 173 8.14 Recycled Plastics Market 173 8.15 Industrial Marketing 175 8.16 Product Development and Marketing 176 8.17 Recycled Plastic Products and Consumer Market 177 8.18 Remarks 178 References 179 9 Life Cycle Assessment 183 9.1 LCA and Plastics Waste 183 Background 184 9.2 Life Cycle Assessment – A Tool to Assess Waste 185 9.3 Scientific Engineering 187 9.4 Purpose 187 9.5 Harmonization of LCA Method 188 9.6 Methodology 188 9.7 LCA Initiation 189 9.8 LCA in Plastics Waste 190 9.9 Advantages of LCA 191 9.10 Shortcomings of LCA 191 9.11 Environment Waste Auditing 192 9.12 Waste Prevention 193 9.13 Remarks 194 References 194 10 Case Studies 199 10.1 Waste Dump and Health Hazards 199 10.2 Utilization of Plastics Waste 200 10.2.1 Europe 201 10.2.2 India 201 10.2.3 Japan 202 10.2.4 France 203 10.2.5 Other Countries 204 10.3 Use of Case Studies 205 10.4 Property Value 206 10.5 Case Study 1: Plastics Waste from the Electric and Electronic Field 206 10.5.1 Concept 206 10.5.2 Objective 207 10.5.3 Methodology 207 10.5.4 Experimental Method 208 10.5.5 Results 210 10.5.6 Conclusion 210 10.6 Case Study 2: Plastics Waste from the Automobile Industry 210 10.6.1 Background 210 10.6.2 Design 211 10.6.3 Disposal and Recovery 211 10.6.3.1 Recycling of Bumpers 211 10.6.4 Inference 211 10.7 Pros and Cons 213 10.7.1 Positive Thinking 213 10.7.2 Negative Effects 213 10.8 Research and Case Study 214 10.9 Remarks 214 References 215 11 Present Trends 219 11.1 Economic Issues 219 11.2 Industry and Society 220 11.3 Landfilling 220 11.4 Effect of Single-Use Plastic Products 221 11.5 Effect on Food Packaging 221 11.6 Recycling Status 222 11.7 Present Research and Shortcomings 222 11.8 Population Growth and Waste 223 11.9 Remarks 224 References 224 12 Future Trends 227 12.1 Present Problems 227 12.2 Incineration in Open Air 228 12.3 Environmental Advantages 229 12.4 Plastics Waste – Challenge 229 12.5 Environmental and Social Problems – Prevention 230 12.6 Reasons – Waste Accumulation 231 12.7 Ecological Issues 232 12.8 Facts about Bioplastics 232 12.9 Future Requirements 233 12.10 Remarks 234 References 235 Index 237

Read more less

Book SynopsisOffers an Interdisciplinary approach to the engineering of functional materials for efficient solar cell technology Written by a collection of experts in the field of solar cell technology, this book focuses on the engineering of a variety of functional materials for improving photoanode efficiency of dye-sensitized solar cells (DSSC). The first two chapters describe operation principles of DSSC, charge transfer dynamics, as well as challenges and solutions for improving DSSCs. The remaining chapters focus on interfacial engineering of functional materials at the photoanode surface to create greater output efficiency. Interfacial Engineering in Functional Materials for Dye-Sensitized Solar Cells begins by introducing readers to the history, configuration, components, and working principles of DSSC It then goes on to cover both nanoarchitectures and light scattering materials as photoanode. Function of compact (blocking) layer in the photoanode and of TiClTable of ContentsList of Contributors xi Preface xv 1 Dye-Sensitized Solar Cells: History, Components, Configuration, and Working Principle 1S.N. Karthick, K.V. Hemalatha, Suresh Kannan Balasingam, F. Manik Clinton, S. Akshaya, and Hee-Je Kim 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 History of Dye-sensitized Solar Cells 3 1.3 Components of DSSCs 4 1.3.1 Conductive Glass Substrate 4 1.3.2 Photoanode 4 1.3.3 Counter Electrode 4 1.3.4 Electrolytes 6 1.3.4.1 Types of Solvents Used in Electrolytes 6 1.3.4.2 Alternative Redox Mediators 7 1.3.5 Dyes 8 1.4 Configuration of DSSCs 8 1.4.1 Metal Substrates for Photoanode and Glass/TCO for Counter Electrode 8 1.4.2 Metal Substrates for Counter Electrode and Glass/TCO for Photoanode 10 1.4.3 Metal Substrate for Photoanode and Polymer Substrate for Counter Electrode 10 1.4.4 Polymer Substrates for Flexible DSSCs 10 1.4.5 Glass/TCO-Free Metal Substrates for Flexible DSSCs 11 1.4.6 Glass/TCO-Free Metal Wire Substrates for Flexible DSSCs 11 1.5 Working Principle of DSSCs 11 1.5.1 Electron Transfer Mechanism in DSSCs 14 1.5.2 Photoelectric Performance 14 Acknowledgments 15 References 15 2 Function of Photoanode: Charge Transfer Dynamics, Challenges, and Alternative Strategies 17A. Dennyson Savariraj and R.V. Mangalaraja 2.1 Introduction 17 2.2 The General Composition of DSSC 18 2.3 Selection of Substrate for DSSCs 18 2.4 Photoanode 19 2.4.1 Coating Procedure 20 2.4.2 Significance of Using Mesoporous Structure 20 2.5 Sensitizer 20 2.6 Charge Transfer Mechanism 21 2.7 Interfaces 21 2.8 Significance of Dye/Metal Oxide Interface 22 2.9 Factors That Influence Efficiency in DSSC 23 2.9.1 Dye Aggregation 23 2.9.2 Effect of Metal Oxide on the Performance of Metal Oxide/Dye Interface 24 2.9.3 Role of Electronic Structure of Metal Oxides 25 2.10 Kinetics of Operation in DSSCs 26 2.11 Strategies to Improve the Photoanode Performance 28 2.11.1 TiCl4 Treatment 28 2.11.2 Composites 28 2.11.3 Light Scattering 29 2.11.4 Nanoarchitectures 29 2.11.5 Doping 30 2.11.6 Interfacial Engineering 30 2.12 Conclusion 30 Acknowledgments 31 References 31 3 Nanoarchitectures as Photoanodes 35Hari Murthy 3.1 Introduction 35 3.2 DSSC Operation 36 3.3 Nanoarchitectures for Improved Device Performance of Photoanodes 39 3.3.1 TiO2 39 3.3.2 ZnO 51 3.3.3 SnO2 53 3.3.4 Nb2O5 55 3.3.5 Graphene 55 3.3.6 Other Photoanode Materials 56 3.4 Future Outlook and Challenges 65 3.5 Conclusion 66 References 66 4 Light Scattering Materials as Photoanodes 79Rajkumar C and A. Arulraj 4.1 Introduction 79 4.2 Introduction to Light Scattering 79 4.3 Materials for Light Scattering in DSSCs 80 4.4 Early Theoretical Predictions of Light Scattering in DSSCs 82 4.5 Different Light Scattering Materials 85 4.5.1 Mixing of Large Particles into Small Particles 85 4.5.2 Voids as Light Scatters 87 4.5.3 Nano-Composites for Light Scattering 87 4.5.3.1 Nanowire–Nanoparticle Composite 87 4.5.3.2 Nanofiber–Nanoparticle Composite 87 4.5.3.3 SrTiO3 Nanocubes–ZnO Nanoparticle Composite 88 4.5.3.4 Silica Nanosphere–ZnO Nanoparticle Composite 88 4.5.3.5 SnO2 Aggregate–SnO2 Nanosheet Composite 88 4.5.3.6 Ag (4,4′-Dicyanamidobiphenyl) Complex–TiO2 NP Composite 88 4.6 Light Scattering Layers 88 4.6.1 Surface Modified TiO2 Particles in Scattering Layer 88 4.6.2 Dual Functional Materials in DSSC 89 4.6.3 Double-Light Scattering Layer 89 4.6.4 Large Particles as Scattering Layers 89 4.6.4.1 TiO2 Nanotubes 90 4.6.4.2 TiO2 Nanowires 90 4.6.4.3 TiO2 Nanospindles 90 4.6.4.4 TiO2 Nanofibers 90 4.6.4.5 TiO2 Rice Grain Nanostructures 90 4.6.4.6 Nest-Shaped TiO2 Structures 91 4.6.4.7 Nano-Embossed Hollow Spherical TiO2 91 4.6.4.8 Hexagonal TiO2 Plates 91 4.6.4.9 TiO2 Photonic Crystals 91 4.6.4.10 Cubic CeO2 Nanoparticles 94 4.6.4.11 Spherical TiO2 Aggregates 94 4.6.4.12 Hierarchical TiO2 Submicroflowers 94 4.6.4.13 SnO2 Aggregates 94 4.6.4.14 ZnO Nanoflowers 95 4.6.5 Core–Shell Nanoparticles for Light Scattering in DSSCs 95 4.6.6 Double-Layer Photoanode 95 4.6.6.1 TiO2 Aggregates 96 4.6.6.2 Morphology-Controlled 1D–3D Bilayer TiO2 Nanostructures 96 4.6.6.3 Quintuple-Shelled SnO2 Hollow Microspheres 96 4.6.6.4 Carbon-Based Materials for Light Scattering 96 4.6.6.5 3D N-Doped TiO2 Microspheres Used as Scattering Layers 96 4.6.6.6 ZnO Hollow Spheres and Urchin-like TiO2 Microspheres 96 4.6.6.7 SnO2 as Light-Scattering Layer 97 4.6.7 Three-Layer Photoanode 97 4.6.8 Four-Layer Photoanode 97 4.6.9 Surface Plasmon Effect in DSSC 97 4.7 Conclusion 99 References 99 5 Function of Compact (Blocking) Layer in Photoanode 107Su Pei Lim 5.1 Introduction 107 5.2 Titanium Dioxide (TiO2) and Titanium (Ti)-Based Material as a Compact Layer 107 5.3 Zinc Oxide (ZnO) as a Compact Layer 112 5.4 Less Common Metal Oxide as a Compact Layer 117 5.5 Conclusion 118 References 121 6 Function of TiCl4 Posttreatment in Photoanode 125T.S. Senthil and C.R. Kalaiselvi 6.1 Introduction 125 6.2 Role of TiCl4 Posttreatment in Photo-Anode 126 6.3 Effect of Posttreatment of TiCl4 on Various Perspectives 126 6.3.1 TiO2 Morphology, Porosity, and Surface Area 126 6.3.2 Dye Adsorption and Photocurrent Generation 129 6.3.3 Electron Transport and Diffusion Coefficient 132 6.3.4 Recombination Losses at Short Circuit 134 6.3.5 Concentration and Dipping Time of TiCl4 135 6.4 Conclusion 136 References 137 7 Doped Semiconductor as Photoanode 139K. S. Rajni and T. Raguram 7.1 Introduction 139 7.2 Photoanode 140 7.3 Characterization 141 7.4 Doped TiO2 Photoanodes 141 7.4.1 Alkali Earth Metals-doped TiO2 141 7.4.1.1 Lithium-doped TiO2 141 7.4.1.2 Magnesium-doped TiO2 143 7.4.1.3 Calcium-doped TiO2 143 7.4.2 Metalloids-doped TiO2 143 7.4.2.1 Boron-doped TiO2 145 7.4.2.2 Silicon-doped TiO2 145 7.4.2.3 Germanium-doped TiO2 145 7.4.2.4 Antimony-doped TiO2 146 7.4.3 Nonmetals-doped TiO2 146 7.4.3.1 Carbon-doped TiO2 146 7.4.3.2 Nitrogen-doped TiO2 147 7.4.3.3 Fluorine-doped TiO2 147 7.4.3.4 Sulfur-doped TiO2 147 7.4.3.5 Iodine-doped TiO2 148 7.4.4 Transition Metals-doped TiO2 148 7.4.4.1 Scandium-doped TiO2 148 7.4.4.2 Vanadium, Niobium, and Tantalum-doped TiO2 148 7.4.4.3 Chromium-doped TiO2 148 7.4.4.4 Manganese and Cobalt-doped TiO2 150 7.4.4.5 Iron-doped TiO2 150 7.4.4.6 Nickel-doped TiO2 151 7.4.4.7 Copper-doped TiO2 152 7.4.4.8 Zinc-doped TiO2 153 7.4.4.9 Yttrium-doped TiO2 153 7.4.4.10 Zirconium-doped TiO2 154 7.4.4.11 Molybdenum-doped TiO2 154 7.4.4.12 Silver-doped TiO2 155 7.4.5 Post-Transition Metals 155 7.4.5.1 Aluminum-doped TiO2 155 7.4.5.2 Gallium-doped TiO2 155 7.4.5.3 Indium-doped TiO2 155 7.4.5.4 Tin-doped TiO2 156 7.4.6 Lanthanides-doped TiO2 156 7.4.6.1 Lanthanum-doped TiO2 156 7.4.6.2 Cerium-doped TiO2 156 7.4.6.3 Neodymium-doped TiO2 157 7.4.6.4 Samarium-doped TiO2 157 7.4.6.5 Europium-doped TiO2 157 7.4.7 Co-doped TiO2 158 7.4.8 Tri-doped TiO2 158 7.5 Conclusion 158 References 159 8 Binary Semiconductor Metal Oxide as Photoanodes 163S.S. Kanmani, I. John Peter, A. Muthu Kumar, P. Nithiananthi, C. Raja Mohan, and K. Ramachandran 8.1 Why Metal Oxide Semiconductors? 163 8.2 Development of MOS-Based DSSC 164 8.2.1 TiO2/ZnO Core/Shell Configuration 165 8.2.2 Preparation of TiO2/ZnO Core/Shell Nanomaterials 165 8.2.3 TiO2/ZnO Core/Shell Nanomaterials 165 8.2.4 DSSC Performance of TiO2/ZnO Core/Shell Configuration 167 8.3 Importance of Heterostructures 170 8.4 I–V Characteristics 171 8.5 Matching of Bandgaps 171 8.6 Conclusion 189 References 189 9 Plasmonic Nanocomposite as Photoanode 193Su Pei Lim 9.1 Introduction 193 9.2 Plasmonic Nanocomposite Modified TiO2 as Photoanode 193 9.3 Plasmonic Nanocomposite Modified ZnO as Photoanode 197 9.4 Plasmonic Nanocomposite Modified with Less Common Metal Oxide as Photoanode 203 9.5 Conclusion 206 References 206 10 Carbon Nanotubes-Based Nanocomposite as Photoanode 213Giovana R. Cagnani, Nirav Joshi, and Flavio M. Shimizu 10.1 Introduction 213 10.2 Recent Advances on DSSC Photoanodes 215 10.3 Structure and Properties of Carbon Nanotubes 216 10.4 CNT-Based Photoanode Material 218 10.5 Effect of the Morphology and Interface of the CNT Photoanodes on the Efficiency of the DSSC 221 10.6 Summary and Future Prospect 223 Acknowledgment 223 References 223 11 Graphene-Based Nanocomposite as Photoanode 231Subhendu K. Panda, G. Murugadoss, and R. Thangamuthu 11.1 Introduction 231 11.2 Graphene–TiO2 Nanocomposite for Photoanode 232 11.3 Conclusion and Remarks 241 References 242 12 Graphitic Carbon Nitride Based Nanocomposites as Photoanodes 247T.S. Shyju, S. Anandhi, P. Vengatesh, C. Karthik Kumar, and M. Paulraj 12.1 Introduction 247 12.2 Importance of Graphitic Carbon Nitride 248 12.3 Photoanodes for DSSC 250 12.4 Preparation of Graphitic Carbon Nitride 252 12.4.1 Bulk Graphitic Carbon Nitride 253 12.4.2 Mesoporous Graphitic Carbon Nitrides 253 12.4.3 Doping in Graphitic Carbon Nitride 254 12.4.4 Ag Deposited g-C3N4 254 12.4.5 Chemical Doping 254 12.5 Operation Principles of DSSC 255 12.5.1 Nanostructured Graphitic Carbon Nitride in DSSC 257 12.6 Graphitic Carbon Nitride in Polymer Films Solar Cell 259 12.7 Preparation of Carbon Nitride Counter Electrode 259 12.8 Quantum Dot Graphitic Carbon Nitride 260 12.9 Porous Graphitic Carbon Nitride 260 12.10 Summary 260 Acknowledgment 261 References 261 Index 265

Read more less

Book Synopsis3D PRINTING FOR ENERGY APPLICATIONS Explore current and future perspectives of 3D printing for the fabrication of high value-added complex devices3D Printing for Energy Applications delivers an insightful and cutting-edge exploration of the applications of 3D printing to the fabrication of complex devices in the energy sector. The book covers aspects related to additive manufacturing of functional materials with applicability in the energy sector. It reviews both the technology of printable materials and 3D printing strategies itself, and its use in energy devices or systems. Split into three sections, the book covers the 3D printing of functional materials before delving into the 3D printing of energy devices. It closes with printing challenges in the production of complex objects. It also presents an interesting perspective on the future of 3D printing of complex devices. Readers will also benefit from the inclusion of:A thorough introduction to 3D printing of functional materialTable of ContentsContributor xiv Introduction to 3D Printing Technologies xviii Part I 3D printing of functional materials 1 1 Additive Manufacturing of Functional Metals 3Venkata Karthik Nadimpalli and David Bue Pedersen 1.1 Introduction 3 1.1.1 Industrial Application of Metal AM in the Energy Sector 5 1.1.2 Geometrical Gradients in AM 6 1.1.3 Material Gradients in AM 6 1.2 Powder Bed Fusion AM 7 1.2.1 Geometric Gradients in PBF 8 1.2.2 Material Gradients in PBF 9 1.3 Direct Material Deposition 12 1.3.1 Powder and Wire Feedstock for Near-Net-Shape AM 12 1.3.2 Functional Material Gradients in DED 13 1.4 Solid-State Additive Manufacturing 16 1.5 Hybrid AM Through Green Body Sintering 19 1.5.1 Common AM Technologies for Green Body Manufacturing 19 1.5.2 CAD Design and Shrinkage Compensation 20 1.5.3 Additive Manufacture 20 1.5.4 Debinding and Sintering 21 1.5.5 Functionally Graded Components in Sintered Components 22 1.6 Conclusions 22 Acknowledgment 24 References 24 2 Additive Manufacturing of Functional Ceramics 33José Fernando Valera-Jiménez, Juan Ramón Marín-Rueda, Juan Carlos Pérez-Flores, Miguel Castro-García, and Jesús Canales-Vázquez 2.1 Introduction 33 2.1.1 Why 3D Printing of Technical Ceramics? 35 2.1.2 Materials and Applications 35 2.2 Ceramics 3D Printing Technologies 36 2.2.1 Lamination Object Modeling (LOM) 37 2.2.2 Ceramics Extrusion 38 2.2.2.1 Robocasting/Direct Ink Writing 39 2.2.2.2 Fused Deposition of Ceramics 42 2.2.3 Photopolymerization 44 2.2.4 Laser-Based Technologies 47 2.2.5 Jetting 49 References 52 3 3D Printing of Functional Composites with Strain Sensing and Self-Heating Capabilities 69Xin Wang and Jihua Gou 3.1 Introduction 69 3.2 Carbon Nanotube Reinforced Functional Polymer Nanocomposites 70 3.2.1 Strain Sensing of CNT Reinforced Polymer Nanocomposites 70 3.2.2 Resistive Heating of CNT Reinforced Polymer Nanocomposites 71 3.3 Printing Strategies 72 3.3.1 Spray Deposition Modeling and Fused Deposition Modeling 72 3.3.2 Printing of Highly Flexible Carbon Nanotube/Polydimethylsilicone Strain Sensor 73 3.3.3 Printing of Carbon Nanotube/Shape Memory Polymer Nanocomposites 73 3.4 Strain Sensing of Printed Nanocomposites 73 3.5 Electric Heating Performance Analysis 79 3.6 Electrical Actuation of the CNT/SMP Nanocomposites 82 3.7 Conclusions 85 References 87 Part II 3D printing challenges for production of complex objects 91 4 Computational Design of Complex 3D Printed Objects 93Emiel van de Ven, Can Ayas, and Matthijs Langelaar 4.1 Introduction 93 4.2 Dedicated Computational Design for 3D Printing 95 4.2.1 Overhang Angle Control Approaches 96 4.2.1.1 Local Angle Control 96 4.2.1.2 Physics-Based Constraints 97 4.2.1.3 Simplified Printing Process 97 4.2.2 Design Scenarios 98 4.3 Case Study: Computational Design of a 3D-Printed Flow Manifold 99 4.3.1 Fluid Flow TO 100 4.3.2 Front Propagation-Based 3D Printing Constraint 102 4.3.3 Fluid TO with 3D Printing Constraint 103 4.4 Current State and Future Challenges 104 References 105 5 Multicomponent and Multimaterials Printing: A Case Study of Embedded Ceramic Sensors in Metallic Pipes 109Cesar A. Terrazas, Mohammad S. Hossain, Yirong Lin, and Ryan B. Wicker 5.1 Multicomponent Printing: A Short Review 109 5.2 Multicomponent Printing: A Case Study on Piezoceramic Sensors in Smart Pipes 111 5.2.1 Brief Introduction to AM of Embedded Sensors for Smart Metering 111 5.2.2 Fabrication of the Embedded Piezoceramic Sensor in Metallic Pipes 114 5.2.2.1 Smart Coupling Fabrication Process Using EPBF Technology 114 5.2.2.2 Materials 116 5.2.2.3 Sensor Housing 117 5.2.2.4 Re-poling of PZT 118 5.2.2.5 Impact in Sensing Properties Due to Heat-Treatment Induced By AM Process 119 5.2.2.6 Smart Coupling Component 119 5.2.2.7 Compressive Force Sensing 119 5.2.2.8 Temperature Sensing 120 5.2.3 Impact of the AM and Performance of the Multicomponent Printed Device 122 5.2.3.1 Compressive Force Sensing 122 5.2.3.2 Temperature Sensing 124 5.2.3.3 Crystalline Structure Analysis 126 5.3 Summary and Outlook 128 Acknowledgments 129 References 130 6 Tailoring of AM Component Properties via Laser Powder Bed Fusion 135Simon Ewald, Maximilian Voshage, Steffen Hermsen, Max Schaukellis, Patrick Köhnen, Christian Haase, and Johannes Henrich Schleifenbaum 6.1 Introduction 135 6.2 Machines, Materials, and Sample Preparation 138 6.3 Sample Preparation and Characterization Techniques 139 6.4 Material Qualification and Process Development 140 6.5 Tailoring Grain Size via Adaptive Processing Strategies 143 6.6 Tailoring Material Properties By Using Powder Blends 146 6.7 Tailoring Properties By Using Special Geometries Such As Lattice Structures 148 Funding 150 Conflicts of Interest 150 References 150 7 3D Printing Challenges and New Concepts for Production of Complex Objects 153Hayden Taylor, Hossein Heidari, Chi Chung Li, Joseph Toombs, and Sui Man Luk 7.1 Introduction 153 7.2 Geometrical Complexity 154 7.3 Material Complexity 155 7.4 Energy Requirements 156 7.5 Promising Metal Deposition Approaches 157 7.6 Multimaterial and Multi-property SLA 159 7.7 Temporal Multiplexing 159 7.8 Resin Formulations with Multiple End-States 160 7.9 Associated Processing Considerations 160 7.10 Bioprinting of Realistic and Vascularized Tissue 162 7.11 Emerging Volumetric Additive Processes 163 7.12 Computation for CAL 166 7.13 Material–Process Interactions in CAL 167 7.14 Current Challenges in CAL 169 7.15 Expanding the Capabilities of CAL 170 7.16 Concluding Remarks and Outlook 171 Acknowledgments 172 References 172 Part III 3D printing of energy devices 181 8 Current State of 3D Printing Technologies and Materials 183Poul Norby 8.1 3D Printing of Energy Devices 183 8.1.1 Batteries 183 8.1.1.1 3D Printing Structured Electrodes 186 8.1.1.2 3D Printing Solid Electrolytes 195 8.1.1.3 3D Printed Full Batteries 197 8.1.1.4 Conclusion and Outlook 200 References 200 9 Capacitors 205Lukas Fieber and Patrick S. Grant 9.1 Introduction 205 9.2 Capacitors and Their Current Manufacture 206 9.2.1 Capacitor Classifications, Operating Principles, Applications, and Current Manufacture 206 9.2.1.1 Electrostatic Capacitors 206 9.2.1.2 Electrolytic Capacitors 209 9.2.1.3 Electrochemical Capacitors 210 9.2.2 Capacitor Components: Function and Requirements 211 9.2.3 Performance 213 9.2.4 The Challenge of Manufacturing Capacitors 214 9.3 The Promise of Additive Manufacturing 215 9.4 Additive Manufacturing Technologies: Considerations for Capacitor Fabrication 217 9.4.1 AM Process Categories 217 9.4.1.1 Material Extrusion – Fused Filament Fabrication 217 9.4.1.2 Material Extrusion – Direct Ink Writing 221 9.4.1.3 Vat Polymerization 223 9.4.1.4 Powder Bed Fusion 225 9.4.1.5 Material Jetting 227 9.4.1.6 Binder Jetting 228 9.4.2 Multi-technology or Hybrid Printing 229 9.4.3 Complete Capacitor Devices Fabricated by Additive Manufacturing 230 9.5 Summary and Outlook 232 Acronyms 233 References 235 10 3D-Printing for Solar Cells 249Marcel Di Vece, Lourens van Dijk, and Ruud E.I. Schropp 10.1 Introduction 249 10.2 Examples of 3D-Printing for PV 250 10.3 Geometric Light Management 255 10.3.1 Background 255 10.3.2 Optical Model for External Light Trapping 257 10.3.3 Design and 3D-Printing of the External Light Trap 260 10.3.4 Characterization 261 10.4 Conclusions 266 References 267 11 3D Printing of Fuel Cells and Electrolyzers 273A. Hornés, A. Pesce, L. Hernández‐Afonso, A. Morata, M. Torrell, and Albert Tarancón 11.1 Introduction 273 11.2 3D Printing of Solid Oxide Cells Technology 274 11.2.1 Solid Oxide Fuel Cells 275 11.2.1.1 SOFC Electrolyte 276 11.2.1.2 SOFC Electrodes 278 11.2.2 Solid Oxide Electrolysis Cells 283 11.2.3 SOC Stacks and Components 284 11.3 3D Printing of Polymer Exchange Membranes Cells Technology 286 11.3.1 Polymeric Exchange Membrane Fuel Cells 287 11.3.1.1 PEMFC Electrolyte 288 11.3.1.2 PEMFC Catalysts Layer 288 11.3.1.3 PEMFC Gas Diffusion Layer 289 11.3.1.4 PEMFC Bipolar Plates and Flow Fields 290 11.3.2 Polymer Exchange Membrane Electrolysis Cells 293 11.3.2.1 PEMEC Liquid Gas Diffusion Layer 293 11.3.2.2 PEMEC Bipolar Plates and Flow Fields 293 11.3.2.3 Fully Printed PEMEC 294 11.4 3D Printing of Bio-Fuel Cells Technology 294 11.5 Conclusions and Outlook 297 References 297 12 DED for Repair and Manufacture of Turbomachinery Components 307S. Linnenbrink, M. Alkhayat, N. Pirch, A. Gasser, and H. Schleifenbaum 12.1 Introduction 307 12.2 DED Based Repair of Turbomachinery Components 309 12.2.1 DED Process 310 12.2.2 Work Environment 310 12.2.3 Process Chain for the Repair of Turbine Blades 310 12.2.3.1 Step 1: “Machining & Preparation” 310 12.2.3.2 Step 2: “Reverse Engineering” 311 12.2.3.3 Step 3: “Generation of Tool Paths” 313 12.2.3.4 Step 4: “DED Process” 313 12.2.3.5 Step 5: “Adaptive Machining” 314 12.3 DED Based Hybrid Manufacturing of New Components 314 12.3.1 Hybrid Additive Manufacturing 315 12.3.2 Turbocharger Nozzle Ring 317 12.3.3 Hybrid Production Cell 319 12.3.4 Process Chain for Hybrid Additive Manufacturing of Nozzle Rings 320 12.3.4.1 Step 1: “Choice of DED Strategy” 320 12.3.4.2 Step 2: “DED Process” 321 12.3.4.3 Step 3: “Optical Metrology” 322 12.3.4.4 Step 4: “Adaptive Milling” 322 12.3.4.5 Step 5: “Joining of Top Ring” 322 12.4 Summary 323 Acknowledgments 324 References 324 13 Thermoelectrics 327Fredrick Kim, Seungjun Choo, and Jae Sung Son 13.1 Introduction 327 13.2 Additive Manufacturing Techniques of Thermoelectric Materials 328 13.2.1 Extrusion-Based Additive Manufacturing Process 328 13.2.2 Fused Deposition Modeling (FDM) Technique 336 13.2.3 Stereolithography Apparatus (SLA) Process 337 13.2.4 Selective Laser Sintering (SLS) Process 339 13.2.5 Summary and Outlook 345 Acknowledgements 345 References 345 14 Carbon Capture, Usage, and Storage 351Jason E. Bara 14.1 Introduction 351 14.2 Can 3D Printing Be Used to Fabricate a CO2 Capture Process at Scale? 354 14.3 A Brief Note on 3D Printing and CO2 at Smaller Scales & Research Efforts 356 14.4 Conclusions 358 References 358 Index 361

Read more less